diff options
| author | Bruce Momjian | 2007-11-15 21:14:46 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Bruce Momjian | 2007-11-15 21:14:46 +0000 |
| commit | fdf5a5efb7b28c13085fe7313658de8d7b9914f6 (patch) | |
| tree | a75cf1422fa1eef4e801cf502b148d8ce1b5dfe7 | |
| parent | 3adc760fb92eab1a8720337a8bf9b66486609eb3 (diff) | |
pgindent run for 8.3.
486 files changed, 10078 insertions, 9698 deletions
diff --git a/contrib/cube/cube.c b/contrib/cube/cube.c index ec8cb72e3b..c57b9919c4 100644 --- a/contrib/cube/cube.c +++ b/contrib/cube/cube.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /****************************************************************************** - $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/cube/cube.c,v 1.33 2007/06/05 21:31:03 tgl Exp $ + $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/cube/cube.c,v 1.34 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ This file contains routines that can be bound to a Postgres backend and called by the backend in the process of processing queries. The calling @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ cube_subset(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[i + dim] = c->x[dx[i] + c->dim - 1]; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ cube_out(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) appendStringInfoChar(&buf, ')'); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(cube,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(cube, 0); PG_RETURN_CSTRING(buf.data); } @@ -381,20 +381,20 @@ g_cube_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); NDBOX *query = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(1); StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - bool res; + bool res; /* * if entry is not leaf, use g_cube_internal_consistent, else use * g_cube_leaf_consistent */ if (GIST_LEAF(entry)) - res = g_cube_leaf_consistent( DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), - query, strategy); + res = g_cube_leaf_consistent(DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), + query, strategy); else - res = g_cube_internal_consistent( DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), - query, strategy); + res = g_cube_internal_consistent(DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), + query, strategy); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(query,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(query, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -451,14 +451,15 @@ Datum g_cube_decompress(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - NDBOX *key = DatumGetNDBOX(PG_DETOAST_DATUM(entry->key)); + NDBOX *key = DatumGetNDBOX(PG_DETOAST_DATUM(entry->key)); if (key != DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key)) { GISTENTRY *retval = (GISTENTRY *) palloc(sizeof(GISTENTRY)); + gistentryinit(*retval, PointerGetDatum(key), - entry->rel, entry->page, - entry->offset, FALSE); + entry->rel, entry->page, + entry->offset, FALSE); PG_RETURN_POINTER(retval); } PG_RETURN_POINTER(entry); @@ -479,8 +480,8 @@ g_cube_penalty(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) double tmp1, tmp2; - ud = cube_union_v0( DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), - DatumGetNDBOX(newentry->key)); + ud = cube_union_v0(DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), + DatumGetNDBOX(newentry->key)); rt_cube_size(ud, &tmp1); rt_cube_size(DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), &tmp2); *result = (float) (tmp1 - tmp2); @@ -812,12 +813,12 @@ cube_union(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { NDBOX *a = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0), *b = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(1); - NDBOX *res; + NDBOX *res; res = cube_union_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(res); } @@ -876,8 +877,9 @@ cube_inter(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) a->x[i + a->dim]), result->x[i + a->dim]); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); + /* * Is it OK to return a non-null intersection for non-overlapping boxes? */ @@ -899,7 +901,7 @@ cube_size(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) for (i = 0, j = a->dim; i < a->dim; i++, j++) result = result * Abs((a->x[j] - a->x[i])); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1011,8 +1013,8 @@ cube_cmp(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_INT32(res); } @@ -1026,8 +1028,8 @@ cube_eq(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res == 0); } @@ -1041,8 +1043,8 @@ cube_ne(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res != 0); } @@ -1056,8 +1058,8 @@ cube_lt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res < 0); } @@ -1071,8 +1073,8 @@ cube_gt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res > 0); } @@ -1086,8 +1088,8 @@ cube_le(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res <= 0); } @@ -1101,8 +1103,8 @@ cube_ge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res >= 0); } @@ -1157,8 +1159,8 @@ cube_contains(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_contains_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1173,8 +1175,8 @@ cube_contained(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_contains_v0(b, a); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1234,8 +1236,8 @@ cube_overlap(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_overlap_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1281,8 +1283,8 @@ cube_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) distance += d * d; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(sqrt(distance)); } @@ -1317,7 +1319,7 @@ cube_is_point(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_BOOL(FALSE); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_BOOL(TRUE); } @@ -1331,7 +1333,7 @@ cube_dim(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) c = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0); dim = c->dim; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_INT32(c->dim); } @@ -1350,7 +1352,7 @@ cube_ll_coord(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (c->dim >= n && n > 0) result = Min(c->x[n - 1], c->x[c->dim + n - 1]); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1369,7 +1371,7 @@ cube_ur_coord(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (c->dim >= n && n > 0) result = Max(c->x[n - 1], c->x[c->dim + n - 1]); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1384,7 +1386,7 @@ cube_enlarge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) j, k; NDBOX *a; - double r; + double r; int4 n; a = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0); @@ -1426,7 +1428,7 @@ cube_enlarge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[j] = r; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -1490,7 +1492,7 @@ cube_c_f8(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[result->dim - 1] = x; result->x[2 * result->dim - 1] = x; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -1521,6 +1523,6 @@ cube_c_f8_f8(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[result->dim - 1] = x1; result->x[2 * result->dim - 1] = x2; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } diff --git a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c index 295a779772..dd5cfc7f86 100644 --- a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c +++ b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Darko Prenosil <[email protected]> * Shridhar Daithankar <[email protected]> * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.65 2007/08/27 01:24:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.66 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * Copyright (c) 2001-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * ALL RIGHTS RESERVED; * @@ -256,10 +256,10 @@ dblink_connect(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) pfree(rconn); ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_S_R_E_PROHIBITED_SQL_STATEMENT_ATTEMPTED), - errmsg("password is required"), - errdetail("Non-superuser cannot connect if the server does not request a password."), - errhint("Target server's authentication method must be changed."))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_S_R_E_PROHIBITED_SQL_STATEMENT_ATTEMPTED), + errmsg("password is required"), + errdetail("Non-superuser cannot connect if the server does not request a password."), + errhint("Target server's authentication method must be changed."))); } } diff --git a/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c b/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c index 85d45491cc..5cc2111adc 100644 --- a/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c +++ b/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -19,24 +19,25 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -typedef struct { - int maxlen; - bool rejectlong; -} DictInt; +typedef struct +{ + int maxlen; + bool rejectlong; +} DictInt; PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dintdict_init); -Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dintdict_lexize); -Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - DictInt *d; - ListCell *l; + List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + DictInt *d; + ListCell *l; d = (DictInt *) palloc0(sizeof(DictInt)); d->maxlen = 6; @@ -44,7 +45,7 @@ dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) foreach(l, dictoptions) { - DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); + DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); if (pg_strcasecmp(defel->defname, "MAXLEN") == 0) { @@ -62,22 +63,22 @@ dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) defel->defname))); } } - + PG_RETURN_POINTER(d); } Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - DictInt *d = (DictInt*)PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char *in = (char*)PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - char *txt = pnstrdup(in, PG_GETARG_INT32(2)); - TSLexeme *res=palloc(sizeof(TSLexeme)*2); + DictInt *d = (DictInt *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + char *txt = pnstrdup(in, PG_GETARG_INT32(2)); + TSLexeme *res = palloc(sizeof(TSLexeme) * 2); res[1].lexeme = NULL; - if (PG_GETARG_INT32(2) > d->maxlen) + if (PG_GETARG_INT32(2) > d->maxlen) { - if ( d->rejectlong ) + if (d->rejectlong) { /* reject by returning void array */ pfree(txt); diff --git a/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c b/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c index 1cd53a26bd..753886117d 100644 --- a/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c +++ b/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -24,29 +24,30 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; typedef struct { - char *key; /* Word */ - char *value; /* Unparsed list of synonyms, including the word itself */ + char *key; /* Word */ + char *value; /* Unparsed list of synonyms, including the + * word itself */ } Syn; typedef struct { - int len; - Syn *syn; + int len; + Syn *syn; - bool keeporig; + bool keeporig; } DictSyn; PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dxsyn_init); -Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dxsyn_lexize); -Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); static char * find_word(char *in, char **end) { - char *start; + char *start; *end = NULL; while (*in && t_isspace(in)) @@ -71,12 +72,12 @@ compare_syn(const void *a, const void *b) } static void -read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) +read_dictionary(DictSyn * d, char *filename) { - char *real_filename = get_tsearch_config_filename(filename, "rules"); - FILE *fin; - char *line; - int cur = 0; + char *real_filename = get_tsearch_config_filename(filename, "rules"); + FILE *fin; + char *line; + int cur = 0; if ((fin = AllocateFile(real_filename, "r")) == NULL) ereport(ERROR, @@ -86,9 +87,9 @@ read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) while ((line = t_readline(fin)) != NULL) { - char *value; - char *key; - char *end = NULL; + char *value; + char *key; + char *end = NULL; if (*line == '\0') continue; @@ -130,9 +131,9 @@ read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - DictSyn *d; - ListCell *l; + List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + DictSyn *d; + ListCell *l; d = (DictSyn *) palloc0(sizeof(DictSyn)); d->len = 0; @@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) foreach(l, dictoptions) { - DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); + DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); if (pg_strcasecmp(defel->defname, "KEEPORIG") == 0) { @@ -166,19 +167,19 @@ dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - DictSyn *d = (DictSyn *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - int length = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); - Syn word; - Syn *found; - TSLexeme *res = NULL; + DictSyn *d = (DictSyn *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + int length = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); + Syn word; + Syn *found; + TSLexeme *res = NULL; if (!length || d->len == 0) PG_RETURN_POINTER(NULL); /* Create search pattern */ { - char *temp = pnstrdup(in, length); + char *temp = pnstrdup(in, length); word.key = lowerstr(temp); pfree(temp); @@ -186,7 +187,7 @@ dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* Look for matching syn */ - found = (Syn *)bsearch(&word, d->syn, d->len, sizeof(Syn), compare_syn); + found = (Syn *) bsearch(&word, d->syn, d->len, sizeof(Syn), compare_syn); pfree(word.key); if (!found) @@ -194,28 +195,28 @@ dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* Parse string of synonyms and return array of words */ { - char *value = pstrdup(found->value); - int value_length = strlen(value); - char *pos = value; - int nsyns = 0; - bool is_first = true; + char *value = pstrdup(found->value); + int value_length = strlen(value); + char *pos = value; + int nsyns = 0; + bool is_first = true; res = palloc(0); - while(pos < value + value_length) + while (pos < value + value_length) { - char *end; - char *syn = find_word(pos, &end); + char *end; + char *syn = find_word(pos, &end); if (!syn) break; *end = '\0'; - res = repalloc(res, sizeof(TSLexeme)*(nsyns + 2)); + res = repalloc(res, sizeof(TSLexeme) * (nsyns + 2)); res[nsyns].lexeme = NULL; /* first word is added to result only if KEEPORIG flag is set */ - if(d->keeporig || !is_first) + if (d->keeporig || !is_first) { res[nsyns].lexeme = pstrdup(syn); res[nsyns + 1].lexeme = NULL; diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore.h b/contrib/hstore/hstore.h index 5ef18abd8e..48ec6e0648 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore.h +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore.h @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ typedef struct int comparePairs(const void *a, const void *b); int uniquePairs(Pairs * a, int4 l, int4 *buflen); -#define HStoreContainsStrategyNumber 7 -#define HStoreExistsStrategyNumber 9 +#define HStoreContainsStrategyNumber 7 +#define HStoreExistsStrategyNumber 9 #endif diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c index f6fab2b89d..144758f3cd 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c @@ -1,24 +1,24 @@ #include "hstore.h" -#include "access/gin.h" +#include "access/gin.h" -#define KEYFLAG 'K' -#define VALFLAG 'V' -#define NULLFLAG 'N' +#define KEYFLAG 'K' +#define VALFLAG 'V' +#define NULLFLAG 'N' PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_extract_hstore); -Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -static text* -makeitem( char *str, int len ) +static text * +makeitem(char *str, int len) { - text *item; + text *item; - item = (text*)palloc( VARHDRSZ + len + 1 ); + item = (text *) palloc(VARHDRSZ + len + 1); SET_VARSIZE(item, VARHDRSZ + len + 1); - if ( str && len > 0 ) - memcpy( VARDATA(item)+1, str, len ); + if (str && len > 0) + memcpy(VARDATA(item) + 1, str, len); return item; } @@ -26,37 +26,37 @@ makeitem( char *str, int len ) Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; + HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; - *nentries = 2*hs->size; + *nentries = 2 * hs->size; - if ( hs->size > 0 ) + if (hs->size > 0) { - HEntry *ptr = ARRPTR(hs); - char *words = STRPTR(hs); - int i=0; + HEntry *ptr = ARRPTR(hs); + char *words = STRPTR(hs); + int i = 0; - entries = (Datum*)palloc( sizeof(Datum) * 2 * hs->size ); + entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum) * 2 * hs->size); while (ptr - ARRPTR(hs) < hs->size) { - text *item; + text *item; - item = makeitem( words + ptr->pos, ptr->keylen ); + item = makeitem(words + ptr->pos, ptr->keylen); *VARDATA(item) = KEYFLAG; entries[i++] = PointerGetDatum(item); - if ( ptr->valisnull ) + if (ptr->valisnull) { - item = makeitem( NULL, 0 ); + item = makeitem(NULL, 0); *VARDATA(item) = NULLFLAG; } else { - item = makeitem( words + ptr->pos + ptr->keylen, ptr->vallen ); + item = makeitem(words + ptr->pos + ptr->keylen, ptr->vallen); *VARDATA(item) = VALFLAG; } entries[i++] = PointerGetDatum(item); @@ -65,36 +65,37 @@ gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs, 0); PG_RETURN_POINTER(entries); } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_extract_hstore_query); -Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - if ( strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber ) + if (strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber) { - PG_RETURN_DATUM( DirectFunctionCall2( - gin_extract_hstore, - PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), - PG_GETARG_DATUM(1) - )); + PG_RETURN_DATUM(DirectFunctionCall2( + gin_extract_hstore, + PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), + PG_GETARG_DATUM(1) + )); } - else if ( strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber ) + else if (strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber) { - text *item, *q = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; + text *item, + *q = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; *nentries = 1; - entries = (Datum*)palloc( sizeof(Datum) ); + entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum)); - item = makeitem( VARDATA(q), VARSIZE(q)-VARHDRSZ ); + item = makeitem(VARDATA(q), VARSIZE(q) - VARHDRSZ); *VARDATA(item) = KEYFLAG; entries[0] = PointerGetDatum(item); @@ -107,29 +108,28 @@ gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_consistent_hstore); -Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1); - bool res = true; + bool res = true; - if ( strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber ) + if (strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber) { - bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(2); - int i; + bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(2); + int i; - for(i=0;res && i<2*query->size;i++) - if ( check[i] == false ) + for (i = 0; res && i < 2 * query->size; i++) + if (check[i] == false) res = false; } - else if ( strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber ) + else if (strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber) res = true; else elog(ERROR, "Unsupported strategy number: %d", strategy); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } - diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c index 74597c3490..bcac30ee6f 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c @@ -275,13 +275,13 @@ tconvert(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) int len; HStore *out; - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(0) ) + if (PG_ARGISNULL(0)) PG_RETURN_NULL(); key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(1) ) - len = CALCDATASIZE(1, VARSIZE(key) ); + if (PG_ARGISNULL(1)) + len = CALCDATASIZE(1, VARSIZE(key)); else { val = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ tconvert(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) out->size = 1; ARRPTR(out)->keylen = VARSIZE(key) - VARHDRSZ; - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(1) ) + if (PG_ARGISNULL(1)) { ARRPTR(out)->vallen = 0; ARRPTR(out)->valisnull = true; @@ -537,18 +537,18 @@ hs_contains(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (entry) { - if ( te->valisnull || entry->valisnull ) + if (te->valisnull || entry->valisnull) { - if ( !(te->valisnull && entry->valisnull) ) + if (!(te->valisnull && entry->valisnull)) res = false; } - else if ( te->vallen != entry->vallen || - strncmp( - vv + entry->pos + entry->keylen, - tv + te->pos + te->keylen, - te->vallen) - ) - res = false; + else if (te->vallen != entry->vallen || + strncmp( + vv + entry->pos + entry->keylen, + tv + te->pos + te->keylen, + te->vallen) + ) + res = false; } else res = false; diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c index 2248428786..6856a68e03 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c @@ -57,16 +57,17 @@ ginint4_queryextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } } - if ( nentries == 0 ) + if (nentries == 0) { - switch( strategy ) + switch (strategy) { case BooleanSearchStrategy: case RTOverlapStrategyNumber: - *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ - break; - default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void arrays */ - break; + *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ + break; + default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void + * arrays */ + break; } } diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c index 3c34cb67a7..51cc77b863 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c @@ -233,10 +233,11 @@ g_int_decompress(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) CHECKARRVALID(in); if (ARRISVOID(in)) { - if (in != (ArrayType *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key)) { + if (in != (ArrayType *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key)) + { retval = palloc(sizeof(GISTENTRY)); gistentryinit(*retval, PointerGetDatum(in), - entry->rel, entry->page, entry->offset, FALSE); + entry->rel, entry->page, entry->offset, FALSE); PG_RETURN_POINTER(retval); } diff --git a/contrib/isn/isn.c b/contrib/isn/isn.c index 1dfb940e92..9134fc06d8 100644 --- a/contrib/isn/isn.c +++ b/contrib/isn/isn.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.6 2007/06/05 21:31:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ ean2UPC(char *isn) * Returns the ean13 value of the string. */ static -ean13 + ean13 str2ean(const char *num) { ean13 ean = 0; /* current ean */ diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c index 6251fd5b5f..ce8b97e46b 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ bt_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) buffer = ReadBuffer(rel, blkno); /* - * We copy the page into local storage to avoid holding pin on - * the buffer longer than we must, and possibly failing to - * release it at all if the calling query doesn't fetch all rows. + * We copy the page into local storage to avoid holding pin on the + * buffer longer than we must, and possibly failing to release it at + * all if the calling query doesn't fetch all rows. */ mctx = MemoryContextSwitchTo(fctx->multi_call_memory_ctx); diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 931c1a5036..31b5b2e642 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -8,17 +8,17 @@ * information as possible, even if it's nonsense. That's because if a * page is corrupt, we don't know why and how exactly it is corrupt, so we * let the user to judge it. - * + * * These functions are restricted to superusers for the fear of introducing - * security holes if the input checking isn't as water-tight as it should. - * You'd need to be superuser to obtain a raw page image anyway, so + * security holes if the input checking isn't as water-tight as it should. + * You'd need to be superuser to obtain a raw page image anyway, so * there's hardly any use case for using these without superuser-rights * anyway. * * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c,v 1.2 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ #include "utils/builtins.h" #include "miscadmin.h" -Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); #define GET_TEXT(str_) \ - DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(str_)) + DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(str_)) /* * bits_to_text @@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); static char * bits_to_text(bits8 *bits, int len) { - int i; - char *str; + int i; + char *str; str = palloc(len + 1); - - for(i = 0; i < len; i++) + + for (i = 0; i < len; i++) str[i] = (bits[(i / 8)] & (1 << (i % 8))) ? '1' : '0'; str[i] = '\0'; @@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ typedef struct heap_page_items_state TupleDesc tupd; Page page; uint16 offset; -} heap_page_items_state; +} heap_page_items_state; Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - bytea *raw_page = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_P(0); + bytea *raw_page = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_P(0); heap_page_items_state *inter_call_data = NULL; FuncCallContext *fctx; - int raw_page_size; + int raw_page_size; if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) TupleDesc tupdesc; MemoryContext mctx; - if(raw_page_size < SizeOfPageHeaderData) - ereport(ERROR, + if (raw_page_size < SizeOfPageHeaderData) + ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); + errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); fctx = SRF_FIRSTCALL_INIT(); mctx = MemoryContextSwitchTo(fctx->multi_call_memory_ctx); @@ -132,42 +132,42 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ItemId id; Datum values[13]; bool nulls[13]; - uint16 lp_offset; + uint16 lp_offset; uint16 lp_flags; uint16 lp_len; memset(nulls, 0, sizeof(nulls)); /* Extract information from the line pointer */ - + id = PageGetItemId(page, inter_call_data->offset); - lp_offset = ItemIdGetOffset(id); - lp_flags = ItemIdGetFlags(id); - lp_len = ItemIdGetLength(id); + lp_offset = ItemIdGetOffset(id); + lp_flags = ItemIdGetFlags(id); + lp_len = ItemIdGetLength(id); values[0] = UInt16GetDatum(inter_call_data->offset); values[1] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_offset); values[2] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_flags); values[3] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_len); - /* We do just enough validity checking to make sure we don't - * reference data outside the page passed to us. The page - * could be corrupt in many other ways, but at least we won't - * crash. + /* + * We do just enough validity checking to make sure we don't reference + * data outside the page passed to us. The page could be corrupt in + * many other ways, but at least we won't crash. */ if (ItemIdHasStorage(id) && lp_len >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && lp_offset == MAXALIGN(lp_offset) && lp_offset + lp_len <= raw_page_size) { - HeapTupleHeader tuphdr; - int bits_len; + HeapTupleHeader tuphdr; + int bits_len; /* Extract information from the tuple header */ tuphdr = (HeapTupleHeader) PageGetItem(page, id); - + values[4] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuphdr)); values[5] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuphdr)); values[6] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetRawCommandId(tuphdr)); /* shared with xvac */ @@ -176,22 +176,23 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) values[9] = UInt16GetDatum(tuphdr->t_infomask); values[10] = UInt8GetDatum(tuphdr->t_hoff); - /* We already checked that the item as is completely within - * the raw page passed to us, with the length given in the line + /* + * We already checked that the item as is completely within the + * raw page passed to us, with the length given in the line * pointer.. Let's check that t_hoff doesn't point over lp_len, * before using it to access t_bits and oid. */ - if (tuphdr->t_hoff >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && + if (tuphdr->t_hoff >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && tuphdr->t_hoff <= lp_len) { if (tuphdr->t_infomask & HEAP_HASNULL) { - bits_len = tuphdr->t_hoff - - (((char *)tuphdr->t_bits) - ((char *)tuphdr)); + bits_len = tuphdr->t_hoff - + (((char *) tuphdr->t_bits) -((char *) tuphdr)); values[11] = GET_TEXT( - bits_to_text(tuphdr->t_bits, bits_len * 8)); - } + bits_to_text(tuphdr->t_bits, bits_len * 8)); + } else nulls[11] = true; @@ -208,17 +209,19 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } else { - /* The line pointer is not used, or it's invalid. Set the rest of - * the fields to NULL */ - int i; + /* + * The line pointer is not used, or it's invalid. Set the rest of + * the fields to NULL + */ + int i; - for(i = 4; i <= 12; i++) + for (i = 4; i <= 12; i++) nulls[i] = true; } - /* Build and return the result tuple. */ - resultTuple = heap_form_tuple(inter_call_data->tupd, values, nulls); - result = HeapTupleGetDatum(resultTuple); + /* Build and return the result tuple. */ + resultTuple = heap_form_tuple(inter_call_data->tupd, values, nulls); + result = HeapTupleGetDatum(resultTuple); inter_call_data->offset++; diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c b/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c index 80632be9fb..7d69fd5e22 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c,v 1.2 2007/09/21 21:25:42 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -Datum get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); /* * get_raw_page @@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) uint32 blkno = PG_GETARG_UINT32(1); Relation rel; - RangeVar *relrv; - bytea *raw_page; - char *raw_page_data; + RangeVar *relrv; + bytea *raw_page; + char *raw_page_data; Buffer buf; if (!superuser()) @@ -61,12 +61,12 @@ get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), errmsg("cannot get raw page from view \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); if (rel->rd_rel->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), errmsg("cannot get raw page from composite type \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); if (blkno >= RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel)) elog(ERROR, "block number %u is out of range for relation \"%s\"", @@ -125,13 +125,13 @@ page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) raw_page_size = VARSIZE(raw_page) - VARHDRSZ; /* - * Check that enough data was supplied, so that we don't try to access - * fields outside the supplied buffer. + * Check that enough data was supplied, so that we don't try to access + * fields outside the supplied buffer. */ - if(raw_page_size < sizeof(PageHeaderData)) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); + if (raw_page_size < sizeof(PageHeaderData)) + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), + errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); page = (PageHeader) VARDATA(raw_page); @@ -154,12 +154,12 @@ page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) values[7] = UInt16GetDatum(PageGetPageLayoutVersion(page)); values[8] = TransactionIdGetDatum(page->pd_prune_xid); - /* Build and return the tuple. */ + /* Build and return the tuple. */ memset(nulls, 0, sizeof(nulls)); - tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); - result = HeapTupleGetDatum(tuple); + tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); + result = HeapTupleGetDatum(tuple); PG_RETURN_DATUM(result); } diff --git a/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c b/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c index e7c5b06a56..21ac8da176 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c +++ b/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * pg_buffercache_pages.c * display some contents of the buffer cache * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c,v 1.13 2007/07/16 21:20:36 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c,v 1.14 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -149,9 +149,9 @@ pg_buffercache_pages(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * And release locks. We do this in reverse order for two reasons: * (1) Anyone else who needs more than one of the locks will be trying - * to lock them in increasing order; we don't want to release the other - * process until it can get all the locks it needs. - * (2) This avoids O(N^2) behavior inside LWLockRelease. + * to lock them in increasing order; we don't want to release the + * other process until it can get all the locks it needs. (2) This + * avoids O(N^2) behavior inside LWLockRelease. */ for (i = NUM_BUFFER_PARTITIONS; --i >= 0;) LWLockRelease(FirstBufMappingLock + i); diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c index 35c90fde48..41b3500dd1 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c +++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ /* * pg_standby.c - * + * * Production-ready example of how to create a Warm Standby - * database server using continuous archiving as a + * database server using continuous archiving as a * replication mechanism * * We separate the parameters for archive and nextWALfile - * so that we can check the archive exists, even if the + * so that we can check the archive exists, even if the * WAL file doesn't (yet). * * This program will be executed once in full for each file @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ * * It is designed to cater to a variety of needs, as well * providing a customizable section. - * - * Original author: Simon Riggs [email protected] - * Current maintainer: Simon Riggs + * + * Original author: Simon Riggs [email protected] + * Current maintainer: Simon Riggs */ #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ #include <signal.h> #ifdef WIN32 -int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *optstring); +int getopt(int argc, char *const argv[], const char *optstring); #else #include <sys/time.h> #include <unistd.h> @@ -34,42 +34,44 @@ int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *optstring); #ifdef HAVE_GETOPT_H #include <getopt.h> #endif - #endif /* ! WIN32 */ extern char *optarg; extern int optind; /* Options and defaults */ -int sleeptime = 5; /* amount of time to sleep between file checks */ -int waittime = -1; /* how long we have been waiting, -1 no wait yet */ -int maxwaittime = 0; /* how long are we prepared to wait for? */ -int keepfiles = 0; /* number of WAL files to keep, 0 keep all */ -int maxretries = 3; /* number of retries on restore command */ -bool debug = false; /* are we debugging? */ -bool triggered = false; /* have we been triggered? */ -bool need_cleanup = false; /* do we need to remove files from archive? */ +int sleeptime = 5; /* amount of time to sleep between file checks */ +int waittime = -1; /* how long we have been waiting, -1 no wait + * yet */ +int maxwaittime = 0; /* how long are we prepared to wait for? */ +int keepfiles = 0; /* number of WAL files to keep, 0 keep all */ +int maxretries = 3; /* number of retries on restore command */ +bool debug = false; /* are we debugging? */ +bool triggered = false; /* have we been triggered? */ +bool need_cleanup = false; /* do we need to remove files from + * archive? */ static volatile sig_atomic_t signaled = false; -char *archiveLocation; /* where to find the archive? */ -char *triggerPath; /* where to find the trigger file? */ -char *xlogFilePath; /* where we are going to restore to */ -char *nextWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ -char *restartWALFileName; /* the file from which we can restart restore */ -char *priorWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ -char WALFilePath[MAXPGPATH];/* the file path including archive */ -char restoreCommand[MAXPGPATH]; /* run this to restore */ -char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char *archiveLocation; /* where to find the archive? */ +char *triggerPath; /* where to find the trigger file? */ +char *xlogFilePath; /* where we are going to restore to */ +char *nextWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char *restartWALFileName; /* the file from which we can restart restore */ +char *priorWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char WALFilePath[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file path including archive */ +char restoreCommand[MAXPGPATH]; /* run this to restore */ +char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file we need to + * get from archive */ #define RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY 0 #define RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK 1 -int restoreCommandType; +int restoreCommandType; #define XLOG_DATA 0 #define XLOG_HISTORY 1 #define XLOG_BACKUP_LABEL 2 -int nextWALFileType; +int nextWALFileType; #define SET_RESTORE_COMMAND(cmd, arg1, arg2) \ snprintf(restoreCommand, MAXPGPATH, cmd " \"%s\" \"%s\"", arg1, arg2) @@ -86,21 +88,21 @@ struct stat stat_buf; * accessible directory. If you want to make other assumptions, * such as using a vendor-specific archive and access API, these * routines are the ones you'll need to change. You're - * enouraged to submit any changes to [email protected] - * or personally to the current maintainer. Those changes may be + * enouraged to submit any changes to [email protected] + * or personally to the current maintainer. Those changes may be * folded in to later versions of this program. */ -#define XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN 24 +#define XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN 24 /* Reworked from access/xlog_internal.h */ #define XLogFileName(fname, tli, log, seg) \ snprintf(fname, XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN + 1, "%08X%08X%08X", tli, log, seg) /* - * Initialize allows customized commands into the warm standby program. + * Initialize allows customized commands into the warm standby program. * - * As an example, and probably the common case, we use either - * cp/ln commands on *nix, or copy/move command on Windows. + * As an example, and probably the common case, we use either + * cp/ln commands on *nix, or copy/move command on Windows. * */ static void @@ -111,79 +113,79 @@ CustomizableInitialize(void) switch (restoreCommandType) { case RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("mklink",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("mklink", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); case RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY: default: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("copy",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("copy", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; - } + } #else snprintf(WALFilePath, MAXPGPATH, "%s/%s", archiveLocation, nextWALFileName); switch (restoreCommandType) { case RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK: #if HAVE_WORKING_LINK - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("ln -s -f",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("ln -s -f", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; #endif case RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY: default: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("cp",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("cp", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; - } + } #endif /* - * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory - * You may wish to add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. - * So, since it is a directory, we use stat to test if its accessible + * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory You may wish to + * add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. So, since it is a + * directory, we use stat to test if its accessible */ if (stat(archiveLocation, &stat_buf) != 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" does not exist\n", archiveLocation); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" does not exist\n", archiveLocation); fflush(stderr); - exit(2); + exit(2); } } /* * CustomizableNextWALFileReady() - * + * * Is the requested file ready yet? */ -static bool +static bool CustomizableNextWALFileReady() { if (stat(WALFilePath, &stat_buf) == 0) { /* - * If its a backup file, return immediately - * If its a regular file return only if its the right size already + * If its a backup file, return immediately If its a regular file + * return only if its the right size already */ if (strlen(nextWALFileName) > 24 && strspn(nextWALFileName, "0123456789ABCDEF") == 24 && - strcmp(nextWALFileName + strlen(nextWALFileName) - strlen(".backup"), - ".backup") == 0) + strcmp(nextWALFileName + strlen(nextWALFileName) - strlen(".backup"), + ".backup") == 0) { nextWALFileType = XLOG_BACKUP_LABEL; - return true; + return true; } - else - if (stat_buf.st_size == XLOG_SEG_SIZE) - { + else if (stat_buf.st_size == XLOG_SEG_SIZE) + { #ifdef WIN32 - /* - * Windows reports that the file has the right number of bytes - * even though the file is still being copied and cannot be - * opened by pg_standby yet. So we wait for sleeptime secs - * before attempting to restore. If that is not enough, we - * will rely on the retry/holdoff mechanism. - */ - pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); + + /* + * Windows reports that the file has the right number of bytes + * even though the file is still being copied and cannot be opened + * by pg_standby yet. So we wait for sleeptime secs before + * attempting to restore. If that is not enough, we will rely on + * the retry/holdoff mechanism. + */ + pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); #endif - nextWALFileType = XLOG_DATA; - return true; - } + nextWALFileType = XLOG_DATA; + return true; + } /* * If still too small, wait until it is the correct size @@ -192,10 +194,10 @@ CustomizableNextWALFileReady() { if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "file size greater than expected\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "file size greater than expected\n"); fflush(stderr); } - exit(3); + exit(3); } } @@ -212,35 +214,36 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) */ if (nextWALFileType == XLOG_DATA) { - int rc; - DIR *xldir; - struct dirent *xlde; + int rc; + DIR *xldir; + struct dirent *xlde; /* - * Assume its OK to keep failing. The failure situation may change over - * time, so we'd rather keep going on the main processing than fail - * because we couldnt clean up yet. + * Assume its OK to keep failing. The failure situation may change + * over time, so we'd rather keep going on the main processing than + * fail because we couldnt clean up yet. */ if ((xldir = opendir(archiveLocation)) != NULL) { while ((xlde = readdir(xldir)) != NULL) { /* - * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers in - * deciding whether a segment is still needed. This ensures that we - * won't prematurely remove a segment from a parent timeline. We could - * probably be a little more proactive about removing segments of - * non-parent timelines, but that would be a whole lot more - * complicated. + * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers + * in deciding whether a segment is still needed. This + * ensures that we won't prematurely remove a segment from a + * parent timeline. We could probably be a little more + * proactive about removing segments of non-parent timelines, + * but that would be a whole lot more complicated. * - * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames to decide - * which ones are earlier than the exclusiveCleanupFileName file. - * Note that this means files are not removed in the order they were - * originally written, in case this worries you. + * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames + * to decide which ones are earlier than the + * exclusiveCleanupFileName file. Note that this means files + * are not removed in the order they were originally written, + * in case this worries you. */ if (strlen(xlde->d_name) == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && strspn(xlde->d_name, "0123456789ABCDEF") == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && - strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) + strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) { #ifdef WIN32 snprintf(WALFilePath, MAXPGPATH, "%s\\%s", archiveLocation, xlde->d_name); @@ -249,7 +252,7 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) #endif if (debug) - fprintf(stderr, "\nremoving \"%s\"", WALFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nremoving \"%s\"", WALFilePath); rc = unlink(WALFilePath); if (rc != 0) @@ -264,7 +267,7 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) fprintf(stderr, "\n"); } else - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" open error\n", archiveLocation); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" open error\n", archiveLocation); closedir(xldir); fflush(stderr); @@ -278,19 +281,19 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) /* * SetWALFileNameForCleanup() - * + * * Set the earliest WAL filename that we want to keep on the archive - * and decide whether we need_cleanup + * and decide whether we need_cleanup */ static bool SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) { - uint32 tli = 1, - log = 0, - seg = 0; - uint32 log_diff = 0, - seg_diff = 0; - bool cleanup = false; + uint32 tli = 1, + log = 0, + seg = 0; + uint32 log_diff = 0, + seg_diff = 0; + bool cleanup = false; if (restartWALFileName) { @@ -305,7 +308,7 @@ SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) { log_diff = keepfiles / MaxSegmentsPerLogFile; seg_diff = keepfiles % MaxSegmentsPerLogFile; - if (seg_diff > seg) + if (seg_diff > seg) { log_diff++; seg = MaxSegmentsPerLogFile - seg_diff; @@ -333,31 +336,30 @@ SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) /* * CheckForExternalTrigger() - * + * * Is there a trigger file? */ -static bool +static bool CheckForExternalTrigger(void) { - int rc; + int rc; /* - * Look for a trigger file, if that option has been selected + * Look for a trigger file, if that option has been selected * - * We use stat() here because triggerPath is always a file - * rather than potentially being in an archive + * We use stat() here because triggerPath is always a file rather than + * potentially being in an archive */ if (triggerPath && stat(triggerPath, &stat_buf) == 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "trigger file found\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "trigger file found\n"); fflush(stderr); /* - * If trigger file found, we *must* delete it. Here's why: - * When recovery completes, we will be asked again - * for the same file from the archive using pg_standby - * so must remove trigger file so we can reload file again - * and come up correctly. + * If trigger file found, we *must* delete it. Here's why: When + * recovery completes, we will be asked again for the same file from + * the archive using pg_standby so must remove trigger file so we can + * reload file again and come up correctly. */ rc = unlink(triggerPath); if (rc != 0) @@ -374,14 +376,14 @@ CheckForExternalTrigger(void) /* * RestoreWALFileForRecovery() - * + * * Perform the action required to restore the file from archive */ static bool RestoreWALFileForRecovery(void) { - int rc = 0; - int numretries = 0; + int rc = 0; + int numretries = 0; if (debug) { @@ -401,7 +403,7 @@ RestoreWALFileForRecovery(void) } return true; } - pg_usleep(numretries++ * sleeptime * 1000000L); + pg_usleep(numretries++ * sleeptime * 1000000L); } /* @@ -441,13 +443,13 @@ sighandler(int sig) } /*------------ MAIN ----------------------------------------*/ -int +int main(int argc, char **argv) { int c; - (void) signal(SIGINT, sighandler); - (void) signal(SIGQUIT, sighandler); + (void) signal(SIGINT, sighandler); + (void) signal(SIGQUIT, sighandler); while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "cdk:lr:s:t:w:")) != -1) { @@ -492,8 +494,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) case 't': /* Trigger file */ triggerPath = optarg; if (CheckForExternalTrigger()) - exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ - break; + exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ + break; case 'w': /* Max wait time */ maxwaittime = atoi(optarg); if (maxwaittime < 0) @@ -510,7 +512,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } } - /* + /* * Parameter checking - after checking to see if trigger file present */ if (argc == 1) @@ -521,8 +523,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* * We will go to the archiveLocation to get nextWALFileName. - * nextWALFileName may not exist yet, which would not be an error, - * so we separate the archiveLocation and nextWALFileName so we can check + * nextWALFileName may not exist yet, which would not be an error, so we + * separate the archiveLocation and nextWALFileName so we can check * separately whether archiveLocation exists, if not that is an error */ if (optind < argc) @@ -532,7 +534,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: must specify archiveLocation\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: must specify archiveLocation\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -544,7 +546,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%f to specify nextWALFileName\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%f to specify nextWALFileName\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -556,7 +558,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%p to specify xlogFilePath\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%p to specify xlogFilePath\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -573,14 +575,14 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nTrigger file : %s", triggerPath ? triggerPath : "<not set>"); - fprintf(stderr, "\nWaiting for WAL file : %s", nextWALFileName); - fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file path : %s", WALFilePath); - fprintf(stderr, "\nRestoring to... : %s", xlogFilePath); - fprintf(stderr, "\nSleep interval : %d second%s", - sleeptime, (sleeptime > 1 ? "s" : " ")); - fprintf(stderr, "\nMax wait interval : %d %s", - maxwaittime, (maxwaittime > 0 ? "seconds" : "forever")); + fprintf(stderr, "\nTrigger file : %s", triggerPath ? triggerPath : "<not set>"); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWaiting for WAL file : %s", nextWALFileName); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file path : %s", WALFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nRestoring to... : %s", xlogFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nSleep interval : %d second%s", + sleeptime, (sleeptime > 1 ? "s" : " ")); + fprintf(stderr, "\nMax wait interval : %d %s", + maxwaittime, (maxwaittime > 0 ? "seconds" : "forever")); fprintf(stderr, "\nCommand for restore : %s", restoreCommand); fprintf(stderr, "\nKeep archive history : %s and later", exclusiveCleanupFileName); fflush(stderr); @@ -609,20 +611,20 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } } - /* + /* * Main wait loop */ while (!CustomizableNextWALFileReady() && !triggered) { if (sleeptime <= 60) - pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); + pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); if (signaled) { triggered = true; if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nsignaled to exit\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\nsignaled to exit\n"); fflush(stderr); } } @@ -631,36 +633,34 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file not present yet."); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file not present yet."); if (triggerPath) - fprintf(stderr, " Checking for trigger file..."); + fprintf(stderr, " Checking for trigger file..."); fflush(stderr); } waittime += sleeptime; - + if (!triggered && (CheckForExternalTrigger() || (waittime >= maxwaittime && maxwaittime > 0))) { triggered = true; if (debug && waittime >= maxwaittime && maxwaittime > 0) - fprintf(stderr, "\nTimed out after %d seconds\n",waittime); + fprintf(stderr, "\nTimed out after %d seconds\n", waittime); } } } - /* - * Action on exit + /* + * Action on exit */ if (triggered) - exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ - - /* - * Once we have restored this file successfully we - * can remove some prior WAL files. - * If this restore fails we musn't remove any - * file because some of them will be requested again - * immediately after the failed restore, or when - * we restart recovery. + exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ + + /* + * Once we have restored this file successfully we can remove some prior + * WAL files. If this restore fails we musn't remove any file because some + * of them will be requested again immediately after the failed restore, + * or when we restart recovery. */ if (RestoreWALFileForRecovery() && need_cleanup) CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(); diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c index ed2ba0eae7..33d005ae9a 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c @@ -16,23 +16,23 @@ Datum gin_trgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *val = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; - TRGM *trg; + text *val = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; + TRGM *trg; int4 trglen; - + *nentries = 0; - + trg = generate_trgm(VARDATA(val), VARSIZE(val) - VARHDRSZ); trglen = ARRNELEM(trg); - + if (trglen > 0) { - trgm *ptr; - int4 i = 0, - item; - + trgm *ptr; + int4 i = 0, + item; + *nentries = (int32) trglen; entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum) * trglen); @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { item = TRGMINT(ptr); entries[i++] = Int32GetDatum(item); - + ptr++; } } @@ -52,20 +52,20 @@ gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum gin_trgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - text *query = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2); + bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + text *query = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2); bool res = FALSE; - TRGM *trg; + TRGM *trg; int4 i, trglen, ntrue = 0; - + trg = generate_trgm(VARDATA(query), VARSIZE(query) - VARHDRSZ); trglen = ARRNELEM(trg); - + for (i = 0; i < trglen; i++) if (check[i]) - ntrue ++; + ntrue++; #ifdef DIVUNION res = (trglen == ntrue) ? true : ((((((float4) ntrue) / ((float4) (trglen - ntrue)))) >= trgm_limit) ? true : false); diff --git a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c index a5e57ce955..5fe48b96a3 100644 --- a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.73 2007/10/22 10:40:47 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.74 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * * pgbench: a simple benchmark program for PostgreSQL * written by Tatsuo Ishii @@ -53,9 +53,9 @@ extern int optind; /* max number of clients allowed */ #ifdef FD_SETSIZE -#define MAXCLIENTS (FD_SETSIZE - 10) +#define MAXCLIENTS (FD_SETSIZE - 10) #else -#define MAXCLIENTS 1024 +#define MAXCLIENTS 1024 #endif int nclients = 1; /* default number of simulated clients */ @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ getrand(int min, int max) /* call PQexec() and exit() on failure */ static void -executeStatement(PGconn *con, const char* sql) +executeStatement(PGconn *con, const char *sql) { PGresult *res; @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ discard_response(CState * state) /* check to see if the SQL result was good */ static int -check(CState *state, PGresult *res, int n) +check(CState * state, PGresult *res, int n) { CState *st = &state[n]; @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ check(CState *state, PGresult *res, int n) default: fprintf(stderr, "Client %d aborted in state %d: %s", n, st->state, PQerrorMessage(st->con)); - remains--; /* I've aborted */ + remains--; /* I've aborted */ PQfinish(st->con); st->con = NULL; return (-1); @@ -452,12 +452,12 @@ top: if (st->sleeping) { /* are we sleeping? */ - int usec; - struct timeval now; + int usec; + struct timeval now; gettimeofday(&now, NULL); usec = (st->until.tv_sec - now.tv_sec) * 1000000 + - st->until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; + st->until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; if (usec <= 0) st->sleeping = 0; /* Done sleeping, go ahead with next command */ else @@ -798,11 +798,11 @@ init(void) "drop table if exists accounts", "create table accounts(aid int not null,bid int,abalance int,filler char(84)) with (fillfactor=%d)", "drop table if exists history", - "create table history(tid int,bid int,aid int,delta int,mtime timestamp,filler char(22))"}; + "create table history(tid int,bid int,aid int,delta int,mtime timestamp,filler char(22))"}; static char *DDLAFTERs[] = { "alter table branches add primary key (bid)", "alter table tellers add primary key (tid)", - "alter table accounts add primary key (aid)"}; + "alter table accounts add primary key (aid)"}; char sql[256]; @@ -821,7 +821,8 @@ init(void) (strstr(DDLs[i], "create table tellers") == DDLs[i]) || (strstr(DDLs[i], "create table accounts") == DDLs[i])) { - char ddl_stmt[128]; + char ddl_stmt[128]; + snprintf(ddl_stmt, 128, DDLs[i], fillfactor); executeStatement(con, ddl_stmt); continue; @@ -990,7 +991,7 @@ process_commands(char *buf) pg_strcasecmp(my_commands->argv[2], "ms") != 0 && pg_strcasecmp(my_commands->argv[2], "s")) { - fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown time unit '%s' - must be us, ms or s\n", + fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown time unit '%s' - must be us, ms or s\n", my_commands->argv[0], my_commands->argv[2]); return NULL; } @@ -1204,7 +1205,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) int c; int is_init_mode = 0; /* initialize mode? */ int is_no_vacuum = 0; /* no vacuum at all before testing? */ - int do_vacuum_accounts = 0; /* do vacuum accounts before testing? */ + int do_vacuum_accounts = 0; /* do vacuum accounts before testing? */ int debug = 0; /* debug flag */ int ttype = 0; /* transaction type. 0: TPC-B, 1: SELECT only, * 2: skip update of branches and tellers */ @@ -1308,7 +1309,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) fprintf(stderr, "Use limit/ulimit to increase the limit before using pgbench.\n"); exit(1); } -#endif /* HAVE_GETRLIMIT */ +#endif /* HAVE_GETRLIMIT */ break; case 'C': is_connect = 1; @@ -1615,8 +1616,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (state[i].sleeping) { - int this_usec; - int sock = PQsocket(state[i].con); + int this_usec; + int sock = PQsocket(state[i].con); if (min_usec < 0) { @@ -1625,7 +1626,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } this_usec = (state[i].until.tv_sec - now.tv_sec) * 1000000 + - state[i].until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; + state[i].until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; if (this_usec > 0 && (min_usec == 0 || this_usec < min_usec)) min_usec = this_usec; @@ -1657,11 +1658,11 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) timeout.tv_usec = min_usec % 1000000; nsocks = select(maxsock + 1, &input_mask, (fd_set *) NULL, - (fd_set *) NULL, &timeout); + (fd_set *) NULL, &timeout); } else nsocks = select(maxsock + 1, &input_mask, (fd_set *) NULL, - (fd_set *) NULL, (struct timeval *) NULL); + (fd_set *) NULL, (struct timeval *) NULL); if (nsocks < 0) { if (errno == EINTR) diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c index 93a6183fca..7138ffa903 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * Butchered version of sshblowf.c from putty-0.59. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c,v 1.8 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c,v 1.9 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ /* @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ static const uint32 sbox3[] = { static void blowfish_encrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, - BlowfishContext *ctx) + BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; uint32 *S1 = ctx->S1; @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, static void blowfish_decrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, - BlowfishContext *ctx) + BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; uint32 *S1 = ctx->S1; @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, } void -blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, +blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, uint32 str[2]; int i; - Assert(keybytes > 0 && keybytes <= (448/8)); + Assert(keybytes > 0 && keybytes <= (448 / 8)); for (i = 0; i < 18; i++) { @@ -492,9 +492,8 @@ blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, } void -blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *iv) +blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *iv) { ctx->iv0 = GET_32BIT_MSB_FIRST(iv); ctx->iv1 = GET_32BIT_MSB_FIRST(iv + 4); } - diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h index 7e11dc9aeb..6e280d8754 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h,v 1.6 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ /* * PuTTY is copyright 1997-2007 Simon Tatham. * @@ -35,14 +35,12 @@ typedef struct S3[256], P[18]; uint32 iv0, - iv1; /* for CBC mode */ -} BlowfishContext; - -void blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes); -void blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *iv); -void blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); - + iv1; /* for CBC mode */ +} BlowfishContext; +void blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes); +void blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *iv); +void blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c index f951f2c411..84b4d758af 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c,v 1.12 2007/04/06 05:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c,v 1.13 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * * This code comes from John the Ripper password cracker, with reentrant * and crypt(3) interfaces added, but optimizations specific to password @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ BF_encode(char *dst, const BF_word * src, int size) } static void -BF_swap(BF_word *x, int count) +BF_swap(BF_word * x, int count) { /* Swap on little-endian hardware, else do nothing */ #ifndef WORDS_BIGENDIAN diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h b/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h index f730b32050..5bc335e582 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. */ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h,v 1.5 2006/10/04 00:29:46 momjian Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #ifndef IMATH_H_ #define IMATH_H_ @@ -115,11 +115,12 @@ mp_result mp_int_mul(mp_int a, mp_int b, mp_int c); /* c = a * b */ mp_result mp_int_mul_value(mp_int a, int value, mp_int c); mp_result mp_int_mul_pow2(mp_int a, int p2, mp_int c); mp_result mp_int_sqr(mp_int a, mp_int c); /* c = a * a */ + mp_result -mp_int_div(mp_int a, mp_int b, /* q = a / b */ +mp_int_div(mp_int a, mp_int b, /* q = a / b */ mp_int q, mp_int r); /* r = a % b */ mp_result -mp_int_div_value(mp_int a, int value, /* q = a / value */ +mp_int_div_value(mp_int a, int value, /* q = a / value */ mp_int q, int *r); /* r = a % value */ mp_result mp_int_div_pow2(mp_int a, int p2, /* q = a / 2^p2 */ diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c index 24db7c0cc8..594308673b 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c,v 1.26 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c,v 1.27 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ struct int_ctx uint8 iv[INT_MAX_IV]; union { - BlowfishContext bf; + BlowfishContext bf; rijndael_ctx rj; } ctx; unsigned keylen; @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ bf_block_size(PX_Cipher * c) static unsigned bf_key_size(PX_Cipher * c) { - return 448/8; + return 448 / 8; } static unsigned diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c index 10df87f2bf..0f46580005 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c,v 1.31 2007/09/29 02:18:15 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c,v 1.32 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -98,10 +98,13 @@ static void AES_cbc_encrypt(const uint8 *src, uint8 *dst, int len, AES_KEY *ctx, uint8 *iv, int enc) { memcpy(dst, src, len); - if (enc) { + if (enc) + { aes_cbc_encrypt(ctx, iv, dst, len); memcpy(iv, dst + len - 16, 16); - } else { + } + else + { aes_cbc_decrypt(ctx, iv, dst, len); memcpy(iv, src + len - 16, 16); } @@ -394,26 +397,27 @@ static int bf_check_supported_key_len(void) { static const uint8 key[56] = { - 0xf0,0xe1,0xd2,0xc3,0xb4,0xa5,0x96,0x87,0x78,0x69, - 0x5a,0x4b,0x3c,0x2d,0x1e,0x0f,0x00,0x11,0x22,0x33, - 0x44,0x55,0x66,0x77,0x04,0x68,0x91,0x04,0xc2,0xfd, - 0x3b,0x2f,0x58,0x40,0x23,0x64,0x1a,0xba,0x61,0x76, - 0x1f,0x1f,0x1f,0x1f,0x0e,0x0e,0x0e,0x0e,0xff,0xff, - 0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff + 0xf0, 0xe1, 0xd2, 0xc3, 0xb4, 0xa5, 0x96, 0x87, 0x78, 0x69, + 0x5a, 0x4b, 0x3c, 0x2d, 0x1e, 0x0f, 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, + 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x04, 0x68, 0x91, 0x04, 0xc2, 0xfd, + 0x3b, 0x2f, 0x58, 0x40, 0x23, 0x64, 0x1a, 0xba, 0x61, 0x76, + 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0xff, 0xff, + 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff }; - static const uint8 data[8] = {0xfe,0xdc,0xba,0x98,0x76,0x54,0x32,0x10}; - static const uint8 res[8] = {0xc0,0x45,0x04,0x01,0x2e,0x4e,0x1f,0x53}; + static const uint8 data[8] = {0xfe, 0xdc, 0xba, 0x98, 0x76, 0x54, 0x32, 0x10}; + static const uint8 res[8] = {0xc0, 0x45, 0x04, 0x01, 0x2e, 0x4e, 0x1f, 0x53}; static uint8 out[8]; - BF_KEY bf_key; + BF_KEY bf_key; /* encrypt with 448bits key and verify output */ BF_set_key(&bf_key, 56, key); BF_ecb_encrypt(data, out, &bf_key, BF_ENCRYPT); - if (memcmp(out, res, 8) != 0) - return 0; /* Output does not match -> strong cipher is not supported */ + if (memcmp(out, res, 8) != 0) + return 0; /* Output does not match -> strong cipher is + * not supported */ return 1; } @@ -421,18 +425,19 @@ static int bf_init(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *key, unsigned klen, const uint8 *iv) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - static int bf_is_strong = -1; + static int bf_is_strong = -1; /* - * Test if key len is supported. BF_set_key silently cut large keys and it could be - * be a problem when user transfer crypted data from one server to another. + * Test if key len is supported. BF_set_key silently cut large keys and it + * could be be a problem when user transfer crypted data from one server + * to another. */ - - if( bf_is_strong == -1) + + if (bf_is_strong == -1) bf_is_strong = bf_check_supported_key_len(); - if( !bf_is_strong && klen>16 ) - return PXE_KEY_TOO_BIG; + if (!bf_is_strong && klen > 16) + return PXE_KEY_TOO_BIG; /* Key len is supported. We can use it. */ BF_set_key(&od->u.bf.key, klen, key); @@ -750,13 +755,14 @@ ossl_aes_init(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *key, unsigned klen, const uint8 *iv) static int ossl_aes_key_init(ossldata * od, int type) { - int err; + int err; + /* - * Strong key support could be missing on some openssl installations. - * We must check return value from set key function. - */ + * Strong key support could be missing on some openssl installations. We + * must check return value from set key function. + */ if (type == AES_ENCRYPT) - err = AES_set_encrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); + err = AES_set_encrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); else err = AES_set_decrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); @@ -776,7 +782,7 @@ ossl_aes_ecb_encrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, unsigned bs = gen_ossl_block_size(c); ossldata *od = c->ptr; const uint8 *end = data + dlen - bs; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_ENCRYPT)) != 0) @@ -794,7 +800,7 @@ ossl_aes_ecb_decrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, unsigned bs = gen_ossl_block_size(c); ossldata *od = c->ptr; const uint8 *end = data + dlen - bs; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_DECRYPT)) != 0) @@ -810,12 +816,12 @@ ossl_aes_cbc_encrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, uint8 *res) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_ENCRYPT)) != 0) return err; - + AES_cbc_encrypt(data, res, dlen, &od->u.aes_key, od->iv, AES_ENCRYPT); return 0; } @@ -825,7 +831,7 @@ ossl_aes_cbc_decrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, uint8 *res) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_DECRYPT)) != 0) diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c index 2942edf2ad..9d2f61ed8e 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c,v 1.6 2007/01/14 20:55:14 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -312,7 +312,6 @@ pgp_decompress_filter(PullFilter ** res, PGP_Context * ctx, PullFilter * src) { return pullf_create(res, &decompress_filter, ctx, src); } - #else /* !HAVE_ZLIB */ int diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c index 81222873b6..d1b22d7ec7 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c,v 1.16 2007/08/23 16:15:51 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c,v 1.17 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ combo_decrypt(PX_Combo * cx, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, /* with padding, empty ciphertext is not allowed */ if (cx->padding) return PXE_DECRYPT_FAILED; - + /* without padding, report empty result */ *rlen = 0; return 0; diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c index e25f35acde..c2e9da965b 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ * * $From: sha2.c,v 1.1 2001/11/08 00:01:51 adg Exp adg $ * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.9 2007/04/06 05:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.10 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ (x) = ((tmp & 0xffff0000ffff0000ULL) >> 16) | \ ((tmp & 0x0000ffff0000ffffULL) << 16); \ } -#endif /* not bigendian */ +#endif /* not bigendian */ /* * Macro for incrementally adding the unsigned 64-bit integer n to the diff --git a/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c b/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c index 3018b6aedd..3cd3147895 100644 --- a/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c +++ b/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c @@ -159,16 +159,17 @@ pgstatindex(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) else if (P_ISLEAF(opaque)) { - int max_avail; - max_avail = BLCKSZ - (BLCKSZ - ((PageHeader)page)->pd_special + SizeOfPageHeaderData); + int max_avail; + + max_avail = BLCKSZ - (BLCKSZ - ((PageHeader) page)->pd_special + SizeOfPageHeaderData); indexStat.max_avail += max_avail; indexStat.free_space += PageGetFreeSpace(page); indexStat.leaf_pages++; /* - * If the next leaf is on an earlier block, it - * means a fragmentation. + * If the next leaf is on an earlier block, it means a + * fragmentation. */ if (opaque->btpo_next != P_NONE && opaque->btpo_next < blkno) indexStat.fragments++; diff --git a/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c b/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c index 22dc2f2e0e..fd7cafea4b 100644 --- a/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c +++ b/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c @@ -552,8 +552,8 @@ crosstab(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) xpstrdup(values[0], rowid); /* - * Check to see if the rowid is the same as that of the last - * tuple sent -- if so, skip this tuple entirely + * Check to see if the rowid is the same as that of the + * last tuple sent -- if so, skip this tuple entirely */ if (!firstpass && xstreq(lastrowid, rowid)) { @@ -563,8 +563,8 @@ crosstab(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* - * If rowid hasn't changed on us, continue building the - * ouput tuple. + * If rowid hasn't changed on us, continue building the ouput + * tuple. */ if (xstreq(rowid, values[0])) { diff --git a/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c b/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c index 728bf4098f..784d2d43ad 100644 --- a/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c +++ b/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -22,40 +22,44 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; */ /* self-defined type */ -typedef struct { - char * buffer; /* text to parse */ - int len; /* length of the text in buffer */ - int pos; /* position of the parser */ -} ParserState; +typedef struct +{ + char *buffer; /* text to parse */ + int len; /* length of the text in buffer */ + int pos; /* position of the parser */ +} ParserState; /* copy-paste from wparser.h of tsearch2 */ -typedef struct { - int lexid; - char *alias; - char *descr; -} LexDescr; +typedef struct +{ + int lexid; + char *alias; + char *descr; +} LexDescr; /* * prototypes */ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_start); -Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_getlexeme); -Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_end); -Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_lextype); -Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); /* * functions */ -Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) palloc0(sizeof(ParserState)); + pst->buffer = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); pst->len = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); pst->pos = 0; @@ -63,15 +67,16 @@ Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_POINTER(pst); } -Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char **t = (char **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - int *tlen = (int *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(2); + ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char **t = (char **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + int *tlen = (int *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(2); int type; *tlen = pst->pos; - *t = pst->buffer + pst->pos; + *t = pst->buffer + pst->pos; if ((pst->buffer)[pst->pos] == ' ') { @@ -81,7 +86,9 @@ Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) while ((pst->buffer)[pst->pos] == ' ' && pst->pos < pst->len) (pst->pos)++; - } else { + } + else + { /* word type */ type = 3; /* go to the next white-space character */ @@ -94,28 +101,29 @@ Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* we are finished if (*tlen == 0) */ if (*tlen == 0) - type=0; + type = 0; PG_RETURN_INT32(type); } -Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + pfree(pst); PG_RETURN_VOID(); } -Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* - * Remarks: - * - we have to return the blanks for headline reason - * - we use the same lexids like Teodor in the default - * word parser; in this way we can reuse the headline - * function of the default word parser. + * Remarks: - we have to return the blanks for headline reason - we use + * the same lexids like Teodor in the default word parser; in this way we + * can reuse the headline function of the default word parser. */ - LexDescr *descr = (LexDescr *) palloc(sizeof(LexDescr) * (2+1)); + LexDescr *descr = (LexDescr *) palloc(sizeof(LexDescr) * (2 + 1)); /* there are only two types in this parser */ descr[0].lexid = 3; diff --git a/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c b/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c index 25fb697529..e0f0f651b8 100644 --- a/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c +++ b/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c,v 1.2 2007/11/13 22:14:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -24,8 +24,8 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -static Oid current_dictionary_oid = InvalidOid; -static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; +static Oid current_dictionary_oid = InvalidOid; +static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; /* insert given value at argument position 0 */ #define INSERT_ARGUMENT0(argument, isnull) \ @@ -65,27 +65,27 @@ static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; } \ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(name) -static Oid GetCurrentDict(void); -static Oid GetCurrentParser(void); - -Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_ts_stat(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_rewrite_accum(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_rewrite_finish(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +static Oid GetCurrentDict(void); +static Oid GetCurrentParser(void); + +Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_ts_stat(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_rewrite_accum(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_rewrite_finish(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(tsa_lexize_byname); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(tsa_lexize_bycurrent); @@ -150,11 +150,11 @@ UNSUPPORTED_FUNCTION(tsa_get_covers); Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *dictname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + text *dictname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); return DirectFunctionCall2(ts_lexize, - ObjectIdGetDatum(TextGetObjectId(regdictionaryin, dictname)), + ObjectIdGetDatum(TextGetObjectId(regdictionaryin, dictname)), arg1); } @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); - Oid id = GetCurrentDict(); + Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); + Oid id = GetCurrentDict(); return DirectFunctionCall2(ts_lexize, ObjectIdGetDatum(id), @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid dict_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + Oid dict_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); if (!SearchSysCacheExists(TSDICTOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(dict_oid), @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Oid dict_oid; + text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Oid dict_oid; dict_oid = TSDictionaryGetDictid(stringToQualifiedNameList(TextPGetCString(name)), false); @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid parser_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + Oid parser_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); if (!SearchSysCacheExists(TSPARSEROID, ObjectIdGetDatum(parser_oid), @@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Oid parser_oid; + text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Oid parser_oid; parser_oid = TSParserGetPrsid(stringToQualifiedNameList(TextPGetCString(name)), false); @@ -252,12 +252,12 @@ tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid arg0 = PG_GETARG_OID(0); - char *name; + Oid arg0 = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + char *name; name = DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(regconfigout, ObjectIdGetDatum(arg0))); - + set_config_option("default_text_search_config", name, PGC_USERSET, PGC_S_SESSION, @@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *arg0 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - char *name; + text *arg0 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + char *name; name = TextPGetCString(arg0); @@ -289,9 +289,9 @@ tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -303,9 +303,9 @@ tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -318,9 +318,9 @@ tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -332,22 +332,22 @@ tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Datum arg2 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(2); - Datum result; - Oid config_oid; + Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Datum arg2 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(2); + Datum result; + Oid config_oid; /* first parameter has to be converted to oid */ config_oid = DatumGetObjectId(DirectFunctionCall1(regconfigin, - DirectFunctionCall1(textout, arg0))); + DirectFunctionCall1(textout, arg0))); if (PG_NARGS() == 3) result = DirectFunctionCall3(ts_headline_byid, - ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), arg1, arg2); + ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), arg1, arg2); else { - Datum arg3 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(3); + Datum arg3 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(3); result = DirectFunctionCall4(ts_headline_byid_opt, ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), @@ -371,11 +371,11 @@ tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { TriggerData *trigdata; Trigger *trigger; - char **tgargs; + char **tgargs; int i; /* Check call context */ - if (!CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo)) /* internal error */ + if (!CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo)) /* internal error */ elog(ERROR, "tsvector_update_trigger: not fired by trigger manager"); trigdata = (TriggerData *) fcinfo->context; @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) tgargs = (char **) palloc((trigger->tgnargs + 1) * sizeof(char *)); tgargs[0] = trigger->tgargs[0]; for (i = 1; i < trigger->tgnargs; i++) - tgargs[i+1] = trigger->tgargs[i]; + tgargs[i + 1] = trigger->tgargs[i]; tgargs[1] = pstrdup(GetConfigOptionByName("default_text_search_config", NULL)); diff --git a/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c b/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c index d711f47207..e1aa8af094 100644 --- a/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c +++ b/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2007 PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c,v 1.3 2007/10/23 21:38:16 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c,v 1.4 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -Datum uuid_nil(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_dns(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_url(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_nil(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_dns(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_url(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v1(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v3(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v5(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v1(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v3(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v5(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(uuid_nil); @@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(uuid_generate_v5); static char * -uuid_to_string(const uuid_t *uuid) +uuid_to_string(const uuid_t * uuid) { - char *buf = palloc(UUID_LEN_STR + 1); - void *ptr = buf; - size_t len = UUID_LEN_STR + 1; + char *buf = palloc(UUID_LEN_STR + 1); + void *ptr = buf; + size_t len = UUID_LEN_STR + 1; uuid_export(uuid, UUID_FMT_STR, &ptr, &len); @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ uuid_to_string(const uuid_t *uuid) static void -string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t *uuid) +string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t * uuid) { uuid_import(uuid, UUID_FMT_STR, str, UUID_LEN_STR + 1); } @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t *uuid) static Datum special_uuid_value(const char *name) { - uuid_t *uuid; - char *str; + uuid_t *uuid; + char *str; uuid_create(&uuid); uuid_load(uuid, name); @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) static Datum -uuid_generate_internal(int mode, const uuid_t *ns, const char *name) +uuid_generate_internal(int mode, const uuid_t * ns, const char *name) { - uuid_t *uuid; - char *str; + uuid_t *uuid; + char *str; uuid_create(&uuid); uuid_make(uuid, mode, ns, name); @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) static Datum -uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t *ns, text *name) +uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t * ns, text *name) { uuid_t *ns_uuid; Datum result; @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t *ns, text *name) result = uuid_generate_internal(mode, ns_uuid, - DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(textout, PointerGetDatum(name)))); + DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(textout, PointerGetDatum(name)))); uuid_destroy(ns_uuid); diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index a6dab8da12..eb8b136cbd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ * without explicitly invoking the toaster. * * This change will break any code that assumes it needn't detoast values - * that have been put into a tuple but never sent to disk. Hopefully there + * that have been put into a tuple but never sent to disk. Hopefully there * are few such places. * * Varlenas still have alignment 'i' (or 'd') in pg_type/pg_attribute, since @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c,v 1.118 2007/11/07 12:24:23 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c,v 1.119 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -99,19 +99,19 @@ heap_compute_data_size(TupleDesc tupleDesc, for (i = 0; i < numberOfAttributes; i++) { - Datum val; + Datum val; if (isnull[i]) continue; val = values[i]; - if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && + if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && VARATT_CAN_MAKE_SHORT(DatumGetPointer(val))) { /* - * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, - * so adjust length and don't count any alignment + * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, so + * adjust length and don't count any alignment */ data_length += VARATT_CONVERTED_SHORT_SIZE(DatumGetPointer(val)); } @@ -147,19 +147,19 @@ ComputeDataSize(TupleDesc tupleDesc, for (i = 0; i < numberOfAttributes; i++) { - Datum val; + Datum val; if (nulls[i] != ' ') continue; val = values[i]; - if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && + if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && VARATT_CAN_MAKE_SHORT(DatumGetPointer(val))) { /* - * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, - * so adjust length and don't count any alignment + * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, so + * adjust length and don't count any alignment */ data_length += VARATT_CONVERTED_SHORT_SIZE(DatumGetPointer(val)); } @@ -195,6 +195,7 @@ heap_fill_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDesc, int i; int numberOfAttributes = tupleDesc->natts; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDesc->attrs; + #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING char *start = data; #endif @@ -238,8 +239,8 @@ heap_fill_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDesc, } /* - * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, - * not on an offset. This is a bit of a hack. + * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, not on + * an offset. This is a bit of a hack. */ if (att[i]->attbyval) @@ -327,6 +328,7 @@ DataFill(TupleDesc tupleDesc, int i; int numberOfAttributes = tupleDesc->natts; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDesc->attrs; + #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING char *start = data; #endif @@ -370,8 +372,8 @@ DataFill(TupleDesc tupleDesc, } /* - * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, - * not on an offset. This is a bit of a hack. + * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, not on + * an offset. This is a bit of a hack. */ if (att[i]->attbyval) @@ -611,8 +613,8 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, /* * Otherwise, check for non-fixed-length attrs up to and including - * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize - * the cached offsets for these attrs. + * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize the + * cached offsets for these attrs. */ if (HeapTupleHasVarWidth(tuple)) { @@ -673,8 +675,8 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, int i; /* - * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we - * still might be able to cache some offsets for next time. + * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we still + * might be able to cache some offsets for next time. * * Note - This loop is a little tricky. For each non-null attribute, * we have to first account for alignment padding before the attr, @@ -683,12 +685,12 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, * attcacheoff until we reach either a null or a var-width attribute. */ off = 0; - for (i = 0; ; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ + for (i = 0;; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ { if (HeapTupleHasNulls(tuple) && att_isnull(i, bp)) { usecache = false; - continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ + continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ } /* If we know the next offset, we can skip the rest */ @@ -697,10 +699,10 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be + * no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for + * either an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (usecache && off == att_align_nominal(off, att[i]->attalign)) @@ -771,11 +773,12 @@ heap_getsysattr(HeapTuple tup, int attnum, TupleDesc tupleDesc, bool *isnull) break; case MinCommandIdAttributeNumber: case MaxCommandIdAttributeNumber: + /* - * cmin and cmax are now both aliases for the same field, - * which can in fact also be a combo command id. XXX perhaps we - * should return the "real" cmin or cmax if possible, that is - * if we are inside the originating transaction? + * cmin and cmax are now both aliases for the same field, which + * can in fact also be a combo command id. XXX perhaps we should + * return the "real" cmin or cmax if possible, that is if we are + * inside the originating transaction? */ result = CommandIdGetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetRawCommandId(tup->t_data)); break; @@ -855,7 +858,8 @@ heap_form_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { HeapTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ HeapTupleHeader td; /* tuple data */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; @@ -965,7 +969,8 @@ heap_formtuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { HeapTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ HeapTupleHeader td; /* tuple data */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; @@ -1263,10 +1268,10 @@ heap_deform_tuple(HeapTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupleDesc, else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1375,10 +1380,10 @@ heap_deformtuple(HeapTuple tuple, else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1484,10 +1489,10 @@ slot_deform_tuple(TupleTableSlot *slot, int natts) else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1791,7 +1796,8 @@ heap_form_minimal_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, bool *isnull) { MinimalTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c index 5412ca0cf3..892363b3a9 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c,v 1.83 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c,v 1.84 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ index_form_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { untoasted_values[i] = PointerGetDatum(heap_tuple_fetch_attr((struct varlena *) - DatumGetPointer(values[i]))); + DatumGetPointer(values[i]))); untoasted_free[i] = true; } @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, /* * Otherwise, check for non-fixed-length attrs up to and including - * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize - * the cached offsets for these attrs. + * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize the + * cached offsets for these attrs. */ if (IndexTupleHasVarwidths(tup)) { @@ -371,8 +371,8 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, int i; /* - * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we - * still might be able to cache some offsets for next time. + * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we still + * might be able to cache some offsets for next time. * * Note - This loop is a little tricky. For each non-null attribute, * we have to first account for alignment padding before the attr, @@ -381,12 +381,12 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, * attcacheoff until we reach either a null or a var-width attribute. */ off = 0; - for (i = 0; ; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ + for (i = 0;; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ { if (IndexTupleHasNulls(tup) && att_isnull(i, bp)) { usecache = false; - continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ + continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ } /* If we know the next offset, we can skip the rest */ @@ -395,10 +395,10 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be + * no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for + * either an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (usecache && off == att_align_nominal(off, att[i]->attalign)) diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c b/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c index 9f40fc59d3..7e4afd70bd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.5 2007/06/03 22:16:02 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ parseRelOptions(Datum options, int numkeywords, const char *const * keywords, if (values[j] && validate) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("parameter \"%s\" specified more than once", - keywords[j]))); + errmsg("parameter \"%s\" specified more than once", + keywords[j]))); value_len = text_len - kw_len - 1; value = (char *) palloc(value_len + 1); memcpy(value, text_str + kw_len + 1, value_len); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c index d608bedb60..430b72a92b 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c,v 1.10 2007/08/21 01:11:12 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -60,17 +60,18 @@ ginarrayextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) elmlen, elmbyval, elmalign, &entries, NULL, (int *) nentries); - if ( *nentries == 0 && PG_NARGS() == 3 ) + if (*nentries == 0 && PG_NARGS() == 3) { - switch( PG_GETARG_UINT16(2) ) /* StrategyNumber */ + switch (PG_GETARG_UINT16(2)) /* StrategyNumber */ { case GinOverlapStrategy: - *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ - break; + *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ + break; case GinContainsStrategy: case GinContainedStrategy: case GinEqualStrategy: - default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void arrays */ + default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void + * arrays */ break; } } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c index 1a711e93c6..a89c384dfc 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c,v 1.9 2007/06/05 12:47:49 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c,v 1.10 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -317,8 +317,8 @@ ginInsertValue(GinBtree btree, GinBtreeStack *stack) Page newlpage; /* - * newlpage is a pointer to memory page, it doesn't associate - * with buffer, stack->buffer should be untouched + * newlpage is a pointer to memory page, it doesn't associate with + * buffer, stack->buffer should be untouched */ newlpage = btree->splitPage(btree, stack->buffer, rbuffer, stack->off, &rdata); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c index d9242c667a..eb6ccfc0b4 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c,v 1.7 2007/06/04 15:56:28 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c,v 1.8 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda static XLogRecData rdata[3]; int sizeofitem = GinSizeOfItem(page); static ginxlogInsert data; - int cnt=0; + int cnt = 0; *prdata = rdata; Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); @@ -373,14 +373,14 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda data.isData = TRUE; data.isLeaf = GinPageIsLeaf(page) ? TRUE : FALSE; - /* - * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed - * to remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL - * - * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right page) - * for recently splited page. + /* + * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed to + * remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL + * + * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right + * page) for recently splited page. */ - if ( data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber ) + if (data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) { rdata[0].buffer = buf; rdata[0].buffer_std = FALSE; @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; rdata[cnt].data = (char *) &data; rdata[cnt].len = sizeof(ginxlogInsert); - rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt+1]; + rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt + 1]; cnt++; rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c index 2c335aea0c..134c5f99dd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.10 2007/10/29 13:49:21 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd static XLogRecData rdata[3]; OffsetNumber placed; static ginxlogInsert data; - int cnt=0; + int cnt = 0; *prdata = rdata; data.updateBlkno = entryPreparePage(btree, page, off); @@ -372,14 +372,14 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd data.isData = false; data.isLeaf = GinPageIsLeaf(page) ? TRUE : FALSE; - /* - * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed - * to remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL + /* + * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed to + * remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL * - * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right page) - * for recently splited page. + * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right + * page) for recently splited page. */ - if ( data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber ) + if (data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) { rdata[0].buffer = buf; rdata[0].buffer_std = TRUE; @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; rdata[cnt].data = (char *) &data; rdata[cnt].len = sizeof(ginxlogInsert); - rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt+1]; + rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt + 1]; cnt++; rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c index 66949f964c..b964f036a0 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.8 2007/06/04 15:56:28 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.9 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -23,29 +23,29 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) OffsetNumber maxoff = GinPageGetOpaque(page)->maxoff; int res; - if ( GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags & GIN_DELETED ) + if (GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags & GIN_DELETED) /* page was deleted by concurrent vacuum */ return false; - if ( *off > maxoff || *off == InvalidOffsetNumber ) + if (*off > maxoff || *off == InvalidOffsetNumber) res = -1; else res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); - if ( res == 0 ) + if (res == 0) { /* page isn't changed */ - return true; - } - else if ( res > 0 ) + return true; + } + else if (res > 0) { - /* - * some items was added before our position, look further to find - * it or first greater + /* + * some items was added before our position, look further to find it + * or first greater */ - + (*off)++; - for (; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) + for (; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) { res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) return true; if (res < 0) - { + { (*off)--; return true; } @@ -61,20 +61,20 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) } else { - /* - * some items was deleted before our position, look from begining - * to find it or first greater + /* + * some items was deleted before our position, look from begining to + * find it or first greater */ - for(*off = FirstOffsetNumber; *off<= maxoff; (*off)++) + for (*off = FirstOffsetNumber; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) { res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); - if ( res == 0 ) + if (res == 0) return true; if (res < 0) - { + { (*off)--; return true; } @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ startScanEntry(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry, bool firs page = BufferGetPage(entry->buffer); /* try to find curItem in current buffer */ - if ( findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset) ) + if (findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset)) return; /* walk to right */ @@ -186,13 +186,13 @@ startScanEntry(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry, bool firs page = BufferGetPage(entry->buffer); entry->offset = InvalidOffsetNumber; - if ( findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset) ) + if (findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset)) return; } /* - * curItem and any greated items was deleted by concurrent vacuum, - * so we finished scan with currrent entry + * curItem and any greated items was deleted by concurrent vacuum, so + * we finished scan with currrent entry */ } } @@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ startScanKey(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanKey key) if (GinFuzzySearchLimit > 0) { /* - * If all of keys more than threshold we will try to reduce result, - * we hope (and only hope, for intersection operation of array our - * supposition isn't true), that total result will not more than - * minimal predictNumberResult. + * If all of keys more than threshold we will try to reduce + * result, we hope (and only hope, for intersection operation of + * array our supposition isn't true), that total result will not + * more than minimal predictNumberResult. */ for (i = 0; i < key->nentries; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c index 2eb1ba95b4..2e40f8b8d8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c,v 1.10 2007/05/27 03:50:38 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ newScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) UInt16GetDatum(scankey[i].sk_strategy) ) ); - if ( nEntryValues < 0 ) + if (nEntryValues < 0) { /* - * extractQueryFn signals that nothing will be found, - * so we can just set isVoidRes flag... + * extractQueryFn signals that nothing will be found, so we can + * just set isVoidRes flag... */ - so->isVoidRes = true; + so->isVoidRes = true; break; } if (entryValues == NULL || nEntryValues == 0) @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ newScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) if (so->nkeys == 0 && !so->isVoidRes) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("GIN index does not support search with void query"))); + errmsg("GIN index does not support search with void query"))); pgstat_count_index_scan(scan->indexRelation); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c index e704e8051e..488a58beb5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c,v 1.10 2007/01/31 15:09:45 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -126,17 +126,17 @@ compareEntries(GinState *ginstate, Datum a, Datum b) &ginstate->compareFn, a, b ) - ); + ); } typedef struct { FmgrInfo *cmpDatumFunc; bool *needUnique; -} cmpEntriesData; +} cmpEntriesData; static int -cmpEntries(const Datum *a, const Datum *b, cmpEntriesData *arg) +cmpEntries(const Datum *a, const Datum *b, cmpEntriesData * arg) { int res = DatumGetInt32(FunctionCall2(arg->cmpDatumFunc, *a, *b)); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c index 1f26869d64..9c0482a890 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c,v 1.17 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c,v 1.18 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ typedef struct IndexBulkDeleteCallback callback; void *callback_state; GinState ginstate; - BufferAccessStrategy strategy; + BufferAccessStrategy strategy; } GinVacuumState; @@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ ginVacuumPostingTreeLeaves(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber blkno, bool isRoot, /* * We should be sure that we don't concurrent with inserts, insert process * never release root page until end (but it can unlock it and lock - * again). New scan can't start but previously started - * ones work concurrently. + * again). New scan can't start but previously started ones work + * concurrently. */ - if ( isRoot ) + if (isRoot) LockBufferForCleanup(buffer); else - LockBuffer(buffer, GIN_EXCLUSIVE); + LockBuffer(buffer, GIN_EXCLUSIVE); Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); @@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ ginDeletePage(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber deleteBlkno, BlockNumber leftBlkn BlockNumber parentBlkno, OffsetNumber myoff, bool isParentRoot) { Buffer dBuffer = ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, deleteBlkno, gvs->strategy); - Buffer lBuffer = (leftBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) ? - InvalidBuffer : ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, leftBlkno, gvs->strategy); + Buffer lBuffer = (leftBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) ? + InvalidBuffer : ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, leftBlkno, gvs->strategy); Buffer pBuffer = ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, parentBlkno, gvs->strategy); Page page, parentPage; @@ -268,17 +268,20 @@ ginDeletePage(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber deleteBlkno, BlockNumber leftBlkn parentPage = BufferGetPage(pBuffer); #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING - do { - PostingItem *tod=(PostingItem *) GinDataPageGetItem(parentPage, myoff); - Assert( PostingItemGetBlockNumber(tod) == deleteBlkno ); - } while(0); + do + { + PostingItem *tod = (PostingItem *) GinDataPageGetItem(parentPage, myoff); + + Assert(PostingItemGetBlockNumber(tod) == deleteBlkno); + } while (0); #endif PageDeletePostingItem(parentPage, myoff); page = BufferGetPage(dBuffer); + /* - * we shouldn't change rightlink field to save - * workability of running search scan + * we shouldn't change rightlink field to save workability of running + * search scan */ GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags = GIN_DELETED; @@ -363,8 +366,8 @@ typedef struct DataPageDeleteStack struct DataPageDeleteStack *child; struct DataPageDeleteStack *parent; - BlockNumber blkno; /* current block number */ - BlockNumber leftBlkno; /* rightest non-deleted page on left */ + BlockNumber blkno; /* current block number */ + BlockNumber leftBlkno; /* rightest non-deleted page on left */ bool isRoot; } DataPageDeleteStack; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c index 79fbb496b5..7649e4c900 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c,v 1.10 2007/10/29 19:26:57 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) Assert(data->isDelete == FALSE); Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { if (data->isLeaf) { @@ -170,6 +170,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (!data->isLeaf && data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) { PostingItem *pitem = (PostingItem *) (XLogRecGetData(record) + sizeof(ginxlogInsert)); + forgetIncompleteSplit(data->node, PostingItemGetBlockNumber(pitem), data->updateBlkno); } @@ -180,7 +181,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) Assert(!GinPageIsData(page)); - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { if (data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) { @@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (PageAddItem(page, (Item) itup, IndexTupleSize(itup), data->offset, false, false) == InvalidOffsetNumber) elog(ERROR, "failed to add item to index page in %u/%u/%u", - data->node.spcNode, data->node.dbNode, data->node.relNode); + data->node.spcNode, data->node.dbNode, data->node.relNode); } if (!data->isLeaf && data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) @@ -212,7 +213,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) } } - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { PageSetLSN(page, lsn); PageSetTLI(page, ThisTimeLineID); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c index 0c1b94d7d3..770c2023bd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c,v 1.147 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c,v 1.148 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -360,8 +360,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate) ptr->block.blkno = BufferGetBlockNumber(ptr->buffer); /* - * fill page, we can do it because all these pages are new - * (ie not linked in tree or masked by temp page + * fill page, we can do it because all these pages are new (ie not + * linked in tree or masked by temp page */ data = (char *) (ptr->list); for (i = 0; i < ptr->block.num; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c index ba7a8ab959..cb1919ac6e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.67 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.68 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -383,13 +383,12 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexTuple tuple, /* * On non-leaf page we can't conclude that child hasn't NULL * values because of assumption in GiST: uinon (VAL, NULL) is VAL - * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL then all childs - * has NULL. + * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL then all childs has NULL. */ - Assert( key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL ); + Assert(key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL); - if ( GistPageIsLeaf(p) && !isNull ) + if (GistPageIsLeaf(p) && !isNull) return false; } else if (isNull) @@ -404,12 +403,14 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexTuple tuple, FALSE, isNull); /* - * Call the Consistent function to evaluate the test. The arguments - * are the index datum (as a GISTENTRY*), the comparison datum, and - * the comparison operator's strategy number and subtype from pg_amop. + * Call the Consistent function to evaluate the test. The + * arguments are the index datum (as a GISTENTRY*), the comparison + * datum, and the comparison operator's strategy number and + * subtype from pg_amop. * - * (Presently there's no need to pass the subtype since it'll always - * be zero, but might as well pass it for possible future use.) + * (Presently there's no need to pass the subtype since it'll + * always be zero, but might as well pass it for possible future + * use.) */ test = FunctionCall4(&key->sk_func, PointerGetDatum(&de), diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c index 590be9133f..e461b5923d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.11 2007/09/07 17:04:26 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.12 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -394,20 +394,22 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ADDLIST(listT, unionT, posT, i); } -#define LIMIT_RATIO 0.1 +#define LIMIT_RATIO 0.1 #define _IS_BADRATIO(x,y) ( (y) == 0 || (float)(x)/(float)(y) < LIMIT_RATIO ) #define IS_BADRATIO(x,y) ( _IS_BADRATIO((x),(y)) || _IS_BADRATIO((y),(x)) ) /* bad disposition, try to split by centers of boxes */ - if ( IS_BADRATIO(posR, posL) && IS_BADRATIO(posT, posB) ) + if (IS_BADRATIO(posR, posL) && IS_BADRATIO(posT, posB)) { - double avgCenterX=0.0, avgCenterY=0.0; - double CenterX, CenterY; + double avgCenterX = 0.0, + avgCenterY = 0.0; + double CenterX, + CenterY; for (i = FirstOffsetNumber; i <= maxoff; i = OffsetNumberNext(i)) { cur = DatumGetBoxP(entryvec->vector[i].key); - avgCenterX += ((double)cur->high.x + (double)cur->low.x)/2.0; - avgCenterY += ((double)cur->high.y + (double)cur->low.y)/2.0; + avgCenterX += ((double) cur->high.x + (double) cur->low.x) / 2.0; + avgCenterY += ((double) cur->high.y + (double) cur->low.y) / 2.0; } avgCenterX /= maxoff; @@ -417,11 +419,11 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) for (i = FirstOffsetNumber; i <= maxoff; i = OffsetNumberNext(i)) { cur = DatumGetBoxP(entryvec->vector[i].key); - - CenterX = ((double)cur->high.x + (double)cur->low.x)/2.0; - CenterY = ((double)cur->high.y + (double)cur->low.y)/2.0; - if (CenterX < avgCenterX) + CenterX = ((double) cur->high.x + (double) cur->low.x) / 2.0; + CenterY = ((double) cur->high.y + (double) cur->low.y) / 2.0; + + if (CenterX < avgCenterX) ADDLIST(listL, unionL, posL, i); else if (CenterX == avgCenterX) { @@ -442,7 +444,7 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) else ADDLIST(listB, unionB, posB, i); } - else + else ADDLIST(listT, unionT, posT, i); } } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c index 212995e7c5..dace2c8906 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c,v 1.32 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c,v 1.33 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ typedef struct Relation index; MemoryContext opCtx; GistBulkDeleteResult *result; - BufferAccessStrategy strategy; + BufferAccessStrategy strategy; } GistVacuum; typedef struct diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c index d3f54c934b..5933b02e8e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.96 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.97 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * This file contains only the public interface routines. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ loop_top: vacuum_delay_point(); buf = _hash_getbuf_with_strategy(rel, blkno, HASH_WRITE, - LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, + LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, info->strategy); page = BufferGetPage(buf); opaque = (HashPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(page); diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c index 71fe34c8a2..4d1b1ed45c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c,v 1.53 2007/09/21 22:52:52 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c,v 1.54 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * These functions are stored in pg_amproc. For each operator class @@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ hashfloat4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * To support cross-type hashing of float8 and float4, we want to return * the same hash value hashfloat8 would produce for an equal float8 value. * So, widen the value to float8 and hash that. (We must do this rather - * than have hashfloat8 try to narrow its value to float4; that could - * fail on overflow.) + * than have hashfloat8 try to narrow its value to float4; that could fail + * on overflow.) */ key8 = key; diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c index e4ea24a62d..c510c6e65b 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.60 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.61 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Overflow pages look like ordinary relation pages. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ _hash_addovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf, Buffer buf) /* * _hash_getovflpage() * - * Find an available overflow page and return it. The returned buffer + * Find an available overflow page and return it. The returned buffer * is pinned and write-locked, and has had _hash_pageinit() applied, * but it is caller's responsibility to fill the special space. * @@ -402,9 +402,9 @@ _hash_freeovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer ovflbuf, bucket = ovflopaque->hasho_bucket; /* - * Zero the page for debugging's sake; then write and release it. - * (Note: if we failed to zero the page here, we'd have problems - * with the Assert in _hash_pageinit() when the page is reused.) + * Zero the page for debugging's sake; then write and release it. (Note: + * if we failed to zero the page here, we'd have problems with the Assert + * in _hash_pageinit() when the page is reused.) */ MemSet(ovflpage, 0, BufferGetPageSize(ovflbuf)); _hash_wrtbuf(rel, ovflbuf); @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ _hash_freeovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer ovflbuf, Buffer prevbuf = _hash_getbuf_with_strategy(rel, prevblkno, HASH_WRITE, - LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, + LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, bstrategy); Page prevpage = BufferGetPage(prevbuf); HashPageOpaque prevopaque = (HashPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(prevpage); diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c index 807dbed8a8..07f27001a8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.70 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.71 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Postgres hash pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ static bool _hash_alloc_buckets(Relation rel, BlockNumber firstblock, - uint32 nblocks); + uint32 nblocks); static void _hash_splitbucket(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf, Bucket obucket, Bucket nbucket, BlockNumber start_oblkno, @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ _hash_getbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno, int access, int flags) * * This must be used only to fetch pages that are known to be before * the index's filesystem EOF, but are to be filled from scratch. - * _hash_pageinit() is applied automatically. Otherwise it has + * _hash_pageinit() is applied automatically. Otherwise it has * effects similar to _hash_getbuf() with access = HASH_WRITE. * * When this routine returns, a write lock is set on the @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ _hash_getinitbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno) Buffer _hash_getnewbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno) { - BlockNumber nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel); + BlockNumber nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel); Buffer buf; if (blkno == P_NEW) @@ -354,10 +354,10 @@ _hash_metapinit(Relation rel) ffactor = 10; /* - * We initialize the metapage, the first two bucket pages, and the - * first bitmap page in sequence, using _hash_getnewbuf to cause - * smgrextend() calls to occur. This ensures that the smgr level - * has the right idea of the physical index length. + * We initialize the metapage, the first two bucket pages, and the first + * bitmap page in sequence, using _hash_getnewbuf to cause smgrextend() + * calls to occur. This ensures that the smgr level has the right idea of + * the physical index length. */ metabuf = _hash_getnewbuf(rel, HASH_METAPAGE); pg = BufferGetPage(metabuf); @@ -501,15 +501,16 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) goto fail; /* - * Can't split anymore if maxbucket has reached its maximum possible value. + * Can't split anymore if maxbucket has reached its maximum possible + * value. * * Ideally we'd allow bucket numbers up to UINT_MAX-1 (no higher because * the calculation maxbucket+1 mustn't overflow). Currently we restrict * to half that because of overflow looping in _hash_log2() and * insufficient space in hashm_spares[]. It's moot anyway because an - * index with 2^32 buckets would certainly overflow BlockNumber and - * hence _hash_alloc_buckets() would fail, but if we supported buckets - * smaller than a disk block then this would be an independent constraint. + * index with 2^32 buckets would certainly overflow BlockNumber and hence + * _hash_alloc_buckets() would fail, but if we supported buckets smaller + * than a disk block then this would be an independent constraint. */ if (metap->hashm_maxbucket >= (uint32) 0x7FFFFFFE) goto fail; @@ -536,10 +537,10 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) /* * Likewise lock the new bucket (should never fail). * - * Note: it is safe to compute the new bucket's blkno here, even though - * we may still need to update the BUCKET_TO_BLKNO mapping. This is - * because the current value of hashm_spares[hashm_ovflpoint] correctly - * shows where we are going to put a new splitpoint's worth of buckets. + * Note: it is safe to compute the new bucket's blkno here, even though we + * may still need to update the BUCKET_TO_BLKNO mapping. This is because + * the current value of hashm_spares[hashm_ovflpoint] correctly shows + * where we are going to put a new splitpoint's worth of buckets. */ start_nblkno = BUCKET_TO_BLKNO(metap, new_bucket); @@ -557,11 +558,12 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) if (spare_ndx > metap->hashm_ovflpoint) { Assert(spare_ndx == metap->hashm_ovflpoint + 1); + /* - * The number of buckets in the new splitpoint is equal to the - * total number already in existence, i.e. new_bucket. Currently - * this maps one-to-one to blocks required, but someday we may need - * a more complicated calculation here. + * The number of buckets in the new splitpoint is equal to the total + * number already in existence, i.e. new_bucket. Currently this maps + * one-to-one to blocks required, but someday we may need a more + * complicated calculation here. */ if (!_hash_alloc_buckets(rel, start_nblkno, new_bucket)) { @@ -673,14 +675,14 @@ fail: static bool _hash_alloc_buckets(Relation rel, BlockNumber firstblock, uint32 nblocks) { - BlockNumber lastblock; + BlockNumber lastblock; char zerobuf[BLCKSZ]; lastblock = firstblock + nblocks - 1; /* - * Check for overflow in block number calculation; if so, we cannot - * extend the index anymore. + * Check for overflow in block number calculation; if so, we cannot extend + * the index anymore. */ if (lastblock < firstblock || lastblock == InvalidBlockNumber) return false; diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c index 052393fc6b..20027592b5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.244 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.245 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ static HeapScanDesc heap_beginscan_internal(Relation relation, - Snapshot snapshot, - int nkeys, ScanKey key, - bool is_bitmapscan); + Snapshot snapshot, + int nkeys, ScanKey key, + bool is_bitmapscan); static XLogRecPtr log_heap_update(Relation reln, Buffer oldbuf, ItemPointerData from, Buffer newbuf, HeapTuple newtup, bool move); static bool HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(Relation relation, Bitmapset *hot_attrs, @@ -85,18 +85,18 @@ initscan(HeapScanDesc scan, ScanKey key) * Determine the number of blocks we have to scan. * * It is sufficient to do this once at scan start, since any tuples added - * while the scan is in progress will be invisible to my snapshot - * anyway. (That is not true when using a non-MVCC snapshot. However, - * we couldn't guarantee to return tuples added after scan start anyway, - * since they might go into pages we already scanned. To guarantee - * consistent results for a non-MVCC snapshot, the caller must hold some - * higher-level lock that ensures the interesting tuple(s) won't change.) + * while the scan is in progress will be invisible to my snapshot anyway. + * (That is not true when using a non-MVCC snapshot. However, we couldn't + * guarantee to return tuples added after scan start anyway, since they + * might go into pages we already scanned. To guarantee consistent + * results for a non-MVCC snapshot, the caller must hold some higher-level + * lock that ensures the interesting tuple(s) won't change.) */ scan->rs_nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(scan->rs_rd); /* * If the table is large relative to NBuffers, use a bulk-read access - * strategy and enable synchronized scanning (see syncscan.c). Although + * strategy and enable synchronized scanning (see syncscan.c). Although * the thresholds for these features could be different, we make them the * same so that there are only two behaviors to tune rather than four. * @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ initscan(HeapScanDesc scan, ScanKey key) memcpy(scan->rs_key, key, scan->rs_nkeys * sizeof(ScanKeyData)); /* - * Currently, we don't have a stats counter for bitmap heap scans - * (but the underlying bitmap index scans will be counted). + * Currently, we don't have a stats counter for bitmap heap scans (but the + * underlying bitmap index scans will be counted). */ if (!scan->rs_bitmapscan) pgstat_count_heap_scan(scan->rs_rd); @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } - page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ + page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ heapgetpage(scan, page); lineoff = FirstOffsetNumber; /* first offnum */ scan->rs_inited = true; @@ -317,6 +317,7 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } + /* * Disable reporting to syncscan logic in a backwards scan; it's * not very likely anyone else is doing the same thing at the same @@ -459,9 +460,9 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, finished = (page == scan->rs_startblock); /* - * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. - * We don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would - * just mess up any other forward-moving scanners. + * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. We + * don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would just + * mess up any other forward-moving scanners. * * Note: we do this before checking for end of scan so that the * final state of the position hint is back at the start of the @@ -554,7 +555,7 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } - page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ + page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ heapgetpage(scan, page); lineindex = 0; scan->rs_inited = true; @@ -585,6 +586,7 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } + /* * Disable reporting to syncscan logic in a backwards scan; it's * not very likely anyone else is doing the same thing at the same @@ -719,9 +721,9 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, finished = (page == scan->rs_startblock); /* - * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. - * We don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would - * just mess up any other forward-moving scanners. + * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. We + * don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would just + * mess up any other forward-moving scanners. * * Note: we do this before checking for end of scan so that the * final state of the position hint is back at the start of the @@ -1057,7 +1059,7 @@ heap_openrv(const RangeVar *relation, LOCKMODE lockmode) * heap_beginscan - begin relation scan * * heap_beginscan_bm is an alternative entry point for setting up a HeapScanDesc - * for a bitmap heap scan. Although that scan technology is really quite + * for a bitmap heap scan. Although that scan technology is really quite * unlike a standard seqscan, there is just enough commonality to make it * worth using the same data structure. * ---------------- @@ -1423,10 +1425,10 @@ bool heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, bool *all_dead) { - Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); TransactionId prev_xmax = InvalidTransactionId; OffsetNumber offnum; - bool at_chain_start; + bool at_chain_start; if (all_dead) *all_dead = true; @@ -1438,7 +1440,7 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, /* Scan through possible multiple members of HOT-chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; + ItemId lp; HeapTupleData heapTuple; /* check for bogus TID */ @@ -1472,7 +1474,8 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, break; /* - * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is broken. + * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is + * broken. */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(prev_xmax) && !TransactionIdEquals(prev_xmax, @@ -1499,8 +1502,8 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, *all_dead = false; /* - * Check to see if HOT chain continues past this tuple; if so - * fetch the next offnum and loop around. + * Check to see if HOT chain continues past this tuple; if so fetch + * the next offnum and loop around. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&heapTuple)) { @@ -1511,7 +1514,7 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, prev_xmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple.t_data); } else - break; /* end of chain */ + break; /* end of chain */ } return false; @@ -1528,8 +1531,8 @@ bool heap_hot_search(ItemPointer tid, Relation relation, Snapshot snapshot, bool *all_dead) { - bool result; - Buffer buffer; + bool result; + Buffer buffer; buffer = ReadBuffer(relation, ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(tid)); LockBuffer(buffer, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); @@ -1665,7 +1668,7 @@ heap_get_latest_tid(Relation relation, * * This is called after we have waited for the XMAX transaction to terminate. * If the transaction aborted, we guarantee the XMAX_INVALID hint bit will - * be set on exit. If the transaction committed, we set the XMAX_COMMITTED + * be set on exit. If the transaction committed, we set the XMAX_COMMITTED * hint bit if possible --- but beware that that may not yet be possible, * if the transaction committed asynchronously. Hence callers should look * only at XMAX_INVALID. @@ -2069,7 +2072,7 @@ l1: /* * If this transaction commits, the tuple will become DEAD sooner or * later. Set flag that this page is a candidate for pruning once our xid - * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, + * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, * the subsequent page pruning will be a no-op and the hint will be * cleared. */ @@ -2252,15 +2255,15 @@ heap_update(Relation relation, ItemPointer otid, HeapTuple newtup, /* * Fetch the list of attributes to be checked for HOT update. This is - * wasted effort if we fail to update or have to put the new tuple on - * a different page. But we must compute the list before obtaining - * buffer lock --- in the worst case, if we are doing an update on one - * of the relevant system catalogs, we could deadlock if we try to - * fetch the list later. In any case, the relcache caches the data - * so this is usually pretty cheap. + * wasted effort if we fail to update or have to put the new tuple on a + * different page. But we must compute the list before obtaining buffer + * lock --- in the worst case, if we are doing an update on one of the + * relevant system catalogs, we could deadlock if we try to fetch the list + * later. In any case, the relcache caches the data so this is usually + * pretty cheap. * - * Note that we get a copy here, so we need not worry about relcache - * flush happening midway through. + * Note that we get a copy here, so we need not worry about relcache flush + * happening midway through. */ hot_attrs = RelationGetIndexAttrBitmap(relation); @@ -2555,7 +2558,7 @@ l2: { /* * Since the new tuple is going into the same page, we might be able - * to do a HOT update. Check if any of the index columns have been + * to do a HOT update. Check if any of the index columns have been * changed. If not, then HOT update is possible. */ if (HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(relation, hot_attrs, &oldtup, heaptup)) @@ -2573,14 +2576,14 @@ l2: /* * If this transaction commits, the old tuple will become DEAD sooner or * later. Set flag that this page is a candidate for pruning once our xid - * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, + * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, * the subsequent page pruning will be a no-op and the hint will be * cleared. * - * XXX Should we set hint on newbuf as well? If the transaction - * aborts, there would be a prunable tuple in the newbuf; but for now - * we choose not to optimize for aborts. Note that heap_xlog_update - * must be kept in sync if this decision changes. + * XXX Should we set hint on newbuf as well? If the transaction aborts, + * there would be a prunable tuple in the newbuf; but for now we choose + * not to optimize for aborts. Note that heap_xlog_update must be kept in + * sync if this decision changes. */ PageSetPrunable(dp, xid); @@ -2695,22 +2698,24 @@ static bool heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, HeapTuple tup1, HeapTuple tup2) { - Datum value1, value2; - bool isnull1, isnull2; + Datum value1, + value2; + bool isnull1, + isnull2; Form_pg_attribute att; /* * If it's a whole-tuple reference, say "not equal". It's not really - * worth supporting this case, since it could only succeed after a - * no-op update, which is hardly a case worth optimizing for. + * worth supporting this case, since it could only succeed after a no-op + * update, which is hardly a case worth optimizing for. */ if (attrnum == 0) return false; /* - * Likewise, automatically say "not equal" for any system attribute - * other than OID and tableOID; we cannot expect these to be consistent - * in a HOT chain, or even to be set correctly yet in the new tuple. + * Likewise, automatically say "not equal" for any system attribute other + * than OID and tableOID; we cannot expect these to be consistent in a HOT + * chain, or even to be set correctly yet in the new tuple. */ if (attrnum < 0) { @@ -2720,17 +2725,17 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, } /* - * Extract the corresponding values. XXX this is pretty inefficient - * if there are many indexed columns. Should HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate - * do a single heap_deform_tuple call on each tuple, instead? But - * that doesn't work for system columns ... + * Extract the corresponding values. XXX this is pretty inefficient if + * there are many indexed columns. Should HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate do a + * single heap_deform_tuple call on each tuple, instead? But that doesn't + * work for system columns ... */ value1 = heap_getattr(tup1, attrnum, tupdesc, &isnull1); value2 = heap_getattr(tup2, attrnum, tupdesc, &isnull2); /* - * If one value is NULL and other is not, then they are certainly - * not equal + * If one value is NULL and other is not, then they are certainly not + * equal */ if (isnull1 != isnull2) return false; @@ -2744,7 +2749,7 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, /* * We do simple binary comparison of the two datums. This may be overly * strict because there can be multiple binary representations for the - * same logical value. But we should be OK as long as there are no false + * same logical value. But we should be OK as long as there are no false * positives. Using a type-specific equality operator is messy because * there could be multiple notions of equality in different operator * classes; furthermore, we cannot safely invoke user-defined functions @@ -2758,7 +2763,7 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, else { Assert(attrnum <= tupdesc->natts); - att = tupdesc->attrs[attrnum - 1]; + att = tupdesc->attrs[attrnum - 1]; return datumIsEqual(value1, value2, att->attbyval, att->attlen); } } @@ -2779,7 +2784,7 @@ static bool HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(Relation relation, Bitmapset *hot_attrs, HeapTuple oldtup, HeapTuple newtup) { - int attrnum; + int attrnum; while ((attrnum = bms_first_member(hot_attrs)) >= 0) { @@ -3094,15 +3099,15 @@ l3: } /* - * We might already hold the desired lock (or stronger), possibly under - * a different subtransaction of the current top transaction. If so, - * there is no need to change state or issue a WAL record. We already - * handled the case where this is true for xmax being a MultiXactId, - * so now check for cases where it is a plain TransactionId. + * We might already hold the desired lock (or stronger), possibly under a + * different subtransaction of the current top transaction. If so, there + * is no need to change state or issue a WAL record. We already handled + * the case where this is true for xmax being a MultiXactId, so now check + * for cases where it is a plain TransactionId. * * Note in particular that this covers the case where we already hold - * exclusive lock on the tuple and the caller only wants shared lock. - * It would certainly not do to give up the exclusive lock. + * exclusive lock on the tuple and the caller only wants shared lock. It + * would certainly not do to give up the exclusive lock. */ xmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data); old_infomask = tuple->t_data->t_infomask; @@ -3179,8 +3184,8 @@ l3: { /* * If the XMAX is a valid TransactionId, then we need to - * create a new MultiXactId that includes both the old - * locker and our own TransactionId. + * create a new MultiXactId that includes both the old locker + * and our own TransactionId. */ xid = MultiXactIdCreate(xmax, xid); new_infomask |= HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI; @@ -3214,8 +3219,8 @@ l3: /* * Store transaction information of xact locking the tuple. * - * Note: Cmax is meaningless in this context, so don't set it; this - * avoids possibly generating a useless combo CID. + * Note: Cmax is meaningless in this context, so don't set it; this avoids + * possibly generating a useless combo CID. */ tuple->t_data->t_infomask = new_infomask; HeapTupleHeaderClearHotUpdated(tuple->t_data); @@ -3425,6 +3430,7 @@ heap_freeze_tuple(HeapTupleHeader tuple, TransactionId cutoff_xid, buf = InvalidBuffer; } HeapTupleHeaderSetXmin(tuple, FrozenTransactionId); + /* * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED will * already be set here, but there's a small chance not. @@ -3437,9 +3443,9 @@ heap_freeze_tuple(HeapTupleHeader tuple, TransactionId cutoff_xid, /* * When we release shared lock, it's possible for someone else to change * xmax before we get the lock back, so repeat the check after acquiring - * exclusive lock. (We don't need this pushup for xmin, because only - * VACUUM could be interested in changing an existing tuple's xmin, - * and there's only one VACUUM allowed on a table at a time.) + * exclusive lock. (We don't need this pushup for xmin, because only + * VACUUM could be interested in changing an existing tuple's xmin, and + * there's only one VACUUM allowed on a table at a time.) */ recheck_xmax: if (!(tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)) @@ -3454,13 +3460,14 @@ recheck_xmax: LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE); buf = InvalidBuffer; - goto recheck_xmax; /* see comment above */ + goto recheck_xmax; /* see comment above */ } HeapTupleHeaderSetXmax(tuple, InvalidTransactionId); + /* - * The tuple might be marked either XMAX_INVALID or - * XMAX_COMMITTED + LOCKED. Normalize to INVALID just to be - * sure no one gets confused. + * The tuple might be marked either XMAX_INVALID or XMAX_COMMITTED + * + LOCKED. Normalize to INVALID just to be sure no one gets + * confused. */ tuple->t_infomask &= ~HEAP_XMAX_COMMITTED; tuple->t_infomask |= HEAP_XMAX_INVALID; @@ -3506,8 +3513,9 @@ recheck_xvac: LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE); buf = InvalidBuffer; - goto recheck_xvac; /* see comment above */ + goto recheck_xvac; /* see comment above */ } + /* * If a MOVED_OFF tuple is not dead, the xvac transaction must * have failed; whereas a non-dead MOVED_IN tuple must mean the @@ -3517,9 +3525,10 @@ recheck_xvac: HeapTupleHeaderSetXvac(tuple, InvalidTransactionId); else HeapTupleHeaderSetXvac(tuple, FrozenTransactionId); + /* - * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED will - * already be set here, but there's a small chance not. + * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED + * will already be set here, but there's a small chance not. */ Assert(!(tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_INVALID)); tuple->t_infomask |= HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED; @@ -3632,8 +3641,8 @@ log_heap_clean(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, /* * The OffsetNumber arrays are not actually in the buffer, but we pretend * that they are. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offset - * arrays need not be stored too. Note that even if all three arrays - * are empty, we want to expose the buffer as a candidate for whole-page + * arrays need not be stored too. Note that even if all three arrays are + * empty, we want to expose the buffer as a candidate for whole-page * storage, since this record type implies a defragmentation operation * even if no item pointers changed state. */ @@ -3686,7 +3695,7 @@ log_heap_clean(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, } /* - * Perform XLogInsert for a heap-freeze operation. Caller must already + * Perform XLogInsert for a heap-freeze operation. Caller must already * have modified the buffer and marked it dirty. */ XLogRecPtr @@ -3711,9 +3720,9 @@ log_heap_freeze(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, rdata[0].next = &(rdata[1]); /* - * The tuple-offsets array is not actually in the buffer, but pretend - * that it is. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offsets array - * need not be stored too. + * The tuple-offsets array is not actually in the buffer, but pretend that + * it is. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offsets array need + * not be stored too. */ if (offcnt > 0) { @@ -3853,7 +3862,7 @@ log_heap_move(Relation reln, Buffer oldbuf, ItemPointerData from, * for writing the page to disk after calling this routine. * * Note: all current callers build pages in private memory and write them - * directly to smgr, rather than using bufmgr. Therefore there is no need + * directly to smgr, rather than using bufmgr. Therefore there is no need * to pass a buffer ID to XLogInsert, nor to perform MarkBufferDirty within * the critical section. * @@ -3905,9 +3914,9 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) Page page; OffsetNumber *offnum; OffsetNumber *end; - int nredirected; - int ndead; - int i; + int nredirected; + int ndead; + int i; if (record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_1) return; @@ -3934,12 +3943,12 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) { OffsetNumber fromoff = *offnum++; OffsetNumber tooff = *offnum++; - ItemId fromlp = PageGetItemId(page, fromoff); + ItemId fromlp = PageGetItemId(page, fromoff); if (clean_move) { /* Physically move the "to" item to the "from" slot */ - ItemId tolp = PageGetItemId(page, tooff); + ItemId tolp = PageGetItemId(page, tooff); HeapTupleHeader htup; *fromlp = *tolp; @@ -3962,7 +3971,7 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) for (i = 0; i < ndead; i++) { OffsetNumber off = *offnum++; - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); ItemIdSetDead(lp); } @@ -3971,14 +3980,14 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) while (offnum < end) { OffsetNumber off = *offnum++; - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); ItemIdSetUnused(lp); } /* - * Finally, repair any fragmentation, and update the page's hint bit - * about whether it has free pointers. + * Finally, repair any fragmentation, and update the page's hint bit about + * whether it has free pointers. */ PageRepairFragmentation(page); @@ -4617,7 +4626,7 @@ heap_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) { xl_heap_update *xlrec = (xl_heap_update *) rec; - if (xl_info & XLOG_HEAP_INIT_PAGE) /* can this case happen? */ + if (xl_info & XLOG_HEAP_INIT_PAGE) /* can this case happen? */ appendStringInfo(buf, "hot_update(init): "); else appendStringInfo(buf, "hot_update: "); @@ -4724,7 +4733,7 @@ heap_sync(Relation rel) /* toast heap, if any */ if (OidIsValid(rel->rd_rel->reltoastrelid)) { - Relation toastrel; + Relation toastrel; toastrel = heap_open(rel->rd_rel->reltoastrelid, AccessShareLock); FlushRelationBuffers(toastrel); diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c index 9723241547..067b23f24c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.3 2007/10/24 13:05:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.4 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -22,21 +22,21 @@ /* Local functions */ -static int heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, - OffsetNumber rootoffnum, - TransactionId OldestXmin, - OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, - OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, - bool redirect_move); +static int heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, + OffsetNumber rootoffnum, + TransactionId OldestXmin, + OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, + OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, + OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, + bool redirect_move); static void heap_prune_record_redirect(OffsetNumber *redirected, - int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber offnum, - OffsetNumber rdoffnum); + int *nredirected, + OffsetNumber offnum, + OffsetNumber rdoffnum); static void heap_prune_record_dead(OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, - OffsetNumber offnum); + OffsetNumber offnum); static void heap_prune_record_unused(OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, - OffsetNumber offnum); + OffsetNumber offnum); /* @@ -70,16 +70,16 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) return; /* - * We prune when a previous UPDATE failed to find enough space on the - * page for a new tuple version, or when free space falls below the - * relation's fill-factor target (but not less than 10%). + * We prune when a previous UPDATE failed to find enough space on the page + * for a new tuple version, or when free space falls below the relation's + * fill-factor target (but not less than 10%). * - * Checking free space here is questionable since we aren't holding - * any lock on the buffer; in the worst case we could get a bogus - * answer. It's unlikely to be *seriously* wrong, though, since - * reading either pd_lower or pd_upper is probably atomic. Avoiding - * taking a lock seems better than sometimes getting a wrong answer - * in what is after all just a heuristic estimate. + * Checking free space here is questionable since we aren't holding any + * lock on the buffer; in the worst case we could get a bogus answer. + * It's unlikely to be *seriously* wrong, though, since reading either + * pd_lower or pd_upper is probably atomic. Avoiding taking a lock seems + * better than sometimes getting a wrong answer in what is after all just + * a heuristic estimate. */ minfree = RelationGetTargetPageFreeSpace(relation, HEAP_DEFAULT_FILLFACTOR); @@ -93,9 +93,9 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) /* * Now that we have buffer lock, get accurate information about the - * page's free space, and recheck the heuristic about whether to prune. - * (We needn't recheck PageIsPrunable, since no one else could have - * pruned while we hold pin.) + * page's free space, and recheck the heuristic about whether to + * prune. (We needn't recheck PageIsPrunable, since no one else could + * have pruned while we hold pin.) */ if (PageIsFull(dp) || PageGetHeapFreeSpace((Page) dp) < minfree) { @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) * * If redirect_move is set, we remove redirecting line pointers by * updating the root line pointer to point directly to the first non-dead - * tuple in the chain. NOTE: eliminating the redirect changes the first + * tuple in the chain. NOTE: eliminating the redirect changes the first * tuple's effective CTID, and is therefore unsafe except within VACUUM FULL. * The only reason we support this capability at all is that by using it, * VACUUM FULL need not cope with LP_REDIRECT items at all; which seems a @@ -136,18 +136,18 @@ int heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, bool redirect_move, bool report_stats) { - int ndeleted = 0; - Page page = BufferGetPage(buffer); - OffsetNumber offnum, - maxoff; - OffsetNumber redirected[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * 2]; - OffsetNumber nowdead[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - OffsetNumber nowunused[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - int nredirected = 0; - int ndead = 0; - int nunused = 0; - bool page_was_full = false; - TransactionId save_prune_xid; + int ndeleted = 0; + Page page = BufferGetPage(buffer); + OffsetNumber offnum, + maxoff; + OffsetNumber redirected[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * 2]; + OffsetNumber nowdead[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + OffsetNumber nowunused[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + int nredirected = 0; + int ndead = 0; + int nunused = 0; + bool page_was_full = false; + TransactionId save_prune_xid; START_CRIT_SECTION(); @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, save_prune_xid = ((PageHeader) page)->pd_prune_xid; PageClearPrunable(page); - /* + /* * Also clear the "page is full" flag if it is set, since there's no point * in repeating the prune/defrag process until something else happens to * the page. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, offnum <= maxoff; offnum = OffsetNumberNext(offnum)) { - ItemId itemid = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); + ItemId itemid = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); /* Nothing to do if slot is empty or already dead */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(itemid) || ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) @@ -233,9 +233,9 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, END_CRIT_SECTION(); /* - * If requested, report the number of tuples reclaimed to pgstats. - * This is ndeleted minus ndead, because we don't want to count a now-DEAD - * root item as a deletion for this purpose. + * If requested, report the number of tuples reclaimed to pgstats. This is + * ndeleted minus ndead, because we don't want to count a now-DEAD root + * item as a deletion for this purpose. */ if (report_stats && ndeleted > ndead) pgstat_update_heap_dead_tuples(relation, ndeleted - ndead); @@ -243,19 +243,17 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, /* * XXX Should we update the FSM information of this page ? * - * There are two schools of thought here. We may not want to update - * FSM information so that the page is not used for unrelated - * UPDATEs/INSERTs and any free space in this page will remain - * available for further UPDATEs in *this* page, thus improving - * chances for doing HOT updates. + * There are two schools of thought here. We may not want to update FSM + * information so that the page is not used for unrelated UPDATEs/INSERTs + * and any free space in this page will remain available for further + * UPDATEs in *this* page, thus improving chances for doing HOT updates. * - * But for a large table and where a page does not receive further - * UPDATEs for a long time, we might waste this space by not - * updating the FSM information. The relation may get extended and - * fragmented further. + * But for a large table and where a page does not receive further UPDATEs + * for a long time, we might waste this space by not updating the FSM + * information. The relation may get extended and fragmented further. * - * One possibility is to leave "fillfactor" worth of space in this - * page and update FSM with the remaining space. + * One possibility is to leave "fillfactor" worth of space in this page + * and update FSM with the remaining space. * * In any case, the current FSM implementation doesn't accept * one-page-at-a-time updates, so this is all academic for now. @@ -298,17 +296,17 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, bool redirect_move) { - int ndeleted = 0; - Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); - TransactionId priorXmax = InvalidTransactionId; - ItemId rootlp; - HeapTupleHeader htup; - OffsetNumber latestdead = InvalidOffsetNumber, - maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(dp), - offnum; - OffsetNumber chainitems[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - int nchain = 0, - i; + int ndeleted = 0; + Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + TransactionId priorXmax = InvalidTransactionId; + ItemId rootlp; + HeapTupleHeader htup; + OffsetNumber latestdead = InvalidOffsetNumber, + maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(dp), + offnum; + OffsetNumber chainitems[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + int nchain = 0, + i; rootlp = PageGetItemId(dp, rootoffnum); @@ -321,14 +319,14 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(htup)) { /* - * If the tuple is DEAD and doesn't chain to anything else, mark it - * unused immediately. (If it does chain, we can only remove it as - * part of pruning its chain.) + * If the tuple is DEAD and doesn't chain to anything else, mark + * it unused immediately. (If it does chain, we can only remove + * it as part of pruning its chain.) * * We need this primarily to handle aborted HOT updates, that is, - * XMIN_INVALID heap-only tuples. Those might not be linked to - * by any chain, since the parent tuple might be re-updated before - * any pruning occurs. So we have to be able to reap them + * XMIN_INVALID heap-only tuples. Those might not be linked to by + * any chain, since the parent tuple might be re-updated before + * any pruning occurs. So we have to be able to reap them * separately from chain-pruning. * * Note that we might first arrive at a dead heap-only tuple @@ -354,9 +352,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, /* while not end of the chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; - bool tupdead, - recent_dead; + ItemId lp; + bool tupdead, + recent_dead; /* Some sanity checks */ if (offnum < FirstOffsetNumber || offnum > maxoff) @@ -368,9 +366,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, break; /* - * If we are looking at the redirected root line pointer, - * jump to the first normal tuple in the chain. If we find - * a redirect somewhere else, stop --- it must not be same chain. + * If we are looking at the redirected root line pointer, jump to the + * first normal tuple in the chain. If we find a redirect somewhere + * else, stop --- it must not be same chain. */ if (ItemIdIsRedirected(lp)) { @@ -382,9 +380,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, } /* - * Likewise, a dead item pointer can't be part of the chain. - * (We already eliminated the case of dead root tuple outside - * this function.) + * Likewise, a dead item pointer can't be part of the chain. (We + * already eliminated the case of dead root tuple outside this + * function.) */ if (ItemIdIsDead(lp)) break; @@ -417,6 +415,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, case HEAPTUPLE_RECENTLY_DEAD: recent_dead = true; + /* * This tuple may soon become DEAD. Update the hint field so * that the page is reconsidered for pruning in future. @@ -425,6 +424,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: + /* * This tuple may soon become DEAD. Update the hint field so * that the page is reconsidered for pruning in future. @@ -434,11 +434,12 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, case HEAPTUPLE_LIVE: case HEAPTUPLE_INSERT_IN_PROGRESS: + /* * If we wanted to optimize for aborts, we might consider * marking the page prunable when we see INSERT_IN_PROGRESS. - * But we don't. See related decisions about when to mark - * the page prunable in heapam.c. + * But we don't. See related decisions about when to mark the + * page prunable in heapam.c. */ break; @@ -486,12 +487,12 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, * Mark as unused each intermediate item that we are able to remove * from the chain. * - * When the previous item is the last dead tuple seen, we are at - * the right candidate for redirection. + * When the previous item is the last dead tuple seen, we are at the + * right candidate for redirection. */ for (i = 1; (i < nchain) && (chainitems[i - 1] != latestdead); i++) { - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(dp, chainitems[i]); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(dp, chainitems[i]); ItemIdSetUnused(lp); heap_prune_record_unused(nowunused, nunused, chainitems[i]); @@ -499,17 +500,17 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, } /* - * If the root entry had been a normal tuple, we are deleting it, - * so count it in the result. But changing a redirect (even to - * DEAD state) doesn't count. + * If the root entry had been a normal tuple, we are deleting it, so + * count it in the result. But changing a redirect (even to DEAD + * state) doesn't count. */ if (ItemIdIsNormal(rootlp)) ndeleted++; /* * If the DEAD tuple is at the end of the chain, the entire chain is - * dead and the root line pointer can be marked dead. Otherwise - * just redirect the root to the correct chain member. + * dead and the root line pointer can be marked dead. Otherwise just + * redirect the root to the correct chain member. */ if (i >= nchain) { @@ -528,25 +529,25 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, { /* * We found a redirect item that doesn't point to a valid follow-on - * item. This can happen if the loop in heap_page_prune caused us - * to visit the dead successor of a redirect item before visiting - * the redirect item. We can clean up by setting the redirect item - * to DEAD state. + * item. This can happen if the loop in heap_page_prune caused us to + * visit the dead successor of a redirect item before visiting the + * redirect item. We can clean up by setting the redirect item to + * DEAD state. */ ItemIdSetDead(rootlp); heap_prune_record_dead(nowdead, ndead, rootoffnum); } /* - * If requested, eliminate LP_REDIRECT items by moving tuples. Note that + * If requested, eliminate LP_REDIRECT items by moving tuples. Note that * if the root item is LP_REDIRECT and doesn't point to a valid follow-on * item, we already killed it above. */ if (redirect_move && ItemIdIsRedirected(rootlp)) { OffsetNumber firstoffnum = ItemIdGetRedirect(rootlp); - ItemId firstlp = PageGetItemId(dp, firstoffnum); - HeapTupleData firsttup; + ItemId firstlp = PageGetItemId(dp, firstoffnum); + HeapTupleData firsttup; Assert(ItemIdIsNormal(firstlp)); /* Set up firsttup to reference the tuple at its existing CTID */ @@ -558,15 +559,15 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, firsttup.t_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(relation); /* - * Mark the tuple for invalidation. Needed because we're changing - * its CTID. + * Mark the tuple for invalidation. Needed because we're changing its + * CTID. */ CacheInvalidateHeapTuple(relation, &firsttup); /* - * Change heap-only status of the tuple because after the line - * pointer manipulation, it's no longer a heap-only tuple, but is - * directly pointed to by index entries. + * Change heap-only status of the tuple because after the line pointer + * manipulation, it's no longer a heap-only tuple, but is directly + * pointed to by index entries. */ Assert(HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(&firsttup)); HeapTupleClearHeapOnly(&firsttup); @@ -594,7 +595,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, /* Record newly-redirected item pointer */ static void heap_prune_record_redirect(OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber offnum, OffsetNumber rdoffnum) + OffsetNumber offnum, OffsetNumber rdoffnum) { Assert(*nredirected < MaxHeapTuplesPerPage); redirected[*nredirected * 2] = offnum; @@ -641,17 +642,18 @@ heap_prune_record_unused(OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, void heap_get_root_tuples(Page page, OffsetNumber *root_offsets) { - OffsetNumber offnum, maxoff; + OffsetNumber offnum, + maxoff; MemSet(root_offsets, 0, MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * sizeof(OffsetNumber)); maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); for (offnum = FirstOffsetNumber; offnum <= maxoff; offnum++) { - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); - HeapTupleHeader htup; - OffsetNumber nextoffnum; - TransactionId priorXmax; + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); + HeapTupleHeader htup; + OffsetNumber nextoffnum; + TransactionId priorXmax; /* skip unused and dead items */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(lp) || ItemIdIsDead(lp)) diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c index e8c5eec50a..20c5938ff2 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * The caller is responsible for creating the new heap, all catalog * changes, supplying the tuples to be written to the new heap, and - * rebuilding indexes. The caller must hold AccessExclusiveLock on the + * rebuilding indexes. The caller must hold AccessExclusiveLock on the * target table, because we assume no one else is writing into it. * * To use the facility: @@ -18,13 +18,13 @@ * begin_heap_rewrite * while (fetch next tuple) * { - * if (tuple is dead) - * rewrite_heap_dead_tuple - * else - * { - * // do any transformations here if required - * rewrite_heap_tuple - * } + * if (tuple is dead) + * rewrite_heap_dead_tuple + * else + * { + * // do any transformations here if required + * rewrite_heap_tuple + * } * } * end_heap_rewrite * @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ * to substitute the correct ctid instead. * * For each ctid reference from A -> B, we might encounter either A first - * or B first. (Note that a tuple in the middle of a chain is both A and B + * or B first. (Note that a tuple in the middle of a chain is both A and B * of different pairs.) * * If we encounter A first, we'll store the tuple in the unresolved_tups @@ -58,11 +58,11 @@ * and can write A immediately with the correct ctid. * * Entries in the hash tables can be removed as soon as the later tuple - * is encountered. That helps to keep the memory usage down. At the end, + * is encountered. That helps to keep the memory usage down. At the end, * both tables are usually empty; we should have encountered both A and B * of each pair. However, it's possible for A to be RECENTLY_DEAD and B * entirely DEAD according to HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum, because the test - * for deadness using OldestXmin is not exact. In such a case we might + * for deadness using OldestXmin is not exact. In such a case we might * encounter B first, and skip it, and find A later. Then A would be added * to unresolved_tups, and stay there until end of the rewrite. Since * this case is very unusual, we don't worry about the memory usage. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ * of CLUSTERing on an unchanging key column, we'll see all the versions * of a given tuple together anyway, and so the peak memory usage is only * proportional to the number of RECENTLY_DEAD versions of a single row, not - * in the whole table. Note that if we do fail halfway through a CLUSTER, + * in the whole table. Note that if we do fail halfway through a CLUSTER, * the old table is still valid, so failure is not catastrophic. * * We can't use the normal heap_insert function to insert into the new @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.7 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.8 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -116,20 +116,20 @@ */ typedef struct RewriteStateData { - Relation rs_new_rel; /* destination heap */ - Page rs_buffer; /* page currently being built */ - BlockNumber rs_blockno; /* block where page will go */ - bool rs_buffer_valid; /* T if any tuples in buffer */ - bool rs_use_wal; /* must we WAL-log inserts? */ - TransactionId rs_oldest_xmin; /* oldest xmin used by caller to + Relation rs_new_rel; /* destination heap */ + Page rs_buffer; /* page currently being built */ + BlockNumber rs_blockno; /* block where page will go */ + bool rs_buffer_valid; /* T if any tuples in buffer */ + bool rs_use_wal; /* must we WAL-log inserts? */ + TransactionId rs_oldest_xmin; /* oldest xmin used by caller to * determine tuple visibility */ - TransactionId rs_freeze_xid; /* Xid that will be used as freeze - * cutoff point */ - MemoryContext rs_cxt; /* for hash tables and entries and - * tuples in them */ - HTAB *rs_unresolved_tups; /* unmatched A tuples */ - HTAB *rs_old_new_tid_map; /* unmatched B tuples */ -} RewriteStateData; + TransactionId rs_freeze_xid;/* Xid that will be used as freeze cutoff + * point */ + MemoryContext rs_cxt; /* for hash tables and entries and tuples in + * them */ + HTAB *rs_unresolved_tups; /* unmatched A tuples */ + HTAB *rs_old_new_tid_map; /* unmatched B tuples */ +} RewriteStateData; /* * The lookup keys for the hash tables are tuple TID and xmin (we must check @@ -139,27 +139,27 @@ typedef struct RewriteStateData */ typedef struct { - TransactionId xmin; /* tuple xmin */ + TransactionId xmin; /* tuple xmin */ ItemPointerData tid; /* tuple location in old heap */ -} TidHashKey; +} TidHashKey; /* * Entry structures for the hash tables */ typedef struct { - TidHashKey key; /* expected xmin/old location of B tuple */ + TidHashKey key; /* expected xmin/old location of B tuple */ ItemPointerData old_tid; /* A's location in the old heap */ - HeapTuple tuple; /* A's tuple contents */ -} UnresolvedTupData; + HeapTuple tuple; /* A's tuple contents */ +} UnresolvedTupData; typedef UnresolvedTupData *UnresolvedTup; typedef struct { - TidHashKey key; /* actual xmin/old location of B tuple */ + TidHashKey key; /* actual xmin/old location of B tuple */ ItemPointerData new_tid; /* where we put it in the new heap */ -} OldToNewMappingData; +} OldToNewMappingData; typedef OldToNewMappingData *OldToNewMapping; @@ -189,8 +189,8 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, HASHCTL hash_ctl; /* - * To ease cleanup, make a separate context that will contain - * the RewriteState struct itself plus all subsidiary data. + * To ease cleanup, make a separate context that will contain the + * RewriteState struct itself plus all subsidiary data. */ rw_cxt = AllocSetContextCreate(CurrentMemoryContext, "Table rewrite", @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, state->rs_unresolved_tups = hash_create("Rewrite / Unresolved ctids", - 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ + 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ &hash_ctl, HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, state->rs_old_new_tid_map = hash_create("Rewrite / Old to new tid map", - 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ + 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ &hash_ctl, HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); @@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ end_heap_rewrite(RewriteState state) UnresolvedTup unresolved; /* - * Write any remaining tuples in the UnresolvedTups table. If we have - * any left, they should in fact be dead, but let's err on the safe side. + * Write any remaining tuples in the UnresolvedTups table. If we have any + * left, they should in fact be dead, but let's err on the safe side. * * XXX this really is a waste of code no? */ @@ -276,15 +276,15 @@ end_heap_rewrite(RewriteState state) } /* - * If the rel isn't temp, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync - * to ensure that the toast table gets fsync'd too. + * If the rel isn't temp, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync to + * ensure that the toast table gets fsync'd too. * * It's obvious that we must do this when not WAL-logging. It's less - * obvious that we have to do it even if we did WAL-log the pages. - * The reason is the same as in tablecmds.c's copy_relation_data(): - * we're writing data that's not in shared buffers, and so a CHECKPOINT - * occurring during the rewriteheap operation won't have fsync'd data - * we wrote before the checkpoint. + * obvious that we have to do it even if we did WAL-log the pages. The + * reason is the same as in tablecmds.c's copy_relation_data(): we're + * writing data that's not in shared buffers, and so a CHECKPOINT + * occurring during the rewriteheap operation won't have fsync'd data we + * wrote before the checkpoint. */ if (!state->rs_new_rel->rd_istemp) heap_sync(state->rs_new_rel); @@ -310,17 +310,17 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, { MemoryContext old_cxt; ItemPointerData old_tid; - TidHashKey hashkey; - bool found; - bool free_new; + TidHashKey hashkey; + bool found; + bool free_new; old_cxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(state->rs_cxt); /* * Copy the original tuple's visibility information into new_tuple. * - * XXX we might later need to copy some t_infomask2 bits, too? - * Right now, we intentionally clear the HOT status bits. + * XXX we might later need to copy some t_infomask2 bits, too? Right now, + * we intentionally clear the HOT status bits. */ memcpy(&new_tuple->t_data->t_choice.t_heap, &old_tuple->t_data->t_choice.t_heap, @@ -335,16 +335,16 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, * While we have our hands on the tuple, we may as well freeze any * very-old xmin or xmax, so that future VACUUM effort can be saved. * - * Note we abuse heap_freeze_tuple() a bit here, since it's expecting - * to be given a pointer to a tuple in a disk buffer. It happens - * though that we can get the right things to happen by passing - * InvalidBuffer for the buffer. + * Note we abuse heap_freeze_tuple() a bit here, since it's expecting to + * be given a pointer to a tuple in a disk buffer. It happens though that + * we can get the right things to happen by passing InvalidBuffer for the + * buffer. */ heap_freeze_tuple(new_tuple->t_data, state->rs_freeze_xid, InvalidBuffer); /* - * Invalid ctid means that ctid should point to the tuple itself. - * We'll override it later if the tuple is part of an update chain. + * Invalid ctid means that ctid should point to the tuple itself. We'll + * override it later if the tuple is part of an update chain. */ ItemPointerSetInvalid(&new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid); @@ -369,9 +369,9 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, if (mapping != NULL) { /* - * We've already copied the tuple that t_ctid points to, so we - * can set the ctid of this tuple to point to the new location, - * and insert it right away. + * We've already copied the tuple that t_ctid points to, so we can + * set the ctid of this tuple to point to the new location, and + * insert it right away. */ new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid = mapping->new_tid; @@ -405,10 +405,10 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, } /* - * Now we will write the tuple, and then check to see if it is the - * B tuple in any new or known pair. When we resolve a known pair, - * we will be able to write that pair's A tuple, and then we have to - * check if it resolves some other pair. Hence, we need a loop here. + * Now we will write the tuple, and then check to see if it is the B tuple + * in any new or known pair. When we resolve a known pair, we will be + * able to write that pair's A tuple, and then we have to check if it + * resolves some other pair. Hence, we need a loop here. */ old_tid = old_tuple->t_self; free_new = false; @@ -422,13 +422,12 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, new_tid = new_tuple->t_self; /* - * If the tuple is the updated version of a row, and the prior - * version wouldn't be DEAD yet, then we need to either resolve - * the prior version (if it's waiting in rs_unresolved_tups), - * or make an entry in rs_old_new_tid_map (so we can resolve it - * when we do see it). The previous tuple's xmax would equal this - * one's xmin, so it's RECENTLY_DEAD if and only if the xmin is - * not before OldestXmin. + * If the tuple is the updated version of a row, and the prior version + * wouldn't be DEAD yet, then we need to either resolve the prior + * version (if it's waiting in rs_unresolved_tups), or make an entry + * in rs_old_new_tid_map (so we can resolve it when we do see it). + * The previous tuple's xmax would equal this one's xmin, so it's + * RECENTLY_DEAD if and only if the xmin is not before OldestXmin. */ if ((new_tuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_UPDATED) && !TransactionIdPrecedes(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(new_tuple->t_data), @@ -449,9 +448,9 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, if (unresolved != NULL) { /* - * We have seen and memorized the previous tuple already. - * Now that we know where we inserted the tuple its t_ctid - * points to, fix its t_ctid and insert it to the new heap. + * We have seen and memorized the previous tuple already. Now + * that we know where we inserted the tuple its t_ctid points + * to, fix its t_ctid and insert it to the new heap. */ if (free_new) heap_freetuple(new_tuple); @@ -461,8 +460,8 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid = new_tid; /* - * We don't need the hash entry anymore, but don't free - * its tuple just yet. + * We don't need the hash entry anymore, but don't free its + * tuple just yet. */ hash_search(state->rs_unresolved_tups, &hashkey, HASH_REMOVE, &found); @@ -474,8 +473,8 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, else { /* - * Remember the new tid of this tuple. We'll use it to set - * the ctid when we find the previous tuple in the chain. + * Remember the new tid of this tuple. We'll use it to set the + * ctid when we find the previous tuple in the chain. */ OldToNewMapping mapping; @@ -506,22 +505,22 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) { /* * If we have already seen an earlier tuple in the update chain that - * points to this tuple, let's forget about that earlier tuple. It's - * in fact dead as well, our simple xmax < OldestXmin test in - * HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum just wasn't enough to detect it. It - * happens when xmin of a tuple is greater than xmax, which sounds + * points to this tuple, let's forget about that earlier tuple. It's in + * fact dead as well, our simple xmax < OldestXmin test in + * HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum just wasn't enough to detect it. It happens + * when xmin of a tuple is greater than xmax, which sounds * counter-intuitive but is perfectly valid. * - * We don't bother to try to detect the situation the other way - * round, when we encounter the dead tuple first and then the - * recently dead one that points to it. If that happens, we'll - * have some unmatched entries in the UnresolvedTups hash table - * at the end. That can happen anyway, because a vacuum might - * have removed the dead tuple in the chain before us. + * We don't bother to try to detect the situation the other way round, + * when we encounter the dead tuple first and then the recently dead one + * that points to it. If that happens, we'll have some unmatched entries + * in the UnresolvedTups hash table at the end. That can happen anyway, + * because a vacuum might have removed the dead tuple in the chain before + * us. */ UnresolvedTup unresolved; - TidHashKey hashkey; - bool found; + TidHashKey hashkey; + bool found; memset(&hashkey, 0, sizeof(hashkey)); hashkey.xmin = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(old_tuple->t_data); @@ -541,7 +540,7 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) } /* - * Insert a tuple to the new relation. This has to track heap_insert + * Insert a tuple to the new relation. This has to track heap_insert * and its subsidiary functions! * * t_self of the tuple is set to the new TID of the tuple. If t_ctid of the @@ -551,11 +550,12 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) static void raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) { - Page page = state->rs_buffer; - Size pageFreeSpace, saveFreeSpace; - Size len; - OffsetNumber newoff; - HeapTuple heaptup; + Page page = state->rs_buffer; + Size pageFreeSpace, + saveFreeSpace; + Size len; + OffsetNumber newoff; + HeapTuple heaptup; /* * If the new tuple is too big for storage or contains already toasted @@ -610,7 +610,8 @@ raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) /* * Now write the page. We say isTemp = true even if it's not a * temp table, because there's no need for smgr to schedule an - * fsync for this write; we'll do it ourselves in end_heap_rewrite. + * fsync for this write; we'll do it ourselves in + * end_heap_rewrite. */ RelationOpenSmgr(state->rs_new_rel); smgrextend(state->rs_new_rel->rd_smgr, state->rs_blockno, @@ -638,12 +639,12 @@ raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) ItemPointerSet(&(tup->t_self), state->rs_blockno, newoff); /* - * Insert the correct position into CTID of the stored tuple, too, - * if the caller didn't supply a valid CTID. + * Insert the correct position into CTID of the stored tuple, too, if the + * caller didn't supply a valid CTID. */ - if(!ItemPointerIsValid(&tup->t_data->t_ctid)) + if (!ItemPointerIsValid(&tup->t_data->t_ctid)) { - ItemId newitemid; + ItemId newitemid; HeapTupleHeader onpage_tup; newitemid = PageGetItemId(page, newoff); diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c b/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c index 795efccc09..7b0653c9ba 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * heap scan synchronization support * * When multiple backends run a sequential scan on the same table, we try - * to keep them synchronized to reduce the overall I/O needed. The goal is + * to keep them synchronized to reduce the overall I/O needed. The goal is * to read each page into shared buffer cache only once, and let all backends * that take part in the shared scan process the page before it falls out of * the cache. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * don't want such queries to slow down others. * * There can realistically only be a few large sequential scans on different - * tables in progress at any time. Therefore we just keep the scan positions + * tables in progress at any time. Therefore we just keep the scan positions * in a small LRU list which we scan every time we need to look up or update a * scan position. The whole mechanism is only applied for tables exceeding * a threshold size (but that is not the concern of this module). @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c,v 1.1 2007/06/08 18:23:52 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ /* GUC variables */ #ifdef TRACE_SYNCSCAN -bool trace_syncscan = false; +bool trace_syncscan = false; #endif @@ -89,21 +89,21 @@ typedef struct ss_scan_location_t { RelFileNode relfilenode; /* identity of a relation */ BlockNumber location; /* last-reported location in the relation */ -} ss_scan_location_t; +} ss_scan_location_t; typedef struct ss_lru_item_t { - struct ss_lru_item_t *prev; - struct ss_lru_item_t *next; - ss_scan_location_t location; -} ss_lru_item_t; + struct ss_lru_item_t *prev; + struct ss_lru_item_t *next; + ss_scan_location_t location; +} ss_lru_item_t; typedef struct ss_scan_locations_t { - ss_lru_item_t *head; - ss_lru_item_t *tail; - ss_lru_item_t items[1]; /* SYNC_SCAN_NELEM items */ -} ss_scan_locations_t; + ss_lru_item_t *head; + ss_lru_item_t *tail; + ss_lru_item_t items[1]; /* SYNC_SCAN_NELEM items */ +} ss_scan_locations_t; #define SizeOfScanLocations(N) offsetof(ss_scan_locations_t, items[N]) @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ static ss_scan_locations_t *scan_locations; /* prototypes for internal functions */ static BlockNumber ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, - BlockNumber location, bool set); + BlockNumber location, bool set); /* @@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ SyncScanShmemSize(void) void SyncScanShmemInit(void) { - int i; - bool found; + int i; + bool found; scan_locations = (ss_scan_locations_t *) ShmemInitStruct("Sync Scan Locations List", @@ -186,20 +186,20 @@ SyncScanShmemInit(void) static BlockNumber ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, BlockNumber location, bool set) { - ss_lru_item_t *item; + ss_lru_item_t *item; item = scan_locations->head; for (;;) { - bool match; + bool match; match = RelFileNodeEquals(item->location.relfilenode, relfilenode); if (match || item->next == NULL) { /* - * If we reached the end of list and no match was found, - * take over the last entry + * If we reached the end of list and no match was found, take over + * the last entry */ if (!match) { @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, BlockNumber location, bool set) * relation, or 0 if no valid location is found. * * We expect the caller has just done RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(), and - * so that number is passed in rather than computing it again. The result + * so that number is passed in rather than computing it again. The result * is guaranteed less than relnblocks (assuming that's > 0). */ BlockNumber @@ -257,8 +257,8 @@ ss_get_location(Relation rel, BlockNumber relnblocks) /* * If the location is not a valid block number for this scan, start at 0. * - * This can happen if for instance a VACUUM truncated the table - * since the location was saved. + * This can happen if for instance a VACUUM truncated the table since the + * location was saved. */ if (startloc >= relnblocks) startloc = 0; @@ -294,12 +294,12 @@ ss_report_location(Relation rel, BlockNumber location) #endif /* - * To reduce lock contention, only report scan progress every N pages. - * For the same reason, don't block if the lock isn't immediately - * available. Missing a few updates isn't critical, it just means that a - * new scan that wants to join the pack will start a little bit behind the - * head of the scan. Hopefully the pages are still in OS cache and the - * scan catches up quickly. + * To reduce lock contention, only report scan progress every N pages. For + * the same reason, don't block if the lock isn't immediately available. + * Missing a few updates isn't critical, it just means that a new scan + * that wants to join the pack will start a little bit behind the head of + * the scan. Hopefully the pages are still in OS cache and the scan + * catches up quickly. */ if ((location % SYNC_SCAN_REPORT_INTERVAL) == 0) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c b/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c index 4f62b1f859..0a8873f994 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.78 2007/10/11 18:19:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.79 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -72,9 +72,9 @@ do { \ static void toast_delete_datum(Relation rel, Datum value); static Datum toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, - bool use_wal, bool use_fsm); -static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr); -static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, + bool use_wal, bool use_fsm); +static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena * attr); +static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length); @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena *attr) +heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena * attr) { - struct varlena *result; + struct varlena *result; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) { @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) +heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena * attr) { if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) { @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) /* * This is a short-header varlena --- convert to 4-byte header format */ - Size data_size = VARSIZE_SHORT(attr) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; - Size new_size = data_size + VARHDRSZ; + Size data_size = VARSIZE_SHORT(attr) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; + Size new_size = data_size + VARHDRSZ; struct varlena *new_attr; new_attr = (struct varlena *) palloc(new_size); @@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena *attr, +heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 slicelength) { struct varlena *preslice; struct varlena *result; - char *attrdata; + char *attrdata; int32 attrsize; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena *attr, if (VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(preslice)) { PGLZ_Header *tmp = (PGLZ_Header *) preslice; - Size size = PGLZ_RAW_SIZE(tmp) + VARHDRSZ; + Size size = PGLZ_RAW_SIZE(tmp) + VARHDRSZ; preslice = (struct varlena *) palloc(size); SET_VARSIZE(preslice, size); @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ toast_raw_datum_size(Datum value) Size toast_datum_size(Datum value) { - struct varlena *attr = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(value); + struct varlena *attr = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(value); Size result; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, for (i = 0; i < numAttrs; i++) { - struct varlena *old_value; - struct varlena *new_value; + struct varlena *old_value; + struct varlena *new_value; if (oldtup != NULL) { @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(old_value)) { if (toast_isnull[i] || !VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value) || - memcmp((char *) old_value, (char *) new_value, + memcmp((char *) old_value, (char *) new_value, VARSIZE_EXTERNAL(old_value)) != 0) { /* @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, * We took care of UPDATE above, so any external value we find * still in the tuple must be someone else's we cannot reuse. * Fetch it back (without decompression, unless we are forcing - * PLAIN storage). If necessary, we'll push it out as a new + * PLAIN storage). If necessary, we'll push it out as a new * external value below. */ if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value)) @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, /* * Second we look for attributes of attstorage 'x' or 'e' that are still - * inline. But skip this if there's no toast table to push them to. + * inline. But skip this if there's no toast table to push them to. */ while (heap_compute_data_size(tupleDesc, toast_values, toast_isnull) > maxDataLen && @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ toast_flatten_tuple_attribute(Datum value, has_nulls = true; else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { - struct varlena *new_value; + struct varlena *new_value; new_value = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(toast_values[i]); if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value) || @@ -1046,7 +1046,8 @@ toast_compress_datum(Datum value) Assert(!VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(value)); /* - * No point in wasting a palloc cycle if value is too short for compression + * No point in wasting a palloc cycle if value is too short for + * compression */ if (valsize < PGLZ_strategy_default->min_input_size) return PointerGetDatum(NULL); @@ -1110,8 +1111,8 @@ toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, /* * Get the data pointer and length, and compute va_rawsize and va_extsize. * - * va_rawsize is the size of the equivalent fully uncompressed datum, - * so we have to adjust for short headers. + * va_rawsize is the size of the equivalent fully uncompressed datum, so + * we have to adjust for short headers. * * va_extsize is the actual size of the data payload in the toast records. */ @@ -1119,7 +1120,7 @@ toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, { data_p = VARDATA_SHORT(value); data_todo = VARSIZE_SHORT(value) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; - toast_pointer.va_rawsize = data_todo + VARHDRSZ; /* as if not short */ + toast_pointer.va_rawsize = data_todo + VARHDRSZ; /* as if not short */ toast_pointer.va_extsize = data_todo; } else if (VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(value)) @@ -1283,7 +1284,7 @@ toast_delete_datum(Relation rel, Datum value) * ---------- */ static struct varlena * -toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) +toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena * attr) { Relation toastrel; Relation toastidx; @@ -1299,7 +1300,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) int32 numchunks; Pointer chunk; bool isnull; - char *chunkdata; + char *chunkdata; int32 chunksize; /* Must copy to access aligned fields */ @@ -1365,7 +1366,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) { /* should never happen */ elog(ERROR, "found toasted toast chunk"); - chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ chunkdata = NULL; } @@ -1384,12 +1385,12 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) residx, numchunks, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } - else if (residx == numchunks-1) + else if (residx == numchunks - 1) { if ((residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE + chunksize) != ressize) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk size %d (expected %d) in final chunk %d for toast value %u", chunksize, - (int) (ressize - residx*TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), + (int) (ressize - residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } @@ -1397,7 +1398,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk number %d for toast value %u (out of range %d..%d)", residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid, - 0, numchunks-1); + 0, numchunks - 1); /* * Copy the data into proper place in our result @@ -1435,7 +1436,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ static struct varlena * -toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) +toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) { Relation toastrel; Relation toastidx; @@ -1457,7 +1458,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) int totalchunks; Pointer chunk; bool isnull; - char *chunkdata; + char *chunkdata; int32 chunksize; int32 chcpystrt; int32 chcpyend; @@ -1574,7 +1575,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) { /* should never happen */ elog(ERROR, "found toasted toast chunk"); - chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ chunkdata = NULL; } @@ -1593,7 +1594,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) residx, totalchunks, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } - else if (residx == totalchunks-1) + else if (residx == totalchunks - 1) { if ((residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE + chunksize) != attrsize) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk size %d (expected %d) in final chunk %d for toast value %u when fetching slice", @@ -1606,7 +1607,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk number %d for toast value %u (out of range %d..%d)", residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid, - 0, totalchunks-1); + 0, totalchunks - 1); /* * Copy the data into proper place in our result diff --git a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c index fd727ca68c..5f1092db05 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.99 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.100 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * INTERFACE ROUTINES * index_open - open an index relation by relation OID @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ index_markpos(IndexScanDesc scan) * returnable tuple in each HOT chain, and so restoring the prior state at the * granularity of the index AM is sufficient. Since the only current user * of mark/restore functionality is nodeMergejoin.c, this effectively means - * that merge-join plans only work for MVCC snapshots. This could be fixed + * that merge-join plans only work for MVCC snapshots. This could be fixed * if necessary, but for now it seems unimportant. * ---------------- */ @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ HeapTuple index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) { HeapTuple heapTuple = &scan->xs_ctup; - ItemPointer tid = &heapTuple->t_self; + ItemPointer tid = &heapTuple->t_self; FmgrInfo *procedure; SCAN_CHECKS; @@ -429,14 +429,14 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) for (;;) { OffsetNumber offnum; - bool at_chain_start; - Page dp; + bool at_chain_start; + Page dp; if (scan->xs_next_hot != InvalidOffsetNumber) { /* - * We are resuming scan of a HOT chain after having returned - * an earlier member. Must still hold pin on current heap page. + * We are resuming scan of a HOT chain after having returned an + * earlier member. Must still hold pin on current heap page. */ Assert(BufferIsValid(scan->xs_cbuf)); Assert(ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(tid) == @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) /* Scan through possible multiple members of HOT-chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; + ItemId lp; ItemPointer ctid; /* check for bogus TID */ @@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) } /* - * We must initialize all of *heapTuple (ie, scan->xs_ctup) - * since it is returned to the executor on success. + * We must initialize all of *heapTuple (ie, scan->xs_ctup) since + * it is returned to the executor on success. */ heapTuple->t_data = (HeapTupleHeader) PageGetItem(dp, lp); heapTuple->t_len = ItemIdGetLength(lp); @@ -544,20 +544,21 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) /* * Shouldn't see a HEAP_ONLY tuple at chain start. (This test * should be unnecessary, since the chain root can't be removed - * while we have pin on the index entry, but let's make it anyway.) + * while we have pin on the index entry, but let's make it + * anyway.) */ if (at_chain_start && HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(heapTuple)) break; /* * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is - * broken. (Note: this test is not optional because it protects - * us against the case where the prior chain member's xmax - * aborted since we looked at it.) + * broken. (Note: this test is not optional because it protects + * us against the case where the prior chain member's xmax aborted + * since we looked at it.) */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(scan->xs_prev_xmax) && !TransactionIdEquals(scan->xs_prev_xmax, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) break; /* If it's visible per the snapshot, we must return it */ @@ -565,10 +566,10 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) scan->xs_cbuf)) { /* - * If the snapshot is MVCC, we know that it could accept - * at most one member of the HOT chain, so we can skip - * examining any more members. Otherwise, check for - * continuation of the HOT-chain, and set state for next time. + * If the snapshot is MVCC, we know that it could accept at + * most one member of the HOT chain, so we can skip examining + * any more members. Otherwise, check for continuation of the + * HOT-chain, and set state for next time. */ if (IsMVCCSnapshot(scan->xs_snapshot)) scan->xs_next_hot = InvalidOffsetNumber; @@ -615,7 +616,7 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) } else break; /* end of chain */ - } /* loop over a single HOT chain */ + } /* loop over a single HOT chain */ LockBuffer(scan->xs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); @@ -788,7 +789,7 @@ index_vacuum_cleanup(IndexVacuumInfo *info, * particular indexed attribute are those with both types equal to * the index opclass' opcintype (note that this is subtly different * from the indexed attribute's own type: it may be a binary-compatible - * type instead). Only the default functions are stored in relcache + * type instead). Only the default functions are stored in relcache * entries --- access methods can use the syscache to look up non-default * functions. * @@ -822,7 +823,7 @@ index_getprocid(Relation irel, * index_getprocinfo * * This routine allows index AMs to keep fmgr lookup info for - * support procs in the relcache. As above, only the "default" + * support procs in the relcache. As above, only the "default" * functions for any particular indexed attribute are cached. * * Note: the return value points into cached data that will be lost during diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c index 5f7ecbe16d..413767ffee 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.160 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.161 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ typedef struct OffsetNumber newitemoff; /* where the new item is to be inserted */ int leftspace; /* space available for items on left page */ int rightspace; /* space available for items on right page */ - int olddataitemstotal; /* space taken by old items */ + int olddataitemstotal; /* space taken by old items */ bool have_split; /* found a valid split? */ @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, if (!ItemIdIsDead(curitemid)) { ItemPointerData htid; - bool all_dead; + bool all_dead; /* * _bt_compare returns 0 for (1,NULL) and (1,NULL) - this's @@ -239,8 +239,8 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, /* * We check the whole HOT-chain to see if there is any tuple - * that satisfies SnapshotDirty. This is necessary because - * we have just a single index entry for the entire chain. + * that satisfies SnapshotDirty. This is necessary because we + * have just a single index entry for the entire chain. */ if (heap_hot_search(&htid, heapRel, &SnapshotDirty, &all_dead)) { @@ -267,15 +267,16 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, * is itself now committed dead --- if so, don't complain. * This is a waste of time in normal scenarios but we must * do it to support CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. - * + * * We must follow HOT-chains here because during * concurrent index build, we insert the root TID though * the actual tuple may be somewhere in the HOT-chain. - * While following the chain we might not stop at the exact - * tuple which triggered the insert, but that's OK because - * if we find a live tuple anywhere in this chain, we have - * a unique key conflict. The other live tuple is not part - * of this chain because it had a different index entry. + * While following the chain we might not stop at the + * exact tuple which triggered the insert, but that's OK + * because if we find a live tuple anywhere in this chain, + * we have a unique key conflict. The other live tuple is + * not part of this chain because it had a different index + * entry. */ htid = itup->t_tid; if (heap_hot_search(&htid, heapRel, SnapshotSelf, NULL)) @@ -293,8 +294,8 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNIQUE_VIOLATION), - errmsg("duplicate key value violates unique constraint \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + errmsg("duplicate key value violates unique constraint \"%s\"", + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); } else if (all_dead) { @@ -372,7 +373,7 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, * On entry, *buf and *offsetptr point to the first legal position * where the new tuple could be inserted. The caller should hold an * exclusive lock on *buf. *offsetptr can also be set to - * InvalidOffsetNumber, in which case the function will search the right + * InvalidOffsetNumber, in which case the function will search the right * location within the page if needed. On exit, they point to the chosen * insert location. If findinsertloc decided to move right, the lock and * pin on the original page will be released and the new page returned to @@ -389,11 +390,12 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, ScanKey scankey, IndexTuple newtup) { - Buffer buf = *bufptr; - Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); - Size itemsz; + Buffer buf = *bufptr; + Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); + Size itemsz; BTPageOpaque lpageop; - bool movedright, vacuumed; + bool movedright, + vacuumed; OffsetNumber newitemoff; OffsetNumber firstlegaloff = *offsetptr; @@ -447,19 +449,21 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, Buffer rbuf; /* - * before considering moving right, see if we can obtain enough - * space by erasing LP_DEAD items + * before considering moving right, see if we can obtain enough space + * by erasing LP_DEAD items */ if (P_ISLEAF(lpageop) && P_HAS_GARBAGE(lpageop)) { _bt_vacuum_one_page(rel, buf); - /* remember that we vacuumed this page, because that makes - * the hint supplied by the caller invalid */ + /* + * remember that we vacuumed this page, because that makes the + * hint supplied by the caller invalid + */ vacuumed = true; if (PageGetFreeSpace(page) >= itemsz) - break; /* OK, now we have enough space */ + break; /* OK, now we have enough space */ } /* @@ -473,11 +477,10 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, /* * step right to next non-dead page * - * must write-lock that page before releasing write lock on - * current page; else someone else's _bt_check_unique scan could - * fail to see our insertion. write locks on intermediate dead - * pages won't do because we don't know when they will get - * de-linked from the tree. + * must write-lock that page before releasing write lock on current + * page; else someone else's _bt_check_unique scan could fail to see + * our insertion. write locks on intermediate dead pages won't do + * because we don't know when they will get de-linked from the tree. */ rbuf = InvalidBuffer; @@ -501,17 +504,16 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, } /* - * Now we are on the right page, so find the insert position. If we - * moved right at all, we know we should insert at the start of the - * page. If we didn't move right, we can use the firstlegaloff hint - * if the caller supplied one, unless we vacuumed the page which - * might have moved tuples around making the hint invalid. If we - * didn't move right or can't use the hint, find the position - * by searching. + * Now we are on the right page, so find the insert position. If we moved + * right at all, we know we should insert at the start of the page. If we + * didn't move right, we can use the firstlegaloff hint if the caller + * supplied one, unless we vacuumed the page which might have moved tuples + * around making the hint invalid. If we didn't move right or can't use + * the hint, find the position by searching. */ if (movedright) newitemoff = P_FIRSTDATAKEY(lpageop); - else if(firstlegaloff != InvalidOffsetNumber && !vacuumed) + else if (firstlegaloff != InvalidOffsetNumber && !vacuumed) newitemoff = firstlegaloff; else newitemoff = _bt_binsrch(rel, buf, keysz, scankey, false); @@ -982,8 +984,8 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, * the data by reinserting it into a new left page. (XXX the latter * comment is probably obsolete.) * - * We need to do this before writing the WAL record, so that XLogInsert can - * WAL log an image of the page if necessary. + * We need to do this before writing the WAL record, so that XLogInsert + * can WAL log an image of the page if necessary. */ PageRestoreTempPage(leftpage, origpage); @@ -1033,10 +1035,10 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, * Log the new item and its offset, if it was inserted on the left * page. (If it was put on the right page, we don't need to explicitly * WAL log it because it's included with all the other items on the - * right page.) Show the new item as belonging to the left page buffer, - * so that it is not stored if XLogInsert decides it needs a full-page - * image of the left page. We store the offset anyway, though, to - * support archive compression of these records. + * right page.) Show the new item as belonging to the left page + * buffer, so that it is not stored if XLogInsert decides it needs a + * full-page image of the left page. We store the offset anyway, + * though, to support archive compression of these records. */ if (newitemonleft) { @@ -1052,31 +1054,31 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, lastrdata->data = (char *) newitem; lastrdata->len = MAXALIGN(newitemsz); - lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ + lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } else { /* - * Although we don't need to WAL-log the new item, we still - * need XLogInsert to consider storing a full-page image of the - * left page, so make an empty entry referencing that buffer. - * This also ensures that the left page is always backup block 1. + * Although we don't need to WAL-log the new item, we still need + * XLogInsert to consider storing a full-page image of the left + * page, so make an empty entry referencing that buffer. This also + * ensures that the left page is always backup block 1. */ lastrdata->next = lastrdata + 1; lastrdata++; lastrdata->data = NULL; lastrdata->len = 0; - lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ + lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } /* * Log the contents of the right page in the format understood by * _bt_restore_page(). We set lastrdata->buffer to InvalidBuffer, - * because we're going to recreate the whole page anyway, so it - * should never be stored by XLogInsert. + * because we're going to recreate the whole page anyway, so it should + * never be stored by XLogInsert. * * Direct access to page is not good but faster - we should implement * some new func in page API. Note we only store the tuples @@ -1101,7 +1103,7 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, lastrdata->data = NULL; lastrdata->len = 0; - lastrdata->buffer = sbuf; /* backup block 2 */ + lastrdata->buffer = sbuf; /* backup block 2 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } @@ -1275,9 +1277,10 @@ _bt_findsplitloc(Relation rel, olddataitemstoleft += itemsz; } - /* If the new item goes as the last item, check for splitting so that - * all the old items go to the left page and the new item goes to the - * right page. + /* + * If the new item goes as the last item, check for splitting so that all + * the old items go to the left page and the new item goes to the right + * page. */ if (newitemoff > maxoff && !goodenoughfound) _bt_checksplitloc(&state, newitemoff, false, olddataitemstotal, 0); @@ -1314,16 +1317,16 @@ _bt_checksplitloc(FindSplitData *state, int olddataitemstoleft, Size firstoldonrightsz) { - int leftfree, - rightfree; - Size firstrightitemsz; - bool newitemisfirstonright; + int leftfree, + rightfree; + Size firstrightitemsz; + bool newitemisfirstonright; /* Is the new item going to be the first item on the right page? */ newitemisfirstonright = (firstoldonright == state->newitemoff && !newitemonleft); - if(newitemisfirstonright) + if (newitemisfirstonright) firstrightitemsz = state->newitemsz; else firstrightitemsz = firstoldonrightsz; @@ -1334,9 +1337,8 @@ _bt_checksplitloc(FindSplitData *state, (state->olddataitemstotal - olddataitemstoleft); /* - * The first item on the right page becomes the high key of the - * left page; therefore it counts against left space as well as right - * space. + * The first item on the right page becomes the high key of the left page; + * therefore it counts against left space as well as right space. */ leftfree -= firstrightitemsz; @@ -1875,8 +1877,8 @@ _bt_vacuum_one_page(Relation rel, Buffer buffer) BTPageOpaque opaque = (BTPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(page); /* - * Scan over all items to see which ones need to be deleted - * according to LP_DEAD flags. + * Scan over all items to see which ones need to be deleted according to + * LP_DEAD flags. */ minoff = P_FIRSTDATAKEY(opaque); maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c index f62e4b3c5e..8eee5a74cc 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.103 2007/09/12 22:10:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.104 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Postgres btree pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque @@ -751,8 +751,8 @@ _bt_parent_deletion_safe(Relation rel, BlockNumber target, BTStack stack) /* * In recovery mode, assume the deletion being replayed is valid. We - * can't always check it because we won't have a full search stack, - * and we should complain if there's a problem, anyway. + * can't always check it because we won't have a full search stack, and we + * should complain if there's a problem, anyway. */ if (InRecovery) return true; @@ -781,8 +781,8 @@ _bt_parent_deletion_safe(Relation rel, BlockNumber target, BTStack stack) { /* * It's only child, so safe if parent would itself be removable. - * We have to check the parent itself, and then recurse to - * test the conditions at the parent's parent. + * We have to check the parent itself, and then recurse to test + * the conditions at the parent's parent. */ if (P_RIGHTMOST(opaque) || P_ISROOT(opaque)) { @@ -887,18 +887,18 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) targetkey = CopyIndexTuple((IndexTuple) PageGetItem(page, itemid)); /* - * To avoid deadlocks, we'd better drop the target page lock before - * going further. + * To avoid deadlocks, we'd better drop the target page lock before going + * further. */ _bt_relbuf(rel, buf); /* - * We need an approximate pointer to the page's parent page. We use - * the standard search mechanism to search for the page's high key; this - * will give us a link to either the current parent or someplace to its - * left (if there are multiple equal high keys). In recursion cases, - * the caller already generated a search stack and we can just re-use - * that work. + * We need an approximate pointer to the page's parent page. We use the + * standard search mechanism to search for the page's high key; this will + * give us a link to either the current parent or someplace to its left + * (if there are multiple equal high keys). In recursion cases, the + * caller already generated a search stack and we can just re-use that + * work. */ if (stack == NULL) { @@ -933,11 +933,11 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) /* * During WAL recovery, we can't use _bt_search (for one reason, * it might invoke user-defined comparison functions that expect - * facilities not available in recovery mode). Instead, just - * set up a dummy stack pointing to the left end of the parent - * tree level, from which _bt_getstackbuf will walk right to the - * parent page. Painful, but we don't care too much about - * performance in this scenario. + * facilities not available in recovery mode). Instead, just set + * up a dummy stack pointing to the left end of the parent tree + * level, from which _bt_getstackbuf will walk right to the parent + * page. Painful, but we don't care too much about performance in + * this scenario. */ pbuf = _bt_get_endpoint(rel, targetlevel + 1, false); stack = (BTStack) palloc(sizeof(BTStackData)); @@ -951,10 +951,10 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) /* * We cannot delete a page that is the rightmost child of its immediate - * parent, unless it is the only child --- in which case the parent has - * to be deleted too, and the same condition applies recursively to it. - * We have to check this condition all the way up before trying to delete. - * We don't need to re-test when deleting a non-leaf page, though. + * parent, unless it is the only child --- in which case the parent has to + * be deleted too, and the same condition applies recursively to it. We + * have to check this condition all the way up before trying to delete. We + * don't need to re-test when deleting a non-leaf page, though. */ if (targetlevel == 0 && !_bt_parent_deletion_safe(rel, target, stack)) @@ -1072,8 +1072,8 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) * might be possible to push the fast root even further down, but the odds * of doing so are slim, and the locking considerations daunting.) * - * We don't support handling this in the case where the parent is - * becoming half-dead, even though it theoretically could occur. + * We don't support handling this in the case where the parent is becoming + * half-dead, even though it theoretically could occur. * * We can safely acquire a lock on the metapage here --- see comments for * _bt_newroot(). @@ -1287,10 +1287,10 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) _bt_relbuf(rel, lbuf); /* - * If parent became half dead, recurse to delete it. Otherwise, if - * right sibling is empty and is now the last child of the parent, recurse - * to try to delete it. (These cases cannot apply at the same time, - * though the second case might itself recurse to the first.) + * If parent became half dead, recurse to delete it. Otherwise, if right + * sibling is empty and is now the last child of the parent, recurse to + * try to delete it. (These cases cannot apply at the same time, though + * the second case might itself recurse to the first.) * * When recursing to parent, we hold the lock on the target page until * done. This delays any insertions into the keyspace that was just diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c index b947d770aa..7b71f544f8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c,v 1.113 2007/05/27 03:50:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c,v 1.114 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -637,17 +637,17 @@ _bt_first(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection dir) * even if the row comparison is of ">" or "<" type, because the * condition applied to all but the last row member is effectively * ">=" or "<=", and so the extra keys don't break the positioning - * scheme. But, by the same token, if we aren't able to use all + * scheme. But, by the same token, if we aren't able to use all * the row members, then the part of the row comparison that we - * did use has to be treated as just a ">=" or "<=" condition, - * and so we'd better adjust strat_total accordingly. + * did use has to be treated as just a ">=" or "<=" condition, and + * so we'd better adjust strat_total accordingly. */ if (i == keysCount - 1) { bool used_all_subkeys = false; Assert(!(subkey->sk_flags & SK_ROW_END)); - for(;;) + for (;;) { subkey++; Assert(subkey->sk_flags & SK_ROW_MEMBER); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c index 6d85695c3d..a1b0125f78 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.86 2007/09/12 22:10:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.87 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ _bt_freestack(BTStack stack) * that's the only one returned. (So, we return either a single = key, * or one or two boundary-condition keys for each attr.) However, if we * cannot compare two keys for lack of a suitable cross-type operator, - * we cannot eliminate either. If there are two such keys of the same + * we cannot eliminate either. If there are two such keys of the same * operator strategy, the second one is just pushed into the output array * without further processing here. We may also emit both >/>= or both * </<= keys if we can't compare them. The logic about required keys still @@ -265,13 +265,13 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) { /* * We treat all btree operators as strict (even if they're not so - * marked in pg_proc). This means that it is impossible for an - * operator condition with a NULL comparison constant to succeed, - * and we can reject it right away. + * marked in pg_proc). This means that it is impossible for an + * operator condition with a NULL comparison constant to succeed, and + * we can reject it right away. * * However, we now also support "x IS NULL" clauses as search - * conditions, so in that case keep going. The planner has not - * filled in any particular strategy in this case, so set it to + * conditions, so in that case keep going. The planner has not filled + * in any particular strategy in this case, so set it to * BTEqualStrategyNumber --- we can treat IS NULL as an equality * operator for purposes of search strategy. */ @@ -303,8 +303,8 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) /* * Initialize for processing of keys for attr 1. * - * xform[i] points to the currently best scan key of strategy type i+1; - * it is NULL if we haven't yet found such a key for this attr. + * xform[i] points to the currently best scan key of strategy type i+1; it + * is NULL if we haven't yet found such a key for this attr. */ attno = 1; memset(xform, 0, sizeof(xform)); @@ -464,6 +464,7 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) memcpy(outkey, cur, sizeof(ScanKeyData)); if (numberOfEqualCols == attno - 1) _bt_mark_scankey_required(outkey); + /* * We don't support RowCompare using equality; such a qual would * mess up the numberOfEqualCols tracking. @@ -514,9 +515,9 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) else { /* - * We can't determine which key is more restrictive. Keep - * the previous one in xform[j] and push this one directly - * to the output array. + * We can't determine which key is more restrictive. Keep the + * previous one in xform[j] and push this one directly to the + * output array. */ ScanKey outkey = &outkeys[new_numberOfKeys++]; @@ -542,7 +543,7 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) * and amoplefttype/amoprighttype equal to the two argument datatypes. * * If the opfamily doesn't supply a complete set of cross-type operators we - * may not be able to make the comparison. If we can make the comparison + * may not be able to make the comparison. If we can make the comparison * we store the operator result in *result and return TRUE. We return FALSE * if the comparison could not be made. * @@ -608,8 +609,8 @@ _bt_compare_scankey_args(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanKey op, * indexscan initiated by syscache lookup will use cross-data-type * operators.) * - * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption, - * we have to un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member. + * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption, we + * have to un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member. */ strat = op->sk_strategy; if (op->sk_flags & SK_BT_DESC) @@ -654,7 +655,7 @@ _bt_compare_scankey_args(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanKey op, static void _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption(ScanKey skey, int16 *indoption) { - int addflags; + int addflags; addflags = indoption[skey->sk_attno - 1] << SK_BT_INDOPTION_SHIFT; if ((addflags & SK_BT_DESC) && !(skey->sk_flags & SK_BT_DESC)) @@ -874,8 +875,8 @@ _bt_checkkeys(IndexScanDesc scan, /* * Since NULLs are sorted before non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the lower limit of the range of values for this - * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, + * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual + * is one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((key->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQBKWD) && @@ -887,8 +888,8 @@ _bt_checkkeys(IndexScanDesc scan, /* * Since NULLs are sorted after non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the upper limit of the range of values for this - * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, + * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is + * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((key->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQFWD) && @@ -978,7 +979,7 @@ _bt_check_rowcompare(ScanKey skey, IndexTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupdesc, * Since NULLs are sorted before non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the lower limit of the range of values for this * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, + * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((subkey->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQBKWD) && @@ -991,7 +992,7 @@ _bt_check_rowcompare(ScanKey skey, IndexTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupdesc, * Since NULLs are sorted after non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the upper limit of the range of values for this * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, + * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((subkey->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQFWD) && @@ -1264,8 +1265,8 @@ _bt_start_vacuum(Relation rel) LWLockAcquire(BtreeVacuumLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); /* - * Assign the next cycle ID, being careful to avoid zero as well as - * the reserved high values. + * Assign the next cycle ID, being careful to avoid zero as well as the + * reserved high values. */ result = ++(btvacinfo->cycle_ctr); if (result == 0 || result > MAX_BT_CYCLE_ID) diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c index 499129c48f..79aae66201 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.46 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.47 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ typedef struct bt_incomplete_action BlockNumber rightblk; /* right half of split */ /* these fields are for a delete: */ BlockNumber delblk; /* parent block to be deleted */ -} bt_incomplete_action; +} bt_incomplete_action; static List *incomplete_actions; @@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, char *datapos; int datalen; OffsetNumber newitemoff = 0; - Item newitem = NULL; - Size newitemsz = 0; + Item newitem = NULL; + Size newitemsz = 0; reln = XLogOpenRelation(xlrec->node); @@ -343,15 +343,15 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, * Reconstruct left (original) sibling if needed. Note that this code * ensures that the items remaining on the left page are in the correct * item number order, but it does not reproduce the physical order they - * would have had. Is this worth changing? See also _bt_restore_page(). + * would have had. Is this worth changing? See also _bt_restore_page(). */ if (!(record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_1)) { - Buffer lbuf = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->leftsib, false); + Buffer lbuf = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->leftsib, false); if (BufferIsValid(lbuf)) { - Page lpage = (Page) BufferGetPage(lbuf); + Page lpage = (Page) BufferGetPage(lbuf); BTPageOpaque lopaque = (BTPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(lpage); if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(lpage))) @@ -359,19 +359,20 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, OffsetNumber off; OffsetNumber maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(lpage); OffsetNumber deletable[MaxOffsetNumber]; - int ndeletable = 0; - ItemId hiItemId; - Item hiItem; + int ndeletable = 0; + ItemId hiItemId; + Item hiItem; /* - * Remove the items from the left page that were copied to - * the right page. Also remove the old high key, if any. - * (We must remove everything before trying to insert any - * items, else we risk not having enough space.) + * Remove the items from the left page that were copied to the + * right page. Also remove the old high key, if any. (We must + * remove everything before trying to insert any items, else + * we risk not having enough space.) */ if (!P_RIGHTMOST(lopaque)) { deletable[ndeletable++] = P_HIKEY; + /* * newitemoff is given to us relative to the original * page's item numbering, so adjust it for this deletion. @@ -421,11 +422,11 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, /* Fix left-link of the page to the right of the new right sibling */ if (xlrec->rnext != P_NONE && !(record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_2)) { - Buffer buffer = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->rnext, false); + Buffer buffer = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->rnext, false); if (BufferIsValid(buffer)) { - Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { @@ -795,7 +796,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -807,7 +808,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -819,7 +820,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -831,7 +832,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c index 419c865606..72be0e855a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@ * CLOG page is initialized to zeroes. Other writes of CLOG come from * recording of transaction commit or abort in xact.c, which generates its * own XLOG records for these events and will re-perform the status update - * on redo; so we need make no additional XLOG entry here. For synchronous + * on redo; so we need make no additional XLOG entry here. For synchronous * transaction commits, the XLOG is guaranteed flushed through the XLOG commit * record before we are called to log a commit, so the WAL rule "write xlog * before data" is satisfied automatically. However, for async commits we * must track the latest LSN affecting each CLOG page, so that we can flush - * XLOG that far and satisfy the WAL rule. We don't have to worry about this + * XLOG that far and satisfy the WAL rule. We don't have to worry about this * for aborts (whether sync or async), since the post-crash assumption would * be that such transactions failed anyway. * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c,v 1.44 2007/09/05 18:10:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c,v 1.45 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ #define TransactionIdToBIndex(xid) ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) /* We store the latest async LSN for each group of transactions */ -#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP 32 /* keep this a power of 2 */ -#define CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE (CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) +#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP 32 /* keep this a power of 2 */ +#define CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE (CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) #define GetLSNIndex(slotno, xid) ((slotno) * CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE + \ ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE) / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ static void WriteTruncateXlogRec(int pageno); * Record the final state of a transaction in the commit log. * * lsn must be the WAL location of the commit record when recording an async - * commit. For a synchronous commit it can be InvalidXLogRecPtr, since the + * commit. For a synchronous commit it can be InvalidXLogRecPtr, since the * caller guarantees the commit record is already flushed in that case. It * should be InvalidXLogRecPtr for abort cases, too. * @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ TransactionIdSetStatus(TransactionId xid, XidStatus status, XLogRecPtr lsn) * an LSN that is late enough to be able to guarantee that if we flush up to * that LSN then we will have flushed the transaction's commit record to disk. * The result is not necessarily the exact LSN of the transaction's commit - * record! For example, for long-past transactions (those whose clog pages + * record! For example, for long-past transactions (those whose clog pages * already migrated to disk), we'll return InvalidXLogRecPtr. Also, because * we group transactions on the same clog page to conserve storage, we might * return the LSN of a later transaction that falls into the same group. @@ -486,8 +486,8 @@ clog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) memcpy(&pageno, XLogRecGetData(record), sizeof(int)); /* - * During XLOG replay, latest_page_number isn't set up yet; insert - * a suitable value to bypass the sanity test in SimpleLruTruncate. + * During XLOG replay, latest_page_number isn't set up yet; insert a + * suitable value to bypass the sanity test in SimpleLruTruncate. */ ClogCtl->shared->latest_page_number = pageno; diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c index b34fa9be78..61a59961d7 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.25 2007/09/05 18:10:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.26 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -380,9 +380,9 @@ MultiXactIdIsRunning(MultiXactId multi) } /* - * Checking for myself is cheap compared to looking in shared memory, - * so first do the equivalent of MultiXactIdIsCurrent(). This is not - * needed for correctness, it's just a fast path. + * Checking for myself is cheap compared to looking in shared memory, so + * first do the equivalent of MultiXactIdIsCurrent(). This is not needed + * for correctness, it's just a fast path. */ for (i = 0; i < nmembers; i++) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c b/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c index e53b05e04d..db0f79c47c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c,v 1.71 2007/09/08 20:31:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c,v 1.72 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * This file contains the high level access-method interface to the @@ -440,14 +440,14 @@ TransactionId TransactionIdLatest(TransactionId mainxid, int nxids, const TransactionId *xids) { - TransactionId result; + TransactionId result; /* - * In practice it is highly likely that the xids[] array is sorted, and - * so we could save some cycles by just taking the last child XID, but - * this probably isn't so performance-critical that it's worth depending - * on that assumption. But just to show we're not totally stupid, scan - * the array back-to-front to avoid useless assignments. + * In practice it is highly likely that the xids[] array is sorted, and so + * we could save some cycles by just taking the last child XID, but this + * probably isn't so performance-critical that it's worth depending on + * that assumption. But just to show we're not totally stupid, scan the + * array back-to-front to avoid useless assignments. */ result = mainxid; while (--nxids >= 0) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c index 6ce9d1b586..2888adbc37 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.37 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.38 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Each global transaction is associated with a global transaction @@ -397,15 +397,15 @@ LockGXact(const char *gid, Oid user) errhint("Must be superuser or the user that prepared the transaction."))); /* - * Note: it probably would be possible to allow committing from another - * database; but at the moment NOTIFY is known not to work and there - * may be some other issues as well. Hence disallow until someone - * gets motivated to make it work. + * Note: it probably would be possible to allow committing from + * another database; but at the moment NOTIFY is known not to work and + * there may be some other issues as well. Hence disallow until + * someone gets motivated to make it work. */ if (MyDatabaseId != gxact->proc.databaseId) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("prepared transaction belongs to another database"), + errmsg("prepared transaction belongs to another database"), errhint("Connect to the database where the transaction was prepared to finish it."))); /* OK for me to lock it */ @@ -937,11 +937,11 @@ EndPrepare(GlobalTransaction gxact) * odds of a PANIC actually occurring should be very tiny given that we * were able to write the bogus CRC above. * - * We have to set inCommit here, too; otherwise a checkpoint - * starting immediately after the WAL record is inserted could complete - * without fsync'ing our state file. (This is essentially the same kind - * of race condition as the COMMIT-to-clog-write case that - * RecordTransactionCommit uses inCommit for; see notes there.) + * We have to set inCommit here, too; otherwise a checkpoint starting + * immediately after the WAL record is inserted could complete without + * fsync'ing our state file. (This is essentially the same kind of race + * condition as the COMMIT-to-clog-write case that RecordTransactionCommit + * uses inCommit for; see notes there.) * * We save the PREPARE record's location in the gxact for later use by * CheckPointTwoPhase. @@ -985,8 +985,8 @@ EndPrepare(GlobalTransaction gxact) MarkAsPrepared(gxact); /* - * Now we can mark ourselves as out of the commit critical section: - * a checkpoint starting after this will certainly see the gxact as a + * Now we can mark ourselves as out of the commit critical section: a + * checkpoint starting after this will certainly see the gxact as a * candidate for fsyncing. */ MyProc->inCommit = false; @@ -1272,8 +1272,8 @@ RemoveTwoPhaseFile(TransactionId xid, bool giveWarning) if (errno != ENOENT || giveWarning) ereport(WARNING, (errcode_for_file_access(), - errmsg("could not remove two-phase state file \"%s\": %m", - path))); + errmsg("could not remove two-phase state file \"%s\": %m", + path))); } /* @@ -1500,8 +1500,8 @@ PrescanPreparedTransactions(void) if (buf == NULL) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); continue; } @@ -1511,8 +1511,8 @@ PrescanPreparedTransactions(void) if (!TransactionIdEquals(hdr->xid, xid)) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); pfree(buf); continue; @@ -1599,8 +1599,8 @@ RecoverPreparedTransactions(void) if (buf == NULL) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); continue; } @@ -1711,9 +1711,9 @@ RecordTransactionCommitPrepared(TransactionId xid, recptr = XLogInsert(RM_XACT_ID, XLOG_XACT_COMMIT_PREPARED, rdata); /* - * We don't currently try to sleep before flush here ... nor is there - * any support for async commit of a prepared xact (the very idea is - * probably a contradiction) + * We don't currently try to sleep before flush here ... nor is there any + * support for async commit of a prepared xact (the very idea is probably + * a contradiction) */ /* Flush XLOG to disk */ diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c index 9c2f14a1a3..84d1e9caef 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.5 2007/05/27 03:50:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ const TwoPhaseCallback twophase_postcommit_callbacks[TWOPHASE_RM_MAX_ID + 1] = lock_twophase_postcommit, /* Lock */ inval_twophase_postcommit, /* Inval */ flatfile_twophase_postcommit, /* flat file update */ - notify_twophase_postcommit, /* notify/listen */ + notify_twophase_postcommit, /* notify/listen */ pgstat_twophase_postcommit /* pgstat */ }; diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c index 14332c6ab2..d7a5183d4c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2000-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.79 2007/09/08 20:31:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.80 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -73,9 +73,9 @@ GetNewTransactionId(bool isSubXact) TransactionIdIsValid(ShmemVariableCache->xidVacLimit)) { /* - * To avoid swamping the postmaster with signals, we issue the - * autovac request only once per 64K transaction starts. This - * still gives plenty of chances before we get into real trouble. + * To avoid swamping the postmaster with signals, we issue the autovac + * request only once per 64K transaction starts. This still gives + * plenty of chances before we get into real trouble. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && (xid % 65536) == 0) SendPostmasterSignal(PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER); @@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ GetNewTransactionId(bool isSubXact) /* * We must store the new XID into the shared ProcArray before releasing - * XidGenLock. This ensures that every active XID older than - * latestCompletedXid is present in the ProcArray, which is essential - * for correct OldestXmin tracking; see src/backend/access/transam/README. + * XidGenLock. This ensures that every active XID older than + * latestCompletedXid is present in the ProcArray, which is essential for + * correct OldestXmin tracking; see src/backend/access/transam/README. * * XXX by storing xid into MyProc without acquiring ProcArrayLock, we are * relying on fetch/store of an xid to be atomic, else other backends @@ -249,18 +249,18 @@ SetTransactionIdLimit(TransactionId oldest_datfrozenxid, xidWarnLimit -= FirstNormalTransactionId; /* - * We'll start trying to force autovacuums when oldest_datfrozenxid - * gets to be more than autovacuum_freeze_max_age transactions old. + * We'll start trying to force autovacuums when oldest_datfrozenxid gets + * to be more than autovacuum_freeze_max_age transactions old. * - * Note: guc.c ensures that autovacuum_freeze_max_age is in a sane - * range, so that xidVacLimit will be well before xidWarnLimit. + * Note: guc.c ensures that autovacuum_freeze_max_age is in a sane range, + * so that xidVacLimit will be well before xidWarnLimit. * * Note: autovacuum_freeze_max_age is a PGC_POSTMASTER parameter so that * we don't have to worry about dealing with on-the-fly changes in its * value. It doesn't look practical to update shared state from a GUC * assign hook (too many processes would try to execute the hook, - * resulting in race conditions as well as crashes of those not - * connected to shared memory). Perhaps this can be improved someday. + * resulting in race conditions as well as crashes of those not connected + * to shared memory). Perhaps this can be improved someday. */ xidVacLimit = oldest_datfrozenxid + autovacuum_freeze_max_age; if (xidVacLimit < FirstNormalTransactionId) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c index b7ab958586..04804c3871 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.252 2007/11/10 14:36:44 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.253 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -274,8 +274,8 @@ IsTransactionState(void) TransactionState s = CurrentTransactionState; /* - * TRANS_DEFAULT and TRANS_ABORT are obviously unsafe states. However, - * we also reject the startup/shutdown states TRANS_START, TRANS_COMMIT, + * TRANS_DEFAULT and TRANS_ABORT are obviously unsafe states. However, we + * also reject the startup/shutdown states TRANS_START, TRANS_COMMIT, * TRANS_PREPARE since it might be too soon or too late within those * transition states to do anything interesting. Hence, the only "valid" * state is TRANS_INPROGRESS. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ GetCurrentTransactionIdIfAny(void) static void AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) { - bool isSubXact = (s->parent != NULL); + bool isSubXact = (s->parent != NULL); ResourceOwner currentOwner; /* Assert that caller didn't screw up */ @@ -400,9 +400,9 @@ AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) SubTransSetParent(s->transactionId, s->parent->transactionId); /* - * Acquire lock on the transaction XID. (We assume this cannot block.) - * We have to ensure that the lock is assigned to the transaction's - * own ResourceOwner. + * Acquire lock on the transaction XID. (We assume this cannot block.) We + * have to ensure that the lock is assigned to the transaction's own + * ResourceOwner. */ currentOwner = CurrentResourceOwner; PG_TRY(); @@ -626,9 +626,9 @@ AtStart_Memory(void) /* * If this is the first time through, create a private context for * AbortTransaction to work in. By reserving some space now, we can - * insulate AbortTransaction from out-of-memory scenarios. Like - * ErrorContext, we set it up with slow growth rate and a nonzero - * minimum size, so that space will be reserved immediately. + * insulate AbortTransaction from out-of-memory scenarios. Like + * ErrorContext, we set it up with slow growth rate and a nonzero minimum + * size, so that space will be reserved immediately. */ if (TransactionAbortContext == NULL) TransactionAbortContext = @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ AtSubStart_ResourceOwner(void) * RecordTransactionCommit * * Returns latest XID among xact and its children, or InvalidTransactionId - * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) + * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) * * This is exported only to support an ugly hack in VACUUM FULL. */ @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ TransactionId RecordTransactionCommit(void) { TransactionId xid = GetTopTransactionIdIfAny(); - bool markXidCommitted = TransactionIdIsValid(xid); + bool markXidCommitted = TransactionIdIsValid(xid); TransactionId latestXid = InvalidTransactionId; int nrels; RelFileNode *rels; @@ -770,29 +770,29 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) nchildren = xactGetCommittedChildren(&children); /* - * If we haven't been assigned an XID yet, we neither can, nor do we - * want to write a COMMIT record. + * If we haven't been assigned an XID yet, we neither can, nor do we want + * to write a COMMIT record. */ if (!markXidCommitted) { /* * We expect that every smgrscheduleunlink is followed by a catalog - * update, and hence XID assignment, so we shouldn't get here with - * any pending deletes. Use a real test not just an Assert to check - * this, since it's a bit fragile. + * update, and hence XID assignment, so we shouldn't get here with any + * pending deletes. Use a real test not just an Assert to check this, + * since it's a bit fragile. */ if (nrels != 0) elog(ERROR, "cannot commit a transaction that deleted files but has no xid"); /* Can't have child XIDs either; AssignTransactionId enforces this */ Assert(nchildren == 0); - + /* * If we didn't create XLOG entries, we're done here; otherwise we - * should flush those entries the same as a commit record. (An + * should flush those entries the same as a commit record. (An * example of a possible record that wouldn't cause an XID to be - * assigned is a sequence advance record due to nextval() --- we - * want to flush that to disk before reporting commit.) + * assigned is a sequence advance record due to nextval() --- we want + * to flush that to disk before reporting commit.) */ if (XactLastRecEnd.xrecoff == 0) goto cleanup; @@ -802,30 +802,29 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Begin commit critical section and insert the commit XLOG record. */ - XLogRecData rdata[3]; - int lastrdata = 0; - xl_xact_commit xlrec; + XLogRecData rdata[3]; + int lastrdata = 0; + xl_xact_commit xlrec; /* Tell bufmgr and smgr to prepare for commit */ BufmgrCommit(); /* - * Mark ourselves as within our "commit critical section". This + * Mark ourselves as within our "commit critical section". This * forces any concurrent checkpoint to wait until we've updated - * pg_clog. Without this, it is possible for the checkpoint to - * set REDO after the XLOG record but fail to flush the pg_clog - * update to disk, leading to loss of the transaction commit if - * the system crashes a little later. + * pg_clog. Without this, it is possible for the checkpoint to set + * REDO after the XLOG record but fail to flush the pg_clog update to + * disk, leading to loss of the transaction commit if the system + * crashes a little later. * * Note: we could, but don't bother to, set this flag in - * RecordTransactionAbort. That's because loss of a transaction - * abort is noncritical; the presumption would be that it aborted, - * anyway. + * RecordTransactionAbort. That's because loss of a transaction abort + * is noncritical; the presumption would be that it aborted, anyway. * - * It's safe to change the inCommit flag of our own backend - * without holding the ProcArrayLock, since we're the only one - * modifying it. This makes checkpoint's determination of which - * xacts are inCommit a bit fuzzy, but it doesn't matter. + * It's safe to change the inCommit flag of our own backend without + * holding the ProcArrayLock, since we're the only one modifying it. + * This makes checkpoint's determination of which xacts are inCommit a + * bit fuzzy, but it doesn't matter. */ START_CRIT_SECTION(); MyProc->inCommit = true; @@ -864,7 +863,7 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) * Check if we want to commit asynchronously. If the user has set * synchronous_commit = off, and we're not doing cleanup of any non-temp * rels nor committing any command that wanted to force sync commit, then - * we can defer flushing XLOG. (We must not allow asynchronous commit if + * we can defer flushing XLOG. (We must not allow asynchronous commit if * there are any non-temp tables to be deleted, because we might delete * the files before the COMMIT record is flushed to disk. We do allow * asynchronous commit if all to-be-deleted tables are temporary though, @@ -875,15 +874,14 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Synchronous commit case. * - * Sleep before flush! So we can flush more than one commit - * records per single fsync. (The idea is some other backend - * may do the XLogFlush while we're sleeping. This needs work - * still, because on most Unixen, the minimum select() delay - * is 10msec or more, which is way too long.) + * Sleep before flush! So we can flush more than one commit records + * per single fsync. (The idea is some other backend may do the + * XLogFlush while we're sleeping. This needs work still, because on + * most Unixen, the minimum select() delay is 10msec or more, which is + * way too long.) * - * We do not sleep if enableFsync is not turned on, nor if - * there are fewer than CommitSiblings other backends with - * active transactions. + * We do not sleep if enableFsync is not turned on, nor if there are + * fewer than CommitSiblings other backends with active transactions. */ if (CommitDelay > 0 && enableFsync && CountActiveBackends() >= CommitSiblings) @@ -906,15 +904,15 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Asynchronous commit case. * - * Report the latest async commit LSN, so that - * the WAL writer knows to flush this commit. + * Report the latest async commit LSN, so that the WAL writer knows to + * flush this commit. */ XLogSetAsyncCommitLSN(XactLastRecEnd); /* - * We must not immediately update the CLOG, since we didn't - * flush the XLOG. Instead, we store the LSN up to which - * the XLOG must be flushed before the CLOG may be updated. + * We must not immediately update the CLOG, since we didn't flush the + * XLOG. Instead, we store the LSN up to which the XLOG must be + * flushed before the CLOG may be updated. */ if (markXidCommitted) { @@ -925,8 +923,8 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) } /* - * If we entered a commit critical section, leave it now, and - * let checkpoints proceed. + * If we entered a commit critical section, leave it now, and let + * checkpoints proceed. */ if (markXidCommitted) { @@ -1068,11 +1066,11 @@ RecordSubTransactionCommit(void) * We do not log the subcommit in XLOG; it doesn't matter until the * top-level transaction commits. * - * We must mark the subtransaction subcommitted in the CLOG if - * it had a valid XID assigned. If it did not, nobody else will - * ever know about the existence of this subxact. We don't - * have to deal with deletions scheduled for on-commit here, since - * they'll be reassigned to our parent (who might still abort). + * We must mark the subtransaction subcommitted in the CLOG if it had a + * valid XID assigned. If it did not, nobody else will ever know about + * the existence of this subxact. We don't have to deal with deletions + * scheduled for on-commit here, since they'll be reassigned to our parent + * (who might still abort). */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) { @@ -1095,7 +1093,7 @@ RecordSubTransactionCommit(void) * RecordTransactionAbort * * Returns latest XID among xact and its children, or InvalidTransactionId - * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) + * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) */ static TransactionId RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) @@ -1106,15 +1104,15 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) RelFileNode *rels; int nchildren; TransactionId *children; - XLogRecData rdata[3]; - int lastrdata = 0; - xl_xact_abort xlrec; + XLogRecData rdata[3]; + int lastrdata = 0; + xl_xact_abort xlrec; /* - * If we haven't been assigned an XID, nobody will care whether we - * aborted or not. Hence, we're done in that case. It does not matter - * if we have rels to delete (note that this routine is not responsible - * for actually deleting 'em). We cannot have any child XIDs, either. + * If we haven't been assigned an XID, nobody will care whether we aborted + * or not. Hence, we're done in that case. It does not matter if we have + * rels to delete (note that this routine is not responsible for actually + * deleting 'em). We cannot have any child XIDs, either. */ if (!TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) { @@ -1128,7 +1126,7 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) * We have a valid XID, so we should write an ABORT record for it. * * We do not flush XLOG to disk here, since the default assumption after a - * crash would be that we aborted, anyway. For the same reason, we don't + * crash would be that we aborted, anyway. For the same reason, we don't * need to worry about interlocking against checkpoint start. */ @@ -1189,10 +1187,10 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) * having flushed the ABORT record to disk, because in event of a crash * we'd be assumed to have aborted anyway. * - * The ordering here isn't critical but it seems best to mark the - * parent first. This assures an atomic transition of all the - * subtransactions to aborted state from the point of view of - * concurrent TransactionIdDidAbort calls. + * The ordering here isn't critical but it seems best to mark the parent + * first. This assures an atomic transition of all the subtransactions to + * aborted state from the point of view of concurrent + * TransactionIdDidAbort calls. */ TransactionIdAbort(xid); TransactionIdAbortTree(nchildren, children); @@ -1231,9 +1229,9 @@ static void AtAbort_Memory(void) { /* - * Switch into TransactionAbortContext, which should have some free - * space even if nothing else does. We'll work in this context until - * we've finished cleaning up. + * Switch into TransactionAbortContext, which should have some free space + * even if nothing else does. We'll work in this context until we've + * finished cleaning up. * * It is barely possible to get here when we've not been able to create * TransactionAbortContext yet; if so use TopMemoryContext. @@ -1438,7 +1436,7 @@ StartTransaction(void) VirtualXactLockTableInsert(vxid); /* - * Advertise it in the proc array. We assume assignment of + * Advertise it in the proc array. We assume assignment of * LocalTransactionID is atomic, and the backendId should be set already. */ Assert(MyProc->backendId == vxid.backendId); @@ -1449,8 +1447,8 @@ StartTransaction(void) /* * set transaction_timestamp() (a/k/a now()). We want this to be the same * as the first command's statement_timestamp(), so don't do a fresh - * GetCurrentTimestamp() call (which'd be expensive anyway). Also, - * mark xactStopTimestamp as unset. + * GetCurrentTimestamp() call (which'd be expensive anyway). Also, mark + * xactStopTimestamp as unset. */ xactStartTimestamp = stmtStartTimestamp; xactStopTimestamp = 0; @@ -1576,8 +1574,8 @@ CommitTransaction(void) PG_TRACE1(transaction__commit, MyProc->lxid); /* - * Let others know about no transaction in progress by me. Note that - * this must be done _before_ releasing locks we hold and _after_ + * Let others know about no transaction in progress by me. Note that this + * must be done _before_ releasing locks we hold and _after_ * RecordTransactionCommit. */ ProcArrayEndTransaction(MyProc, latestXid); @@ -2503,7 +2501,7 @@ AbortCurrentTransaction(void) * inside a function or multi-query querystring. (We will always fail if * this is false, but it's convenient to centralize the check here instead of * making callers do it.) - * stmtType: statement type name, for error messages. + * stmtType: statement type name, for error messages. */ void PreventTransactionChain(bool isTopLevel, const char *stmtType) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c index 36adc20848..3218c134e5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.287 2007/11/15 20:36:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ bool XLOG_DEBUG = false; * future XLOG segment as long as there aren't already XLOGfileslop future * segments; else we'll delete it. This could be made a separate GUC * variable, but at present I think it's sufficient to hardwire it as - * 2*CheckPointSegments+1. Under normal conditions, a checkpoint will free + * 2*CheckPointSegments+1. Under normal conditions, a checkpoint will free * no more than 2*CheckPointSegments log segments, and we want to recycle all * of them; the +1 allows boundary cases to happen without wasting a * delete/create-segment cycle. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData XLogwrtResult LogwrtResult; uint32 ckptXidEpoch; /* nextXID & epoch of latest checkpoint */ TransactionId ckptXid; - XLogRecPtr asyncCommitLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit */ + XLogRecPtr asyncCommitLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit */ /* Protected by WALWriteLock: */ XLogCtlWrite Write; @@ -737,8 +737,8 @@ begin:; * full-block records into the non-full-block format. * * Note: we could just set the flag whenever !forcePageWrites, but - * defining it like this leaves the info bit free for some potential - * other use in records without any backup blocks. + * defining it like this leaves the info bit free for some potential other + * use in records without any backup blocks. */ if ((info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_MASK) && !Insert->forcePageWrites) info |= XLR_BKP_REMOVABLE; @@ -1345,10 +1345,10 @@ static bool XLogCheckpointNeeded(void) { /* - * A straight computation of segment number could overflow 32 - * bits. Rather than assuming we have working 64-bit - * arithmetic, we compare the highest-order bits separately, - * and force a checkpoint immediately when they change. + * A straight computation of segment number could overflow 32 bits. + * Rather than assuming we have working 64-bit arithmetic, we compare the + * highest-order bits separately, and force a checkpoint immediately when + * they change. */ uint32 old_segno, new_segno; @@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ XLogCheckpointNeeded(void) new_segno = (openLogId % XLogSegSize) * XLogSegsPerFile + openLogSeg; new_highbits = openLogId / XLogSegSize; if (new_highbits != old_highbits || - new_segno >= old_segno + (uint32) (CheckPointSegments-1)) + new_segno >= old_segno + (uint32) (CheckPointSegments - 1)) return true; return false; } @@ -1558,9 +1558,9 @@ XLogWrite(XLogwrtRqst WriteRqst, bool flexible, bool xlog_switch) /* * Signal bgwriter to start a checkpoint if we've consumed too * much xlog since the last one. For speed, we first check - * using the local copy of RedoRecPtr, which might be - * out of date; if it looks like a checkpoint is needed, - * forcibly update RedoRecPtr and recheck. + * using the local copy of RedoRecPtr, which might be out of + * date; if it looks like a checkpoint is needed, forcibly + * update RedoRecPtr and recheck. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && XLogCheckpointNeeded()) @@ -1779,9 +1779,9 @@ XLogFlush(XLogRecPtr record) * We normally flush only completed blocks; but if there is nothing to do on * that basis, we check for unflushed async commits in the current incomplete * block, and flush through the latest one of those. Thus, if async commits - * are not being used, we will flush complete blocks only. We can guarantee + * are not being used, we will flush complete blocks only. We can guarantee * that async commits reach disk after at most three cycles; normally only - * one or two. (We allow XLogWrite to write "flexibly", meaning it can stop + * one or two. (We allow XLogWrite to write "flexibly", meaning it can stop * at the end of the buffer ring; this makes a difference only with very high * load or long wal_writer_delay, but imposes one extra cycle for the worst * case for async commits.) @@ -1861,6 +1861,7 @@ void XLogAsyncCommitFlush(void) { XLogRecPtr WriteRqstPtr; + /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; @@ -2252,7 +2253,7 @@ InstallXLogFileSegment(uint32 *log, uint32 *seg, char *tmppath, LWLockRelease(ControlFileLock); return false; } -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), @@ -2432,8 +2433,8 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, int rc; bool signaled; struct stat stat_buf; - uint32 restartLog; - uint32 restartSeg; + uint32 restartLog; + uint32 restartSeg; /* * When doing archive recovery, we always prefer an archived log file even @@ -2511,8 +2512,8 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, sp++; XLByteToSeg(ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo, restartLog, restartSeg); - XLogFileName(lastRestartPointFname, - ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID, + XLogFileName(lastRestartPointFname, + ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID, restartLog, restartSeg); StrNCpy(dp, lastRestartPointFname, endp - dp); dp += strlen(dp); @@ -2594,17 +2595,17 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, * incorrectly. We have to assume the former. * * However, if the failure was due to any sort of signal, it's best to - * punt and abort recovery. (If we "return false" here, upper levels - * will assume that recovery is complete and start up the database!) - * It's essential to abort on child SIGINT and SIGQUIT, because per spec + * punt and abort recovery. (If we "return false" here, upper levels will + * assume that recovery is complete and start up the database!) It's + * essential to abort on child SIGINT and SIGQUIT, because per spec * system() ignores SIGINT and SIGQUIT while waiting; if we see one of * those it's a good bet we should have gotten it too. Aborting on other * signals such as SIGTERM seems a good idea as well. * - * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when - * a called command died on a signal. Also, 126 and 127 are used to - * report problems such as an unfindable command; treat those as fatal - * errors too. + * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when a called + * command died on a signal. Also, 126 and 127 are used to report + * problems such as an unfindable command; treat those as fatal errors + * too. */ signaled = WIFSIGNALED(rc) || WEXITSTATUS(rc) > 125; @@ -3981,8 +3982,8 @@ ReadControlFile(void) ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("database files are incompatible with server"), errdetail("The database cluster was initialized with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d," - " but the server was compiled with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d.", - ControlFile->toast_max_chunk_size, (int) TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), + " but the server was compiled with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d.", + ControlFile->toast_max_chunk_size, (int) TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), errhint("It looks like you need to recompile or initdb."))); #ifdef HAVE_INT64_TIMESTAMP @@ -4430,7 +4431,7 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) */ recoveryTargetTime = DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in, - CStringGetDatum(tok2), + CStringGetDatum(tok2), ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid), Int32GetDatum(-1))); ereport(LOG, @@ -4629,7 +4630,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis) { bool stopsHere; uint8 record_info; - TimestampTz recordXtime; + TimestampTz recordXtime; /* We only consider stopping at COMMIT or ABORT records */ if (record->xl_rmid != RM_XACT_ID) @@ -4781,11 +4782,11 @@ StartupXLOG(void) (errmsg("database system was interrupted while in recovery at log time %s", str_time(ControlFile->checkPointCopy.time)), errhint("If this has occurred more than once some data might be corrupted" - " and you might need to choose an earlier recovery target."))); + " and you might need to choose an earlier recovery target."))); else if (ControlFile->state == DB_IN_PRODUCTION) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("database system was interrupted; last known up at %s", - str_time(ControlFile->time)))); + (errmsg("database system was interrupted; last known up at %s", + str_time(ControlFile->time)))); /* This is just to allow attaching to startup process with a debugger */ #ifdef XLOG_REPLAY_DELAY @@ -4879,9 +4880,9 @@ StartupXLOG(void) wasShutdown = (record->xl_info == XLOG_CHECKPOINT_SHUTDOWN); ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("redo record is at %X/%X; shutdown %s", - checkPoint.redo.xlogid, checkPoint.redo.xrecoff, - wasShutdown ? "TRUE" : "FALSE"))); + (errmsg("redo record is at %X/%X; shutdown %s", + checkPoint.redo.xlogid, checkPoint.redo.xrecoff, + wasShutdown ? "TRUE" : "FALSE"))); ereport(DEBUG1, (errmsg("next transaction ID: %u/%u; next OID: %u", checkPoint.nextXidEpoch, checkPoint.nextXid, @@ -4920,7 +4921,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) { if (wasShutdown) ereport(PANIC, - (errmsg("invalid redo record in shutdown checkpoint"))); + (errmsg("invalid redo record in shutdown checkpoint"))); InRecovery = true; } else if (ControlFile->state != DB_SHUTDOWNED) @@ -5045,7 +5046,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) */ if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply)) { - reachedStopPoint = true; /* see below */ + reachedStopPoint = true; /* see below */ recoveryContinue = false; if (!recoveryApply) break; @@ -5087,8 +5088,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) ReadRecPtr.xlogid, ReadRecPtr.xrecoff))); if (recoveryLastXTime) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("last completed transaction was at log time %s", - timestamptz_to_str(recoveryLastXTime)))); + (errmsg("last completed transaction was at log time %s", + timestamptz_to_str(recoveryLastXTime)))); InRedo = false; } else @@ -5116,7 +5117,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) if (reachedStopPoint) /* stopped because of stop request */ ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("requested recovery stop point is before end time of backup dump"))); - else /* ran off end of WAL */ + else /* ran off end of WAL */ ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("WAL ends before end time of backup dump"))); } @@ -5124,12 +5125,12 @@ StartupXLOG(void) /* * Consider whether we need to assign a new timeline ID. * - * If we are doing an archive recovery, we always assign a new ID. This - * handles a couple of issues. If we stopped short of the end of WAL + * If we are doing an archive recovery, we always assign a new ID. This + * handles a couple of issues. If we stopped short of the end of WAL * during recovery, then we are clearly generating a new timeline and must * assign it a unique new ID. Even if we ran to the end, modifying the - * current last segment is problematic because it may result in trying - * to overwrite an already-archived copy of that segment, and we encourage + * current last segment is problematic because it may result in trying to + * overwrite an already-archived copy of that segment, and we encourage * DBAs to make their archive_commands reject that. We can dodge the * problem by making the new active segment have a new timeline ID. * @@ -5472,7 +5473,7 @@ GetInsertRecPtr(void) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; - XLogRecPtr recptr; + XLogRecPtr recptr; SpinLockAcquire(&xlogctl->info_lck); recptr = xlogctl->LogwrtRqst.Write; @@ -5576,8 +5577,12 @@ LogCheckpointStart(int flags) static void LogCheckpointEnd(void) { - long write_secs, sync_secs, total_secs; - int write_usecs, sync_usecs, total_usecs; + long write_secs, + sync_secs, + total_secs; + int write_usecs, + sync_usecs, + total_usecs; CheckpointStats.ckpt_end_t = GetCurrentTimestamp(); @@ -5601,9 +5606,9 @@ LogCheckpointEnd(void) CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_added, CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_removed, CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_recycled, - write_secs, write_usecs/1000, - sync_secs, sync_usecs/1000, - total_secs, total_usecs/1000); + write_secs, write_usecs / 1000, + sync_secs, sync_usecs / 1000, + total_secs, total_usecs / 1000); } /* @@ -5665,9 +5670,9 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) } /* - * Let smgr prepare for checkpoint; this has to happen before we - * determine the REDO pointer. Note that smgr must not do anything - * that'd have to be undone if we decide no checkpoint is needed. + * Let smgr prepare for checkpoint; this has to happen before we determine + * the REDO pointer. Note that smgr must not do anything that'd have to + * be undone if we decide no checkpoint is needed. */ smgrpreckpt(); @@ -5761,8 +5766,8 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) LWLockRelease(WALInsertLock); /* - * If enabled, log checkpoint start. We postpone this until now - * so as not to log anything if we decided to skip the checkpoint. + * If enabled, log checkpoint start. We postpone this until now so as not + * to log anything if we decided to skip the checkpoint. */ if (log_checkpoints) LogCheckpointStart(flags); @@ -5782,11 +5787,11 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) * checkpoint take a bit longer than to hold locks longer than necessary. * (In fact, the whole reason we have this issue is that xact.c does * commit record XLOG insertion and clog update as two separate steps - * protected by different locks, but again that seems best on grounds - * of minimizing lock contention.) + * protected by different locks, but again that seems best on grounds of + * minimizing lock contention.) * - * A transaction that has not yet set inCommit when we look cannot be - * at risk, since he's not inserted his commit record yet; and one that's + * A transaction that has not yet set inCommit when we look cannot be at + * risk, since he's not inserted his commit record yet; and one that's * already cleared it is not at risk either, since he's done fixing clog * and we will correctly flush the update below. So we cannot miss any * xacts we need to wait for. @@ -5794,8 +5799,9 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) nInCommit = GetTransactionsInCommit(&inCommitXids); if (nInCommit > 0) { - do { - pg_usleep(10000L); /* wait for 10 msec */ + do + { + pg_usleep(10000L); /* wait for 10 msec */ } while (HaveTransactionsInCommit(inCommitXids, nInCommit)); } pfree(inCommitXids); @@ -5946,7 +5952,7 @@ CheckPointGuts(XLogRecPtr checkPointRedo, int flags) CheckPointCLOG(); CheckPointSUBTRANS(); CheckPointMultiXact(); - CheckPointBuffers(flags); /* performs all required fsyncs */ + CheckPointBuffers(flags); /* performs all required fsyncs */ /* We deliberately delay 2PC checkpointing as long as possible */ CheckPointTwoPhase(checkPointRedo); } @@ -6046,14 +6052,14 @@ XLogPutNextOid(Oid nextOid) * does. * * Note, however, that the above statement only covers state "within" the - * database. When we use a generated OID as a file or directory name, - * we are in a sense violating the basic WAL rule, because that filesystem + * database. When we use a generated OID as a file or directory name, we + * are in a sense violating the basic WAL rule, because that filesystem * change may reach disk before the NEXTOID WAL record does. The impact - * of this is that if a database crash occurs immediately afterward, - * we might after restart re-generate the same OID and find that it - * conflicts with the leftover file or directory. But since for safety's - * sake we always loop until finding a nonconflicting filename, this poses - * no real problem in practice. See pgsql-hackers discussion 27-Sep-2006. + * of this is that if a database crash occurs immediately afterward, we + * might after restart re-generate the same OID and find that it conflicts + * with the leftover file or directory. But since for safety's sake we + * always loop until finding a nonconflicting filename, this poses no real + * problem in practice. See pgsql-hackers discussion 27-Sep-2006. */ } @@ -6673,7 +6679,7 @@ pg_switch_xlog(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser to switch transaction log files")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser to switch transaction log files")))); switchpoint = RequestXLogSwitch(); diff --git a/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c b/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c index c142085637..83b5ee878c 100644 --- a/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c +++ b/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.236 2007/08/02 23:39:44 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.237 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ AuxiliaryProcessMain(int argc, char *argv[]) { char *progname = argv[0]; int flag; - AuxProcType auxType = CheckerProcess; + AuxProcType auxType = CheckerProcess; char *userDoption = NULL; /* @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ AuxiliaryProcessMain(int argc, char *argv[]) InitXLOGAccess(); WalWriterMain(); proc_exit(1); /* should never return */ - + default: elog(PANIC, "unrecognized process type: %d", auxType); proc_exit(1); @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ bootstrap_signals(void) } /* - * Begin shutdown of an auxiliary process. This is approximately the equivalent + * Begin shutdown of an auxiliary process. This is approximately the equivalent * of ShutdownPostgres() in postinit.c. We can't run transactions in an * auxiliary process, so most of the work of AbortTransaction() is not needed, * but we do need to make sure we've released any LWLocks we are holding. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c index 622901a69d..e8c9ea296f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.141 2007/10/12 18:55:11 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.142 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * See acl.h. @@ -2348,8 +2348,8 @@ pg_ts_config_ownercheck(Oid cfg_oid, Oid roleid) if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("text search configuration with OID %u does not exist", - cfg_oid))); + errmsg("text search configuration with OID %u does not exist", + cfg_oid))); ownerId = ((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->cfgowner; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c index 51bb4ba17f..c562223ddb 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.67 2007/08/21 01:11:13 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.68 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -85,29 +85,29 @@ typedef struct * See also getObjectClass(). */ static const Oid object_classes[MAX_OCLASS] = { - RelationRelationId, /* OCLASS_CLASS */ - ProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_PROC */ - TypeRelationId, /* OCLASS_TYPE */ - CastRelationId, /* OCLASS_CAST */ - ConstraintRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONSTRAINT */ - ConversionRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONVERSION */ - AttrDefaultRelationId, /* OCLASS_DEFAULT */ - LanguageRelationId, /* OCLASS_LANGUAGE */ - OperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPERATOR */ - OperatorClassRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPCLASS */ - OperatorFamilyRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPFAMILY */ + RelationRelationId, /* OCLASS_CLASS */ + ProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_PROC */ + TypeRelationId, /* OCLASS_TYPE */ + CastRelationId, /* OCLASS_CAST */ + ConstraintRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONSTRAINT */ + ConversionRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONVERSION */ + AttrDefaultRelationId, /* OCLASS_DEFAULT */ + LanguageRelationId, /* OCLASS_LANGUAGE */ + OperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPERATOR */ + OperatorClassRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPCLASS */ + OperatorFamilyRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPFAMILY */ AccessMethodOperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_AMOP */ AccessMethodProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_AMPROC */ - RewriteRelationId, /* OCLASS_REWRITE */ - TriggerRelationId, /* OCLASS_TRIGGER */ - NamespaceRelationId, /* OCLASS_SCHEMA */ - TSParserRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSPARSER */ - TSDictionaryRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSDICT */ - TSTemplateRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSTEMPLATE */ - TSConfigRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSCONFIG */ - AuthIdRelationId, /* OCLASS_ROLE */ - DatabaseRelationId, /* OCLASS_DATABASE */ - TableSpaceRelationId /* OCLASS_TBLSPACE */ + RewriteRelationId, /* OCLASS_REWRITE */ + TriggerRelationId, /* OCLASS_TRIGGER */ + NamespaceRelationId, /* OCLASS_SCHEMA */ + TSParserRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSPARSER */ + TSDictionaryRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSDICT */ + TSTemplateRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSTEMPLATE */ + TSConfigRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSCONFIG */ + AuthIdRelationId, /* OCLASS_ROLE */ + DatabaseRelationId, /* OCLASS_DATABASE */ + TableSpaceRelationId /* OCLASS_TBLSPACE */ }; @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ doDeletion(const ObjectAddress *object) RemoveTSConfigurationById(object->objectId); break; - /* OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE not handled */ + /* OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE not handled */ default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized object class: %u", @@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search parser %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search parser %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2178,7 +2178,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search dictionary %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search dictionary %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_dict) GETSTRUCT(tup))->dictname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_dict) GETSTRUCT(tup))->dictname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2194,7 +2194,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search template %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search template %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_template) GETSTRUCT(tup))->tmplname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_template) GETSTRUCT(tup))->tmplname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2210,7 +2210,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search configuration %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search configuration %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tup))->cfgname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tup))->cfgname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c index d22bb77a50..d436760b97 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.325 2007/10/29 19:40:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.326 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) { /* * Warn user, but don't fail, if column to be created has UNKNOWN type - * (usually as a result of a 'retrieve into' - jolly) + * (usually as a result of a 'retrieve into' - jolly) */ ereport(WARNING, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), @@ -418,8 +418,8 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) else if (att_typtype == TYPTYPE_PSEUDO) { /* - * Refuse any attempt to create a pseudo-type column, except for - * a special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY during initdb + * Refuse any attempt to create a pseudo-type column, except for a + * special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY during initdb */ if (atttypid != ANYARRAYOID || IsUnderPostmaster) ereport(ERROR, @@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) else if (att_typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE) { /* - * For a composite type, recurse into its attributes. You might - * think this isn't necessary, but since we allow system catalogs - * to break the rule, we have to guard against the case. + * For a composite type, recurse into its attributes. You might think + * this isn't necessary, but since we allow system catalogs to break + * the rule, we have to guard against the case. */ - Relation relation; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - int i; + Relation relation; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + int i; relation = relation_open(get_typ_typrelid(atttypid), AccessShareLock); @@ -702,17 +702,17 @@ AddNewRelationTuple(Relation pg_class_desc, { /* * Initialize to the minimum XID that could put tuples in the table. - * We know that no xacts older than RecentXmin are still running, - * so that will do. + * We know that no xacts older than RecentXmin are still running, so + * that will do. */ new_rel_reltup->relfrozenxid = RecentXmin; } else { /* - * Other relation types will not contain XIDs, so set relfrozenxid - * to InvalidTransactionId. (Note: a sequence does contain a tuple, - * but we force its xmin to be FrozenTransactionId always; see + * Other relation types will not contain XIDs, so set relfrozenxid to + * InvalidTransactionId. (Note: a sequence does contain a tuple, but + * we force its xmin to be FrozenTransactionId always; see * commands/sequence.c.) */ new_rel_reltup->relfrozenxid = InvalidTransactionId; @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ AddNewRelationType(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace, Oid new_rel_oid, char new_rel_kind, - Oid new_array_type) + Oid new_array_type) { return TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined OID */ @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ AddNewRelationType(const char *typeName, InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ InvalidOid, /* array element type - irrelevant */ false, /* this is not an array type */ - new_array_type, /* array type if any */ + new_array_type, /* array type if any */ InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ NULL, /* default value - none */ NULL, /* default binary representation */ @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, Relation new_rel_desc; Oid old_type_oid; Oid new_type_oid; - Oid new_array_oid = InvalidOid; + Oid new_array_oid = InvalidOid; pg_class_desc = heap_open(RelationRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -815,9 +815,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, /* * Since we are going to create a rowtype as well, also check for - * collision with an existing type name. If there is one and it's - * an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way; otherwise - * we can at least give a good error message. + * collision with an existing type name. If there is one and it's an + * autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way; otherwise we can + * at least give a good error message. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, CStringGetDatum(relname), @@ -829,9 +829,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), errmsg("type \"%s\" already exists", relname), - errhint("A relation has an associated type of the same name, " - "so you must use a name that doesn't conflict " - "with any existing type."))); + errhint("A relation has an associated type of the same name, " + "so you must use a name that doesn't conflict " + "with any existing type."))); } /* @@ -880,9 +880,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, Assert(relid == RelationGetRelid(new_rel_desc)); /* - * Decide whether to create an array type over the relation's rowtype. - * We do not create any array types for system catalogs (ie, those made - * during initdb). We create array types for regular relations, views, + * Decide whether to create an array type over the relation's rowtype. We + * do not create any array types for system catalogs (ie, those made + * during initdb). We create array types for regular relations, views, * and composite types ... but not, eg, for toast tables or sequences. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && (relkind == RELKIND_RELATION || @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE)) { /* OK, so pre-assign a type OID for the array type */ - Relation pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + Relation pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); new_array_oid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); @@ -901,14 +901,15 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, * system type corresponding to the new relation. * * NOTE: we could get a unique-index failure here, in case someone else is - * creating the same type name in parallel but hadn't committed yet - * when we checked for a duplicate name above. + * creating the same type name in parallel but hadn't committed yet when + * we checked for a duplicate name above. */ new_type_oid = AddNewRelationType(relname, relnamespace, relid, relkind, - new_array_oid); + new_array_oid); + /* * Now make the array type if wanted. */ @@ -919,32 +920,32 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, relarrayname = makeArrayTypeName(relname, relnamespace); TypeCreate(new_array_oid, /* force the type's OID to this */ - relarrayname, /* Array type name */ - relnamespace, /* Same namespace as parent */ - InvalidOid, /* Not composite, no relationOid */ - 0, /* relkind, also N/A here */ - -1, /* Internal size (varlena) */ - TYPTYPE_BASE, /* Not composite - typelem is */ + relarrayname, /* Array type name */ + relnamespace, /* Same namespace as parent */ + InvalidOid, /* Not composite, no relationOid */ + 0, /* relkind, also N/A here */ + -1, /* Internal size (varlena) */ + TYPTYPE_BASE, /* Not composite - typelem is */ DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* default array delimiter */ - F_ARRAY_IN, /* array input proc */ - F_ARRAY_OUT, /* array output proc */ - F_ARRAY_RECV, /* array recv (bin) proc */ - F_ARRAY_SEND, /* array send (bin) proc */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - new_type_oid, /* array element type - the rowtype */ - true, /* yes, this is an array type */ - InvalidOid, /* this has no array type */ - InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ - NULL, /* default value - none */ - NULL, /* default binary representation */ - false, /* passed by reference */ - 'd', /* alignment - must be the largest! */ - 'x', /* fully TOASTable */ - -1, /* typmod */ - 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ - false); /* Type NOT NULL */ + F_ARRAY_IN, /* array input proc */ + F_ARRAY_OUT, /* array output proc */ + F_ARRAY_RECV, /* array recv (bin) proc */ + F_ARRAY_SEND, /* array send (bin) proc */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + new_type_oid, /* array element type - the rowtype */ + true, /* yes, this is an array type */ + InvalidOid, /* this has no array type */ + InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ + NULL, /* default value - none */ + NULL, /* default binary representation */ + false, /* passed by reference */ + 'd', /* alignment - must be the largest! */ + 'x', /* fully TOASTable */ + -1, /* typmod */ + 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ + false); /* Type NOT NULL */ pfree(relarrayname); } @@ -1723,9 +1724,9 @@ AddRelationRawConstraints(Relation rel, NameStr(atp->attname)); /* - * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we do not bother - * to make an explicit pg_attrdef entry, since the default behavior - * is equivalent. + * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we do not bother to make + * an explicit pg_attrdef entry, since the default behavior is + * equivalent. * * Note a nonobvious property of this test: if the column is of a * domain type, what we'll get is not a bare null Const but a @@ -1734,7 +1735,7 @@ AddRelationRawConstraints(Relation rel, * override any default that the domain might have. */ if (expr == NULL || - (IsA(expr, Const) && ((Const *) expr)->constisnull)) + (IsA(expr, Const) &&((Const *) expr)->constisnull)) continue; StoreAttrDefault(rel, colDef->attnum, nodeToString(expr)); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/index.c b/src/backend/catalog/index.c index 7f2bad8c0f..28caf71595 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/index.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/index.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.287 2007/11/08 23:22:54 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ index_create(Oid heapRelationId, } else { - bool have_simple_col = false; + bool have_simple_col = false; /* Create auto dependencies on simply-referenced columns */ for (i = 0; i < indexInfo->ii_NumIndexAttrs; i++) @@ -742,15 +742,15 @@ index_create(Oid heapRelationId, } /* - * It's possible for an index to not depend on any columns of - * the table at all, in which case we need to give it a dependency - * on the table as a whole; else it won't get dropped when the - * table is dropped. This edge case is not totally useless; - * for example, a unique index on a constant expression can serve - * to prevent a table from containing more than one row. + * It's possible for an index to not depend on any columns of the + * table at all, in which case we need to give it a dependency on + * the table as a whole; else it won't get dropped when the table + * is dropped. This edge case is not totally useless; for + * example, a unique index on a constant expression can serve to + * prevent a table from containing more than one row. */ if (!have_simple_col && - !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Expressions, 0) && + !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Expressions, 0) && !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Predicate, 0)) { referenced.classId = RelationRelationId; @@ -1360,15 +1360,15 @@ index_build(Relation heapRelation, Assert(PointerIsValid(stats)); /* - * If we found any potentially broken HOT chains, mark the index as - * not being usable until the current transaction is below the event - * horizon. See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. + * If we found any potentially broken HOT chains, mark the index as not + * being usable until the current transaction is below the event horizon. + * See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. */ if (indexInfo->ii_BrokenHotChain) { - Oid indexId = RelationGetRelid(indexRelation); - Relation pg_index; - HeapTuple indexTuple; + Oid indexId = RelationGetRelid(indexRelation); + Relation pg_index; + HeapTuple indexTuple; Form_pg_index indexForm; pg_index = heap_open(IndexRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1515,19 +1515,19 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); /* - * When dealing with a HOT-chain of updated tuples, we want to - * index the values of the live tuple (if any), but index it - * under the TID of the chain's root tuple. This approach is - * necessary to preserve the HOT-chain structure in the heap. - * So we need to be able to find the root item offset for every - * tuple that's in a HOT-chain. When first reaching a new page - * of the relation, call heap_get_root_tuples() to build a map - * of root item offsets on the page. + * When dealing with a HOT-chain of updated tuples, we want to index + * the values of the live tuple (if any), but index it under the TID + * of the chain's root tuple. This approach is necessary to preserve + * the HOT-chain structure in the heap. So we need to be able to find + * the root item offset for every tuple that's in a HOT-chain. When + * first reaching a new page of the relation, call + * heap_get_root_tuples() to build a map of root item offsets on the + * page. * * It might look unsafe to use this information across buffer * lock/unlock. However, we hold ShareLock on the table so no - * ordinary insert/update/delete should occur; and we hold pin on - * the buffer continuously while visiting the page, so no pruning + * ordinary insert/update/delete should occur; and we hold pin on the + * buffer continuously while visiting the page, so no pruning * operation can occur either. * * Note the implied assumption that there is no more than one live @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, */ if (scan->rs_cblock != root_blkno) { - Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); + Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); heap_get_root_tuples(page, root_offsets); @@ -1549,12 +1549,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, /* do our own time qual check */ bool indexIt; - recheck: + recheck: + /* * We could possibly get away with not locking the buffer here, * since caller should hold ShareLock on the relation, but let's - * be conservative about it. (This remark is still correct - * even with HOT-pruning: our pin on the buffer prevents pruning.) + * be conservative about it. (This remark is still correct even + * with HOT-pruning: our pin on the buffer prevents pruning.) */ LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); @@ -1580,9 +1581,9 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * building it, and may need to see such tuples.) * * However, if it was HOT-updated then we must only index - * the live tuple at the end of the HOT-chain. Since this - * breaks semantics for pre-existing snapshots, mark - * the index as unusable for them. + * the live tuple at the end of the HOT-chain. Since this + * breaks semantics for pre-existing snapshots, mark the + * index as unusable for them. * * If we've already decided that the index will be unsafe * for old snapshots, we may as well stop indexing @@ -1611,13 +1612,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * followed by CREATE INDEX within a transaction.) An * exception occurs when reindexing a system catalog, * because we often release lock on system catalogs before - * committing. In that case we wait for the inserting + * committing. In that case we wait for the inserting * transaction to finish and check again. (We could do * that on user tables too, but since the case is not * expected it seems better to throw an error.) */ if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) { if (!IsSystemRelation(heapRelation)) elog(ERROR, "concurrent insert in progress"); @@ -1627,11 +1628,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * Must drop the lock on the buffer before we wait */ TransactionId xwait = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data); + LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); XactLockTableWait(xwait); goto recheck; } } + /* * We must index such tuples, since if the index build * commits then they're good. @@ -1648,14 +1651,14 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * followed by CREATE INDEX within a transaction.) An * exception occurs when reindexing a system catalog, * because we often release lock on system catalogs before - * committing. In that case we wait for the deleting + * committing. In that case we wait for the deleting * transaction to finish and check again. (We could do * that on user tables too, but since the case is not * expected it seems better to throw an error.) */ Assert(!(heapTuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)); if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data))) { if (!IsSystemRelation(heapRelation)) elog(ERROR, "concurrent delete in progress"); @@ -1665,11 +1668,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * Must drop the lock on the buffer before we wait */ TransactionId xwait = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data); + LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); XactLockTableWait(xwait); goto recheck; } } + /* * Otherwise, we have to treat these tuples just like * RECENTLY_DELETED ones. @@ -1689,7 +1694,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, break; default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum result"); - indexIt = tupleIsAlive = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ + indexIt = tupleIsAlive = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } @@ -1741,11 +1746,11 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, if (HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(heapTuple)) { /* - * For a heap-only tuple, pretend its TID is that of the root. - * See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. + * For a heap-only tuple, pretend its TID is that of the root. See + * src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. */ - HeapTupleData rootTuple; - OffsetNumber offnum; + HeapTupleData rootTuple; + OffsetNumber offnum; rootTuple = *heapTuple; offnum = ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&heapTuple->t_self); @@ -1787,11 +1792,11 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * We do a concurrent index build by first inserting the catalog entry for the * index via index_create(), marking it not indisready and not indisvalid. * Then we commit our transaction and start a new one, then we wait for all - * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now + * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now * we know that any subsequently-started transactions will see the index and * honor its constraints on HOT updates; so while existing HOT-chains might * be broken with respect to the index, no currently live tuple will have an - * incompatible HOT update done to it. We now build the index normally via + * incompatible HOT update done to it. We now build the index normally via * index_build(), while holding a weak lock that allows concurrent * insert/update/delete. Also, we index only tuples that are valid * as of the start of the scan (see IndexBuildHeapScan), whereas a normal @@ -1805,7 +1810,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * * Next, we mark the index "indisready" (but still not "indisvalid") and * commit the second transaction and start a third. Again we wait for all - * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now + * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now * we know that any subsequently-started transactions will see the index and * insert their new tuples into it. We then take a new reference snapshot * which is passed to validate_index(). Any tuples that are valid according @@ -1945,8 +1950,8 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, EState *estate; ExprContext *econtext; BlockNumber root_blkno = InvalidBlockNumber; - OffsetNumber root_offsets[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - bool in_index[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + OffsetNumber root_offsets[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + bool in_index[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; /* state variables for the merge */ ItemPointer indexcursor = NULL; @@ -1989,29 +1994,29 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, { ItemPointer heapcursor = &heapTuple->t_self; ItemPointerData rootTuple; - OffsetNumber root_offnum; + OffsetNumber root_offnum; CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); state->htups += 1; /* - * As commented in IndexBuildHeapScan, we should index heap-only tuples - * under the TIDs of their root tuples; so when we advance onto a new - * heap page, build a map of root item offsets on the page. + * As commented in IndexBuildHeapScan, we should index heap-only + * tuples under the TIDs of their root tuples; so when we advance onto + * a new heap page, build a map of root item offsets on the page. * * This complicates merging against the tuplesort output: we will * visit the live tuples in order by their offsets, but the root - * offsets that we need to compare against the index contents might - * be ordered differently. So we might have to "look back" within - * the tuplesort output, but only within the current page. We handle - * that by keeping a bool array in_index[] showing all the - * already-passed-over tuplesort output TIDs of the current page. - * We clear that array here, when advancing onto a new heap page. + * offsets that we need to compare against the index contents might be + * ordered differently. So we might have to "look back" within the + * tuplesort output, but only within the current page. We handle that + * by keeping a bool array in_index[] showing all the + * already-passed-over tuplesort output TIDs of the current page. We + * clear that array here, when advancing onto a new heap page. */ if (scan->rs_cblock != root_blkno) { - Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); + Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); heap_get_root_tuples(page, root_offsets); @@ -2102,14 +2107,14 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, /* * If the tuple is already committed dead, you might think we - * could suppress uniqueness checking, but this is no longer - * true in the presence of HOT, because the insert is actually - * a proxy for a uniqueness check on the whole HOT-chain. That - * is, the tuple we have here could be dead because it was already + * could suppress uniqueness checking, but this is no longer true + * in the presence of HOT, because the insert is actually a proxy + * for a uniqueness check on the whole HOT-chain. That is, the + * tuple we have here could be dead because it was already * HOT-updated, and if so the updating transaction will not have - * thought it should insert index entries. The index AM will - * check the whole HOT-chain and correctly detect a conflict - * if there is one. + * thought it should insert index entries. The index AM will + * check the whole HOT-chain and correctly detect a conflict if + * there is one. */ index_insert(indexRelation, diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c index 46e0312b99..4e2bb1de5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.99 2007/08/27 03:36:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.100 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ * * The textual specification of search_path can include "$user" to refer to * the namespace named the same as the current user, if any. (This is just - * ignored if there is no such namespace.) Also, it can include "pg_temp" + * ignored if there is no such namespace.) Also, it can include "pg_temp" * to refer to the current backend's temp namespace. This is usually also * ignorable if the temp namespace hasn't been set up, but there's a special * case: if "pg_temp" appears first then it should be the default creation - * target. We kluge this case a little bit so that the temp namespace isn't + * target. We kluge this case a little bit so that the temp namespace isn't * set up until the first attempt to create something in it. (The reason for * klugery is that we can't create the temp namespace outside a transaction, * but initial GUC processing of search_path happens outside a transaction.) @@ -144,10 +144,10 @@ static bool baseSearchPathValid = true; typedef struct { - List *searchPath; /* the desired search path */ + List *searchPath; /* the desired search path */ Oid creationNamespace; /* the desired creation namespace */ - int nestLevel; /* subtransaction nesting level */ -} OverrideStackEntry; + int nestLevel; /* subtransaction nesting level */ +} OverrideStackEntry; static List *overrideStack = NIL; @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ static List *overrideStack = NIL; * command is first executed). Thereafter it's the OID of the temp namespace. * * myTempToastNamespace is the OID of the namespace for my temp tables' toast - * tables. It is set when myTempNamespace is, and is InvalidOid before that. + * tables. It is set when myTempNamespace is, and is InvalidOid before that. * * myTempNamespaceSubID shows whether we've created the TEMP namespace in the * current subtransaction. The flag propagates up the subtransaction tree, @@ -241,10 +241,10 @@ RangeVarGetRelid(const RangeVar *relation, bool failOK) if (relation->schemaname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); + errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) relId = get_relname_relid(relation->relname, myTempNamespace); - else /* this probably can't happen? */ + else /* this probably can't happen? */ relId = InvalidOid; } else if (relation->schemaname) @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ RangeVarGetCreationNamespace(const RangeVar *newRelation) if (newRelation->schemaname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); + errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); /* Initialize temp namespace if first time through */ if (!OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) InitTempTableNamespace(); @@ -619,8 +619,8 @@ FuncnameGetCandidates(List *names, int nargs) else { /* - * Consider only procs that are in the search path and are not - * in the temp namespace. + * Consider only procs that are in the search path and are not in + * the temp namespace. */ ListCell *nsp; @@ -949,8 +949,8 @@ OpernameGetCandidates(List *names, char oprkind) else { /* - * Consider only opers that are in the search path and are not - * in the temp namespace. + * Consider only opers that are in the search path and are not in + * the temp namespace. */ ListCell *nsp; @@ -1377,7 +1377,7 @@ TSParserGetPrsid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ prsoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSPARSERNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(parser_name), @@ -1433,8 +1433,8 @@ TSParserIsVisible(Oid prsId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another parser of the same name earlier in the path. So we - * must do a slow check for conflicting parsers. + * hidden by another parser of the same name earlier in the path. So + * we must do a slow check for conflicting parsers. */ char *name = NameStr(form->prsname); ListCell *l; @@ -1445,7 +1445,7 @@ TSParserIsVisible(Oid prsId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ TSDictionaryGetDictid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ dictoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSDICTNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(dict_name), @@ -1562,8 +1562,8 @@ TSDictionaryIsVisible(Oid dictId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another dictionary of the same name earlier in the - * path. So we must do a slow check for conflicting dictionaries. + * hidden by another dictionary of the same name earlier in the path. + * So we must do a slow check for conflicting dictionaries. */ char *name = NameStr(form->dictname); ListCell *l; @@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ TSDictionaryIsVisible(Oid dictId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ TSTemplateGetTmplid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ tmploid = GetSysCacheOid(TSTEMPLATENAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(template_name), @@ -1690,8 +1690,8 @@ TSTemplateIsVisible(Oid tmplId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another template of the same name earlier in the path. - * So we must do a slow check for conflicting templates. + * hidden by another template of the same name earlier in the path. So + * we must do a slow check for conflicting templates. */ char *name = NameStr(form->tmplname); ListCell *l; @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ TSTemplateIsVisible(Oid tmplId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ TSConfigGetCfgid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ cfgoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSCONFIGNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(config_name), @@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ TSConfigGetCfgid(List *names, bool failOK) /* * TSConfigIsVisible * Determine whether a text search configuration (identified by OID) - * is visible in the current search path. Visible means "would be found + * is visible in the current search path. Visible means "would be found * by searching for the unqualified text search configuration name". */ bool @@ -1831,7 +1831,7 @@ TSConfigIsVisible(Oid cfgid) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1925,11 +1925,12 @@ LookupExplicitNamespace(const char *nspname) { if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) return myTempNamespace; + /* - * Since this is used only for looking up existing objects, there - * is no point in trying to initialize the temp namespace here; - * and doing so might create problems for some callers. - * Just fall through and give the "does not exist" error. + * Since this is used only for looking up existing objects, there is + * no point in trying to initialize the temp namespace here; and doing + * so might create problems for some callers. Just fall through and + * give the "does not exist" error. */ } @@ -2166,7 +2167,7 @@ bool isTempOrToastNamespace(Oid namespaceId) { if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace) && - (myTempNamespace == namespaceId || myTempToastNamespace == namespaceId)) + (myTempNamespace == namespaceId || myTempToastNamespace == namespaceId)) return true; return false; } @@ -2208,7 +2209,7 @@ isOtherTempNamespace(Oid namespaceId) /* * GetTempToastNamespace - get the OID of my temporary-toast-table namespace, - * which must already be assigned. (This is only used when creating a toast + * which must already be assigned. (This is only used when creating a toast * table for a temp table, so we must have already done InitTempTableNamespace) */ Oid @@ -2265,7 +2266,7 @@ GetOverrideSearchPath(MemoryContext context) * search_path variable is ignored while an override is active. */ void -PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath *newpath) +PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath * newpath) { OverrideStackEntry *entry; List *oidlist; @@ -2315,7 +2316,7 @@ PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath *newpath) /* And make it active. */ activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt); } @@ -2349,7 +2350,7 @@ PopOverrideSearchPath(void) entry = (OverrideStackEntry *) linitial(overrideStack); activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ } else { @@ -2392,7 +2393,7 @@ FindConversionByName(List *name) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ conoid = FindConversion(conversion_name, namespaceId); if (OidIsValid(conoid)) @@ -2533,7 +2534,7 @@ recomputeNamespacePath(void) } /* - * Remember the first member of the explicit list. (Note: this is + * Remember the first member of the explicit list. (Note: this is * nominally wrong if temp_missing, but we need it anyway to distinguish * explicit from implicit mention of pg_catalog.) */ @@ -2696,7 +2697,7 @@ AtEOXact_Namespace(bool isCommit) { myTempNamespace = InvalidOid; myTempToastNamespace = InvalidOid; - baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ + baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ } myTempNamespaceSubID = InvalidSubTransactionId; } @@ -2748,7 +2749,7 @@ AtEOSubXact_Namespace(bool isCommit, SubTransactionId mySubid, /* TEMP namespace creation failed, so reset state */ myTempNamespace = InvalidOid; myTempToastNamespace = InvalidOid; - baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ + baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ } } @@ -2773,7 +2774,7 @@ AtEOSubXact_Namespace(bool isCommit, SubTransactionId mySubid, entry = (OverrideStackEntry *) linitial(overrideStack); activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ } else { @@ -2983,9 +2984,9 @@ fetch_search_path(bool includeImplicit) recomputeNamespacePath(); /* - * If the temp namespace should be first, force it to exist. This is - * so that callers can trust the result to reflect the actual default - * creation namespace. It's a bit bogus to do this here, since + * If the temp namespace should be first, force it to exist. This is so + * that callers can trust the result to reflect the actual default + * creation namespace. It's a bit bogus to do this here, since * current_schema() is supposedly a stable function without side-effects, * but the alternatives seem worse. */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c index 3c161ba512..d43823f287 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.87 2007/09/03 00:39:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.88 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ AggregateCreate(const char *aggName, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), errmsg("cannot determine result data type"), - errdetail("An aggregate returning a polymorphic type " - "must have at least one polymorphic argument."))); + errdetail("An aggregate returning a polymorphic type " + "must have at least one polymorphic argument."))); /* handle sortop, if supplied */ if (aggsortopName) @@ -213,8 +213,8 @@ AggregateCreate(const char *aggName, PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* parameterModes */ PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* parameterNames */ PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* proconfig */ - 1, /* procost */ - 0); /* prorows */ + 1, /* procost */ + 0); /* prorows */ /* * Okay to create the pg_aggregate entry. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c index ede6607b85..2e10b11e71 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.35 2007/02/14 01:58:56 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.36 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ CreateConstraintEntry(const char *constraintName, if (foreignNKeys > 0) { /* - * Register normal dependencies on the equality operators that - * support a foreign-key constraint. If the PK and FK types - * are the same then all three operators for a column are the - * same; otherwise they are different. + * Register normal dependencies on the equality operators that support + * a foreign-key constraint. If the PK and FK types are the same then + * all three operators for a column are the same; otherwise they are + * different. */ ObjectAddress oprobject; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c index e9c75ebdb6..22292e00f2 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c,v 1.38 2007/09/24 01:29:28 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c,v 1.39 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -275,4 +275,3 @@ FindConversion(const char *conname, Oid connamespace) return conoid; } - diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c index 6a09886435..c82b3aff3f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.2 2007/04/02 22:14:17 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,32 +37,33 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) TupleDesc tupDesc; NameData enumlabel; Oid *oids; - int i, n; + int i, + n; Datum values[Natts_pg_enum]; char nulls[Natts_pg_enum]; ListCell *lc; - HeapTuple tup; + HeapTuple tup; n = list_length(vals); /* - * XXX we do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- - * if you have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index - * violation. Is it worth trying harder? + * XXX we do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- if + * you have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index violation. + * Is it worth trying harder? */ pg_enum = heap_open(EnumRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); tupDesc = pg_enum->rd_att; /* - * Allocate oids. While this method does not absolutely guarantee - * that we generate no duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each - * oid into the table before allocating the next), trouble could only - * occur if the oid counter wraps all the way around before we finish. - * Which seems unlikely. + * Allocate oids. While this method does not absolutely guarantee that we + * generate no duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each oid into the + * table before allocating the next), trouble could only occur if the oid + * counter wraps all the way around before we finish. Which seems + * unlikely. */ oids = (Oid *) palloc(n * sizeof(Oid)); - for(i = 0; i < n; i++) + for (i = 0; i < n; i++) { oids[i] = GetNewOid(pg_enum); } @@ -76,9 +77,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) i = 0; foreach(lc, vals) { - char *lab = strVal(lfirst(lc)); + char *lab = strVal(lfirst(lc)); - /* + /* * labels are stored in a name field, for easier syscache lookup, so * check the length to make sure it's within range. */ @@ -86,9 +87,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) if (strlen(lab) > (NAMEDATALEN - 1)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME), - errmsg("invalid enum label \"%s\", must be %d characters or less", - lab, - NAMEDATALEN - 1))); + errmsg("invalid enum label \"%s\", must be %d characters or less", + lab, + NAMEDATALEN - 1))); values[Anum_pg_enum_enumtypid - 1] = ObjectIdGetDatum(enumTypeOid); @@ -148,8 +149,8 @@ EnumValuesDelete(Oid enumTypeOid) static int oid_cmp(const void *p1, const void *p2) { - Oid v1 = *((const Oid *) p1); - Oid v2 = *((const Oid *) p2); + Oid v1 = *((const Oid *) p1); + Oid v2 = *((const Oid *) p2); if (v1 < v2) return -1; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c index 55a0cc0839..99a5959252 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c,v 1.101 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c,v 1.102 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * these routines moved here from commands/define.c and somewhat cleaned up. @@ -868,7 +868,7 @@ makeOperatorDependencies(HeapTuple tuple) * operators oprcom and oprnegate. We would not want to delete this * operator if those go away, but only reset the link fields; which is not * a function that the dependency code can presently handle. (Something - * could perhaps be done with objectSubId though.) For now, it's okay to + * could perhaps be done with objectSubId though.) For now, it's okay to * let those links dangle if a referenced operator is removed. */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c index 6b5a7d0fd9..9487b66dde 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.146 2007/09/03 00:39:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.147 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ ProcedureCreate(const char *procedureName, /* * Do not allow polymorphic return type unless at least one input argument - * is polymorphic. Also, do not allow return type INTERNAL unless at + * is polymorphic. Also, do not allow return type INTERNAL unless at * least one input argument is INTERNAL. */ for (i = 0; i < parameterCount; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c index ef1a83b4e4..5272edfe19 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.20 2007/05/14 20:07:01 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.21 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ checkSharedDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId) /* * We limit the number of dependencies reported to the client to * MAX_REPORTED_DEPS, since client software may not deal well with - * enormous error strings. The server log always gets a full report, + * enormous error strings. The server log always gets a full report, * which is collected in a separate StringInfo if and only if we detect * that the client report is going to be truncated. */ @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ checkSharedDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId) if (numNotReportedDeps > 0 || numNotReportedDbs > 0) { - ObjectAddress obj; + ObjectAddress obj; obj.classId = classId; obj.objectId = objectId; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c index 7419b36338..bcfc14195f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.113 2007/05/12 00:54:59 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.114 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ TypeShellMake(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(GetUserId()); /* typowner */ values[i++] = Int16GetDatum(sizeof(int4)); /* typlen */ values[i++] = BoolGetDatum(true); /* typbyval */ - values[i++] = CharGetDatum(TYPTYPE_PSEUDO); /* typtype */ + values[i++] = CharGetDatum(TYPTYPE_PSEUDO); /* typtype */ values[i++] = BoolGetDatum(false); /* typisdefined */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(DEFAULT_TYPDELIM); /* typdelim */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid); /* typrelid */ @@ -255,13 +255,13 @@ TypeCreate(Oid newTypeOid, values[i++] = CharGetDatum(typDelim); /* typdelim */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(relationOid); /* typrelid */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(elementType); /* typelem */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(arrayType); /* typarray */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(arrayType); /* typarray */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(inputProcedure); /* typinput */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(outputProcedure); /* typoutput */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(receiveProcedure); /* typreceive */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(sendProcedure); /* typsend */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodinProcedure); /* typmodin */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodoutProcedure); /* typmodout */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodoutProcedure); /* typmodout */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(analyzeProcedure); /* typanalyze */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(alignment); /* typalign */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(storage); /* typstorage */ @@ -397,8 +397,8 @@ TypeCreate(Oid newTypeOid, void GenerateTypeDependencies(Oid typeNamespace, Oid typeObjectId, - Oid relationOid, /* only for relation rowtypes */ - char relationKind, /* ditto */ + Oid relationOid, /* only for relation rowtypes */ + char relationKind, /* ditto */ Oid owner, Oid inputProcedure, Oid outputProcedure, @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ GenerateTypeDependencies(Oid typeNamespace, referenced.objectId = elementType; referenced.objectSubId = 0; recordDependencyOn(&myself, &referenced, - isImplicitArray ? DEPENDENCY_INTERNAL : DEPENDENCY_NORMAL); + isImplicitArray ? DEPENDENCY_INTERNAL : DEPENDENCY_NORMAL); } /* Normal dependency from a domain to its base type. */ @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ TypeRename(Oid typeOid, const char *newTypeName, Oid typeNamespace) /* If the type has an array type, recurse to handle that */ if (OidIsValid(arrayOid)) { - char *arrname = makeArrayTypeName(newTypeName, typeNamespace); + char *arrname = makeArrayTypeName(newTypeName, typeNamespace); TypeRename(arrayOid, arrname, typeNamespace); pfree(arrname); @@ -622,12 +622,12 @@ char * makeArrayTypeName(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) { char *arr; - int i; + int i; Relation pg_type_desc; /* - * The idea is to prepend underscores as needed until we make a name - * that doesn't collide with anything... + * The idea is to prepend underscores as needed until we make a name that + * doesn't collide with anything... */ arr = palloc(NAMEDATALEN); @@ -647,10 +647,10 @@ makeArrayTypeName(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) heap_close(pg_type_desc, AccessShareLock); - if (i >= NAMEDATALEN-1) + if (i >= NAMEDATALEN - 1) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), - errmsg("could not form array type name for type \"%s\"", + errmsg("could not form array type name for type \"%s\"", typeName))); return arr; @@ -698,10 +698,10 @@ moveArrayTypeName(Oid typeOid, const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) return false; /* - * OK, use makeArrayTypeName to pick an unused modification of the - * name. Note that since makeArrayTypeName is an iterative process, - * this will produce a name that it might have produced the first time, - * had the conflicting type we are about to create already existed. + * OK, use makeArrayTypeName to pick an unused modification of the name. + * Note that since makeArrayTypeName is an iterative process, this will + * produce a name that it might have produced the first time, had the + * conflicting type we are about to create already existed. */ newname = makeArrayTypeName(typeName, typeNamespace); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 51944c54c2..20ece6d6eb 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.110 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.111 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ analyze_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, totaldeadrows; HeapTuple *rows; PGRUsage ru0; - TimestampTz starttime = 0; + TimestampTz starttime = 0; if (vacstmt->verbose) elevel = INFO; @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ typedef struct FmgrInfo *cmpFn; int cmpFlags; int *tupnoLink; -} CompareScalarsContext; +} CompareScalarsContext; static void compute_minimal_stats(VacAttrStatsP stats, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c index 736e74882d..0789d1a1e5 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.164 2007/09/29 18:05:20 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.165 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ static List *get_tables_to_cluster(MemoryContext cluster_context); * * The single-relation case does not have any such overhead. * - * We also allow a relation to be specified without index. In that case, + * We also allow a relation to be specified without index. In that case, * the indisclustered bit will be looked up, and an ERROR will be thrown * if there is no index with the bit set. *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ cluster(ClusterStmt *stmt, bool isTopLevel) RelationGetRelationName(rel)); /* - * Reject clustering a remote temp table ... their local buffer manager - * is not going to cope. + * Reject clustering a remote temp table ... their local buffer + * manager is not going to cope. */ if (isOtherTempNamespace(RelationGetNamespace(rel))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions"))); + errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions"))); if (stmt->indexname == NULL) { @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ cluster_rel(RelToCluster *rvtc, bool recheck) * check in the "recheck" case is appropriate (which currently means * somebody is executing a database-wide CLUSTER), because there is * another check in cluster() which will stop any attempt to cluster - * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in + * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in * check_index_is_clusterable which is redundant, but we leave it for * extra safety. */ @@ -733,8 +733,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) /* * compute xids used to freeze and weed out dead tuples. We use -1 - * freeze_min_age to avoid having CLUSTER freeze tuples earlier than - * a plain VACUUM would. + * freeze_min_age to avoid having CLUSTER freeze tuples earlier than a + * plain VACUUM would. */ vacuum_set_xid_limits(-1, OldHeap->rd_rel->relisshared, &OldestXmin, &FreezeXid); @@ -745,8 +745,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) /* * Scan through the OldHeap in OldIndex order and copy each tuple into the * NewHeap. To ensure we see recently-dead tuples that still need to be - * copied, we scan with SnapshotAny and use HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum - * for the visibility test. + * copied, we scan with SnapshotAny and use HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum for + * the visibility test. */ scan = index_beginscan(OldHeap, OldIndex, SnapshotAny, 0, (ScanKey) NULL); @@ -774,31 +774,33 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) isdead = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_INSERT_IN_PROGRESS: + /* - * We should not see this unless it's been inserted earlier - * in our own transaction. + * We should not see this unless it's been inserted earlier in + * our own transaction. */ if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data))) elog(ERROR, "concurrent insert in progress"); /* treat as live */ isdead = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: + /* - * We should not see this unless it's been deleted earlier - * in our own transaction. + * We should not see this unless it's been deleted earlier in + * our own transaction. */ Assert(!(tuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)); if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data))) elog(ERROR, "concurrent delete in progress"); /* treat as recently dead */ isdead = false; break; default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum result"); - isdead = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ + isdead = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/comment.c b/src/backend/commands/comment.c index c175523c36..38c9b7c9a5 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/comment.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/comment.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.98 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.99 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ CommentTSParser(List *qualname, char *comment) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search parser"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search parser"))); CreateComments(prsId, TSParserRelationId, 0, comment); } @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ CommentTSTemplate(List *qualname, char *comment) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search template"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search template"))); CreateComments(tmplId, TSTemplateRelationId, 0, comment); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/copy.c b/src/backend/commands/copy.c index fdfe5ea965..ef7e04ca28 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/copy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/copy.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.287 2007/09/12 20:49:27 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ DoCopy(const CopyStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) errmsg("COPY (SELECT) WITH OIDS is not supported"))); /* - * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient + * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient * locks on the source table(s). * * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we @@ -1638,8 +1638,8 @@ CopyFrom(CopyState cstate) MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext; ErrorContextCallback errcontext; CommandId mycid = GetCurrentCommandId(); - bool use_wal = true; /* by default, use WAL logging */ - bool use_fsm = true; /* by default, use FSM for free space */ + bool use_wal = true; /* by default, use WAL logging */ + bool use_fsm = true; /* by default, use FSM for free space */ Assert(cstate->rel); @@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ CopyFrom(CopyState cstate) cstate->filename))); } - /* + /* * If we skipped writing WAL, then we need to sync the heap (but not * indexes since those use WAL anyway) */ @@ -2685,7 +2685,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) char *start_ptr; char *end_ptr; int input_len; - bool saw_high_bit = false; + bool saw_high_bit = false; /* Make sure space remains in fieldvals[] */ if (fieldno >= maxfields) @@ -2776,7 +2776,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) } c = val & 0xff; if (IS_HIGHBIT_SET(c)) - saw_high_bit = true; + saw_high_bit = true; } } break; @@ -2804,7 +2804,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) * literally */ } - } + } /* Add c to output string */ *output_ptr++ = c; @@ -2813,13 +2813,15 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) /* Terminate attribute value in output area */ *output_ptr++ = '\0'; - /* If we de-escaped a char with the high bit set, make sure - * we still have valid data for the db encoding. Avoid calling strlen - * here for the sake of efficiency. + /* + * If we de-escaped a char with the high bit set, make sure we still + * have valid data for the db encoding. Avoid calling strlen here for + * the sake of efficiency. */ if (saw_high_bit) { - char *fld = fieldvals[fieldno]; + char *fld = fieldvals[fieldno]; + pg_verifymbstr(fld, output_ptr - (fld + 1), false); } @@ -3077,15 +3079,15 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) * We have to grovel through the string searching for control characters * and instances of the delimiter character. In most cases, though, these * are infrequent. To avoid overhead from calling CopySendData once per - * character, we dump out all characters between escaped characters in - * a single call. The loop invariant is that the data from "start" to - * "ptr" can be sent literally, but hasn't yet been. + * character, we dump out all characters between escaped characters in a + * single call. The loop invariant is that the data from "start" to "ptr" + * can be sent literally, but hasn't yet been. * * We can skip pg_encoding_mblen() overhead when encoding is safe, because * in valid backend encodings, extra bytes of a multibyte character never * look like ASCII. This loop is sufficiently performance-critical that - * it's worth making two copies of it to get the IS_HIGHBIT_SET() test - * out of the normal safe-encoding path. + * it's worth making two copies of it to get the IS_HIGHBIT_SET() test out + * of the normal safe-encoding path. */ if (cstate->encoding_embeds_ascii) { @@ -3096,13 +3098,16 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) { DUMPSOFAR(); CopySendChar(cstate, '\\'); - start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ + start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ } else if ((unsigned char) c < (unsigned char) 0x20) { switch (c) { - /* \r and \n must be escaped, the others are traditional */ + /* + * \r and \n must be escaped, the others are + * traditional + */ case '\b': case '\f': case '\n': @@ -3134,13 +3139,16 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) { DUMPSOFAR(); CopySendChar(cstate, '\\'); - start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ + start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ } else if ((unsigned char) c < (unsigned char) 0x20) { switch (c) { - /* \r and \n must be escaped, the others are traditional */ + /* + * \r and \n must be escaped, the others are + * traditional + */ case '\b': case '\f': case '\n': diff --git a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c index 3090ae0af4..2d455ed31f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.202 2007/10/16 11:30:16 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.203 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -260,17 +260,17 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) * Check whether encoding matches server locale settings. We allow * mismatch in three cases: * - * 1. ctype_encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means either that the locale - * is C/POSIX which works with any encoding, or that we couldn't determine + * 1. ctype_encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means either that the locale is + * C/POSIX which works with any encoding, or that we couldn't determine * the locale's encoding and have to trust the user to get it right. * - * 2. selected encoding is SQL_ASCII, but only if you're a superuser. - * This is risky but we have historically allowed it --- notably, the + * 2. selected encoding is SQL_ASCII, but only if you're a superuser. This + * is risky but we have historically allowed it --- notably, the * regression tests require it. * * 3. selected encoding is UTF8 and platform is win32. This is because - * UTF8 is a pseudo codepage that is supported in all locales since - * it's converted to UTF16 before being used. + * UTF8 is a pseudo codepage that is supported in all locales since it's + * converted to UTF16 before being used. * * Note: if you change this policy, fix initdb to match. */ @@ -286,8 +286,8 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) (errmsg("encoding %s does not match server's locale %s", pg_encoding_to_char(encoding), setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL)), - errdetail("The server's LC_CTYPE setting requires encoding %s.", - pg_encoding_to_char(ctype_encoding)))); + errdetail("The server's LC_CTYPE setting requires encoding %s.", + pg_encoding_to_char(ctype_encoding)))); /* Resolve default tablespace for new database */ if (dtablespacename && dtablespacename->arg) @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) if (dst_deftablespace == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("pg_global cannot be used as default tablespace"))); + errmsg("pg_global cannot be used as default tablespace"))); /* * If we are trying to change the default tablespace of the template, @@ -375,12 +375,12 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) if (CheckOtherDBBackends(src_dboid)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_IN_USE), - errmsg("source database \"%s\" is being accessed by other users", - dbtemplate))); + errmsg("source database \"%s\" is being accessed by other users", + dbtemplate))); /* - * Select an OID for the new database, checking that it doesn't have - * a filename conflict with anything already existing in the tablespace + * Select an OID for the new database, checking that it doesn't have a + * filename conflict with anything already existing in the tablespace * directories. */ pg_database_rel = heap_open(DatabaseRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -558,9 +558,9 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) /* * Set flag to update flat database file at commit. Note: this also * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between - * creation of the database files and commital of the transaction. - * If we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's taking up - * disk space but is not in pg_database, which is not good. + * creation of the database files and commital of the transaction. If + * we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's taking up disk + * space but is not in pg_database, which is not good. */ database_file_update_needed(); } @@ -721,10 +721,10 @@ dropdb(const char *dbname, bool missing_ok) /* * Set flag to update flat database file at commit. Note: this also - * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between - * removal of the database files and commital of the transaction. - * If we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk - * but still there according to pg_database, which is not good. + * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between removal + * of the database files and commital of the transaction. If we crash + * before committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk but still there + * according to pg_database, which is not good. */ database_file_update_needed(); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/discard.c b/src/backend/commands/discard.c index d2ae6defd0..7af6ce0122 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/discard.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/discard.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/discard.c,v 1.1 2007/04/26 16:13:10 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/discard.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ static void DiscardAll(bool isTopLevel); * DISCARD { ALL | TEMP | PLANS } */ void -DiscardCommand(DiscardStmt *stmt, bool isTopLevel) +DiscardCommand(DiscardStmt * stmt, bool isTopLevel) { switch (stmt->target) { @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ DiscardAll(bool isTopLevel) { /* * Disallow DISCARD ALL in a transaction block. This is arguably - * inconsistent (we don't make a similar check in the command - * sequence that DISCARD ALL is equivalent to), but the idea is - * to catch mistakes: DISCARD ALL inside a transaction block - * would leave the transaction still uncommitted. + * inconsistent (we don't make a similar check in the command sequence + * that DISCARD ALL is equivalent to), but the idea is to catch mistakes: + * DISCARD ALL inside a transaction block would leave the transaction + * still uncommitted. */ PreventTransactionChain(isTopLevel, "DISCARD ALL"); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/explain.c b/src/backend/commands/explain.c index c9d454bc49..c385d952d2 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/explain.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/explain.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.165 2007/08/15 21:39:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.166 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ /* Hook for plugins to get control in ExplainOneQuery() */ ExplainOneQuery_hook_type ExplainOneQuery_hook = NULL; + /* Hook for plugins to get control in explain_get_index_name() */ explain_get_index_name_hook_type explain_get_index_name_hook = NULL; @@ -50,10 +51,10 @@ typedef struct ExplainState } ExplainState; static void ExplainOneQuery(Query *query, ExplainStmt *stmt, - const char *queryString, - ParamListInfo params, TupOutputState *tstate); + const char *queryString, + ParamListInfo params, TupOutputState *tstate); static void report_triggers(ResultRelInfo *rInfo, bool show_relname, - StringInfo buf); + StringInfo buf); static double elapsed_time(instr_time *starttime); static void explain_outNode(StringInfo str, Plan *plan, PlanState *planstate, @@ -90,14 +91,14 @@ ExplainQuery(ExplainStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, getParamListTypes(params, ¶m_types, &num_params); /* - * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient + * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient * locks on the source table(s). * - * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we - * make a preliminary copy of the source querytree. This prevents - * problems in the case that the EXPLAIN is in a portal or plpgsql - * function and is executed repeatedly. (See also the same hack in - * DECLARE CURSOR and PREPARE.) XXX FIXME someday. + * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we make + * a preliminary copy of the source querytree. This prevents problems in + * the case that the EXPLAIN is in a portal or plpgsql function and is + * executed repeatedly. (See also the same hack in DECLARE CURSOR and + * PREPARE.) XXX FIXME someday. */ rewritten = pg_analyze_and_rewrite((Node *) copyObject(stmt->query), queryString, param_types, num_params); @@ -215,7 +216,7 @@ ExplainOneUtility(Node *utilityStmt, ExplainStmt *stmt, * to call it. */ void -ExplainOnePlan(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt, ParamListInfo params, +ExplainOnePlan(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt, ParamListInfo params, ExplainStmt *stmt, TupOutputState *tstate) { QueryDesc *queryDesc; @@ -376,8 +377,8 @@ report_triggers(ResultRelInfo *rInfo, bool show_relname, StringInfo buf) InstrEndLoop(instr); /* - * We ignore triggers that were never invoked; they likely - * aren't relevant to the current query type. + * We ignore triggers that were never invoked; they likely aren't + * relevant to the current query type. */ if (instr->ntuples == 0) continue; @@ -624,7 +625,7 @@ explain_outNode(StringInfo str, if (ScanDirectionIsBackward(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexorderdir)) appendStringInfoString(str, " Backward"); appendStringInfo(str, " using %s", - explain_get_index_name(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexid)); + explain_get_index_name(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexid)); /* FALL THRU */ case T_SeqScan: case T_BitmapHeapScan: @@ -1137,7 +1138,7 @@ show_sort_keys(Plan *sortplan, int nkeys, AttrNumber *keycols, /* Set up deparsing context */ context = deparse_context_for_plan((Node *) outerPlan(sortplan), - NULL, /* Sort has no innerPlan */ + NULL, /* Sort has no innerPlan */ es->rtable); useprefix = list_length(es->rtable) > 1; @@ -1192,7 +1193,7 @@ show_sort_info(SortState *sortstate, static const char * explain_get_index_name(Oid indexId) { - const char *result; + const char *result; if (explain_get_index_name_hook) result = (*explain_get_index_name_hook) (indexId); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c index 3a55661502..892bd7c9f3 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.86 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.87 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * These routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ static void AlterFunctionOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tup, - Oid newOwnerId); + Oid newOwnerId); /* @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ compute_return_type(TypeName *returnType, Oid languageOid, if (returnType->typmods != NIL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", - typnam))); + errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", + typnam))); /* Otherwise, go ahead and make a shell type */ ereport(NOTICE, @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ examine_parameter_list(List *parameters, Oid languageOid, * FUNCTION and ALTER FUNCTION and return it via one of the out * parameters. Returns true if the passed option was recognized. If * the out parameter we were going to assign to points to non-NULL, - * raise a duplicate-clause error. (We don't try to detect duplicate + * raise a duplicate-clause error. (We don't try to detect duplicate * SET parameters though --- if you're redundant, the last one wins.) */ static bool @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ update_proconfig_value(ArrayType *a, List *set_items) if (valuestr) a = GUCArrayAdd(a, sstmt->name, valuestr); - else /* RESET */ + else /* RESET */ a = GUCArrayDelete(a, sstmt->name); } } @@ -1598,9 +1598,9 @@ DropCast(DropCastStmt *stmt) TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); else ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("cast from type %s to type %s does not exist, skipping", - TypeNameToString(stmt->sourcetype), - TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); + (errmsg("cast from type %s to type %s does not exist, skipping", + TypeNameToString(stmt->sourcetype), + TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); return; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c index 943978e589..dc53546a05 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.166 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.167 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -396,10 +396,9 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, } /* - * Parse AM-specific options, convert to text array form, - * validate. The src_options introduced due to using indexes - * via the "CREATE LIKE INCLUDING INDEXES" statement also need to - * be merged here + * Parse AM-specific options, convert to text array form, validate. The + * src_options introduced due to using indexes via the "CREATE LIKE + * INCLUDING INDEXES" statement also need to be merged here */ if (src_options) reloptions = unflatten_reloptions(src_options); @@ -452,7 +451,7 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, { indexRelationId = index_create(relationId, indexRelationName, indexRelationId, - indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, + indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, coloptions, reloptions, primary, isconstraint, allowSystemTableMods, skip_build, concurrent); @@ -461,18 +460,18 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, /* * For a concurrent build, we next insert the catalog entry and add - * constraints. We don't build the index just yet; we must first make - * the catalog entry so that the new index is visible to updating + * constraints. We don't build the index just yet; we must first make the + * catalog entry so that the new index is visible to updating * transactions. That will prevent them from making incompatible HOT * updates. The new index will be marked not indisready and not * indisvalid, so that no one else tries to either insert into it or use - * it for queries. We pass skip_build = true to prevent the build. + * it for queries. We pass skip_build = true to prevent the build. */ indexRelationId = index_create(relationId, indexRelationName, indexRelationId, indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, coloptions, reloptions, primary, isconstraint, - allowSystemTableMods, true, concurrent); + allowSystemTableMods, true, concurrent); /* * We must commit our current transaction so that the index becomes @@ -506,15 +505,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * xacts that open the table for writing after this point; they will see * the new index when they open it. * - * Note: the reason we use actual lock acquisition here, rather than - * just checking the ProcArray and sleeping, is that deadlock is possible - * if one of the transactions in question is blocked trying to acquire - * an exclusive lock on our table. The lock code will detect deadlock - * and error out properly. + * Note: the reason we use actual lock acquisition here, rather than just + * checking the ProcArray and sleeping, is that deadlock is possible if + * one of the transactions in question is blocked trying to acquire an + * exclusive lock on our table. The lock code will detect deadlock and + * error out properly. * * Note: GetLockConflicts() never reports our own xid, hence we need not - * check for that. Also, prepared xacts are not reported, which is - * fine since they certainly aren't going to do anything more. + * check for that. Also, prepared xacts are not reported, which is fine + * since they certainly aren't going to do anything more. */ old_lockholders = GetLockConflicts(&heaplocktag, ShareLock); @@ -530,15 +529,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * indexes. We have waited out all the existing transactions and any new * transaction will have the new index in its list, but the index is still * marked as "not-ready-for-inserts". The index is consulted while - * deciding HOT-safety though. This arrangement ensures that no new HOT + * deciding HOT-safety though. This arrangement ensures that no new HOT * chains can be created where the new tuple and the old tuple in the * chain have different index keys. * * We now take a new snapshot, and build the index using all tuples that - * are visible in this snapshot. We can be sure that any HOT updates - * to these tuples will be compatible with the index, since any updates - * made by transactions that didn't know about the index are now committed - * or rolled back. Thus, each visible tuple is either the end of its + * are visible in this snapshot. We can be sure that any HOT updates to + * these tuples will be compatible with the index, since any updates made + * by transactions that didn't know about the index are now committed or + * rolled back. Thus, each visible tuple is either the end of its * HOT-chain or the extension of the chain is HOT-safe for this index. */ @@ -565,10 +564,9 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, index_close(indexRelation, NoLock); /* - * Update the pg_index row to mark the index as ready for inserts. - * Once we commit this transaction, any new transactions that - * open the table must insert new entries into the index for insertions - * and non-HOT updates. + * Update the pg_index row to mark the index as ready for inserts. Once we + * commit this transaction, any new transactions that open the table must + * insert new entries into the index for insertions and non-HOT updates. */ pg_index = heap_open(IndexRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -611,8 +609,8 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, /* * Now take the "reference snapshot" that will be used by validate_index() - * to filter candidate tuples. Beware! There might still be snapshots - * in use that treat some transaction as in-progress that our reference + * to filter candidate tuples. Beware! There might still be snapshots in + * use that treat some transaction as in-progress that our reference * snapshot treats as committed. If such a recently-committed transaction * deleted tuples in the table, we will not include them in the index; yet * those transactions which see the deleting one as still-in-progress will @@ -636,15 +634,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * The index is now valid in the sense that it contains all currently * interesting tuples. But since it might not contain tuples deleted just * before the reference snap was taken, we have to wait out any - * transactions that might have older snapshots. Obtain a list of - * VXIDs of such transactions, and wait for them individually. + * transactions that might have older snapshots. Obtain a list of VXIDs + * of such transactions, and wait for them individually. * * We can exclude any running transactions that have xmin >= the xmax of * our reference snapshot, since they are clearly not interested in any * missing older tuples. Transactions in other DBs aren't a problem - * either, since they'll never even be able to see this index. - * Also, GetCurrentVirtualXIDs never reports our own vxid, so we - * need not check for that. + * either, since they'll never even be able to see this index. Also, + * GetCurrentVirtualXIDs never reports our own vxid, so we need not check + * for that. */ old_snapshots = GetCurrentVirtualXIDs(ActiveSnapshot->xmax, false); @@ -681,8 +679,8 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * relcache entries for the index itself, but we should also send a * relcache inval on the parent table to force replanning of cached plans. * Otherwise existing sessions might fail to use the new index where it - * would be useful. (Note that our earlier commits did not create - * reasons to replan; relcache flush on the index itself was sufficient.) + * would be useful. (Note that our earlier commits did not create reasons + * to replan; relcache flush on the index itself was sufficient.) */ CacheInvalidateRelcacheByRelid(heaprelid.relId); @@ -837,9 +835,9 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, accessMethodId); /* - * Set up the per-column options (indoption field). For now, this - * is zero for any un-ordered index, while ordered indexes have DESC - * and NULLS FIRST/LAST options. + * Set up the per-column options (indoption field). For now, this is + * zero for any un-ordered index, while ordered indexes have DESC and + * NULLS FIRST/LAST options. */ colOptionP[attn] = 0; if (amcanorder) diff --git a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c index cc15e2b2cd..05b94d6283 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.55 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.56 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -52,33 +52,33 @@ typedef struct Oid lefttype; /* lefttype */ Oid righttype; /* righttype */ bool recheck; /* oper recheck flag (unused for proc) */ -} OpFamilyMember; +} OpFamilyMember; static void AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, List *items); static void AlterOpFamilyDrop(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, - List *items); + int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, + List *items); static void processTypesSpec(List *args, Oid *lefttype, Oid *righttype); -static void assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); -static void assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); -static void addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember *member, bool isProc); +static void assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); +static void assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); +static void addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember * member, bool isProc); static void storeOperators(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, - Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, - List *operators, bool isAdd); + Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, + List *operators, bool isAdd); static void storeProcedures(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, - Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, - List *procedures, bool isAdd); + Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, + List *procedures, bool isAdd); static void dropOperators(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - List *operators); + List *operators); static void dropProcedures(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - List *procedures); + List *procedures); static void AlterOpClassOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tuple, Oid newOwnerId); static void AlterOpFamilyOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tuple, - Oid newOwnerId); + Oid newOwnerId); /* @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ OpFamilyCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname) else { /* Unqualified opfamily name, so search the search path */ - Oid opfID = OpfamilynameGetOpfid(amID, opfname); + Oid opfID = OpfamilynameGetOpfid(amID, opfname); if (!OidIsValid(opfID)) return NULL; @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ OpClassCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opclassname) else { /* Unqualified opclass name, so search the search path */ - Oid opcID = OpclassnameGetOpcid(amID, opcname); + Oid opcID = OpclassnameGetOpcid(amID, opcname); if (!OidIsValid(opcID)) return NULL; @@ -348,8 +348,9 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); opfamilyoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); + /* * XXX given the superuser check above, there's no need for an * ownership check here @@ -367,6 +368,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) if (HeapTupleIsValid(tup)) { opfamilyoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); + /* * XXX given the superuser check above, there's no need for an * ownership check here @@ -597,7 +599,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) opclassoid, procedures, false); /* - * Create dependencies for the opclass proper. Note: we do not create a + * Create dependencies for the opclass proper. Note: we do not create a * dependency link to the AM, because we don't currently support DROP * ACCESS METHOD. */ @@ -644,7 +646,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) * Define a new index operator family. */ void -DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { char *opfname; /* name of opfamily we're creating */ Oid amoid, /* our AM's oid */ @@ -686,8 +688,8 @@ DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) ReleaseSysCache(tup); /* - * Currently, we require superuser privileges to create an opfamily. - * See comments in DefineOpClass. + * Currently, we require superuser privileges to create an opfamily. See + * comments in DefineOpClass. * * XXX re-enable NOT_USED code sections below if you remove this test. */ @@ -763,7 +765,7 @@ DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) * different code paths. */ void -AlterOpFamily(AlterOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +AlterOpFamily(AlterOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { Oid amoid, /* our AM's oid */ opfamilyoid; /* oid of opfamily */ @@ -876,7 +878,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), errmsg("operator argument types must be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); - operOid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + operOid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ } #ifdef NOT_USED @@ -932,7 +934,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, case OPCLASS_ITEM_STORAGETYPE: ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("STORAGE cannot be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); + errmsg("STORAGE cannot be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized item type: %d", item->itemtype); @@ -1057,7 +1059,7 @@ processTypesSpec(List *args, Oid *lefttype, Oid *righttype) * and do any validity checking we can manage. */ static void -assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) +assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) { Operator optup; Form_pg_operator opform; @@ -1098,7 +1100,7 @@ assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) * and do any validity checking we can manage. */ static void -assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) +assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) { HeapTuple proctup; Form_pg_proc procform; @@ -1156,10 +1158,10 @@ assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) else { /* - * The default for GiST and GIN in CREATE OPERATOR CLASS is to use - * the class' opcintype as lefttype and righttype. In CREATE or - * ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY, opcintype isn't available, so make the - * user specify the types. + * The default for GiST and GIN in CREATE OPERATOR CLASS is to use the + * class' opcintype as lefttype and righttype. In CREATE or ALTER + * OPERATOR FAMILY, opcintype isn't available, so make the user + * specify the types. */ if (!OidIsValid(member->lefttype)) member->lefttype = typeoid; @@ -1179,7 +1181,7 @@ assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) * duplicated strategy or proc number. */ static void -addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember *member, bool isProc) +addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember * member, bool isProc) { ListCell *l; @@ -1560,7 +1562,7 @@ RemoveOpClass(RemoveOpClassStmt *stmt) * Deletes an opfamily. */ void -RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { Oid amID, opfID; @@ -1589,11 +1591,11 @@ RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *stmt) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); else ereport(NOTICE, (errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); return; } @@ -2120,7 +2122,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyOwner(List *name, const char *access_method, Oid newOwnerId) } /* - * The first parameter is pg_opfamily, opened and suitably locked. The second + * The first parameter is pg_opfamily, opened and suitably locked. The second * parameter is a copy of the tuple from pg_opfamily we want to modify. */ static void diff --git a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c index 8de6b4bebf..1ae9d5186b 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.37 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.38 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ DefineOperator(List *names, List *parameters) Oid oprNamespace; AclResult aclresult; bool canMerge = false; /* operator merges */ - bool canHash = false; /* operator hashes */ + bool canHash = false; /* operator hashes */ List *functionName = NIL; /* function for operator */ TypeName *typeName1 = NULL; /* first type name */ TypeName *typeName2 = NULL; /* second type name */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c index e8f21d4f08..ba9e9a2320 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c,v 1.66 2007/10/24 23:27:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c,v 1.67 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ * utilityStmt field is set. */ void -PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt *stmt, ParamListInfo params, +PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt * stmt, ParamListInfo params, const char *queryString, bool isTopLevel) { DeclareCursorStmt *cstmt = (DeclareCursorStmt *) stmt->utilityStmt; @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt *stmt, ParamListInfo params, * * If the user didn't specify a SCROLL type, allow or disallow scrolling * based on whether it would require any additional runtime overhead to do - * so. Also, we disallow scrolling for FOR UPDATE cursors. + * so. Also, we disallow scrolling for FOR UPDATE cursors. */ portal->cursorOptions = cstmt->options; if (!(portal->cursorOptions & (CURSOR_OPT_SCROLL | CURSOR_OPT_NO_SCROLL))) @@ -369,8 +369,8 @@ PersistHoldablePortal(Portal portal) * to be at, but the tuplestore API doesn't support that. So we start * at the beginning of the tuplestore and iterate through it until we * reach where we need to be. FIXME someday? (Fortunately, the - * typical case is that we're supposed to be at or near the start - * of the result set, so this isn't as bad as it sounds.) + * typical case is that we're supposed to be at or near the start of + * the result set, so this isn't as bad as it sounds.) */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(portal->holdContext); @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ PersistHoldablePortal(Portal portal) { /* we can handle this case even if posOverflow */ while (tuplestore_advance(portal->holdStore, true)) - /* continue */ ; + /* continue */ ; } else { diff --git a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c index 0a7f565316..4e86b7eebf 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2002-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/prepare.c,v 1.78 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/prepare.c,v 1.79 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ static HTAB *prepared_queries = NULL; static void InitQueryHashTable(void); static ParamListInfo EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, - const char *queryString, EState *estate); + const char *queryString, EState *estate); static Datum build_regtype_array(Oid *param_types, int num_params); /* @@ -101,8 +101,8 @@ PrepareQuery(PrepareStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) * passed in from above us will not be visible to it), allowing * information about unknown parameters to be deduced from context. * - * Because parse analysis scribbles on the raw querytree, we must make - * a copy to ensure we have a pristine raw tree to cache. FIXME someday. + * Because parse analysis scribbles on the raw querytree, we must make a + * copy to ensure we have a pristine raw tree to cache. FIXME someday. */ query = parse_analyze_varparams((Node *) copyObject(stmt->query), queryString, @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ PrepareQuery(PrepareStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) CreateCommandTag((Node *) query), argtypes, nargs, - 0, /* default cursor options */ + 0, /* default cursor options */ plan_list, true); } @@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, if (nparams != num_params) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("wrong number of parameters for prepared statement \"%s\"", - pstmt->stmt_name), + errmsg("wrong number of parameters for prepared statement \"%s\"", + pstmt->stmt_name), errdetail("Expected %d parameters but got %d.", num_params, nparams))); @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, return NULL; /* - * We have to run parse analysis for the expressions. Since the - * parser is not cool about scribbling on its input, copy first. + * We have to run parse analysis for the expressions. Since the parser is + * not cool about scribbling on its input, copy first. */ params = (List *) copyObject(params); @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, if (pstate->p_hasAggs) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), - errmsg("cannot use aggregate function in EXECUTE parameter"))); + errmsg("cannot use aggregate function in EXECUTE parameter"))); given_type_id = exprType(expr); @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, i + 1, format_type_be(given_type_id), format_type_be(expected_type_id)), - errhint("You will need to rewrite or cast the expression."))); + errhint("You will need to rewrite or cast the expression."))); lfirst(l) = expr; i++; @@ -734,8 +734,8 @@ pg_prepared_statement(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(per_query_ctx); /* - * build tupdesc for result tuples. This must match the definition of - * the pg_prepared_statements view in system_views.sql + * build tupdesc for result tuples. This must match the definition of the + * pg_prepared_statements view in system_views.sql */ tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(5, false); TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "name", @@ -780,11 +780,11 @@ pg_prepared_statement(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) nulls[1] = true; else values[1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, - CStringGetDatum(prep_stmt->plansource->query_string)); + CStringGetDatum(prep_stmt->plansource->query_string)); values[2] = TimestampTzGetDatum(prep_stmt->prepare_time); values[3] = build_regtype_array(prep_stmt->plansource->param_types, - prep_stmt->plansource->num_params); + prep_stmt->plansource->num_params); values[4] = BoolGetDatum(prep_stmt->from_sql); tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c b/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c index b103667935..80e5d3d7dc 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.46 2007/06/23 22:12:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.47 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -111,17 +111,17 @@ CreateSchemaCommand(CreateSchemaStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) /* * Examine the list of commands embedded in the CREATE SCHEMA command, and * reorganize them into a sequentially executable order with no forward - * references. Note that the result is still a list of raw parsetrees - * --- we cannot, in general, run parse analysis on one statement until - * we have actually executed the prior ones. + * references. Note that the result is still a list of raw parsetrees --- + * we cannot, in general, run parse analysis on one statement until we + * have actually executed the prior ones. */ parsetree_list = transformCreateSchemaStmt(stmt); /* - * Execute each command contained in the CREATE SCHEMA. Since the - * grammar allows only utility commands in CREATE SCHEMA, there is - * no need to pass them through parse_analyze() or the rewriter; - * we can just hand them straight to ProcessUtility. + * Execute each command contained in the CREATE SCHEMA. Since the grammar + * allows only utility commands in CREATE SCHEMA, there is no need to pass + * them through parse_analyze() or the rewriter; we can just hand them + * straight to ProcessUtility. */ foreach(parsetree_item, parsetree_list) { @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ CreateSchemaCommand(CreateSchemaStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) ProcessUtility(stmt, queryString, NULL, - false, /* not top level */ + false, /* not top level */ None_Receiver, NULL); /* make sure later steps can see the object created here */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c index 619e289206..54799447c4 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.147 2007/10/25 18:54:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.148 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1145,8 +1145,8 @@ init_params(List *options, bool isInit, snprintf(bufm, sizeof(bufm), INT64_FORMAT, new->max_value); ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("START value (%s) cannot be greater than MAXVALUE (%s)", - bufs, bufm))); + errmsg("START value (%s) cannot be greater than MAXVALUE (%s)", + bufs, bufm))); } /* CACHE */ @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ process_owned_by(Relation seqrel, List *owned_by) if (seqrel->rd_rel->relowner != tablerel->rd_rel->relowner) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("sequence must have same owner as table it is linked to"))); + errmsg("sequence must have same owner as table it is linked to"))); if (RelationGetNamespace(seqrel) != RelationGetNamespace(tablerel)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c index 23f3619369..285bc23496 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.235 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.236 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ static List *MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, static void MergeConstraintsIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel); static void MergeAttributesIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel); static void add_nonduplicate_constraint(Constraint *cdef, - ConstrCheck *check, int *ncheck); + ConstrCheck *check, int *ncheck); static bool change_varattnos_walker(Node *node, const AttrNumber *newattno); static void StoreCatalogInheritance(Oid relationId, List *supers); static void StoreCatalogInheritance1(Oid relationId, Oid parentOid, @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ static void ATExecSetRelOptions(Relation rel, List *defList, bool isReset); static void ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, char fires_when, bool skip_system); static void ATExecEnableDisableRule(Relation rel, char *rulename, - char fires_when); + char fires_when); static void ATExecAddInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent); static void ATExecDropInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent); static void copy_relation_data(Relation rel, SMgrRelation dst); @@ -395,6 +395,7 @@ DefineRelation(CreateStmt *stmt, char relkind) if (cdef->contype == CONSTR_CHECK) add_nonduplicate_constraint(cdef, check, &ncheck); } + /* * parse_utilcmd.c might have passed some precooked constraints too, * due to LIKE tab INCLUDING CONSTRAINTS @@ -841,8 +842,8 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, if (list_member_oid(parentOids, RelationGetRelid(relation))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE), - errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", - parent->relname))); + errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", + parent->relname))); parentOids = lappend_oid(parentOids, RelationGetRelid(relation)); @@ -888,8 +889,8 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, exist_attno = findAttrByName(attributeName, inhSchema); if (exist_attno > 0) { - Oid defTypeId; - int32 deftypmod; + Oid defTypeId; + int32 deftypmod; /* * Yes, try to merge the two column definitions. They must @@ -1032,8 +1033,10 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, if (exist_attno > 0) { ColumnDef *def; - Oid defTypeId, newTypeId; - int32 deftypmod, newtypmod; + Oid defTypeId, + newTypeId; + int32 deftypmod, + newtypmod; /* * Yes, try to merge the two column definitions. They must @@ -1632,8 +1635,8 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) bool relhastriggers; /* - * Grab an exclusive lock on the target table, index, sequence or - * view, which we will NOT release until end of transaction. + * Grab an exclusive lock on the target table, index, sequence or view, + * which we will NOT release until end of transaction. */ targetrelation = relation_open(myrelid, AccessExclusiveLock); @@ -1647,9 +1650,8 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); /* - * For compatibility with prior releases, we don't complain if - * ALTER TABLE or ALTER INDEX is used to rename a sequence or - * view. + * For compatibility with prior releases, we don't complain if ALTER TABLE + * or ALTER INDEX is used to rename a sequence or view. */ relkind = targetrelation->rd_rel->relkind; if (reltype == OBJECT_SEQUENCE && relkind != 'S') @@ -1746,19 +1748,19 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) void AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) { - Relation rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, AccessExclusiveLock); + Relation rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, AccessExclusiveLock); int expected_refcnt; /* - * Disallow ALTER TABLE when the current backend has any open reference - * to it besides the one we just got (such as an open cursor or active - * plan); our AccessExclusiveLock doesn't protect us against stomping on - * our own foot, only other people's feet! + * Disallow ALTER TABLE when the current backend has any open reference to + * it besides the one we just got (such as an open cursor or active plan); + * our AccessExclusiveLock doesn't protect us against stomping on our own + * foot, only other people's feet! * - * Note: the only case known to cause serious trouble is ALTER COLUMN TYPE, - * and some changes are obviously pretty benign, so this could possibly - * be relaxed to only error out for certain types of alterations. But - * the use-case for allowing any of these things is not obvious, so we + * Note: the only case known to cause serious trouble is ALTER COLUMN + * TYPE, and some changes are obviously pretty benign, so this could + * possibly be relaxed to only error out for certain types of alterations. + * But the use-case for allowing any of these things is not obvious, so we * won't work hard at it for now. */ expected_refcnt = rel->rd_isnailed ? 2 : 1; @@ -1784,7 +1786,7 @@ AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) void AlterTableInternal(Oid relid, List *cmds, bool recurse) { - Relation rel = relation_open(relid, AccessExclusiveLock); + Relation rel = relation_open(relid, AccessExclusiveLock); ATController(rel, cmds, recurse); } @@ -2153,54 +2155,54 @@ ATExecCmd(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd) ATExecSetRelOptions(rel, (List *) cmd->def, true); break; - case AT_EnableTrig: /* ENABLE TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); + case AT_EnableTrig: /* ENABLE TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); break; - case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: /* ENABLE ALWAYS TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ALWAYS, false); + case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: /* ENABLE ALWAYS TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ALWAYS, false); break; - case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: /* ENABLE REPLICA TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false); + case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: /* ENABLE REPLICA TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false); break; case AT_DisableTrig: /* DISABLE TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); break; case AT_EnableTrigAll: /* ENABLE TRIGGER ALL */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); break; case AT_DisableTrigAll: /* DISABLE TRIGGER ALL */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); break; case AT_EnableTrigUser: /* ENABLE TRIGGER USER */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true); break; case AT_DisableTrigUser: /* DISABLE TRIGGER USER */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, true); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, true); break; - case AT_EnableRule: /* ENABLE RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN); + case AT_EnableRule: /* ENABLE RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN); break; - case AT_EnableAlwaysRule: /* ENABLE ALWAYS RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ALWAYS); + case AT_EnableAlwaysRule: /* ENABLE ALWAYS RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ALWAYS); break; - case AT_EnableReplicaRule: /* ENABLE REPLICA RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ON_REPLICA); + case AT_EnableReplicaRule: /* ENABLE REPLICA RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ON_REPLICA); break; case AT_DisableRule: /* DISABLE RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_DISABLED); + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_DISABLED); break; case AT_AddInherit: @@ -2303,8 +2305,8 @@ ATRewriteTables(List **wqueue) /* * Swap the physical files of the old and new heaps. Since we are - * generating a new heap, we can use RecentXmin for the table's new - * relfrozenxid because we rewrote all the tuples on + * generating a new heap, we can use RecentXmin for the table's + * new relfrozenxid because we rewrote all the tuples on * ATRewriteTable, so no older Xid remains on the table. */ swap_relation_files(tab->relid, OIDNewHeap, RecentXmin); @@ -3011,8 +3013,8 @@ ATExecAddColumn(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) { Form_pg_attribute childatt = (Form_pg_attribute) GETSTRUCT(tuple); - Oid ctypeId; - int32 ctypmod; + Oid ctypeId; + int32 ctypmod; /* Okay if child matches by type */ ctypeId = typenameTypeId(NULL, colDef->typename, &ctypmod); @@ -3819,8 +3821,8 @@ ATExecAddConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, Node *newConstraint) /* * Currently, we only expect to see CONSTR_CHECK nodes * arriving here (see the preprocessing done in - * parse_utilcmd.c). Use a switch anyway to make it easier - * to add more code later. + * parse_utilcmd.c). Use a switch anyway to make it easier to + * add more code later. */ switch (constr->contype) { @@ -4030,7 +4032,7 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, * * Note that we have to be careful about the difference between the actual * PK column type and the opclass' declared input type, which might be - * only binary-compatible with it. The declared opcintype is the right + * only binary-compatible with it. The declared opcintype is the right * thing to probe pg_amop with. */ if (numfks != numpks) @@ -4067,10 +4069,10 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, /* * Check it's a btree; currently this can never fail since no other - * index AMs support unique indexes. If we ever did have other - * types of unique indexes, we'd need a way to determine which - * operator strategy number is equality. (Is it reasonable to - * insist that every such index AM use btree's number for equality?) + * index AMs support unique indexes. If we ever did have other types + * of unique indexes, we'd need a way to determine which operator + * strategy number is equality. (Is it reasonable to insist that + * every such index AM use btree's number for equality?) */ if (amid != BTREE_AM_OID) elog(ERROR, "only b-tree indexes are supported for foreign keys"); @@ -4088,8 +4090,8 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, eqstrategy, opcintype, opcintype, opfamily); /* - * Are there equality operators that take exactly the FK type? - * Assume we should look through any domain here. + * Are there equality operators that take exactly the FK type? Assume + * we should look through any domain here. */ fktyped = getBaseType(fktype); @@ -4099,21 +4101,21 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, ffeqop = get_opfamily_member(opfamily, fktyped, fktyped, eqstrategy); else - ffeqop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + ffeqop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ if (!(OidIsValid(pfeqop) && OidIsValid(ffeqop))) { /* - * Otherwise, look for an implicit cast from the FK type to - * the opcintype, and if found, use the primary equality operator. + * Otherwise, look for an implicit cast from the FK type to the + * opcintype, and if found, use the primary equality operator. * This is a bit tricky because opcintype might be a generic type * such as ANYARRAY, and so what we have to test is whether the * two actual column types can be concurrently cast to that type. * (Otherwise, we'd fail to reject combinations such as int[] and * point[].) */ - Oid input_typeids[2]; - Oid target_typeids[2]; + Oid input_typeids[2]; + Oid target_typeids[2]; input_typeids[0] = pktype; input_typeids[1] = fktype; @@ -5255,10 +5257,10 @@ ATPostAlterTypeParse(char *cmd, List **wqueue) ListCell *list_item; /* - * We expect that we will get only ALTER TABLE and CREATE INDEX statements. - * Hence, there is no need to pass them through parse_analyze() or the - * rewriter, but instead we need to pass them through parse_utilcmd.c - * to make them ready for execution. + * We expect that we will get only ALTER TABLE and CREATE INDEX + * statements. Hence, there is no need to pass them through + * parse_analyze() or the rewriter, but instead we need to pass them + * through parse_utilcmd.c to make them ready for execution. */ raw_parsetree_list = raw_parser(cmd); querytree_list = NIL; @@ -5272,8 +5274,8 @@ ATPostAlterTypeParse(char *cmd, List **wqueue) cmd)); else if (IsA(stmt, AlterTableStmt)) querytree_list = list_concat(querytree_list, - transformAlterTableStmt((AlterTableStmt *) stmt, - cmd)); + transformAlterTableStmt((AlterTableStmt *) stmt, + cmd)); else querytree_list = lappend(querytree_list, stmt); } @@ -5528,7 +5530,7 @@ ATExecChangeOwner(Oid relationOid, Oid newOwnerId, bool recursing) */ if (tuple_class->relkind != RELKIND_INDEX) AlterTypeOwnerInternal(tuple_class->reltype, newOwnerId, - tuple_class->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE); + tuple_class->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE); /* * If we are operating on a table, also change the ownership of any @@ -5983,7 +5985,7 @@ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, */ static void ATExecEnableDisableRule(Relation rel, char *trigname, - char fires_when) + char fires_when) { EnableDisableRule(rel, trigname, fires_when); } @@ -6051,8 +6053,8 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) if (inh->inhparent == RelationGetRelid(parent_rel)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE), - errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", - RelationGetRelationName(parent_rel)))); + errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", + RelationGetRelationName(parent_rel)))); if (inh->inhseqno > inhseqno) inhseqno = inh->inhseqno; } @@ -6063,12 +6065,12 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) * (In particular, this disallows making a rel inherit from itself.) * * This is not completely bulletproof because of race conditions: in - * multi-level inheritance trees, someone else could concurrently - * be making another inheritance link that closes the loop but does - * not join either of the rels we have locked. Preventing that seems - * to require exclusive locks on the entire inheritance tree, which is - * a cure worse than the disease. find_all_inheritors() will cope with - * circularity anyway, so don't sweat it too much. + * multi-level inheritance trees, someone else could concurrently be + * making another inheritance link that closes the loop but does not join + * either of the rels we have locked. Preventing that seems to require + * exclusive locks on the entire inheritance tree, which is a cure worse + * than the disease. find_all_inheritors() will cope with circularity + * anyway, so don't sweat it too much. */ children = find_all_inheritors(RelationGetRelid(child_rel)); @@ -6095,7 +6097,7 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) MergeConstraintsIntoExisting(child_rel, parent_rel); /* - * OK, it looks valid. Make the catalog entries that show inheritance. + * OK, it looks valid. Make the catalog entries that show inheritance. */ StoreCatalogInheritance1(RelationGetRelid(child_rel), RelationGetRelid(parent_rel), @@ -6189,8 +6191,8 @@ MergeAttributesIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel) if (attribute->attnotnull && !childatt->attnotnull) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("column \"%s\" in child table must be marked NOT NULL", - attributeName))); + errmsg("column \"%s\" in child table must be marked NOT NULL", + attributeName))); /* * OK, bump the child column's inheritance count. (If we fail @@ -6345,20 +6347,20 @@ ATExecDropInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent) bool found = false; /* - * AccessShareLock on the parent is probably enough, seeing that DROP TABLE - * doesn't lock parent tables at all. We need some lock since we'll be - * inspecting the parent's schema. + * AccessShareLock on the parent is probably enough, seeing that DROP + * TABLE doesn't lock parent tables at all. We need some lock since we'll + * be inspecting the parent's schema. */ parent_rel = heap_openrv(parent, AccessShareLock); /* - * We don't bother to check ownership of the parent table --- ownership - * of the child is presumed enough rights. + * We don't bother to check ownership of the parent table --- ownership of + * the child is presumed enough rights. */ /* - * Find and destroy the pg_inherits entry linking the two, or error out - * if there is none. + * Find and destroy the pg_inherits entry linking the two, or error out if + * there is none. */ catalogRelation = heap_open(InheritsRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); ScanKeyInit(&key[0], @@ -6508,9 +6510,9 @@ AlterTableNamespace(RangeVar *relation, const char *newschema) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), errmsg("cannot move an owned sequence into another schema"), - errdetail("Sequence \"%s\" is linked to table \"%s\".", - RelationGetRelationName(rel), - get_rel_name(tableId)))); + errdetail("Sequence \"%s\" is linked to table \"%s\".", + RelationGetRelationName(rel), + get_rel_name(tableId)))); } break; case RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE: diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c index 305da59da0..b212fe0823 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.50 2007/11/15 20:36:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.51 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt) if (strchr(location, '\'')) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME), - errmsg("tablespace location cannot contain single quotes"))); + errmsg("tablespace location cannot contain single quotes"))); /* * Allowing relative paths seems risky @@ -356,10 +356,10 @@ CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt) } /* - * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between creating - * the symlink on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's - * not great that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't - * want to make it larger than necessary. + * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between creating the + * symlink on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's not great + * that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't want to make + * it larger than necessary. */ ForceSyncCommit(); @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) LWLockAcquire(TablespaceCreateLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); /* - * Try to remove the physical infrastructure. + * Try to remove the physical infrastructure. */ if (!remove_tablespace_directories(tablespaceoid, false)) { @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) * Not all files deleted? However, there can be lingering empty files * in the directories, left behind by for example DROP TABLE, that * have been scheduled for deletion at next checkpoint (see comments - * in mdunlink() for details). We could just delete them immediately, + * in mdunlink() for details). We could just delete them immediately, * but we can't tell them apart from important data files that we * mustn't delete. So instead, we force a checkpoint which will clean * out any lingering files, and try again. @@ -506,10 +506,10 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) */ /* - * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between removing - * the files on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's - * not great that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't - * want to make it larger than necessary. + * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between removing the + * files on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's not great + * that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't want to make + * it larger than necessary. */ ForceSyncCommit(); @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ remove_tablespace_directories(Oid tablespaceoid, bool redo) * * If redo is true then ENOENT is a likely outcome here, and we allow it * to pass without comment. In normal operation we still allow it, but - * with a warning. This is because even though ProcessUtility disallows + * with a warning. This is because even though ProcessUtility disallows * DROP TABLESPACE in a transaction block, it's possible that a previous * DROP failed and rolled back after removing the tablespace directories * and symlink. We want to allow a new DROP attempt to succeed at @@ -1019,12 +1019,12 @@ assign_temp_tablespaces(const char *newval, bool doit, GucSource source) * transaction, we'll leak a bit of TopTransactionContext memory. * Doesn't seem worth worrying about. */ - Oid *tblSpcs; - int numSpcs; + Oid *tblSpcs; + int numSpcs; ListCell *l; tblSpcs = (Oid *) MemoryContextAlloc(TopTransactionContext, - list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); + list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); numSpcs = 0; foreach(l, namelist) { @@ -1112,10 +1112,10 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) return; /* - * Can't do catalog access unless within a transaction. This is just - * a safety check in case this function is called by low-level code that - * could conceivably execute outside a transaction. Note that in such - * a scenario, fd.c will fall back to using the current database's default + * Can't do catalog access unless within a transaction. This is just a + * safety check in case this function is called by low-level code that + * could conceivably execute outside a transaction. Note that in such a + * scenario, fd.c will fall back to using the current database's default * tablespace, which should always be OK. */ if (!IsTransactionState()) @@ -1136,7 +1136,7 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) /* Store tablespace OIDs in an array in TopTransactionContext */ tblSpcs = (Oid *) MemoryContextAlloc(TopTransactionContext, - list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); + list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); numSpcs = 0; foreach(l, namelist) { @@ -1160,8 +1160,8 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) } /* - * Allow explicit specification of database's default tablespace - * in temp_tablespaces without triggering permissions checks. + * Allow explicit specification of database's default tablespace in + * temp_tablespaces without triggering permissions checks. */ if (curoid == MyDatabaseTableSpace) { @@ -1241,8 +1241,8 @@ get_tablespace_name(Oid spc_oid) /* * Search pg_tablespace. We use a heapscan here even though there is an - * index on oid, on the theory that pg_tablespace will usually have just - * a few entries and so an indexed lookup is a waste of effort. + * index on oid, on the theory that pg_tablespace will usually have just a + * few entries and so an indexed lookup is a waste of effort. */ rel = heap_open(TableSpaceRelationId, AccessShareLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c index ca3b2ec2ce..608293cac3 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c,v 1.5 2007/08/22 22:30:20 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ #include "utils/syscache.h" -static void MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, - HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); -static void DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, - HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); +static void MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, + HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); +static void DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, + HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); /* --------------------- TS Parser commands ------------------------ */ @@ -220,8 +220,8 @@ DefineTSParser(List *names, List *parameters) else ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("text search parser parameter \"%s\" not recognized", - defel->defname))); + errmsg("text search parser parameter \"%s\" not recognized", + defel->defname))); } /* @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ RenameTSParser(List *oldname, const char *newname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), errmsg("text search parser \"%s\" already exists", - newname))); + newname))); namestrcpy(&(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname), newname); simple_heap_update(rel, &tup->t_self, tup); @@ -421,10 +421,9 @@ verify_dictoptions(Oid tmplId, List *dictoptions) /* * Suppress this test when running in a standalone backend. This is a * hack to allow initdb to create prefab dictionaries that might not - * actually be usable in template1's encoding (due to using external - * files that can't be translated into template1's encoding). We want - * to create them anyway, since they might be usable later in other - * databases. + * actually be usable in template1's encoding (due to using external files + * that can't be translated into template1's encoding). We want to create + * them anyway, since they might be usable later in other databases. */ if (!IsUnderPostmaster) return; @@ -445,14 +444,14 @@ verify_dictoptions(Oid tmplId, List *dictoptions) if (dictoptions) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("text search template \"%s\" does not accept options", - NameStr(tform->tmplname)))); + errmsg("text search template \"%s\" does not accept options", + NameStr(tform->tmplname)))); } else { /* - * Copy the options just in case init method thinks it can scribble - * on them ... + * Copy the options just in case init method thinks it can scribble on + * them ... */ dictoptions = copyObject(dictoptions); @@ -793,8 +792,8 @@ AlterTSDictionary(AlterTSDictionaryStmt * stmt) /* * NOTE: because we only support altering the options, not the template, - * there is no need to update dependencies. This might have to change - * if the options ever reference inside-the-database objects. + * there is no need to update dependencies. This might have to change if + * the options ever reference inside-the-database objects. */ heap_freetuple(newtup); @@ -966,7 +965,7 @@ DefineTSTemplate(List *names, List *parameters) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to create text search templates"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to create text search templates"))); /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ namespaceoid = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(names, &tmplname); @@ -1048,7 +1047,7 @@ RenameTSTemplate(List *oldname, const char *newname) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to rename text search templates"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to rename text search templates"))); rel = heap_open(TSTemplateRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1633,7 +1632,7 @@ AlterTSConfigurationOwner(List *name, Oid newOwnerId) * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION - main entry point */ void -AlterTSConfiguration(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt) +AlterTSConfiguration(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt) { HeapTuple tup; Relation relMap; @@ -1727,7 +1726,7 @@ getTokenTypes(Oid prsId, List *tokennames) * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION ADD/ALTER MAPPING */ static void -MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, +MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap) { Oid cfgId = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); @@ -1889,7 +1888,7 @@ MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION DROP MAPPING */ static void -DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, +DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap) { Oid cfgId = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); @@ -1981,7 +1980,7 @@ serialize_deflist(List *deflist) char *val = defGetString(defel); appendStringInfo(&buf, "%s = ", - quote_identifier(defel->defname)); + quote_identifier(defel->defname)); /* If backslashes appear, force E syntax to determine their handling */ if (strchr(val, '\\')) appendStringInfoChar(&buf, ESCAPE_STRING_SYNTAX); @@ -2014,7 +2013,7 @@ serialize_deflist(List *deflist) List * deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) { - text *in = DatumGetTextP(txt); /* in case it's toasted */ + text *in = DatumGetTextP(txt); /* in case it's toasted */ List *result = NIL; int len = VARSIZE(in) - VARHDRSZ; char *ptr, @@ -2022,7 +2021,8 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *workspace, *wsptr = NULL, *startvalue = NULL; - typedef enum { + typedef enum + { CS_WAITKEY, CS_INKEY, CS_INQKEY, @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) CS_INSQVALUE, CS_INDQVALUE, CS_INWVALUE - } ds_state; + } ds_state; ds_state state = CS_WAITKEY; workspace = (char *) palloc(len + 1); /* certainly enough room */ @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INQKEY: if (*ptr == '"') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2106,7 +2106,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) startvalue = wsptr; state = CS_INSQVALUE; } - else if (*ptr == 'E' && ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') + else if (*ptr == 'E' && ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') { ptr++; startvalue = wsptr; @@ -2127,7 +2127,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INSQVALUE: if (*ptr == '\'') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2137,13 +2137,13 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } } else if (*ptr == '\\') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\\') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\\') { /* copy only one of the two backslashes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2159,7 +2159,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INDQVALUE: if (*ptr == '"') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2169,7 +2169,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } } @@ -2184,7 +2184,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } else @@ -2203,7 +2203,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); } else if (state != CS_WAITKEY) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c index 230004c59b..e93f3b9a4f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.110 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.111 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) Oid typmodoutOid = InvalidOid; Oid analyzeOid = InvalidOid; char *array_type; - Oid array_oid; + Oid array_oid; ListCell *pl; Oid typoid; Oid resulttype; - Relation pg_type; + Relation pg_type; /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ typeNamespace = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(names, &typeName); @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) 0, 0); /* - * If it's not a shell, see if it's an autogenerated array type, - * and if so rename it out of the way. + * If it's not a shell, see if it's an autogenerated array type, and if so + * rename it out of the way. */ if (OidIsValid(typoid) && get_typisdefined(typoid)) { @@ -155,8 +155,8 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) } /* - * If it doesn't exist, create it as a shell, so that the OID is known - * for use in the I/O function definitions. + * If it doesn't exist, create it as a shell, so that the OID is known for + * use in the I/O function definitions. */ if (!OidIsValid(typoid)) { @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) NameListToString(analyzeName)); /* Preassign array type OID so we can insert it in pg_type.typarray */ - pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); array_oid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); @@ -418,14 +418,14 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ internalLength, /* internal size */ - TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ + TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ delimiter, /* array element delimiter */ inputOid, /* input procedure */ outputOid, /* output procedure */ receiveOid, /* receive procedure */ sendOid, /* send procedure */ typmodinOid, /* typmodin procedure */ - typmodoutOid,/* typmodout procedure */ + typmodoutOid, /* typmodout procedure */ analyzeOid, /* analyze procedure */ elemType, /* element type ID */ false, /* this is not an array type */ @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ RemoveType(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) return; } - typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); typ = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(tup); /* Permission check: must own type or its namespace */ @@ -564,9 +564,9 @@ RemoveTypeById(Oid typeOid) simple_heap_delete(relation, &tup->t_self); /* - * If it is an enum, delete the pg_enum entries too; we don't bother - * with making dependency entries for those, so it has to be done - * "by hand" here. + * If it is an enum, delete the pg_enum entries too; we don't bother with + * making dependency entries for those, so it has to be done "by hand" + * here. */ if (((Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(tup))->typtype == TYPTYPE_ENUM) EnumValuesDelete(typeOid); @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) get_namespace_name(domainNamespace)); /* - * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and + * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and * it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, @@ -651,10 +651,9 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) basetypeoid = HeapTupleGetOid(typeTup); /* - * Base type must be a plain base type, another domain or an enum. - * Domains over pseudotypes would create a security hole. Domains - * over composite types might be made to work in the future, but not - * today. + * Base type must be a plain base type, another domain or an enum. Domains + * over pseudotypes would create a security hole. Domains over composite + * types might be made to work in the future, but not today. */ typtype = baseType->typtype; if (typtype != TYPTYPE_BASE && @@ -751,8 +750,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) pstate = make_parsestate(NULL); /* - * Cook the constr->raw_expr into an expression. - * Note: name is strictly for error message + * Cook the constr->raw_expr into an expression. Note: + * name is strictly for error message */ defaultExpr = cookDefault(pstate, constr->raw_expr, basetypeoid, @@ -760,8 +759,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) domainName); /* - * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we treat - * it like not having a default. + * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we treat it + * like not having a default. * * Note that if the basetype is another domain, we'll see * a CoerceToDomain expr here and not discard the default. @@ -786,7 +785,7 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) defaultValue = deparse_expression(defaultExpr, deparse_context_for(domainName, - InvalidOid), + InvalidOid), false, false); defaultValueBin = nodeToString(defaultExpr); } @@ -872,8 +871,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) outputProcedure, /* output procedure */ receiveProcedure, /* receive procedure */ sendProcedure, /* send procedure */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ analyzeProcedure, /* analyze procedure */ typelem, /* element type ID */ false, /* this isn't an array */ @@ -961,7 +960,7 @@ RemoveDomain(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) return; } - typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); /* Permission check: must own type or its namespace */ if (!pg_type_ownercheck(typeoid, GetUserId()) && @@ -996,16 +995,16 @@ RemoveDomain(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) * Registers a new enum. */ void -DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) +DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt * stmt) { - char *enumName; - char *enumArrayName; - Oid enumNamespace; - Oid enumTypeOid; + char *enumName; + char *enumArrayName; + Oid enumNamespace; + Oid enumTypeOid; AclResult aclresult; - Oid old_type_oid; - Oid enumArrayOid; - Relation pg_type; + Oid old_type_oid; + Oid enumArrayOid; + Relation pg_type; /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ enumNamespace = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(stmt->typename, @@ -1018,7 +1017,7 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) get_namespace_name(enumNamespace)); /* - * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and + * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and * it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, @@ -1034,39 +1033,39 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) } /* Preassign array type OID so we can insert it in pg_type.typarray */ - pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); enumArrayOid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); /* Create the pg_type entry */ - enumTypeOid = - TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined type OID */ - enumName, /* type name */ - enumNamespace, /* namespace */ - InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ - 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ - sizeof(Oid), /* internal size */ + enumTypeOid = + TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined type OID */ + enumName, /* type name */ + enumNamespace, /* namespace */ + InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ + 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ + sizeof(Oid), /* internal size */ TYPTYPE_ENUM, /* type-type (enum type) */ DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ - F_ENUM_IN, /* input procedure */ - F_ENUM_OUT, /* output procedure */ - F_ENUM_RECV, /* receive procedure */ - F_ENUM_SEND, /* send procedure */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - InvalidOid, /* element type ID */ - false, /* this is not an array type */ + F_ENUM_IN, /* input procedure */ + F_ENUM_OUT, /* output procedure */ + F_ENUM_RECV, /* receive procedure */ + F_ENUM_SEND, /* send procedure */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + InvalidOid, /* element type ID */ + false, /* this is not an array type */ enumArrayOid, /* array type we are about to create */ - InvalidOid, /* base type ID (only for domains) */ - NULL, /* never a default type value */ - NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ - true, /* always passed by value */ - 'i', /* int alignment */ - 'p', /* TOAST strategy always plain */ - -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ - 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ - false); /* Type NOT NULL */ + InvalidOid, /* base type ID (only for domains) */ + NULL, /* never a default type value */ + NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ + true, /* always passed by value */ + 'i', /* int alignment */ + 'p', /* TOAST strategy always plain */ + -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ + 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ + false); /* Type NOT NULL */ /* Enter the enum's values into pg_enum */ EnumValuesCreate(enumTypeOid, stmt->vals); @@ -1077,31 +1076,31 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) enumArrayName = makeArrayTypeName(enumName, enumNamespace); TypeCreate(enumArrayOid, /* force assignment of this type OID */ - enumArrayName, /* type name */ - enumNamespace, /* namespace */ - InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ - 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ - -1, /* internal size (always varlena) */ + enumArrayName, /* type name */ + enumNamespace, /* namespace */ + InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ + 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ + -1, /* internal size (always varlena) */ TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ - DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ - F_ARRAY_IN, /* input procedure */ - F_ARRAY_OUT, /* output procedure */ - F_ARRAY_RECV, /* receive procedure */ - F_ARRAY_SEND, /* send procedure */ + DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ + F_ARRAY_IN, /* input procedure */ + F_ARRAY_OUT, /* output procedure */ + F_ARRAY_RECV, /* receive procedure */ + F_ARRAY_SEND, /* send procedure */ InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - enumTypeOid, /* element type ID */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + enumTypeOid, /* element type ID */ true, /* yes this is an array type */ InvalidOid, /* no further array type */ - InvalidOid, /* base type ID */ - NULL, /* never a default type value */ - NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ - false, /* never passed by value */ - 'i', /* enums have align i, so do their arrays */ - 'x', /* ARRAY is always toastable */ - -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ - 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ + InvalidOid, /* base type ID */ + NULL, /* never a default type value */ + NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ + false, /* never passed by value */ + 'i', /* enums have align i, so do their arrays */ + 'x', /* ARRAY is always toastable */ + -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ + 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ false); /* Type NOT NULL */ pfree(enumArrayName); @@ -1475,7 +1474,7 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) * DefineDomain.) */ if (defaultExpr == NULL || - (IsA(defaultExpr, Const) && ((Const *) defaultExpr)->constisnull)) + (IsA(defaultExpr, Const) &&((Const *) defaultExpr)->constisnull)) { /* Default is NULL, drop it */ new_record_nulls[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = 'n'; @@ -1493,13 +1492,13 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) defaultValue = deparse_expression(defaultExpr, deparse_context_for(NameStr(typTup->typname), InvalidOid), - false, false); + false, false); /* * Form an updated tuple with the new default and write it back. */ new_record[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, - CStringGetDatum(nodeToString(defaultExpr))); + CStringGetDatum(nodeToString(defaultExpr))); new_record_repl[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = 'r'; new_record[Anum_pg_type_typdefault - 1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, @@ -1527,7 +1526,7 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) /* Rebuild dependencies */ GenerateTypeDependencies(typTup->typnamespace, domainoid, - InvalidOid, /* typrelid is n/a */ + InvalidOid, /* typrelid is n/a */ 0, /* relation kind is n/a */ typTup->typowner, typTup->typinput, @@ -1956,9 +1955,10 @@ get_rels_with_domain(Oid domainOid, LOCKMODE lockmode) if (pg_depend->classid == TypeRelationId) { Assert(get_typtype(pg_depend->objid) == TYPTYPE_DOMAIN); + /* - * Recursively add dependent columns to the output list. This - * is a bit inefficient since we may fail to combine RelToCheck + * Recursively add dependent columns to the output list. This is + * a bit inefficient since we may fail to combine RelToCheck * entries when attributes of the same rel have different derived * domain types, but it's probably not worth improving. */ @@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("type \"%s\" does not exist", TypeNameToString(typename)))); - typeOid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeOid = typeTypeId(tup); /* Copy the syscache entry so we can scribble on it below */ newtup = heap_copytuple(tup); @@ -2375,8 +2375,8 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) /* * If it's a composite type, we need to check that it really is a - * free-standing composite type, and not a table's rowtype. We - * want people to use ALTER TABLE not ALTER TYPE for that case. + * free-standing composite type, and not a table's rowtype. We want people + * to use ALTER TABLE not ALTER TYPE for that case. */ if (typTup->typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE && get_rel_relkind(typTup->typrelid) != RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE) @@ -2423,8 +2423,8 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) } /* - * If it's a composite type, invoke ATExecChangeOwner so that we - * fix up the pg_class entry properly. That will call back to + * If it's a composite type, invoke ATExecChangeOwner so that we fix + * up the pg_class entry properly. That will call back to * AlterTypeOwnerInternal to take care of the pg_type entry(s). */ if (typTup->typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE) @@ -2458,7 +2458,7 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) /* * AlterTypeOwnerInternal - change type owner unconditionally * - * This is currently only used to propagate ALTER TABLE/TYPE OWNER to a + * This is currently only used to propagate ALTER TABLE/TYPE OWNER to a * table's rowtype or an array type, and to implement REASSIGN OWNED BY. * It assumes the caller has done all needed checks. The function will * automatically recurse to an array type if the type has one. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ AlterTypeNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) * Caller must have already checked privileges. * * The function automatically recurses to process the type's array type, - * if any. isImplicitArray should be TRUE only when doing this internal + * if any. isImplicitArray should be TRUE only when doing this internal * recursion (outside callers must never try to move an array type directly). * * If errorOnTableType is TRUE, the function errors out if the type is diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c index 55ce0dbade..c0d58d33ea 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.360 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.361 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -592,19 +592,19 @@ vacuum_set_xid_limits(int freeze_min_age, bool sharedRel, /* * We can always ignore processes running lazy vacuum. This is because we * use these values only for deciding which tuples we must keep in the - * tables. Since lazy vacuum doesn't write its XID anywhere, it's - * safe to ignore it. In theory it could be problematic to ignore lazy - * vacuums on a full vacuum, but keep in mind that only one vacuum process - * can be working on a particular table at any time, and that each vacuum - * is always an independent transaction. + * tables. Since lazy vacuum doesn't write its XID anywhere, it's safe to + * ignore it. In theory it could be problematic to ignore lazy vacuums on + * a full vacuum, but keep in mind that only one vacuum process can be + * working on a particular table at any time, and that each vacuum is + * always an independent transaction. */ *oldestXmin = GetOldestXmin(sharedRel, true); Assert(TransactionIdIsNormal(*oldestXmin)); /* - * Determine the minimum freeze age to use: as specified by the caller, - * or vacuum_freeze_min_age, but in any case not more than half + * Determine the minimum freeze age to use: as specified by the caller, or + * vacuum_freeze_min_age, but in any case not more than half * autovacuum_freeze_max_age, so that autovacuums to prevent XID * wraparound won't occur too frequently. */ @@ -623,8 +623,8 @@ vacuum_set_xid_limits(int freeze_min_age, bool sharedRel, /* * If oldestXmin is very far back (in practice, more than - * autovacuum_freeze_max_age / 2 XIDs old), complain and force a - * minimum freeze age of zero. + * autovacuum_freeze_max_age / 2 XIDs old), complain and force a minimum + * freeze age of zero. */ safeLimit = ReadNewTransactionId() - autovacuum_freeze_max_age; if (!TransactionIdIsNormal(safeLimit)) @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ vac_update_relstats(Oid relid, BlockNumber num_pages, double num_tuples, * advance pg_database.datfrozenxid, also try to truncate pg_clog. * * We violate transaction semantics here by overwriting the database's - * existing pg_database tuple with the new value. This is reasonably + * existing pg_database tuple with the new value. This is reasonably * safe since the new value is correct whether or not this transaction * commits. As with vac_update_relstats, this avoids leaving dead tuples * behind after a VACUUM. @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ vac_update_datfrozenxid(void) bool dirty = false; /* - * Initialize the "min" calculation with RecentGlobalXmin. Any + * Initialize the "min" calculation with RecentGlobalXmin. Any * not-yet-committed pg_class entries for new tables must have * relfrozenxid at least this high, because any other open xact must have * RecentXmin >= its PGPROC.xmin >= our RecentGlobalXmin; see @@ -848,8 +848,7 @@ vac_update_datfrozenxid(void) /* * If we were able to advance datfrozenxid, mark the flat-file copy of - * pg_database for update at commit, and see if we can truncate - * pg_clog. + * pg_database for update at commit, and see if we can truncate pg_clog. */ if (dirty) { @@ -893,10 +892,10 @@ vac_truncate_clog(TransactionId frozenXID) * inserted by CREATE DATABASE. Any such entry will have a copy of some * existing DB's datfrozenxid, and that source DB cannot be ours because * of the interlock against copying a DB containing an active backend. - * Hence the new entry will not reduce the minimum. Also, if two - * VACUUMs concurrently modify the datfrozenxid's of different databases, - * the worst possible outcome is that pg_clog is not truncated as - * aggressively as it could be. + * Hence the new entry will not reduce the minimum. Also, if two VACUUMs + * concurrently modify the datfrozenxid's of different databases, the + * worst possible outcome is that pg_clog is not truncated as aggressively + * as it could be. */ relation = heap_open(DatabaseRelationId, AccessShareLock); @@ -989,13 +988,13 @@ vacuum_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, char expected_relkind) * * We can furthermore set the PROC_IN_VACUUM flag, which lets other * concurrent VACUUMs know that they can ignore this one while - * determining their OldestXmin. (The reason we don't set it - * during a full VACUUM is exactly that we may have to run user- - * defined functions for functional indexes, and we want to make sure - * that if they use the snapshot set above, any tuples it requires - * can't get removed from other tables. An index function that - * depends on the contents of other tables is arguably broken, but we - * won't break it here by violating transaction semantics.) + * determining their OldestXmin. (The reason we don't set it during a + * full VACUUM is exactly that we may have to run user- defined + * functions for functional indexes, and we want to make sure that if + * they use the snapshot set above, any tuples it requires can't get + * removed from other tables. An index function that depends on the + * contents of other tables is arguably broken, but we won't break it + * here by violating transaction semantics.) * * Note: this flag remains set until CommitTransaction or * AbortTransaction. We don't want to clear it until we reset @@ -1168,8 +1167,8 @@ full_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt) /* * Flush any previous async-commit transactions. This does not guarantee - * that we will be able to set hint bits for tuples they inserted, but - * it improves the probability, especially in simple sequential-commands + * that we will be able to set hint bits for tuples they inserted, but it + * improves the probability, especially in simple sequential-commands * cases. See scan_heap() and repair_frag() for more about this. */ XLogAsyncCommitFlush(); @@ -1319,10 +1318,11 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * dirty. To ensure that invalid data doesn't get written to disk, we * must take exclusive buffer lock wherever we potentially modify * pages. In fact, we insist on cleanup lock so that we can safely - * call heap_page_prune(). (This might be overkill, since the bgwriter - * pays no attention to individual tuples, but on the other hand it's - * unlikely that the bgwriter has this particular page pinned at this - * instant. So violating the coding rule would buy us little anyway.) + * call heap_page_prune(). (This might be overkill, since the + * bgwriter pays no attention to individual tuples, but on the other + * hand it's unlikely that the bgwriter has this particular page + * pinned at this instant. So violating the coding rule would buy us + * little anyway.) */ LockBufferForCleanup(buf); @@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, continue; } - /* + /* * Prune all HOT-update chains in this page. * * We use the redirect_move option so that redirecting line pointers @@ -1377,8 +1377,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, true, false); /* - * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for - * tuples requiring freezing. + * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for tuples + * requiring freezing. */ nfrozen = 0; notup = true; @@ -1393,9 +1393,9 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * Collect un-used items too - it's possible to have indexes - * pointing here after crash. (That's an ancient comment and - * is likely obsolete with WAL, but we might as well continue - * to check for such problems.) + * pointing here after crash. (That's an ancient comment and is + * likely obsolete with WAL, but we might as well continue to + * check for such problems.) */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(itemid)) { @@ -1406,9 +1406,9 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * DEAD item pointers are to be vacuumed normally; but we don't - * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting - * (at least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just - * freed up a non-HOT tuple). + * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting (at + * least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just freed up + * a non-HOT tuple). */ if (ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) { @@ -1433,12 +1433,13 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, !OidIsValid(HeapTupleGetOid(&tuple))) elog(WARNING, "relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: OID is invalid", relname, blkno, offnum); + /* * The shrinkage phase of VACUUM FULL requires that all * live tuples have XMIN_COMMITTED set --- see comments in * repair_frag()'s walk-along-page loop. Use of async * commit may prevent HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum from - * setting the bit for a recently committed tuple. Rather + * setting the bit for a recently committed tuple. Rather * than trying to handle this corner case, we just give up * and don't shrink. */ @@ -1448,30 +1449,31 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: XMIN_COMMITTED not set for transaction %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; } break; case HEAPTUPLE_DEAD: + /* * Ordinarily, DEAD tuples would have been removed by * heap_page_prune(), but it's possible that the tuple * state changed since heap_page_prune() looked. In * particular an INSERT_IN_PROGRESS tuple could have * changed to DEAD if the inserter aborted. So this - * cannot be considered an error condition, though it - * does suggest that someone released a lock early. + * cannot be considered an error condition, though it does + * suggest that someone released a lock early. * * If the tuple is HOT-updated then it must only be * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it as if it * were RECENTLY_DEAD, and abandon shrinking. (XXX is it - * worth trying to make the shrinking code smart enough - * to handle this? It's an unusual corner case.) + * worth trying to make the shrinking code smart enough to + * handle this? It's an unusual corner case.) * * DEAD heap-only tuples can safely be removed if they * aren't themselves HOT-updated, although this is a bit - * inefficient since we'll uselessly try to remove - * index entries for them. + * inefficient since we'll uselessly try to remove index + * entries for them. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&tuple)) { @@ -1484,7 +1486,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, } else { - tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + /* * We need not require XMIN_COMMITTED or * XMAX_COMMITTED to be set, since we will remove the @@ -1502,8 +1505,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, nkeep += 1; /* - * As with the LIVE case, shrinkage requires XMIN_COMMITTED - * to be set. + * As with the LIVE case, shrinkage requires + * XMIN_COMMITTED to be set. */ if (do_shrinking && !(tuple.t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED)) @@ -1511,7 +1514,7 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: XMIN_COMMITTED not set for transaction %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; } @@ -1542,15 +1545,15 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * This should not happen, since we hold exclusive lock on * the relation; shouldn't we raise an error? (Actually, * it can happen in system catalogs, since we tend to - * release write lock before commit there.) As above, - * we can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is + * release write lock before commit there.) As above, we + * can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is * uncertain. */ if (do_shrinking) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: InsertTransactionInProgress %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: @@ -1559,15 +1562,15 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * This should not happen, since we hold exclusive lock on * the relation; shouldn't we raise an error? (Actually, * it can happen in system catalogs, since we tend to - * release write lock before commit there.) As above, - * we can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is + * release write lock before commit there.) As above, we + * can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is * uncertain. */ if (do_shrinking) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: DeleteTransactionInProgress %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; break; default: @@ -1615,8 +1618,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, max_tlen = tuple.t_len; /* - * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it - * needs freezing. + * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it needs + * freezing. */ if (heap_freeze_tuple(tuple.t_data, FreezeLimit, InvalidBuffer)) @@ -1996,11 +1999,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, if (i >= vacpage->offsets_free) /* not found */ { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = offnum; + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * the index cleanup. Decrement the + * keep_indexed_tuples count to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2010,11 +2014,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, else { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = offnum; + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an - * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * index entry for this item which will be removed in the + * index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples count + * to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2051,10 +2056,10 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * Also, because we distinguish DEAD and RECENTLY_DEAD tuples * using OldestXmin, which is a rather coarse test, it is quite * possible to have an update chain in which a tuple we think is - * RECENTLY_DEAD links forward to one that is definitely DEAD. - * In such a case the RECENTLY_DEAD tuple must actually be dead, - * but it seems too complicated to try to make VACUUM remove it. - * We treat each contiguous set of RECENTLY_DEAD tuples as a + * RECENTLY_DEAD links forward to one that is definitely DEAD. In + * such a case the RECENTLY_DEAD tuple must actually be dead, but + * it seems too complicated to try to make VACUUM remove it. We + * treat each contiguous set of RECENTLY_DEAD tuples as a * separately movable chain, ignoring any intervening DEAD ones. */ if (((tuple.t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_UPDATED) && @@ -2096,11 +2101,11 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * If this tuple is in the begin/middle of the chain then we * have to move to the end of chain. As with any t_ctid * chase, we have to verify that each new tuple is really the - * descendant of the tuple we came from; however, here we - * need even more than the normal amount of paranoia. - * If t_ctid links forward to a tuple determined to be DEAD, - * then depending on where that tuple is, it might already - * have been removed, and perhaps even replaced by a MOVED_IN + * descendant of the tuple we came from; however, here we need + * even more than the normal amount of paranoia. If t_ctid + * links forward to a tuple determined to be DEAD, then + * depending on where that tuple is, it might already have + * been removed, and perhaps even replaced by a MOVED_IN * tuple. We don't want to include any DEAD tuples in the * chain, so we have to recheck HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum. */ @@ -2116,7 +2121,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, OffsetNumber nextOffnum; ItemId nextItemid; HeapTupleHeader nextTdata; - HTSV_Result nextTstatus; + HTSV_Result nextTstatus; nextTid = tp.t_data->t_ctid; priorXmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tp.t_data); @@ -2148,10 +2153,11 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ReleaseBuffer(nextBuf); break; } + /* - * Must check for DEAD or MOVED_IN tuple, too. This - * could potentially update hint bits, so we'd better - * hold the buffer content lock. + * Must check for DEAD or MOVED_IN tuple, too. This could + * potentially update hint bits, so we'd better hold the + * buffer content lock. */ LockBuffer(nextBuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); nextTstatus = HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum(nextTdata, @@ -2266,7 +2272,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, } tp.t_self = vtlp->this_tid; Pbuf = ReadBufferWithStrategy(onerel, - ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tp.t_self)), + ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tp.t_self)), vac_strategy); Ppage = BufferGetPage(Pbuf); Pitemid = PageGetItemId(Ppage, @@ -2350,7 +2356,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* Get page to move from */ tuple.t_self = vtmove[ti].tid; Cbuf = ReadBufferWithStrategy(onerel, - ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tuple.t_self)), + ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tuple.t_self)), vac_strategy); /* Get page to move to */ @@ -2375,10 +2381,10 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, &ec, &Ctid, vtmove[ti].cleanVpd); /* - * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, - * this move will generate an additional index entry, - * so increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. - */ + * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, this + * move will generate an additional index entry, so + * increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. + */ if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) vacrelstats->rel_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2398,22 +2404,22 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * When we move tuple chains, we may need to move * tuples from a block that we haven't yet scanned in - * the outer walk-along-the-relation loop. Note that we - * can't be moving a tuple from a block that we have - * already scanned because if such a tuple exists, then - * we must have moved the chain along with that tuple - * when we scanned that block. IOW the test of - * (Cbuf != buf) guarantees that the tuple we are - * looking at right now is in a block which is yet to - * be scanned. + * the outer walk-along-the-relation loop. Note that + * we can't be moving a tuple from a block that we + * have already scanned because if such a tuple + * exists, then we must have moved the chain along + * with that tuple when we scanned that block. IOW the + * test of (Cbuf != buf) guarantees that the tuple we + * are looking at right now is in a block which is yet + * to be scanned. * * We maintain two counters to correctly count the * moved-off tuples from blocks that are not yet * scanned (keep_tuples) and how many of them have * index pointers (keep_indexed_tuples). The main - * reason to track the latter is to help verify - * that indexes have the expected number of entries - * when all the dust settles. + * reason to track the latter is to help verify that + * indexes have the expected number of entries when + * all the dust settles. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2467,9 +2473,9 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, dst_buffer, dst_page, dst_vacpage, &ec); /* - * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, - * this move will generate an additional index entry, - * so increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. + * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, this move will + * generate an additional index entry, so increment the + * rel_indexed_tuples count. */ if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) vacrelstats->rel_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2538,11 +2544,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = off; Assert(keep_tuples > 0); + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * the index cleanup. Decrement the + * keep_indexed_tuples count to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(htup)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2594,14 +2601,14 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * exclusive access to the relation. However, that would require a * lot of extra code to close and re-open the relation, indexes, etc. * For now, a quick hack: record status of current transaction as - * committed, and continue. We force the commit to be synchronous - * so that it's down to disk before we truncate. (Note: tqual.c - * knows that VACUUM FULL always uses sync commit, too.) The - * transaction continues to be shown as running in the ProcArray. + * committed, and continue. We force the commit to be synchronous so + * that it's down to disk before we truncate. (Note: tqual.c knows + * that VACUUM FULL always uses sync commit, too.) The transaction + * continues to be shown as running in the ProcArray. * - * XXX This desperately needs to be revisited. Any failure after - * this point will result in a PANIC "cannot abort transaction nnn, - * it was already committed"! + * XXX This desperately needs to be revisited. Any failure after this + * point will result in a PANIC "cannot abort transaction nnn, it was + * already committed"! */ ForceSyncCommit(); (void) RecordTransactionCommit(); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c index d3aa277ce8..3f7032fbcd 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * We are willing to use at most maintenance_work_mem memory space to keep * track of dead tuples. We initially allocate an array of TIDs of that size, * with an upper limit that depends on table size (this limit ensures we don't - * allocate a huge area uselessly for vacuuming small tables). If the array + * allocate a huge area uselessly for vacuuming small tables). If the array * threatens to overflow, we suspend the heap scan phase and perform a pass of * index cleanup and page compaction, then resume the heap scan with an empty * TID array. @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.101 2007/09/26 20:16:28 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.102 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, int nindexes; BlockNumber possibly_freeable; PGRUsage ru0; - TimestampTz starttime = 0; + TimestampTz starttime = 0; pg_rusage_init(&ru0); @@ -212,10 +212,10 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, (errmsg("relation \"%s.%s\" contains more than \"max_fsm_pages\" pages with useful free space", get_namespace_name(RelationGetNamespace(onerel)), RelationGetRelationName(onerel)), - errhint((vacrelstats->tot_free_pages > vacrelstats->rel_pages * 0.20 ? - /* Only suggest VACUUM FULL if 20% free */ - "Consider using VACUUM FULL on this relation or increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\"." : - "Consider increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\".")))); + errhint((vacrelstats->tot_free_pages > vacrelstats->rel_pages * 0.20 ? + /* Only suggest VACUUM FULL if 20% free */ + "Consider using VACUUM FULL on this relation or increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\"." : + "Consider increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\".")))); /* Update statistics in pg_class */ vac_update_relstats(RelationGetRelid(onerel), @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, get_namespace_name(RelationGetNamespace(onerel)), RelationGetRelationName(onerel), vacrelstats->num_index_scans, - vacrelstats->pages_removed, vacrelstats->rel_pages, - vacrelstats->tuples_deleted, vacrelstats->rel_tuples, + vacrelstats->pages_removed, vacrelstats->rel_pages, + vacrelstats->tuples_deleted, vacrelstats->rel_tuples, pg_rusage_show(&ru0)))); } } @@ -350,9 +350,9 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, * page that someone has just added to the relation and not yet * been able to initialize (see RelationGetBufferForTuple). To * protect against that, release the buffer lock, grab the - * relation extension lock momentarily, and re-lock the buffer. - * If the page is still uninitialized by then, it must be left - * over from a crashed backend, and we can initialize it. + * relation extension lock momentarily, and re-lock the buffer. If + * the page is still uninitialized by then, it must be left over + * from a crashed backend, and we can initialize it. * * We don't really need the relation lock when this is a new or * temp relation, but it's probably not worth the code space to @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, continue; } - /* + /* * Prune all HOT-update chains in this page. * * We count tuples removed by the pruning step as removed by VACUUM. @@ -398,8 +398,8 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, false, false); /* - * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for - * tuples requiring freezing. + * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for tuples + * requiring freezing. */ nfrozen = 0; hastup = false; @@ -421,19 +421,19 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, } /* Redirect items mustn't be touched */ - if (ItemIdIsRedirected(itemid)) - { + if (ItemIdIsRedirected(itemid)) + { hastup = true; /* this page won't be truncatable */ - continue; - } + continue; + } - ItemPointerSet(&(tuple.t_self), blkno, offnum); + ItemPointerSet(&(tuple.t_self), blkno, offnum); /* * DEAD item pointers are to be vacuumed normally; but we don't - * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting - * (at least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just - * freed up a non-HOT tuple). + * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting (at + * least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just freed up + * a non-HOT tuple). */ if (ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) { @@ -451,6 +451,7 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, switch (HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum(tuple.t_data, OldestXmin, buf)) { case HEAPTUPLE_DEAD: + /* * Ordinarily, DEAD tuples would have been removed by * heap_page_prune(), but it's possible that the tuple @@ -460,17 +461,17 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, * cannot be considered an error condition. * * If the tuple is HOT-updated then it must only be - * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it just as - * if it were RECENTLY_DEAD. Also, if it's a heap-only - * tuple, we choose to keep it, because it'll be a - * lot cheaper to get rid of it in the next pruning pass - * than to treat it like an indexed tuple. + * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it just as if + * it were RECENTLY_DEAD. Also, if it's a heap-only + * tuple, we choose to keep it, because it'll be a lot + * cheaper to get rid of it in the next pruning pass than + * to treat it like an indexed tuple. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&tuple) || HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(&tuple)) nkeep += 1; else - tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ break; case HEAPTUPLE_LIVE: /* Tuple is good --- but let's do some validity checks */ @@ -509,8 +510,8 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, hastup = true; /* - * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it - * needs freezing. Note we already have exclusive buffer lock. + * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it needs + * freezing. Note we already have exclusive buffer lock. */ if (heap_freeze_tuple(tuple.t_data, FreezeLimit, InvalidBuffer)) @@ -864,11 +865,11 @@ lazy_truncate_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats) RelationTruncate(onerel, new_rel_pages); /* - * Note: once we have truncated, we *must* keep the exclusive lock - * until commit. The sinval message that will be sent at commit - * (as a result of vac_update_relstats()) must be received by other - * backends, to cause them to reset their rd_targblock values, before - * they can safely access the table again. + * Note: once we have truncated, we *must* keep the exclusive lock until + * commit. The sinval message that will be sent at commit (as a result of + * vac_update_relstats()) must be received by other backends, to cause + * them to reset their rd_targblock values, before they can safely access + * the table again. */ /* @@ -933,9 +934,8 @@ count_nondeletable_pages(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats) /* * We don't insert a vacuum delay point here, because we have an - * exclusive lock on the table which we want to hold for as short - * a time as possible. We still need to check for interrupts - * however. + * exclusive lock on the table which we want to hold for as short a + * time as possible. We still need to check for interrupts however. */ CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/variable.c b/src/backend/commands/variable.c index 8a04a975ca..e4ea35ab53 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/variable.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/variable.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/variable.c,v 1.121 2007/08/04 01:26:53 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/variable.c,v 1.122 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -463,16 +463,16 @@ assign_log_timezone(const char *value, bool doit, GucSource source) { /* * UNKNOWN is the value shown as the "default" for log_timezone in - * guc.c. We interpret it as being a complete no-op; we don't - * change the timezone setting. Note that if there is a known - * timezone setting, we will return that name rather than UNKNOWN - * as the canonical spelling. + * guc.c. We interpret it as being a complete no-op; we don't change + * the timezone setting. Note that if there is a known timezone + * setting, we will return that name rather than UNKNOWN as the + * canonical spelling. * - * During GUC initialization, since the timezone library isn't set - * up yet, pg_get_timezone_name will return NULL and we will leave - * the setting as UNKNOWN. If this isn't overridden from the - * config file then pg_timezone_initialize() will eventually - * select a default value from the environment. + * During GUC initialization, since the timezone library isn't set up + * yet, pg_get_timezone_name will return NULL and we will leave the + * setting as UNKNOWN. If this isn't overridden from the config file + * then pg_timezone_initialize() will eventually select a default + * value from the environment. */ if (doit) { diff --git a/src/backend/commands/view.c b/src/backend/commands/view.c index a6ef94dcef..810d70b37f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/view.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/view.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.102 2007/08/27 03:36:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.103 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -273,6 +273,7 @@ DefineViewRules(Oid viewOid, Query *viewParse, bool replace) true, replace, list_make1(viewParse)); + /* * Someday: automatic ON INSERT, etc */ @@ -356,8 +357,8 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) RangeVar *view; /* - * Run parse analysis to convert the raw parse tree to a Query. Note - * this also acquires sufficient locks on the source table(s). + * Run parse analysis to convert the raw parse tree to a Query. Note this + * also acquires sufficient locks on the source table(s). * * Since parse analysis scribbles on its input, copy the raw parse tree; * this ensures we don't corrupt a prepared statement, for example. @@ -404,14 +405,14 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) /* * If the user didn't explicitly ask for a temporary view, check whether - * we need one implicitly. We allow TEMP to be inserted automatically - * as long as the CREATE command is consistent with that --- no explicit + * we need one implicitly. We allow TEMP to be inserted automatically as + * long as the CREATE command is consistent with that --- no explicit * schema name. */ view = stmt->view; if (!view->istemp && isViewOnTempTable(viewParse)) { - view = copyObject(view); /* don't corrupt original command */ + view = copyObject(view); /* don't corrupt original command */ view->istemp = true; ereport(NOTICE, (errmsg("view \"%s\" will be a temporary view", diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c b/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c index 3b48a5cf18..9c96d67efd 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c,v 1.92 2007/02/19 02:23:11 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c,v 1.93 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -337,12 +337,13 @@ ExecSupportsMarkRestore(NodeTag plantype) return true; case T_Result: + /* - * T_Result only supports mark/restore if it has a child plan - * that does, so we do not have enough information to give a - * really correct answer. However, for current uses it's - * enough to always say "false", because this routine is not - * asked about gating Result plans, only base-case Results. + * T_Result only supports mark/restore if it has a child plan that + * does, so we do not have enough information to give a really + * correct answer. However, for current uses it's enough to + * always say "false", because this routine is not asked about + * gating Result plans, only base-case Results. */ return false; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c b/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c index 72bccd4438..9f63d99d65 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c,v 1.2 2007/06/11 22:22:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ static ScanState *search_plan_tree(PlanState *node, Oid table_oid); * valid updatable scan of the specified table. */ bool -execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, +execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr * cexpr, ExprContext *econtext, Oid table_oid, ItemPointer current_tid) @@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, char *cursor_name; char *table_name; Portal portal; - QueryDesc *queryDesc; + QueryDesc *queryDesc; ScanState *scanstate; - bool lisnull; - Oid tuple_tableoid; + bool lisnull; + Oid tuple_tableoid; ItemPointer tuple_tid; /* Get the cursor name --- may have to look up a parameter reference */ @@ -85,24 +85,23 @@ execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, cursor_name))); /* - * Dig through the cursor's plan to find the scan node. Fail if it's - * not there or buried underneath aggregation. + * Dig through the cursor's plan to find the scan node. Fail if it's not + * there or buried underneath aggregation. */ scanstate = search_plan_tree(ExecGetActivePlanTree(queryDesc), table_oid); if (!scanstate) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_CURSOR_STATE), - errmsg("cursor \"%s\" is not a simply updatable scan of table \"%s\"", - cursor_name, table_name))); + errmsg("cursor \"%s\" is not a simply updatable scan of table \"%s\"", + cursor_name, table_name))); /* - * The cursor must have a current result row: per the SQL spec, it's - * an error if not. We test this at the top level, rather than at - * the scan node level, because in inheritance cases any one table - * scan could easily not be on a row. We want to return false, not - * raise error, if the passed-in table OID is for one of the inactive - * scans. + * The cursor must have a current result row: per the SQL spec, it's an + * error if not. We test this at the top level, rather than at the scan + * node level, because in inheritance cases any one table scan could + * easily not be on a row. We want to return false, not raise error, if + * the passed-in table OID is for one of the inactive scans. */ if (portal->atStart || portal->atEnd) ereport(ERROR, @@ -182,37 +181,37 @@ search_plan_tree(PlanState *node, Oid table_oid) case T_IndexScanState: case T_BitmapHeapScanState: case T_TidScanState: - { - ScanState *sstate = (ScanState *) node; + { + ScanState *sstate = (ScanState *) node; - if (RelationGetRelid(sstate->ss_currentRelation) == table_oid) - return sstate; - break; - } + if (RelationGetRelid(sstate->ss_currentRelation) == table_oid) + return sstate; + break; + } /* * For Append, we must look through the members; watch out for * multiple matches (possible if it was from UNION ALL) */ case T_AppendState: - { - AppendState *astate = (AppendState *) node; - ScanState *result = NULL; - int i; - - for (i = 0; i < astate->as_nplans; i++) { - ScanState *elem = search_plan_tree(astate->appendplans[i], - table_oid); - - if (!elem) - continue; - if (result) - return NULL; /* multiple matches */ - result = elem; + AppendState *astate = (AppendState *) node; + ScanState *result = NULL; + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < astate->as_nplans; i++) + { + ScanState *elem = search_plan_tree(astate->appendplans[i], + table_oid); + + if (!elem) + continue; + if (result) + return NULL; /* multiple matches */ + result = elem; + } + return result; } - return result; - } /* * Result and Limit can be descended through (these are safe diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c index 485f6ddc1e..90136981fb 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.298 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.299 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ static TupleTableSlot *EvalPlanQualNext(EState *estate); static void EndEvalPlanQual(EState *estate); static void ExecCheckRTPerms(List *rangeTable); static void ExecCheckRTEPerms(RangeTblEntry *rte); -static void ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt); +static void ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt); static void EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq); static void EvalPlanQualStop(evalPlanQual *epq); @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ ExecCheckRTEPerms(RangeTblEntry *rte) * Check that the query does not imply any writes to non-temp tables. */ static void -ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt) +ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt) { ListCell *l; @@ -536,8 +536,8 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) /* * Have to lock relations selected FOR UPDATE/FOR SHARE before we - * initialize the plan tree, else we'd be doing a lock upgrade. - * While we are at it, build the ExecRowMark list. + * initialize the plan tree, else we'd be doing a lock upgrade. While we + * are at it, build the ExecRowMark list. */ estate->es_rowMarks = NIL; foreach(l, plannedstmt->rowMarks) @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) /* Add slots for subplans and initplans */ foreach(l, plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); nSlots += ExecCountSlotsNode(subplan); } @@ -602,23 +602,22 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) estate->es_useEvalPlan = false; /* - * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do - * this before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since + * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do this + * before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. */ Assert(estate->es_subplanstates == NIL); i = 1; /* subplan indices count from 1 */ foreach(l, plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); - PlanState *subplanstate; - int sp_eflags; + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate; + int sp_eflags; /* - * A subplan will never need to do BACKWARD scan nor MARK/RESTORE. - * If it is a parameterless subplan (not initplan), we suggest that it - * be prepared to handle REWIND efficiently; otherwise there is no - * need. + * A subplan will never need to do BACKWARD scan nor MARK/RESTORE. If + * it is a parameterless subplan (not initplan), we suggest that it be + * prepared to handle REWIND efficiently; otherwise there is no need. */ sp_eflags = eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY; if (bms_is_member(i, plannedstmt->rewindPlanIDs)) @@ -714,11 +713,12 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) j = ExecInitJunkFilter(subplan->plan->targetlist, resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att->tdhasoid, ExecAllocTableSlot(estate->es_tupleTable)); + /* - * Since it must be UPDATE/DELETE, there had better be - * a "ctid" junk attribute in the tlist ... but ctid could - * be at a different resno for each result relation. - * We look up the ctid resnos now and save them in the + * Since it must be UPDATE/DELETE, there had better be a + * "ctid" junk attribute in the tlist ... but ctid could + * be at a different resno for each result relation. We + * look up the ctid resnos now and save them in the * junkfilters. */ j->jf_junkAttNo = ExecFindJunkAttribute(j, "ctid"); @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) rliststate = (List *) ExecInitExpr((Expr *) rlist, planstate); resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning = ExecBuildProjectionInfo(rliststate, econtext, slot, - resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att); + resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att); resultRelInfo++; } } @@ -843,8 +843,8 @@ initResultRelInfo(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo, bool doInstrument) { /* - * Check valid relkind ... parser and/or planner should have noticed - * this already, but let's make sure. + * Check valid relkind ... parser and/or planner should have noticed this + * already, but let's make sure. */ switch (resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind) { @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ initResultRelInfo(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo, * if so it doesn't matter which one we pick.) However, it is sometimes * necessary to fire triggers on other relations; this happens mainly when an * RI update trigger queues additional triggers on other relations, which will - * be processed in the context of the outer query. For efficiency's sake, + * be processed in the context of the outer query. For efficiency's sake, * we want to have a ResultRelInfo for those triggers too; that can avoid * repeated re-opening of the relation. (It also provides a way for EXPLAIN * ANALYZE to report the runtimes of such triggers.) So we make additional @@ -964,15 +964,15 @@ ExecGetTriggerResultRel(EState *estate, Oid relid) /* * Open the target relation's relcache entry. We assume that an - * appropriate lock is still held by the backend from whenever the - * trigger event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. + * appropriate lock is still held by the backend from whenever the trigger + * event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. */ rel = heap_open(relid, NoLock); /* - * Make the new entry in the right context. Currently, we don't need - * any index information in ResultRelInfos used only for triggers, - * so tell initResultRelInfo it's a DELETE. + * Make the new entry in the right context. Currently, we don't need any + * index information in ResultRelInfos used only for triggers, so tell + * initResultRelInfo it's a DELETE. */ oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt); rInfo = makeNode(ResultRelInfo); @@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ ExecEndPlan(PlanState *planstate, EState *estate) */ foreach(l, estate->es_subplanstates) { - PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); ExecEndNode(subplanstate); } @@ -2398,15 +2398,15 @@ EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq) ExecCreateTupleTable(estate->es_tupleTable->size); /* - * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do - * this before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since + * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do this + * before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. */ Assert(epqstate->es_subplanstates == NIL); foreach(l, estate->es_plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); - PlanState *subplanstate; + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate; subplanstate = ExecInitNode(subplan, epqstate, 0); @@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq) * * This is a cut-down version of ExecutorEnd(); basically we want to do most * of the normal cleanup, but *not* close result relations (which we are - * just sharing from the outer query). We do, however, have to close any + * just sharing from the outer query). We do, however, have to close any * trigger target relations that got opened, since those are not shared. */ static void @@ -2445,7 +2445,7 @@ EvalPlanQualStop(evalPlanQual *epq) foreach(l, epqstate->es_subplanstates) { - PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); ExecEndNode(subplanstate); } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c index 53ddc65819..8c917c8418 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.223 2007/10/24 18:37:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.224 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -65,11 +65,11 @@ static Datum ExecEvalAggref(AggrefExprState *aggref, static Datum ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalScalarVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalWholeRowVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalWholeRowSlow(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalConst(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalParam(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ static Datum ExecEvalCoalesce(CoalesceExprState *coalesceExpr, static Datum ExecEvalMinMax(MinMaxExprState *minmaxExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState * xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalNullIf(FuncExprState *nullIfExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); @@ -147,14 +147,14 @@ static Datum ExecEvalFieldStore(FieldStoreState *fstate, static Datum ExecEvalRelabelType(GenericExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, - ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState *astate, - ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState * iostate, + ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState * astate, + ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalCurrentOfExpr(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); /* ---------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -489,21 +489,21 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, * Scalar variable case. * * If it's a user attribute, check validity (bogus system attnums will - * be caught inside slot_getattr). What we have to check for here - * is the possibility of an attribute having been changed in type - * since the plan tree was created. Ideally the plan would get - * invalidated and not re-used, but until that day arrives, we need - * defenses. Fortunately it's sufficient to check once on the first - * time through. + * be caught inside slot_getattr). What we have to check for here is + * the possibility of an attribute having been changed in type since + * the plan tree was created. Ideally the plan would get invalidated + * and not re-used, but until that day arrives, we need defenses. + * Fortunately it's sufficient to check once on the first time + * through. * * Note: we allow a reference to a dropped attribute. slot_getattr * will force a NULL result in such cases. * * Note: ideally we'd check typmod as well as typid, but that seems - * impractical at the moment: in many cases the tupdesc will have - * been generated by ExecTypeFromTL(), and that can't guarantee to - * generate an accurate typmod in all cases, because some expression - * node types don't carry typmod. + * impractical at the moment: in many cases the tupdesc will have been + * generated by ExecTypeFromTL(), and that can't guarantee to generate + * an accurate typmod in all cases, because some expression node types + * don't carry typmod. */ if (attnum > 0) { @@ -522,9 +522,9 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, if (variable->vartype != attr->atttypid) ereport(ERROR, (errmsg("attribute %d has wrong type", attnum), - errdetail("Table has type %s, but query expects %s.", - format_type_be(attr->atttypid), - format_type_be(variable->vartype)))); + errdetail("Table has type %s, but query expects %s.", + format_type_be(attr->atttypid), + format_type_be(variable->vartype)))); } } @@ -570,10 +570,10 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, * looking at the output of a subplan that includes resjunk * columns. (XXX it would be nice to verify that the extra * columns are all marked resjunk, but we haven't got access to - * the subplan targetlist here...) Resjunk columns should always + * the subplan targetlist here...) Resjunk columns should always * be at the end of a targetlist, so it's sufficient to ignore - * them here; but we need to use ExecEvalWholeRowSlow to get - * rid of them in the eventual output tuples. + * them here; but we need to use ExecEvalWholeRowSlow to get rid + * of them in the eventual output tuples. */ var_tupdesc = lookup_rowtype_tupdesc(variable->vartype, -1); @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, Form_pg_attribute sattr = slot_tupdesc->attrs[i]; if (vattr->atttypid == sattr->atttypid) - continue; /* no worries */ + continue; /* no worries */ if (!vattr->attisdropped) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), @@ -737,12 +737,12 @@ ExecEvalWholeRowSlow(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, *isNull = false; /* - * Currently, the only case handled here is stripping of trailing - * resjunk fields, which we do in a slightly chintzy way by just - * adjusting the tuple's natts header field. Possibly there will someday - * be a need for more-extensive rearrangements, in which case it'd - * be worth disassembling and reassembling the tuple (perhaps use a - * JunkFilter for that?) + * Currently, the only case handled here is stripping of trailing resjunk + * fields, which we do in a slightly chintzy way by just adjusting the + * tuple's natts header field. Possibly there will someday be a need for + * more-extensive rearrangements, in which case it'd be worth + * disassembling and reassembling the tuple (perhaps use a JunkFilter for + * that?) */ Assert(variable->vartype != RECORDOID); var_tupdesc = lookup_rowtype_tupdesc(variable->vartype, -1); @@ -2577,9 +2577,9 @@ ExecEvalArray(ArrayExprState *astate, ExprContext *econtext, /* * If all items were null or empty arrays, return an empty array; - * otherwise, if some were and some weren't, raise error. (Note: - * we must special-case this somehow to avoid trying to generate - * a 1-D array formed from empty arrays. It's not ideal...) + * otherwise, if some were and some weren't, raise error. (Note: we + * must special-case this somehow to avoid trying to generate a 1-D + * array formed from empty arrays. It's not ideal...) */ if (haveempty) { @@ -2844,17 +2844,17 @@ ExecEvalMinMax(MinMaxExprState *minmaxExpr, ExprContext *econtext, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, +ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState * xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) xmlExpr->xprstate.expr; - text *result; - StringInfoData buf; - Datum value; - bool isnull; - ListCell *arg; + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) xmlExpr->xprstate.expr; + text *result; + StringInfoData buf; + Datum value; + bool isnull; + ListCell *arg; ListCell *narg; - int i; + int i; if (isDone) *isDone = ExprSingleResult; @@ -2864,11 +2864,11 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, { case IS_XMLCONCAT: { - List *values = NIL; + List *values = NIL; foreach(arg, xmlExpr->args) { - ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); + ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); value = ExecEvalExpr(e, econtext, &isnull, NULL); if (!isnull) @@ -2888,8 +2888,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, i = 0; forboth(arg, xmlExpr->named_args, narg, xexpr->arg_names) { - ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); - char *argname = strVal(lfirst(narg)); + ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); + char *argname = strVal(lfirst(narg)); value = ExecEvalExpr(e, econtext, &isnull, NULL); if (!isnull) @@ -2912,8 +2912,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLPARSE: { - ExprState *e; - text *data; + ExprState *e; + text *data; bool preserve_whitespace; /* arguments are known to be text, bool */ @@ -2941,8 +2941,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLPI: { - ExprState *e; - text *arg; + ExprState *e; + text *arg; /* optional argument is known to be text */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) <= 1); @@ -2968,9 +2968,9 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLROOT: { - ExprState *e; - xmltype *data; - text *version; + ExprState *e; + xmltype *data; + text *version; int standalone; /* arguments are known to be xml, text, int */ @@ -3003,7 +3003,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLSERIALIZE: { - ExprState *e; + ExprState *e; /* argument type is known to be xml */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) == 1); @@ -3021,7 +3021,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_DOCUMENT: { - ExprState *e; + ExprState *e; /* optional argument is known to be xml */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) == 1); @@ -3043,7 +3043,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, result = NULL; else { - int len = buf.len + VARHDRSZ; + int len = buf.len + VARHDRSZ; result = palloc(len); SET_VARSIZE(result, len); @@ -3431,9 +3431,9 @@ ExecEvalFieldSelect(FieldSelectState *fstate, /* Check for dropped column, and force a NULL result if so */ if (fieldnum <= 0 || - fieldnum > tupDesc->natts) /* should never happen */ - elog(ERROR, "attribute number %d exceeds number of columns %d", - fieldnum, tupDesc->natts); + fieldnum > tupDesc->natts) /* should never happen */ + elog(ERROR, "attribute number %d exceeds number of columns %d", + fieldnum, tupDesc->natts); attr = tupDesc->attrs[fieldnum - 1]; if (attr->attisdropped) { @@ -3587,7 +3587,7 @@ ExecEvalRelabelType(GenericExprState *exprstate, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, +ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState * iostate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { @@ -3621,7 +3621,7 @@ ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState *astate, +ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState * astate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { @@ -3820,7 +3820,7 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) if (naggs != aggstate->numaggs) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), - errmsg("aggregate function calls cannot be nested"))); + errmsg("aggregate function calls cannot be nested"))); } else { @@ -3980,8 +3980,8 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) { CoerceViaIO *iocoerce = (CoerceViaIO *) node; CoerceViaIOState *iostate = makeNode(CoerceViaIOState); - Oid iofunc; - bool typisvarlena; + Oid iofunc; + bool typisvarlena; iostate->xprstate.evalfunc = (ExprStateEvalFunc) ExecEvalCoerceViaIO; iostate->arg = ExecInitExpr(iocoerce->arg, parent); @@ -4268,11 +4268,11 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) break; case T_XmlExpr: { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; - XmlExprState *xstate = makeNode(XmlExprState); - List *outlist; - ListCell *arg; - int i; + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; + XmlExprState *xstate = makeNode(XmlExprState); + List *outlist; + ListCell *arg; + int i; xstate->xprstate.evalfunc = (ExprStateEvalFunc) ExecEvalXml; xstate->named_outfuncs = (FmgrInfo *) @@ -4281,8 +4281,8 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) i = 0; foreach(arg, xexpr->named_args) { - Expr *e = (Expr *) lfirst(arg); - ExprState *estate; + Expr *e = (Expr *) lfirst(arg); + ExprState *estate; Oid typOutFunc; bool typIsVarlena; @@ -4299,8 +4299,8 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) outlist = NIL; foreach(arg, xexpr->args) { - Expr *e = (Expr *) lfirst(arg); - ExprState *estate; + Expr *e = (Expr *) lfirst(arg); + ExprState *estate; estate = ExecInitExpr(e, parent); outlist = lappend(outlist, estate); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execScan.c b/src/backend/executor/execScan.c index 7ee4dc3841..c0fddcec22 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execScan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execScan.c @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execScan.c,v 1.41 2007/02/02 00:07:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execScan.c,v 1.42 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -217,13 +217,14 @@ tlist_matches_tupdesc(PlanState *ps, List *tlist, Index varno, TupleDesc tupdesc return false; /* out of order */ if (att_tup->attisdropped) return false; /* table contains dropped columns */ + /* - * Note: usually the Var's type should match the tupdesc exactly, - * but in situations involving unions of columns that have different + * Note: usually the Var's type should match the tupdesc exactly, but + * in situations involving unions of columns that have different * typmods, the Var may have come from above the union and hence have * typmod -1. This is a legitimate situation since the Var still - * describes the column, just not as exactly as the tupdesc does. - * We could change the planner to prevent it, but it'd then insert + * describes the column, just not as exactly as the tupdesc does. We + * could change the planner to prevent it, but it'd then insert * projection steps just to convert from specific typmod to typmod -1, * which is pretty silly. */ diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c index 790a9dccc1..230d5c919f 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.151 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.152 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ ExecGetResultType(PlanState *planstate) * the given tlist should be a list of ExprState nodes, not Expr nodes. * * inputDesc can be NULL, but if it is not, we check to see whether simple - * Vars in the tlist match the descriptor. It is important to provide + * Vars in the tlist match the descriptor. It is important to provide * inputDesc for relation-scan plan nodes, as a cross check that the relation * hasn't been changed since the plan was made. At higher levels of a plan, * there is no need to recheck. @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ ExecBuildProjectionInfo(List *targetList, * Determine whether the target list consists entirely of simple Var * references (ie, references to non-system attributes) that match the * input. If so, we can use the simpler ExecVariableList instead of - * ExecTargetList. (Note: if there is a type mismatch then ExecEvalVar + * ExecTargetList. (Note: if there is a type mismatch then ExecEvalVar * will probably throw an error at runtime, but we leave that to it.) */ isVarList = true; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/functions.c b/src/backend/executor/functions.c index d5ff4c1213..c03232ff0f 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/functions.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/functions.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.118 2007/06/17 18:57:29 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.119 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ static execution_state *init_execution_state(List *queryTree_list, static void init_sql_fcache(FmgrInfo *finfo); static void postquel_start(execution_state *es, SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache); static TupleTableSlot *postquel_getnext(execution_state *es, - SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache); + SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache); static void postquel_end(execution_state *es); static void postquel_sub_params(SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache, FunctionCallInfo fcinfo); @@ -251,16 +251,16 @@ init_sql_fcache(FmgrInfo *finfo) queryTree_list = pg_parse_and_rewrite(fcache->src, argOidVect, nargs); /* - * Check that the function returns the type it claims to. Although - * in simple cases this was already done when the function was defined, - * we have to recheck because database objects used in the function's - * queries might have changed type. We'd have to do it anyway if the - * function had any polymorphic arguments. + * Check that the function returns the type it claims to. Although in + * simple cases this was already done when the function was defined, we + * have to recheck because database objects used in the function's queries + * might have changed type. We'd have to do it anyway if the function had + * any polymorphic arguments. * - * Note: we set fcache->returnsTuple according to whether we are - * returning the whole tuple result or just a single column. In the - * latter case we clear returnsTuple because we need not act different - * from the scalar result case, even if it's a rowtype column. + * Note: we set fcache->returnsTuple according to whether we are returning + * the whole tuple result or just a single column. In the latter case we + * clear returnsTuple because we need not act different from the scalar + * result case, even if it's a rowtype column. * * In the returnsTuple case, check_sql_fn_retval will also construct a * JunkFilter we can use to coerce the returned rowtype to the desired @@ -320,8 +320,8 @@ postquel_start(execution_state *es, SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache) if (es->qd->utilitystmt == NULL) { /* - * Only set up to collect queued triggers if it's not a SELECT. - * This isn't just an optimization, but is necessary in case a SELECT + * Only set up to collect queued triggers if it's not a SELECT. This + * isn't just an optimization, but is necessary in case a SELECT * returns multiple rows to caller --- we mustn't exit from the * function execution with a stacked AfterTrigger level still active. */ @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ postquel_getnext(execution_state *es, SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache) es->qd->utilitystmt), fcache->src, es->qd->params, - false, /* not top level */ + false, /* not top level */ es->qd->dest, NULL); result = NULL; @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, /* * If the last query isn't a SELECT, the return type must be VOID. * - * Note: eventually replace this test with QueryReturnsTuples? We'd need + * Note: eventually replace this test with QueryReturnsTuples? We'd need * a more general method of determining the output type, though. */ if (!(parse->commandType == CMD_SELECT && @@ -926,10 +926,9 @@ check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, /* * OK, it's a SELECT, so it must return something matching the declared * type. (We used to insist that the declared type not be VOID in this - * case, but that makes it hard to write a void function that exits - * after calling another void function. Instead, we insist that the - * SELECT return void ... so void is treated as if it were a scalar type - * below.) + * case, but that makes it hard to write a void function that exits after + * calling another void function. Instead, we insist that the SELECT + * return void ... so void is treated as if it were a scalar type below.) */ /* diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c index 644268b635..e86b44c914 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c,v 1.153 2007/08/08 18:07:05 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c,v 1.154 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1363,8 +1363,8 @@ ExecInitAgg(Agg *node, EState *estate, int eflags) /* * Get actual datatypes of the inputs. These could be different from - * the agg's declared input types, when the agg accepts ANY or - * a polymorphic type. + * the agg's declared input types, when the agg accepts ANY or a + * polymorphic type. */ i = 0; foreach(lc, aggref->args) @@ -1647,9 +1647,9 @@ ExecReScanAgg(AggState *node, ExprContext *exprCtxt) MemSet(econtext->ecxt_aggnulls, 0, sizeof(bool) * node->numaggs); /* - * Release all temp storage. Note that with AGG_HASHED, the hash table - * is allocated in a sub-context of the aggcontext. We're going to - * rebuild the hash table from scratch, so we need to use + * Release all temp storage. Note that with AGG_HASHED, the hash table is + * allocated in a sub-context of the aggcontext. We're going to rebuild + * the hash table from scratch, so we need to use * MemoryContextResetAndDeleteChildren() to avoid leaking the old hash * table's memory context header. */ diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c index 87e0063a03..779f83de47 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c,v 1.20 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapHeapscan.c,v 1.21 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ bitgetpage(HeapScanDesc scan, TBMIterateResult *tbmres) * tbmres; but we have to follow any HOT chain starting at each such * offset. */ - int curslot; + int curslot; for (curslot = 0; curslot < tbmres->ntuples; curslot++) { diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c index 6c14b8a413..3f65d4cd71 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c,v 1.23 2007/05/25 17:54:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c,v 1.24 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -259,9 +259,9 @@ ExecInitBitmapIndexScan(BitmapIndexScan *node, EState *estate, int eflags) indexstate->ss.ss_currentScanDesc = NULL; /* - * If we are just doing EXPLAIN (ie, aren't going to run the plan), - * stop here. This allows an index-advisor plugin to EXPLAIN a plan - * containing references to nonexistent indexes. + * If we are just doing EXPLAIN (ie, aren't going to run the plan), stop + * here. This allows an index-advisor plugin to EXPLAIN a plan containing + * references to nonexistent indexes. */ if (eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY) return indexstate; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c index b5cabd81a4..b22295d35f 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c,v 1.114 2007/06/07 19:19:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c,v 1.115 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ ExecHashTableCreate(Hash *node, List *hashOperators) hashtable->spaceAllowed = work_mem * 1024L; /* - * Get info about the hash functions to be used for each hash key. - * Also remember whether the join operators are strict. + * Get info about the hash functions to be used for each hash key. Also + * remember whether the join operators are strict. */ nkeys = list_length(hashOperators); hashtable->outer_hashfunctions = @@ -423,8 +423,8 @@ ExecChooseHashTableSize(double ntuples, int tupwidth, /* * Both nbuckets and nbatch must be powers of 2 to make - * ExecHashGetBucketAndBatch fast. We already fixed nbatch; now inflate - * nbuckets to the next larger power of 2. We also force nbuckets to not + * ExecHashGetBucketAndBatch fast. We already fixed nbatch; now inflate + * nbuckets to the next larger power of 2. We also force nbuckets to not * be real small, by starting the search at 2^10. */ i = 10; @@ -718,22 +718,22 @@ ExecHashGetHashValue(HashJoinTable hashtable, /* * If the attribute is NULL, and the join operator is strict, then * this tuple cannot pass the join qual so we can reject it - * immediately (unless we're scanning the outside of an outer join, - * in which case we must not reject it). Otherwise we act like the + * immediately (unless we're scanning the outside of an outer join, in + * which case we must not reject it). Otherwise we act like the * hashcode of NULL is zero (this will support operators that act like * IS NOT DISTINCT, though not any more-random behavior). We treat * the hash support function as strict even if the operator is not. * * Note: currently, all hashjoinable operators must be strict since - * the hash index AM assumes that. However, it takes so little - * extra code here to allow non-strict that we may as well do it. + * the hash index AM assumes that. However, it takes so little extra + * code here to allow non-strict that we may as well do it. */ if (isNull) { if (hashtable->hashStrict[i] && !keep_nulls) { MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldContext); - return false; /* cannot match */ + return false; /* cannot match */ } /* else, leave hashkey unmodified, equivalent to hashcode 0 */ } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c index a07024585e..d986872bff 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c,v 1.91 2007/06/07 19:19:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c,v 1.92 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ ExecHashJoinOuterGetTuple(PlanState *outerNode, econtext->ecxt_outertuple = slot; if (ExecHashGetHashValue(hashtable, econtext, hjstate->hj_OuterHashKeys, - true, /* outer tuple */ + true, /* outer tuple */ (hjstate->js.jointype == JOIN_LEFT), hashvalue)) { @@ -580,8 +580,8 @@ ExecHashJoinOuterGetTuple(PlanState *outerNode, } /* - * That tuple couldn't match because of a NULL, so discard it - * and continue with the next one. + * That tuple couldn't match because of a NULL, so discard it and + * continue with the next one. */ slot = ExecProcNode(outerNode); } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c index a1fb29ad2c..d1c8dbd544 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c,v 1.123 2007/05/31 20:45:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c,v 1.124 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -529,9 +529,9 @@ ExecInitIndexScan(IndexScan *node, EState *estate, int eflags) ExecAssignScanProjectionInfo(&indexstate->ss); /* - * If we are just doing EXPLAIN (ie, aren't going to run the plan), - * stop here. This allows an index-advisor plugin to EXPLAIN a plan - * containing references to nonexistent indexes. + * If we are just doing EXPLAIN (ie, aren't going to run the plan), stop + * here. This allows an index-advisor plugin to EXPLAIN a plan containing + * references to nonexistent indexes. */ if (eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY) return indexstate; @@ -981,7 +981,7 @@ ExecIndexBuildScanKeys(PlanState *planstate, Relation index, if (leftop && IsA(leftop, RelabelType)) leftop = ((RelabelType *) leftop)->arg; - Assert(leftop != NULL); + Assert(leftop != NULL); if (!(IsA(leftop, Var) && var_is_rel((Var *) leftop))) @@ -994,8 +994,8 @@ ExecIndexBuildScanKeys(PlanState *planstate, Relation index, */ ScanKeyEntryInitialize(this_scan_key, SK_ISNULL | SK_SEARCHNULL, - varattno, /* attribute number to scan */ - strategy, /* op's strategy */ + varattno, /* attribute number to scan */ + strategy, /* op's strategy */ subtype, /* strategy subtype */ InvalidOid, /* no reg proc for this */ (Datum) 0); /* constant */ diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c index 76296cfd87..b3ed076ada 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c,v 1.31 2007/05/17 19:35:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c,v 1.32 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ ExecLimit(LimitState *node) /* * First call for this node, so compute limit/offset. (We can't do * this any earlier, because parameters from upper nodes will not - * be set during ExecInitLimit.) This also sets position = 0 - * and changes the state to LIMIT_RESCAN. + * be set during ExecInitLimit.) This also sets position = 0 and + * changes the state to LIMIT_RESCAN. */ recompute_limits(node); @@ -295,17 +295,18 @@ recompute_limits(LimitState *node) * * This is a bit of a kluge, but we don't have any more-abstract way of * communicating between the two nodes; and it doesn't seem worth trying - * to invent one without some more examples of special communication needs. + * to invent one without some more examples of special communication + * needs. * * Note: it is the responsibility of nodeSort.c to react properly to - * changes of these parameters. If we ever do redesign this, it'd be - * a good idea to integrate this signaling with the parameter-change + * changes of these parameters. If we ever do redesign this, it'd be a + * good idea to integrate this signaling with the parameter-change * mechanism. */ if (IsA(outerPlanState(node), SortState)) { - SortState *sortState = (SortState *) outerPlanState(node); - int64 tuples_needed = node->count + node->offset; + SortState *sortState = (SortState *) outerPlanState(node); + int64 tuples_needed = node->count + node->offset; /* negative test checks for overflow */ if (node->noCount || tuples_needed < 0) @@ -412,9 +413,9 @@ void ExecReScanLimit(LimitState *node, ExprContext *exprCtxt) { /* - * Recompute limit/offset in case parameters changed, and reset the - * state machine. We must do this before rescanning our child node, - * in case it's a Sort that we are passing the parameters down to. + * Recompute limit/offset in case parameters changed, and reset the state + * machine. We must do this before rescanning our child node, in case + * it's a Sort that we are passing the parameters down to. */ recompute_limits(node); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c index e216c1f9e9..4d19e793e8 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c,v 1.59 2007/05/21 17:57:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMaterial.c,v 1.60 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -312,10 +312,10 @@ ExecMaterialReScan(MaterialState *node, ExprContext *exprCtxt) /* * If subnode is to be rescanned then we forget previous stored - * results; we have to re-read the subplan and re-store. Also, - * if we told tuplestore it needn't support rescan, we lose and - * must re-read. (This last should not happen in common cases; - * else our caller lied by not passing EXEC_FLAG_REWIND to us.) + * results; we have to re-read the subplan and re-store. Also, if we + * told tuplestore it needn't support rescan, we lose and must + * re-read. (This last should not happen in common cases; else our + * caller lied by not passing EXEC_FLAG_REWIND to us.) * * Otherwise we can just rewind and rescan the stored output. The * state of the subnode does not change. diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c index 794871e5ba..5f213b20a3 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.88 2007/05/21 17:57:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.89 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ * * Therefore, rather than directly executing the merge join clauses, * we evaluate the left and right key expressions separately and then - * compare the columns one at a time (see MJCompare). The planner + * compare the columns one at a time (see MJCompare). The planner * passes us enough information about the sort ordering of the inputs * to allow us to determine how to make the comparison. We may use the * appropriate btree comparison function, since Postgres' only notion @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ typedef struct MergeJoinClauseData * sort ordering for each merge key. The mergejoinable operator is an * equality operator in this opfamily, and the two inputs are guaranteed to be * ordered in either increasing or decreasing (respectively) order according - * to this opfamily, with nulls at the indicated end of the range. This + * to this opfamily, with nulls at the indicated end of the range. This * allows us to obtain the needed comparison function from the opfamily. */ static MergeJoinClause @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ MJExamineQuals(List *mergeclauses, &op_lefttype, &op_righttype, &op_recheck); - if (op_strategy != BTEqualStrategyNumber) /* should not happen */ + if (op_strategy != BTEqualStrategyNumber) /* should not happen */ elog(ERROR, "cannot merge using non-equality operator %u", qual->opno); Assert(!op_recheck); /* never true for btree */ @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ MJExamineQuals(List *mergeclauses, op_lefttype, op_righttype, BTORDER_PROC); - if (!RegProcedureIsValid(cmpproc)) /* should not happen */ + if (!RegProcedureIsValid(cmpproc)) /* should not happen */ elog(ERROR, "missing support function %d(%u,%u) in opfamily %u", BTORDER_PROC, op_lefttype, op_righttype, opfamily); @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ MJExamineQuals(List *mergeclauses, clause->reverse = false; else if (opstrategy == BTGreaterStrategyNumber) clause->reverse = true; - else /* planner screwed up */ + else /* planner screwed up */ elog(ERROR, "unsupported mergejoin strategy %d", opstrategy); clause->nulls_first = nulls_first; @@ -354,21 +354,21 @@ MJCompare(MergeJoinState *mergestate) { if (clause->risnull) { - nulleqnull = true; /* NULL "=" NULL */ + nulleqnull = true; /* NULL "=" NULL */ continue; } if (clause->nulls_first) - result = -1; /* NULL "<" NOT_NULL */ + result = -1; /* NULL "<" NOT_NULL */ else - result = 1; /* NULL ">" NOT_NULL */ + result = 1; /* NULL ">" NOT_NULL */ break; } if (clause->risnull) { if (clause->nulls_first) - result = 1; /* NOT_NULL ">" NULL */ + result = 1; /* NOT_NULL ">" NULL */ else - result = -1; /* NOT_NULL "<" NULL */ + result = -1; /* NOT_NULL "<" NULL */ break; } @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ MJCompare(MergeJoinState *mergestate) fresult = FunctionCallInvoke(&fcinfo); if (fcinfo.isnull) { - nulleqnull = true; /* treat like NULL = NULL */ + nulleqnull = true; /* treat like NULL = NULL */ continue; } result = DatumGetInt32(fresult); @@ -1447,10 +1447,10 @@ ExecInitMergeJoin(MergeJoin *node, EState *estate, int eflags) /* * For certain types of inner child nodes, it is advantageous to issue - * MARK every time we advance past an inner tuple we will never return - * to. For other types, MARK on a tuple we cannot return to is a waste - * of cycles. Detect which case applies and set mj_ExtraMarks if we - * want to issue "unnecessary" MARK calls. + * MARK every time we advance past an inner tuple we will never return to. + * For other types, MARK on a tuple we cannot return to is a waste of + * cycles. Detect which case applies and set mj_ExtraMarks if we want to + * issue "unnecessary" MARK calls. * * Currently, only Material wants the extra MARKs, and it will be helpful * only if eflags doesn't specify REWIND. diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c index 5ea5132dd2..01046190d2 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c,v 1.40 2007/02/22 23:44:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeResult.c,v 1.41 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -133,8 +133,8 @@ ExecResult(ResultState *node) return NULL; /* - * prepare to compute projection expressions, which will expect - * to access the input tuples as varno OUTER. + * prepare to compute projection expressions, which will expect to + * access the input tuples as varno OUTER. */ econtext->ecxt_outertuple = outerTupleSlot; } @@ -308,9 +308,9 @@ ExecReScanResult(ResultState *node, ExprContext *exprCtxt) /* * If chgParam of subnode is not null then plan will be re-scanned by - * first ExecProcNode. However, if caller is passing us an exprCtxt - * then forcibly rescan the subnode now, so that we can pass the - * exprCtxt down to the subnode (needed for gated indexscan). + * first ExecProcNode. However, if caller is passing us an exprCtxt then + * forcibly rescan the subnode now, so that we can pass the exprCtxt down + * to the subnode (needed for gated indexscan). */ if (node->ps.lefttree && (node->ps.lefttree->chgParam == NULL || exprCtxt != NULL)) diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c index f12d0143a3..9074f78842 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c,v 1.90 2007/08/26 21:44:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubplan.c,v 1.91 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -259,14 +259,14 @@ ExecScanSubPlan(SubPlanState *node, * ROWCOMPARE_SUBLINK. * * For EXPR_SUBLINK we require the subplan to produce no more than one - * tuple, else an error is raised. If zero tuples are produced, we return + * tuple, else an error is raised. If zero tuples are produced, we return * NULL. Assuming we get a tuple, we just use its first column (there can * be only one non-junk column in this case). * * For ARRAY_SUBLINK we allow the subplan to produce any number of tuples, * and form an array of the first column's values. Note in particular - * that we produce a zero-element array if no tuples are produced (this - * is a change from pre-8.3 behavior of returning NULL). + * that we produce a zero-element array if no tuples are produced (this is + * a change from pre-8.3 behavior of returning NULL). */ result = BoolGetDatum(subLinkType == ALL_SUBLINK); *isNull = false; @@ -859,17 +859,17 @@ ExecInitSubPlan(SubPlan *subplan, PlanState *parent) slot = ExecAllocTableSlot(tupTable); ExecSetSlotDescriptor(slot, tupDesc); sstate->projLeft = ExecBuildProjectionInfo(lefttlist, - NULL, - slot, - NULL); + NULL, + slot, + NULL); tupDesc = ExecTypeFromTL(rightptlist, false); slot = ExecAllocTableSlot(tupTable); ExecSetSlotDescriptor(slot, tupDesc); sstate->projRight = ExecBuildProjectionInfo(righttlist, - sstate->innerecontext, - slot, - NULL); + sstate->innerecontext, + slot, + NULL); } return sstate; @@ -910,8 +910,8 @@ ExecSetParamPlan(SubPlanState *node, ExprContext *econtext) elog(ERROR, "ANY/ALL subselect unsupported as initplan"); /* - * By definition, an initplan has no parameters from our query level, - * but it could have some from an outer level. Rescan it if needed. + * By definition, an initplan has no parameters from our query level, but + * it could have some from an outer level. Rescan it if needed. */ if (planstate->chgParam != NULL) ExecReScan(planstate, NULL); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c index 159ee1b34d..d81773a67d 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c,v 1.37 2007/02/27 01:11:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c,v 1.38 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ ExecInitSubqueryScan(SubqueryScan *node, EState *estate, int eflags) Assert(!(eflags & EXEC_FLAG_MARK)); /* - * SubqueryScan should not have any "normal" children. Also, if planner + * SubqueryScan should not have any "normal" children. Also, if planner * left anything in subrtable, it's fishy. */ Assert(outerPlan(node) == NULL); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c index 8c217a442b..d33d92bbb7 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c,v 1.56 2007/10/24 18:37:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeTidscan.c,v 1.57 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ TidListCreate(TidScanState *tidstate) ItemPointerData cursor_tid; if (execCurrentOf(cexpr, econtext, - RelationGetRelid(tidstate->ss.ss_currentRelation), + RelationGetRelid(tidstate->ss.ss_currentRelation), &cursor_tid)) { if (numTids >= numAllocTids) @@ -274,8 +274,8 @@ TidNext(TidScanState *node) /* * XXX shouldn't we check here to make sure tuple matches TID list? In - * runtime-key case this is not certain, is it? However, in the - * WHERE CURRENT OF case it might not match anyway ... + * runtime-key case this is not certain, is it? However, in the WHERE + * CURRENT OF case it might not match anyway ... */ ExecStoreTuple(estate->es_evTuple[scanrelid - 1], @@ -328,8 +328,8 @@ TidNext(TidScanState *node) /* * For WHERE CURRENT OF, the tuple retrieved from the cursor might - * since have been updated; if so, we should fetch the version that - * is current according to our snapshot. + * since have been updated; if so, we should fetch the version that is + * current according to our snapshot. */ if (node->tss_isCurrentOf) heap_get_latest_tid(heapRelation, snapshot, &tuple->t_self); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/spi.c b/src/backend/executor/spi.c index 0ea017906e..3d72fa20a5 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/spi.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/spi.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/spi.c,v 1.183 2007/10/25 13:48:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/spi.c,v 1.184 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -46,8 +46,8 @@ static int _SPI_pquery(QueryDesc *queryDesc, bool fire_triggers, long tcount); static void _SPI_error_callback(void *arg); static void _SPI_cursor_operation(Portal portal, - FetchDirection direction, long count, - DestReceiver *dest); + FetchDirection direction, long count, + DestReceiver *dest); static SPIPlanPtr _SPI_copy_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, MemoryContext parentcxt); static SPIPlanPtr _SPI_save_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan); @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ SPI_cursor_open(const char *name, SPIPlanPtr plan, oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(PortalGetHeapMemory(portal)); /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ paramLI = (ParamListInfo) palloc(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (plan->nargs - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (plan->nargs - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); paramLI->numParams = plan->nargs; for (k = 0; k < plan->nargs; k++) @@ -967,8 +967,8 @@ SPI_cursor_open(const char *name, SPIPlanPtr plan, cplan); /* - * Set up options for portal. Default SCROLL type is chosen the same - * way as PerformCursorOpen does it. + * Set up options for portal. Default SCROLL type is chosen the same way + * as PerformCursorOpen does it. */ portal->cursorOptions = plan->cursor_options; if (!(portal->cursorOptions & (CURSOR_OPT_SCROLL | CURSOR_OPT_NO_SCROLL))) @@ -983,9 +983,9 @@ SPI_cursor_open(const char *name, SPIPlanPtr plan, } /* - * Disallow SCROLL with SELECT FOR UPDATE. This is not redundant with - * the check in transformDeclareCursorStmt because the cursor options - * might not have come through there. + * Disallow SCROLL with SELECT FOR UPDATE. This is not redundant with the + * check in transformDeclareCursorStmt because the cursor options might + * not have come through there. */ if (portal->cursorOptions & CURSOR_OPT_SCROLL) { @@ -999,9 +999,9 @@ SPI_cursor_open(const char *name, SPIPlanPtr plan, } /* - * If told to be read-only, we'd better check for read-only queries. - * This can't be done earlier because we need to look at the finished, - * planned queries. (In particular, we don't want to do it between + * If told to be read-only, we'd better check for read-only queries. This + * can't be done earlier because we need to look at the finished, planned + * queries. (In particular, we don't want to do it between * RevalidateCachedPlan and PortalDefineQuery, because throwing an error * between those steps would result in leaking our plancache refcount.) */ @@ -1011,14 +1011,14 @@ SPI_cursor_open(const char *name, SPIPlanPtr plan, foreach(lc, stmt_list) { - Node *pstmt = (Node *) lfirst(lc); + Node *pstmt = (Node *) lfirst(lc); if (!CommandIsReadOnly(pstmt)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - /* translator: %s is a SQL statement name */ - errmsg("%s is not allowed in a non-volatile function", - CreateCommandTag(pstmt)))); + /* translator: %s is a SQL statement name */ + errmsg("%s is not allowed in a non-volatile function", + CreateCommandTag(pstmt)))); } } @@ -1396,8 +1396,8 @@ _SPI_prepare_plan(const char *src, SPIPlanPtr plan) raw_parsetree_list = pg_parse_query(src); /* - * Do parse analysis and rule rewrite for each raw parsetree, then - * cons up a phony plancache entry for each one. + * Do parse analysis and rule rewrite for each raw parsetree, then cons up + * a phony plancache entry for each one. */ plancache_list = NIL; @@ -1416,9 +1416,9 @@ _SPI_prepare_plan(const char *src, SPIPlanPtr plan) plansource = (CachedPlanSource *) palloc0(sizeof(CachedPlanSource)); cplan = (CachedPlan *) palloc0(sizeof(CachedPlan)); - plansource->raw_parse_tree = parsetree; + plansource->raw_parse_tree = parsetree; /* cast-away-const here is a bit ugly, but there's no reason to copy */ - plansource->query_string = (char *) src; + plansource->query_string = (char *) src; plansource->commandTag = CreateCommandTag(parsetree); plansource->param_types = argtypes; plansource->num_params = nargs; @@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ _SPI_execute_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, Datum *Values, const char *Nulls, ProcessUtility(stmt, plansource->query_string, paramLI, - false, /* not top level */ + false, /* not top level */ dest, NULL); /* Update "processed" if stmt returned tuples */ @@ -1713,7 +1713,7 @@ _SPI_pquery(QueryDesc *queryDesc, bool fire_triggers, long tcount) { case CMD_SELECT: Assert(queryDesc->plannedstmt->utilityStmt == NULL); - if (queryDesc->plannedstmt->intoClause) /* select into table? */ + if (queryDesc->plannedstmt->intoClause) /* select into table? */ res = SPI_OK_SELINTO; else if (queryDesc->dest->mydest != DestSPI) { @@ -1984,8 +1984,8 @@ _SPI_copy_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, MemoryContext parentcxt) newsource = (CachedPlanSource *) palloc0(sizeof(CachedPlanSource)); newcplan = (CachedPlan *) palloc0(sizeof(CachedPlan)); - newsource->raw_parse_tree = copyObject(plansource->raw_parse_tree); - newsource->query_string = pstrdup(plansource->query_string); + newsource->raw_parse_tree = copyObject(plansource->raw_parse_tree); + newsource->query_string = pstrdup(plansource->query_string); newsource->commandTag = plansource->commandTag; newsource->param_types = newplan->argtypes; newsource->num_params = newplan->nargs; diff --git a/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c b/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c index fc403648bc..598570a267 100644 --- a/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c +++ b/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c,v 1.47 2007/08/12 20:18:06 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c,v 1.48 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ makeStringInfo(void) void initStringInfo(StringInfo str) { - int size = 1024; /* initial default buffer size */ + int size = 1024; /* initial default buffer size */ str->data = (char *) palloc(size); str->maxlen = size; @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ enlargeStringInfo(StringInfo str, int needed) int newlen; /* - * Guard against out-of-range "needed" values. Without this, we can get + * Guard against out-of-range "needed" values. Without this, we can get * an overflow or infinite loop in the following. */ if (needed < 0) /* should not happen */ diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c index 22a03f3afc..89cb3e9ad4 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.158 2007/11/15 20:04:38 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.159 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ pg_krb5_recvauth(Port *port) if (get_role_line(port->user_name) == NULL) return STATUS_ERROR; - + ret = pg_krb5_init(); if (ret != STATUS_OK) return ret; @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ pg_krb5_recvauth(Port *port) * from src/athena/auth/krb5/src/lib/gssapi/generic/gssapi_generic.c */ static const gss_OID_desc GSS_C_NT_USER_NAME_desc = - {10, (void *)"\x2a\x86\x48\x86\xf7\x12\x01\x02\x01\x02"}; +{10, (void *) "\x2a\x86\x48\x86\xf7\x12\x01\x02\x01\x02"}; static GSS_DLLIMP gss_OID GSS_C_NT_USER_NAME = &GSS_C_NT_USER_NAME_desc; #endif @@ -334,30 +334,33 @@ static GSS_DLLIMP gss_OID GSS_C_NT_USER_NAME = &GSS_C_NT_USER_NAME_desc; static void pg_GSS_error(int severity, char *errmsg, OM_uint32 maj_stat, OM_uint32 min_stat) { - gss_buffer_desc gmsg; - OM_uint32 lmaj_s, lmin_s, msg_ctx; - char msg_major[128], - msg_minor[128]; + gss_buffer_desc gmsg; + OM_uint32 lmaj_s, + lmin_s, + msg_ctx; + char msg_major[128], + msg_minor[128]; /* Fetch major status message */ msg_ctx = 0; lmaj_s = gss_display_status(&lmin_s, maj_stat, GSS_C_GSS_CODE, - GSS_C_NO_OID, &msg_ctx, &gmsg); + GSS_C_NO_OID, &msg_ctx, &gmsg); strlcpy(msg_major, gmsg.value, sizeof(msg_major)); gss_release_buffer(&lmin_s, &gmsg); if (msg_ctx) - /* More than one message available. - * XXX: Should we loop and read all messages? - * (same below) + + /* + * More than one message available. XXX: Should we loop and read all + * messages? (same below) */ - ereport(WARNING, + ereport(WARNING, (errmsg_internal("incomplete GSS error report"))); /* Fetch mechanism minor status message */ msg_ctx = 0; lmaj_s = gss_display_status(&lmin_s, min_stat, GSS_C_MECH_CODE, - GSS_C_NO_OID, &msg_ctx, &gmsg); + GSS_C_NO_OID, &msg_ctx, &gmsg); strlcpy(msg_minor, gmsg.value, sizeof(msg_minor)); gss_release_buffer(&lmin_s, &gmsg); @@ -365,8 +368,10 @@ pg_GSS_error(int severity, char *errmsg, OM_uint32 maj_stat, OM_uint32 min_stat) ereport(WARNING, (errmsg_internal("incomplete GSS minor error report"))); - /* errmsg_internal, since translation of the first part must be - * done before calling this function anyway. */ + /* + * errmsg_internal, since translation of the first part must be done + * before calling this function anyway. + */ ereport(severity, (errmsg_internal("%s", errmsg), errdetail("%s: %s", msg_major, msg_minor))); @@ -375,36 +380,38 @@ pg_GSS_error(int severity, char *errmsg, OM_uint32 maj_stat, OM_uint32 min_stat) static int pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) { - OM_uint32 maj_stat, min_stat, lmin_s, gflags; - char *kt_path; - int mtype; - int ret; - StringInfoData buf; - gss_buffer_desc gbuf; + OM_uint32 maj_stat, + min_stat, + lmin_s, + gflags; + char *kt_path; + int mtype; + int ret; + StringInfoData buf; + gss_buffer_desc gbuf; if (pg_krb_server_keyfile && strlen(pg_krb_server_keyfile) > 0) { /* * Set default Kerberos keytab file for the Krb5 mechanism. * - * setenv("KRB5_KTNAME", pg_krb_server_keyfile, 0); - * except setenv() not always available. + * setenv("KRB5_KTNAME", pg_krb_server_keyfile, 0); except setenv() + * not always available. */ if (!getenv("KRB5_KTNAME")) { kt_path = palloc(MAXPGPATH + 13); snprintf(kt_path, MAXPGPATH + 13, - "KRB5_KTNAME=%s", pg_krb_server_keyfile); + "KRB5_KTNAME=%s", pg_krb_server_keyfile); putenv(kt_path); } } /* - * We accept any service principal that's present in our - * keytab. This increases interoperability between kerberos - * implementations that see for example case sensitivity - * differently, while not really opening up any vector - * of attack. + * We accept any service principal that's present in our keytab. This + * increases interoperability between kerberos implementations that see + * for example case sensitivity differently, while not really opening up + * any vector of attack. */ port->gss->cred = GSS_C_NO_CREDENTIAL; @@ -414,12 +421,12 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) port->gss->ctx = GSS_C_NO_CONTEXT; /* - * Loop through GSSAPI message exchange. This exchange can consist - * of multiple messags sent in both directions. First message is always - * from the client. All messages from client to server are password - * packets (type 'p'). + * Loop through GSSAPI message exchange. This exchange can consist of + * multiple messags sent in both directions. First message is always from + * the client. All messages from client to server are password packets + * (type 'p'). */ - do + do { mtype = pq_getbyte(); if (mtype != 'p') @@ -429,7 +436,7 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) ereport(COMMERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_PROTOCOL_VIOLATION), errmsg("expected GSS response, got message type %d", - mtype))); + mtype))); return STATUS_ERROR; } @@ -446,21 +453,21 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) gbuf.length = buf.len; gbuf.value = buf.data; - elog(DEBUG4, "Processing received GSS token of length %u", + elog(DEBUG4, "Processing received GSS token of length %u", (unsigned int) gbuf.length); maj_stat = gss_accept_sec_context( - &min_stat, - &port->gss->ctx, - port->gss->cred, - &gbuf, - GSS_C_NO_CHANNEL_BINDINGS, - &port->gss->name, - NULL, - &port->gss->outbuf, - &gflags, - NULL, - NULL); + &min_stat, + &port->gss->ctx, + port->gss->cred, + &gbuf, + GSS_C_NO_CHANNEL_BINDINGS, + &port->gss->name, + NULL, + &port->gss->outbuf, + &gflags, + NULL, + NULL); /* gbuf no longer used */ pfree(buf.data); @@ -488,10 +495,11 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) if (maj_stat != GSS_S_COMPLETE && maj_stat != GSS_S_CONTINUE_NEEDED) { OM_uint32 lmin_s; + gss_delete_sec_context(&lmin_s, &port->gss->ctx, GSS_C_NO_BUFFER); - pg_GSS_error(ERROR, - gettext_noop("accepting GSS security context failed"), - maj_stat, min_stat); + pg_GSS_error(ERROR, + gettext_noop("accepting GSS security context failed"), + maj_stat, min_stat); } if (maj_stat == GSS_S_CONTINUE_NEEDED) @@ -510,8 +518,8 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) /* * GSS_S_COMPLETE indicates that authentication is now complete. * - * Get the name of the user that authenticated, and compare it to the - * pg username that was specified for the connection. + * Get the name of the user that authenticated, and compare it to the pg + * username that was specified for the connection. */ maj_stat = gss_display_name(&min_stat, port->gss->name, &gbuf, NULL); if (maj_stat != GSS_S_COMPLETE) @@ -524,7 +532,8 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) */ if (strchr(gbuf.value, '@')) { - char *cp = strchr(gbuf.value, '@'); + char *cp = strchr(gbuf.value, '@'); + *cp = '\0'; cp++; @@ -542,7 +551,7 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) { /* GSS realm does not match */ elog(DEBUG2, - "GSSAPI realm (%s) and configured realm (%s) don't match", + "GSSAPI realm (%s) and configured realm (%s) don't match", cp, pg_krb_realm); gss_release_buffer(&lmin_s, &gbuf); return STATUS_ERROR; @@ -566,20 +575,19 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) if (ret) { /* GSS name and PGUSER are not equivalent */ - elog(DEBUG2, + elog(DEBUG2, "provided username (%s) and GSSAPI username (%s) don't match", - port->user_name, (char *)gbuf.value); + port->user_name, (char *) gbuf.value); gss_release_buffer(&lmin_s, &gbuf); return STATUS_ERROR; } - + gss_release_buffer(&lmin_s, &gbuf); return STATUS_OK; } - -#else /* no ENABLE_GSS */ +#else /* no ENABLE_GSS */ static int pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) { @@ -588,78 +596,78 @@ pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port) errmsg("GSSAPI not implemented on this server"))); return STATUS_ERROR; } -#endif /* ENABLE_GSS */ +#endif /* ENABLE_GSS */ #ifdef ENABLE_SSPI static void pg_SSPI_error(int severity, char *errmsg, SECURITY_STATUS r) { - char sysmsg[256]; + char sysmsg[256]; if (FormatMessage(FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM, NULL, r, 0, sysmsg, sizeof(sysmsg), NULL) == 0) ereport(severity, - (errmsg_internal("%s", errmsg), - errdetail("sspi error %x", (unsigned int)r))); + (errmsg_internal("%s", errmsg), + errdetail("sspi error %x", (unsigned int) r))); else ereport(severity, - (errmsg_internal("%s", errmsg), - errdetail("%s (%x)", sysmsg, (unsigned int)r))); + (errmsg_internal("%s", errmsg), + errdetail("%s (%x)", sysmsg, (unsigned int) r))); } -typedef SECURITY_STATUS -(WINAPI * QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN)( - PCtxtHandle, void **); +typedef SECURITY_STATUS + (WINAPI * QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN) ( + PCtxtHandle, void **); static int pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) { - int mtype; - StringInfoData buf; + int mtype; + StringInfoData buf; SECURITY_STATUS r; - CredHandle sspicred; - CtxtHandle *sspictx = NULL, - newctx; - TimeStamp expiry; - ULONG contextattr; - SecBufferDesc inbuf; - SecBufferDesc outbuf; - SecBuffer OutBuffers[1]; - SecBuffer InBuffers[1]; - HANDLE token; - TOKEN_USER *tokenuser; - DWORD retlen; - char accountname[MAXPGPATH]; - char domainname[MAXPGPATH]; - DWORD accountnamesize = sizeof(accountname); - DWORD domainnamesize = sizeof(domainname); - SID_NAME_USE accountnameuse; - HMODULE secur32; - QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN _QuerySecurityContextToken; + CredHandle sspicred; + CtxtHandle *sspictx = NULL, + newctx; + TimeStamp expiry; + ULONG contextattr; + SecBufferDesc inbuf; + SecBufferDesc outbuf; + SecBuffer OutBuffers[1]; + SecBuffer InBuffers[1]; + HANDLE token; + TOKEN_USER *tokenuser; + DWORD retlen; + char accountname[MAXPGPATH]; + char domainname[MAXPGPATH]; + DWORD accountnamesize = sizeof(accountname); + DWORD domainnamesize = sizeof(domainname); + SID_NAME_USE accountnameuse; + HMODULE secur32; + QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN _QuerySecurityContextToken; /* * Acquire a handle to the server credentials. */ r = AcquireCredentialsHandle(NULL, - "negotiate", - SECPKG_CRED_INBOUND, - NULL, - NULL, - NULL, - NULL, - &sspicred, - &expiry); + "negotiate", + SECPKG_CRED_INBOUND, + NULL, + NULL, + NULL, + NULL, + &sspicred, + &expiry); if (r != SEC_E_OK) - pg_SSPI_error(ERROR, - gettext_noop("could not acquire SSPI credentials handle"), r); + pg_SSPI_error(ERROR, + gettext_noop("could not acquire SSPI credentials handle"), r); /* - * Loop through SSPI message exchange. This exchange can consist - * of multiple messags sent in both directions. First message is always - * from the client. All messages from client to server are password - * packets (type 'p'). + * Loop through SSPI message exchange. This exchange can consist of + * multiple messags sent in both directions. First message is always from + * the client. All messages from client to server are password packets + * (type 'p'). */ - do + do { mtype = pq_getbyte(); if (mtype != 'p') @@ -669,7 +677,7 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) ereport(COMMERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_PROTOCOL_VIOLATION), errmsg("expected SSPI response, got message type %d", - mtype))); + mtype))); return STATUS_ERROR; } @@ -699,18 +707,18 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) outbuf.ulVersion = SECBUFFER_VERSION; - elog(DEBUG4, "Processing received SSPI token of length %u", + elog(DEBUG4, "Processing received SSPI token of length %u", (unsigned int) buf.len); r = AcceptSecurityContext(&sspicred, - sspictx, - &inbuf, - ASC_REQ_ALLOCATE_MEMORY, - SECURITY_NETWORK_DREP, - &newctx, - &outbuf, - &contextattr, - NULL); + sspictx, + &inbuf, + ASC_REQ_ALLOCATE_MEMORY, + SECURITY_NETWORK_DREP, + &newctx, + &outbuf, + &contextattr, + NULL); /* input buffer no longer used */ pfree(buf.data); @@ -739,8 +747,8 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) free(sspictx); } FreeCredentialsHandle(&sspicred); - pg_SSPI_error(ERROR, - gettext_noop("could not accept SSPI security context"), r); + pg_SSPI_error(ERROR, + gettext_noop("could not accept SSPI security context"), r); } if (sspictx == NULL) @@ -748,7 +756,7 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) sspictx = malloc(sizeof(CtxtHandle)); if (sspictx == NULL) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg("out of memory"))); + (errmsg("out of memory"))); memcpy(sspictx, &newctx, sizeof(CtxtHandle)); } @@ -768,18 +776,18 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) /* * SEC_E_OK indicates that authentication is now complete. * - * Get the name of the user that authenticated, and compare it to the - * pg username that was specified for the connection. + * Get the name of the user that authenticated, and compare it to the pg + * username that was specified for the connection. * - * MingW is missing the export for QuerySecurityContextToken in - * the secur32 library, so we have to load it dynamically. + * MingW is missing the export for QuerySecurityContextToken in the + * secur32 library, so we have to load it dynamically. */ secur32 = LoadLibrary("SECUR32.DLL"); if (secur32 == NULL) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg_internal("could not load secur32.dll: %d", - (int)GetLastError()))); + (errmsg_internal("could not load secur32.dll: %d", + (int) GetLastError()))); _QuerySecurityContextToken = (QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN) GetProcAddress(secur32, "QuerySecurityContextToken"); @@ -787,16 +795,16 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) { FreeLibrary(secur32); ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg_internal("could not locate QuerySecurityContextToken in secur32.dll: %d", - (int)GetLastError()))); + (errmsg_internal("could not locate QuerySecurityContextToken in secur32.dll: %d", + (int) GetLastError()))); } - r = (_QuerySecurityContextToken)(sspictx, &token); + r = (_QuerySecurityContextToken) (sspictx, &token); if (r != SEC_E_OK) { FreeLibrary(secur32); pg_SSPI_error(ERROR, - gettext_noop("could not get security token from context"), r); + gettext_noop("could not get security token from context"), r); } FreeLibrary(secur32); @@ -810,8 +818,8 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) if (!GetTokenInformation(token, TokenUser, NULL, 0, &retlen) && GetLastError() != 122) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg_internal("could not get token user size: error code %d", - (int) GetLastError()))); + (errmsg_internal("could not get token user size: error code %d", + (int) GetLastError()))); tokenuser = malloc(retlen); if (tokenuser == NULL) @@ -821,18 +829,19 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) if (!GetTokenInformation(token, TokenUser, tokenuser, retlen, &retlen)) ereport(ERROR, (errmsg_internal("could not get user token: error code %d", - (int) GetLastError()))); + (int) GetLastError()))); - if (!LookupAccountSid(NULL, tokenuser->User.Sid, accountname, &accountnamesize, - domainname, &domainnamesize, &accountnameuse)) + if (!LookupAccountSid(NULL, tokenuser->User.Sid, accountname, &accountnamesize, + domainname, &domainnamesize, &accountnameuse)) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg_internal("could not lookup acconut sid: error code %d", - (int) GetLastError()))); + (errmsg_internal("could not lookup acconut sid: error code %d", + (int) GetLastError()))); free(tokenuser); - /* - * Compare realm/domain if requested. In SSPI, always compare case insensitive. + /* + * Compare realm/domain if requested. In SSPI, always compare case + * insensitive. */ if (pg_krb_realm && strlen(pg_krb_realm)) { @@ -841,28 +850,28 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) elog(DEBUG2, "SSPI domain (%s) and configured domain (%s) don't match", domainname, pg_krb_realm); - + return STATUS_ERROR; } } /* - * We have the username (without domain/realm) in accountname, compare - * to the supplied value. In SSPI, always compare case insensitive. + * We have the username (without domain/realm) in accountname, compare to + * the supplied value. In SSPI, always compare case insensitive. */ if (pg_strcasecmp(port->user_name, accountname)) { /* GSS name and PGUSER are not equivalent */ - elog(DEBUG2, + elog(DEBUG2, "provided username (%s) and SSPI username (%s) don't match", port->user_name, accountname); return STATUS_ERROR; } - + return STATUS_OK; } -#else /* no ENABLE_SSPI */ +#else /* no ENABLE_SSPI */ static int pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) { @@ -871,7 +880,7 @@ pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port) errmsg("SSPI not implemented on this server"))); return STATUS_ERROR; } -#endif /* ENABLE_SSPI */ +#endif /* ENABLE_SSPI */ /* @@ -1113,8 +1122,11 @@ sendAuthRequest(Port *port, AuthRequest areq) pq_sendbytes(&buf, port->cryptSalt, 2); #if defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) - /* Add the authentication data for the next step of - * the GSSAPI or SSPI negotiation. */ + + /* + * Add the authentication data for the next step of the GSSAPI or SSPI + * negotiation. + */ else if (areq == AUTH_REQ_GSS_CONT) { if (port->gss->outbuf.length > 0) @@ -1413,7 +1425,7 @@ CheckLDAPAuth(Port *port) { ldap_unbind(ldap); ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("could not set LDAP protocol version: error code %d", r))); + (errmsg("could not set LDAP protocol version: error code %d", r))); return STATUS_ERROR; } @@ -1456,9 +1468,9 @@ CheckLDAPAuth(Port *port) } /* - * Leak LDAP handle on purpose, because we need the library to stay - * open. This is ok because it will only ever be leaked once per - * process and is automatically cleaned up on process exit. + * Leak LDAP handle on purpose, because we need the library to + * stay open. This is ok because it will only ever be leaked once + * per process and is automatically cleaned up on process exit. */ } if ((r = _ldap_start_tls_sA(ldap, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL)) != LDAP_SUCCESS) @@ -1466,7 +1478,7 @@ CheckLDAPAuth(Port *port) { ldap_unbind(ldap); ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("could not start LDAP TLS session: error code %d", r))); + (errmsg("could not start LDAP TLS session: error code %d", r))); return STATUS_ERROR; } } diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c b/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c index efb8ecbb77..d7df99e496 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.81 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.82 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * * Since the server static private key ($DataDir/server.key) * will normally be stored unencrypted so that the database @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ #if SSLEAY_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x0907000L #include <openssl/conf.h> #endif -#endif /* USE_SSL */ +#endif /* USE_SSL */ #include "libpq/libpq.h" #include "tcop/tcopprot.h" @@ -130,8 +130,7 @@ static const char *SSLerrmessage(void); static SSL_CTX *SSL_context = NULL; /* GUC variable controlling SSL cipher list */ -char *SSLCipherSuites = NULL; - +char *SSLCipherSuites = NULL; #endif /* ------------------------------------------------------------ */ @@ -282,7 +281,7 @@ rloop: #ifdef WIN32 pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SSL_get_fd(port->ssl), (err == SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ) ? - FD_READ | FD_CLOSE : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, + FD_READ | FD_CLOSE : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, INFINITE); #endif goto rloop; @@ -376,7 +375,7 @@ wloop: #ifdef WIN32 pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SSL_get_fd(port->ssl), (err == SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ) ? - FD_READ | FD_CLOSE : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, + FD_READ | FD_CLOSE : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, INFINITE); #endif goto wloop; @@ -811,9 +810,9 @@ initialize_SSL(void) X509_V_FLAG_CRL_CHECK | X509_V_FLAG_CRL_CHECK_ALL); #else ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("SSL certificate revocation list file \"%s\" ignored", - ROOT_CRL_FILE), - errdetail("SSL library does not support certificate revocation lists."))); + (errmsg("SSL certificate revocation list file \"%s\" ignored", + ROOT_CRL_FILE), + errdetail("SSL library does not support certificate revocation lists."))); #endif else { @@ -821,7 +820,7 @@ initialize_SSL(void) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("SSL certificate revocation list file \"%s\" not found, skipping: %s", ROOT_CRL_FILE, SSLerrmessage()), - errdetail("Certificates will not be checked against revocation list."))); + errdetail("Certificates will not be checked against revocation list."))); } } @@ -889,7 +888,7 @@ aloop: #ifdef WIN32 pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SSL_get_fd(port->ssl), (err == SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ) ? - FD_READ | FD_CLOSE | FD_ACCEPT : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, + FD_READ | FD_CLOSE | FD_ACCEPT : FD_WRITE | FD_CLOSE, INFINITE); #endif goto aloop; diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c index c3cde8cb1b..e1be331b79 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.162 2007/07/23 10:16:53 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.163 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ authident(hbaPort *port) if (get_role_line(port->user_name) == NULL) return STATUS_ERROR; - + switch (port->raddr.addr.ss_family) { case AF_INET: diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/ip.c b/src/backend/libpq/ip.c index 2e9bd98890..69c4189e95 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/ip.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/ip.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/ip.c,v 1.40 2007/02/10 14:58:54 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/ip.c,v 1.41 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * * This file and the IPV6 implementation were initially provided by * Nigel Kukard <[email protected]>, Linux Based Systems Design @@ -79,6 +79,7 @@ pg_getaddrinfo_all(const char *hostname, const char *servname, servname, hintp, result); #ifdef _AIX + /* * It seems some versions of AIX's getaddrinfo don't reliably zero * sin_port when servname is NULL, so clean up after it. diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c b/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c index ae9d47076a..4ed6722557 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c,v 1.196 2007/09/14 15:58:02 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c,v 1.197 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -183,11 +183,11 @@ pq_close(int code, Datum arg) if (MyProcPort->gss->cred != GSS_C_NO_CREDENTIAL) gss_release_cred(&min_s, &MyProcPort->gss->cred); -#endif /* ENABLE_GSS */ +#endif /* ENABLE_GSS */ /* GSS and SSPI share the port->gss struct */ free(MyProcPort->gss); -#endif /* ENABLE_GSS || ENABLE_SSPI */ +#endif /* ENABLE_GSS || ENABLE_SSPI */ /* Cleanly shut down SSL layer */ secure_close(MyProcPort); @@ -255,6 +255,7 @@ StreamServerPort(int family, char *hostName, unsigned short portNumber, struct addrinfo hint; int listen_index = 0; int added = 0; + #if !defined(WIN32) || defined(IPV6_V6ONLY) int one = 1; #endif @@ -356,14 +357,17 @@ StreamServerPort(int family, char *hostName, unsigned short portNumber, } #ifndef WIN32 + /* - * Without the SO_REUSEADDR flag, a new postmaster can't be started right away after - * a stop or crash, giving "address already in use" error on TCP ports. + * Without the SO_REUSEADDR flag, a new postmaster can't be started + * right away after a stop or crash, giving "address already in use" + * error on TCP ports. * - * On win32, however, this behavior only happens if the SO_EXLUSIVEADDRUSE is set. - * With SO_REUSEADDR, win32 allows multiple servers to listen on the same address, - * resulting in unpredictable behavior. With no flags at all, win32 behaves as - * Unix with SO_REUSEADDR. + * On win32, however, this behavior only happens if the + * SO_EXLUSIVEADDRUSE is set. With SO_REUSEADDR, win32 allows multiple + * servers to listen on the same address, resulting in unpredictable + * behavior. With no flags at all, win32 behaves as Unix with + * SO_REUSEADDR. */ if (!IS_AF_UNIX(addr->ai_family)) { @@ -577,6 +581,7 @@ StreamConnection(int server_fd, Port *port) ereport(LOG, (errcode_for_socket_access(), errmsg("could not accept new connection: %m"))); + /* * If accept() fails then postmaster.c will still see the server * socket as read-ready, and will immediately try again. To avoid diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c b/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c index 606bb14a69..747e7b6163 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c,v 1.45 2007/04/06 05:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqformat.c,v 1.46 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ pq_sendfloat8(StringInfo buf, float8 f) appendBinaryStringInfo(buf, (char *) &swap.h[1], 4); appendBinaryStringInfo(buf, (char *) &swap.h[0], 4); #endif -#else /* INT64 works */ +#else /* INT64 works */ union { float8 f; @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ pq_getmsgfloat8(StringInfo msg) swap.h[0] = pq_getmsgint(msg, 4); #endif return swap.f; -#else /* INT64 works */ +#else /* INT64 works */ union { float8 f; diff --git a/src/backend/main/main.c b/src/backend/main/main.c index 65d42e9de5..0b61a7174b 100644 --- a/src/backend/main/main.c +++ b/src/backend/main/main.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/main/main.c,v 1.108 2007/03/07 13:35:02 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/main/main.c,v 1.109 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) #endif if (argc > 1 && strcmp(argv[1], "--boot") == 0) - AuxiliaryProcessMain(argc, argv); /* does not return */ + AuxiliaryProcessMain(argc, argv); /* does not return */ if (argc > 1 && strcmp(argv[1], "--describe-config") == 0) exit(GucInfoMain()); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c b/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c index c6393effcd..d3396a8d0f 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.383 2007/10/11 18:05:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.384 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -68,9 +68,9 @@ * _copyPlannedStmt */ static PlannedStmt * -_copyPlannedStmt(PlannedStmt *from) +_copyPlannedStmt(PlannedStmt * from) { - PlannedStmt *newnode = makeNode(PlannedStmt); + PlannedStmt *newnode = makeNode(PlannedStmt); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(commandType); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(canSetTag); @@ -727,9 +727,9 @@ _copyRangeVar(RangeVar *from) * _copyIntoClause */ static IntoClause * -_copyIntoClause(IntoClause *from) +_copyIntoClause(IntoClause * from) { - IntoClause *newnode = makeNode(IntoClause); + IntoClause *newnode = makeNode(IntoClause); COPY_NODE_FIELD(rel); COPY_NODE_FIELD(colNames); @@ -1026,9 +1026,9 @@ _copyRelabelType(RelabelType *from) * _copyCoerceViaIO */ static CoerceViaIO * -_copyCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO *from) +_copyCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO * from) { - CoerceViaIO *newnode = makeNode(CoerceViaIO); + CoerceViaIO *newnode = makeNode(CoerceViaIO); COPY_NODE_FIELD(arg); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(resulttype); @@ -1041,9 +1041,9 @@ _copyCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO *from) * _copyArrayCoerceExpr */ static ArrayCoerceExpr * -_copyArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExpr *from) +_copyArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExpr * from) { - ArrayCoerceExpr *newnode = makeNode(ArrayCoerceExpr); + ArrayCoerceExpr *newnode = makeNode(ArrayCoerceExpr); COPY_NODE_FIELD(arg); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(elemfuncid); @@ -1195,9 +1195,9 @@ _copyMinMaxExpr(MinMaxExpr *from) * _copyXmlExpr */ static XmlExpr * -_copyXmlExpr(XmlExpr *from) +_copyXmlExpr(XmlExpr * from) { - XmlExpr *newnode = makeNode(XmlExpr); + XmlExpr *newnode = makeNode(XmlExpr); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(op); COPY_STRING_FIELD(name); @@ -1304,7 +1304,7 @@ _copySetToDefault(SetToDefault *from) * _copyCurrentOfExpr */ static CurrentOfExpr * -_copyCurrentOfExpr(CurrentOfExpr *from) +_copyCurrentOfExpr(CurrentOfExpr * from) { CurrentOfExpr *newnode = makeNode(CurrentOfExpr); @@ -1393,9 +1393,9 @@ _copyFromExpr(FromExpr *from) * _copyPathKey */ static PathKey * -_copyPathKey(PathKey *from) +_copyPathKey(PathKey * from) { - PathKey *newnode = makeNode(PathKey); + PathKey *newnode = makeNode(PathKey); /* EquivalenceClasses are never moved, so just shallow-copy the pointer */ COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(pk_eclass); @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ _copyLockingClause(LockingClause *from) } static XmlSerialize * -_copyXmlSerialize(XmlSerialize *from) +_copyXmlSerialize(XmlSerialize * from) { XmlSerialize *newnode = makeNode(XmlSerialize); @@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ _copyRemoveOpClassStmt(RemoveOpClassStmt *from) } static RemoveOpFamilyStmt * -_copyRemoveOpFamilyStmt(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *from) +_copyRemoveOpFamilyStmt(RemoveOpFamilyStmt * from) { RemoveOpFamilyStmt *newnode = makeNode(RemoveOpFamilyStmt); @@ -2398,7 +2398,7 @@ _copyCompositeTypeStmt(CompositeTypeStmt *from) } static CreateEnumStmt * -_copyCreateEnumStmt(CreateEnumStmt *from) +_copyCreateEnumStmt(CreateEnumStmt * from) { CreateEnumStmt *newnode = makeNode(CreateEnumStmt); @@ -2475,7 +2475,7 @@ _copyCreateOpClassItem(CreateOpClassItem *from) } static CreateOpFamilyStmt * -_copyCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt *from) +_copyCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt * from) { CreateOpFamilyStmt *newnode = makeNode(CreateOpFamilyStmt); @@ -2486,7 +2486,7 @@ _copyCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt *from) } static AlterOpFamilyStmt * -_copyAlterOpFamilyStmt(AlterOpFamilyStmt *from) +_copyAlterOpFamilyStmt(AlterOpFamilyStmt * from) { AlterOpFamilyStmt *newnode = makeNode(AlterOpFamilyStmt); @@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ _copyVariableShowStmt(VariableShowStmt *from) } static DiscardStmt * -_copyDiscardStmt(DiscardStmt *from) +_copyDiscardStmt(DiscardStmt * from) { DiscardStmt *newnode = makeNode(DiscardStmt); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c b/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c index a12351ae28..0a832113b0 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.313 2007/09/03 18:46:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.314 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ _equalRangeVar(RangeVar *a, RangeVar *b) } static bool -_equalIntoClause(IntoClause *a, IntoClause *b) +_equalIntoClause(IntoClause * a, IntoClause * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(rel); COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(colNames); @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ _equalRelabelType(RelabelType *a, RelabelType *b) } static bool -_equalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO *a, CoerceViaIO *b) +_equalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO * a, CoerceViaIO * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(arg); COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(resulttype); @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ _equalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIO *a, CoerceViaIO *b) } static bool -_equalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExpr *a, ArrayCoerceExpr *b) +_equalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExpr * a, ArrayCoerceExpr * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(arg); COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(elemfuncid); @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ _equalMinMaxExpr(MinMaxExpr *a, MinMaxExpr *b) } static bool -_equalXmlExpr(XmlExpr *a, XmlExpr *b) +_equalXmlExpr(XmlExpr * a, XmlExpr * b) { COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(op); COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(name); @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ _equalSetToDefault(SetToDefault *a, SetToDefault *b) } static bool -_equalCurrentOfExpr(CurrentOfExpr *a, CurrentOfExpr *b) +_equalCurrentOfExpr(CurrentOfExpr * a, CurrentOfExpr * b) { COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(cvarno); COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(cursor_name); @@ -660,12 +660,12 @@ _equalFromExpr(FromExpr *a, FromExpr *b) */ static bool -_equalPathKey(PathKey *a, PathKey *b) +_equalPathKey(PathKey * a, PathKey * b) { /* - * This is normally used on non-canonicalized PathKeys, so must chase - * up to the topmost merged EquivalenceClass and see if those are the - * same (by pointer equality). + * This is normally used on non-canonicalized PathKeys, so must chase up + * to the topmost merged EquivalenceClass and see if those are the same + * (by pointer equality). */ EquivalenceClass *a_eclass; EquivalenceClass *b_eclass; @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ _equalRemoveOpClassStmt(RemoveOpClassStmt *a, RemoveOpClassStmt *b) } static bool -_equalRemoveOpFamilyStmt(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *a, RemoveOpFamilyStmt *b) +_equalRemoveOpFamilyStmt(RemoveOpFamilyStmt * a, RemoveOpFamilyStmt * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(opfamilyname); COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(amname); @@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ _equalCompositeTypeStmt(CompositeTypeStmt *a, CompositeTypeStmt *b) } static bool -_equalCreateEnumStmt(CreateEnumStmt *a, CreateEnumStmt *b) +_equalCreateEnumStmt(CreateEnumStmt * a, CreateEnumStmt * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(typename); COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(vals); @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ _equalCreateOpClassItem(CreateOpClassItem *a, CreateOpClassItem *b) } static bool -_equalCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt *a, CreateOpFamilyStmt *b) +_equalCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt * a, CreateOpFamilyStmt * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(opfamilyname); COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(amname); @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ _equalCreateOpFamilyStmt(CreateOpFamilyStmt *a, CreateOpFamilyStmt *b) } static bool -_equalAlterOpFamilyStmt(AlterOpFamilyStmt *a, AlterOpFamilyStmt *b) +_equalAlterOpFamilyStmt(AlterOpFamilyStmt * a, AlterOpFamilyStmt * b) { COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(opfamilyname); COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(amname); @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ _equalVariableShowStmt(VariableShowStmt *a, VariableShowStmt *b) } static bool -_equalDiscardStmt(DiscardStmt *a, DiscardStmt *b) +_equalDiscardStmt(DiscardStmt * a, DiscardStmt * b) { COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(target); @@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@ _equalFkConstraint(FkConstraint *a, FkConstraint *b) } static bool -_equalXmlSerialize(XmlSerialize *a, XmlSerialize *b) +_equalXmlSerialize(XmlSerialize * a, XmlSerialize * b) { COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(xmloption); COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(expr); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c b/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c index fc4f7d2dac..d97e56e4e4 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c,v 1.316 2007/11/08 21:49:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c,v 1.317 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Every node type that can appear in stored rules' parsetrees *must* @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ _outDatum(StringInfo str, Datum value, int typlen, bool typbyval) */ static void -_outPlannedStmt(StringInfo str, PlannedStmt *node) +_outPlannedStmt(StringInfo str, PlannedStmt * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("PLANNEDSTMT"); @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ _outRangeVar(StringInfo str, RangeVar *node) } static void -_outIntoClause(StringInfo str, IntoClause *node) +_outIntoClause(StringInfo str, IntoClause * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("INTOCLAUSE"); @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ _outRelabelType(StringInfo str, RelabelType *node) } static void -_outCoerceViaIO(StringInfo str, CoerceViaIO *node) +_outCoerceViaIO(StringInfo str, CoerceViaIO * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("COERCEVIAIO"); @@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ _outCoerceViaIO(StringInfo str, CoerceViaIO *node) } static void -_outArrayCoerceExpr(StringInfo str, ArrayCoerceExpr *node) +_outArrayCoerceExpr(StringInfo str, ArrayCoerceExpr * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("ARRAYCOERCEEXPR"); @@ -986,10 +986,10 @@ _outMinMaxExpr(StringInfo str, MinMaxExpr *node) } static void -_outXmlExpr(StringInfo str, XmlExpr *node) +_outXmlExpr(StringInfo str, XmlExpr * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("XMLEXPR"); - + WRITE_ENUM_FIELD(op, XmlExprOp); WRITE_STRING_FIELD(name); WRITE_NODE_FIELD(named_args); @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ _outSetToDefault(StringInfo str, SetToDefault *node) } static void -_outCurrentOfExpr(StringInfo str, CurrentOfExpr *node) +_outCurrentOfExpr(StringInfo str, CurrentOfExpr * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("CURRENTOFEXPR"); @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ _outHashPath(StringInfo str, HashPath *node) } static void -_outPlannerGlobal(StringInfo str, PlannerGlobal *node) +_outPlannerGlobal(StringInfo str, PlannerGlobal * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("PLANNERGLOBAL"); @@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ _outIndexOptInfo(StringInfo str, IndexOptInfo *node) } static void -_outEquivalenceClass(StringInfo str, EquivalenceClass *node) +_outEquivalenceClass(StringInfo str, EquivalenceClass * node) { /* * To simplify reading, we just chase up to the topmost merged EC and @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ _outEquivalenceClass(StringInfo str, EquivalenceClass *node) } static void -_outEquivalenceMember(StringInfo str, EquivalenceMember *node) +_outEquivalenceMember(StringInfo str, EquivalenceMember * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("EQUIVALENCEMEMBER"); @@ -1421,7 +1421,7 @@ _outEquivalenceMember(StringInfo str, EquivalenceMember *node) } static void -_outPathKey(StringInfo str, PathKey *node) +_outPathKey(StringInfo str, PathKey * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("PATHKEY"); @@ -1627,7 +1627,7 @@ _outLockingClause(StringInfo str, LockingClause *node) } static void -_outXmlSerialize(StringInfo str, XmlSerialize *node) +_outXmlSerialize(StringInfo str, XmlSerialize * node) { WRITE_NODE_TYPE("XMLSERIALIZE"); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/print.c b/src/backend/nodes/print.c index c6edfbed8a..a12b6d5d62 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/print.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/print.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/print.c,v 1.85 2007/02/22 22:00:23 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/print.c,v 1.86 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * * HISTORY * AUTHOR DATE MAJOR EVENT @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ print_pathkeys(List *pathkeys, List *rtable) printf("("); foreach(i, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); EquivalenceClass *eclass; ListCell *k; bool first = true; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c b/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c index d528720c3e..957e86abe2 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c,v 1.85 2007/02/16 00:14:01 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c,v 1.86 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ desirable_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel) { /* - * Join if there is an applicable join clause, or if there is a join - * order restriction forcing these rels to be joined. + * Join if there is an applicable join clause, or if there is a join order + * restriction forcing these rels to be joined. */ if (have_relevant_joinclause(root, outer_rel, inner_rel) || have_join_order_restriction(root, outer_rel, inner_rel)) diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c index cc82380dc6..cc36a36964 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c,v 1.165 2007/09/26 18:51:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c,v 1.166 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ join_search_hook_type join_search_hook = NULL; static void set_base_rel_pathlists(PlannerInfo *root); static void set_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, - Index rti, RangeTblEntry *rte); + Index rti, RangeTblEntry *rte); static void set_plain_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, RangeTblEntry *rte); static void set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, @@ -312,10 +312,10 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * We have to copy the parent's targetlist and quals to the child, - * with appropriate substitution of variables. However, only the + * with appropriate substitution of variables. However, only the * baserestrictinfo quals are needed before we can check for - * constraint exclusion; so do that first and then check to see - * if we can disregard this child. + * constraint exclusion; so do that first and then check to see if we + * can disregard this child. */ childrel->baserestrictinfo = (List *) adjust_appendrel_attrs((Node *) rel->baserestrictinfo, @@ -325,8 +325,8 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, { /* * This child need not be scanned, so we can omit it from the - * appendrel. Mark it with a dummy cheapest-path though, in - * case best_appendrel_indexscan() looks at it later. + * appendrel. Mark it with a dummy cheapest-path though, in case + * best_appendrel_indexscan() looks at it later. */ set_dummy_rel_pathlist(childrel); continue; @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ make_rel_from_joinlist(PlannerInfo *root, List *joinlist) * needed for these paths need have been instantiated. * * Note to plugin authors: the functions invoked during standard_join_search() - * modify root->join_rel_list and root->join_rel_hash. If you want to do more + * modify root->join_rel_list and root->join_rel_hash. If you want to do more * than one join-order search, you'll probably need to save and restore the * original states of those data structures. See geqo_eval() for an example. */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c index c722070abc..52f6e14bda 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.187 2007/10/24 18:37:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.188 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -112,12 +112,12 @@ typedef struct { PlannerInfo *root; QualCost total; -} cost_qual_eval_context; +} cost_qual_eval_context; static MergeScanSelCache *cached_scansel(PlannerInfo *root, - RestrictInfo *rinfo, - PathKey *pathkey); -static bool cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context); + RestrictInfo *rinfo, + PathKey * pathkey); +static bool cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context * context); static Selectivity approx_selectivity(PlannerInfo *root, List *quals, JoinType jointype); static Selectivity join_in_selectivity(JoinPath *path, PlannerInfo *root); @@ -303,15 +303,14 @@ cost_index(IndexPath *path, PlannerInfo *root, max_IO_cost = (pages_fetched * random_page_cost) / num_scans; /* - * In the perfectly correlated case, the number of pages touched - * by each scan is selectivity * table_size, and we can use the - * Mackert and Lohman formula at the page level to estimate how - * much work is saved by caching across scans. We still assume - * all the fetches are random, though, which is an overestimate - * that's hard to correct for without double-counting the cache - * effects. (But in most cases where such a plan is actually - * interesting, only one page would get fetched per scan anyway, - * so it shouldn't matter much.) + * In the perfectly correlated case, the number of pages touched by + * each scan is selectivity * table_size, and we can use the Mackert + * and Lohman formula at the page level to estimate how much work is + * saved by caching across scans. We still assume all the fetches are + * random, though, which is an overestimate that's hard to correct for + * without double-counting the cache effects. (But in most cases + * where such a plan is actually interesting, only one page would get + * fetched per scan anyway, so it shouldn't matter much.) */ pages_fetched = ceil(indexSelectivity * (double) baserel->pages); @@ -344,8 +343,8 @@ cost_index(IndexPath *path, PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * Now interpolate based on estimated index order correlation to get - * total disk I/O cost for main table accesses. + * Now interpolate based on estimated index order correlation to get total + * disk I/O cost for main table accesses. */ csquared = indexCorrelation * indexCorrelation; @@ -643,11 +642,12 @@ cost_bitmap_tree_node(Path *path, Cost *cost, Selectivity *selec) { *cost = ((IndexPath *) path)->indextotalcost; *selec = ((IndexPath *) path)->indexselectivity; + /* * Charge a small amount per retrieved tuple to reflect the costs of * manipulating the bitmap. This is mostly to make sure that a bitmap - * scan doesn't look to be the same cost as an indexscan to retrieve - * a single tuple. + * scan doesn't look to be the same cost as an indexscan to retrieve a + * single tuple. */ *cost += 0.1 * cpu_operator_cost * ((IndexPath *) path)->rows; } @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ cost_tidscan(Path *path, PlannerInfo *root, /* * We must force TID scan for WHERE CURRENT OF, because only nodeTidscan.c - * understands how to do it correctly. Therefore, honor enable_tidscan + * understands how to do it correctly. Therefore, honor enable_tidscan * only when CURRENT OF isn't present. Also note that cost_qual_eval * counts a CurrentOfExpr as having startup cost disable_cost, which we * subtract off here; that's to prevent other plan types such as seqscan @@ -1043,10 +1043,10 @@ cost_sort(Path *path, PlannerInfo *root, else if (tuples > 2 * output_tuples || input_bytes > work_mem_bytes) { /* - * We'll use a bounded heap-sort keeping just K tuples in memory, - * for a total number of tuple comparisons of N log2 K; but the - * constant factor is a bit higher than for quicksort. Tweak it - * so that the cost curve is continuous at the crossover point. + * We'll use a bounded heap-sort keeping just K tuples in memory, for + * a total number of tuple comparisons of N log2 K; but the constant + * factor is a bit higher than for quicksort. Tweak it so that the + * cost curve is continuous at the crossover point. */ startup_cost += 2.0 * cpu_operator_cost * tuples * LOG2(2.0 * output_tuples); } @@ -1454,8 +1454,8 @@ cost_mergejoin(MergePath *path, PlannerInfo *root) RestrictInfo *firstclause = (RestrictInfo *) linitial(mergeclauses); List *opathkeys; List *ipathkeys; - PathKey *opathkey; - PathKey *ipathkey; + PathKey *opathkey; + PathKey *ipathkey; MergeScanSelCache *cache; /* Get the input pathkeys to determine the sort-order details */ @@ -1593,7 +1593,7 @@ cost_mergejoin(MergePath *path, PlannerInfo *root) * run mergejoinscansel() with caching */ static MergeScanSelCache * -cached_scansel(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo, PathKey *pathkey) +cached_scansel(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo, PathKey * pathkey) { MergeScanSelCache *cache; ListCell *lc; @@ -1787,8 +1787,8 @@ cost_hashjoin(HashPath *path, PlannerInfo *root) * If inner relation is too big then we will need to "batch" the join, * which implies writing and reading most of the tuples to disk an extra * time. Charge seq_page_cost per page, since the I/O should be nice and - * sequential. Writing the inner rel counts as startup cost, - * all the rest as run cost. + * sequential. Writing the inner rel counts as startup cost, all the rest + * as run cost. */ if (numbatches > 1) { @@ -1891,16 +1891,16 @@ cost_qual_eval_node(QualCost *cost, Node *qual, PlannerInfo *root) } static bool -cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) +cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context * context) { if (node == NULL) return false; /* * RestrictInfo nodes contain an eval_cost field reserved for this - * routine's use, so that it's not necessary to evaluate the qual - * clause's cost more than once. If the clause's cost hasn't been - * computed yet, the field's startup value will contain -1. + * routine's use, so that it's not necessary to evaluate the qual clause's + * cost more than once. If the clause's cost hasn't been computed yet, + * the field's startup value will contain -1. */ if (IsA(node, RestrictInfo)) { @@ -1913,14 +1913,16 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) locContext.root = context->root; locContext.total.startup = 0; locContext.total.per_tuple = 0; + /* - * For an OR clause, recurse into the marked-up tree so that - * we set the eval_cost for contained RestrictInfos too. + * For an OR clause, recurse into the marked-up tree so that we + * set the eval_cost for contained RestrictInfos too. */ if (rinfo->orclause) cost_qual_eval_walker((Node *) rinfo->orclause, &locContext); else cost_qual_eval_walker((Node *) rinfo->clause, &locContext); + /* * If the RestrictInfo is marked pseudoconstant, it will be tested * only once, so treat its cost as all startup cost. @@ -1941,8 +1943,8 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) /* * For each operator or function node in the given tree, we charge the - * estimated execution cost given by pg_proc.procost (remember to - * multiply this by cpu_operator_cost). + * estimated execution cost given by pg_proc.procost (remember to multiply + * this by cpu_operator_cost). * * Vars and Consts are charged zero, and so are boolean operators (AND, * OR, NOT). Simplistic, but a lot better than no model at all. @@ -1951,7 +1953,7 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) * evaluation of AND/OR? Probably *not*, because that would make the * results depend on the clause ordering, and we are not in any position * to expect that the current ordering of the clauses is the one that's - * going to end up being used. (Is it worth applying order_qual_clauses + * going to end up being used. (Is it worth applying order_qual_clauses * much earlier in the planning process to fix this?) */ if (IsA(node, FuncExpr)) @@ -1984,9 +1986,9 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) else if (IsA(node, CoerceViaIO)) { CoerceViaIO *iocoerce = (CoerceViaIO *) node; - Oid iofunc; - Oid typioparam; - bool typisvarlena; + Oid iofunc; + Oid typioparam; + bool typisvarlena; /* check the result type's input function */ getTypeInputInfo(iocoerce->resulttype, @@ -2014,7 +2016,7 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) foreach(lc, rcexpr->opnos) { - Oid opid = lfirst_oid(lc); + Oid opid = lfirst_oid(lc); context->total.per_tuple += get_func_cost(get_opcode(opid)) * cpu_operator_cost; @@ -2069,7 +2071,7 @@ cost_qual_eval_walker(Node *node, cost_qual_eval_context *context) { /* * Otherwise we will be rescanning the subplan output on each - * evaluation. We need to estimate how much of the output we will + * evaluation. We need to estimate how much of the output we will * actually need to scan. NOTE: this logic should agree with * get_initplan_cost, below, and with the estimates used by * make_subplan() in plan/subselect.c. @@ -2266,9 +2268,9 @@ set_joinrel_size_estimates(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, * double-counting them because they were not considered in estimating the * sizes of the component rels. * - * For an outer join, we have to distinguish the selectivity of the - * join's own clauses (JOIN/ON conditions) from any clauses that were - * "pushed down". For inner joins we just count them all as joinclauses. + * For an outer join, we have to distinguish the selectivity of the join's + * own clauses (JOIN/ON conditions) from any clauses that were "pushed + * down". For inner joins we just count them all as joinclauses. */ if (IS_OUTER_JOIN(jointype)) { @@ -2316,7 +2318,7 @@ set_joinrel_size_estimates(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, * * If we are doing an outer join, take that into account: the joinqual * selectivity has to be clamped using the knowledge that the output must - * be at least as large as the non-nullable input. However, any + * be at least as large as the non-nullable input. However, any * pushed-down quals are applied after the outer join, so their * selectivity applies fully. * @@ -2515,7 +2517,7 @@ set_rel_width(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) if (rel->relid > 0) rel_reloid = getrelid(rel->relid, root->parse->rtable); else - rel_reloid = InvalidOid; /* probably can't happen */ + rel_reloid = InvalidOid; /* probably can't happen */ foreach(tllist, rel->reltargetlist) { diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c index 18c6ff9368..67204728a5 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c,v 1.4 2007/11/08 21:49:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c,v 1.5 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -26,37 +26,37 @@ #include "utils/lsyscache.h" -static EquivalenceMember *add_eq_member(EquivalenceClass *ec, - Expr *expr, Relids relids, - bool is_child, Oid datatype); +static EquivalenceMember *add_eq_member(EquivalenceClass * ec, + Expr *expr, Relids relids, + bool is_child, Oid datatype); static void generate_base_implied_equalities_const(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec); + EquivalenceClass * ec); static void generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec); + EquivalenceClass * ec); static void generate_base_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec); + EquivalenceClass * ec); static List *generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, + EquivalenceClass * ec, RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel); static List *generate_join_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, + EquivalenceClass * ec, RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel); -static Oid select_equality_operator(EquivalenceClass *ec, - Oid lefttype, Oid righttype); +static Oid select_equality_operator(EquivalenceClass * ec, + Oid lefttype, Oid righttype); static RestrictInfo *create_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, Oid opno, - EquivalenceMember *leftem, - EquivalenceMember *rightem, - EquivalenceClass *parent_ec); + EquivalenceClass * ec, Oid opno, + EquivalenceMember * leftem, + EquivalenceMember * rightem, + EquivalenceClass * parent_ec); static void reconsider_outer_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, - RestrictInfo *rinfo, - bool outer_on_left); + RestrictInfo *rinfo, + bool outer_on_left); static void reconsider_full_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, - RestrictInfo *rinfo); + RestrictInfo *rinfo); /* @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ static void reconsider_full_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, * * If below_outer_join is true, then the clause was found below the nullable * side of an outer join, so its sides might validly be both NULL rather than - * strictly equal. We can still deduce equalities in such cases, but we take + * strictly equal. We can still deduce equalities in such cases, but we take * care to mark an EquivalenceClass if it came from any such clauses. Also, * we have to check that both sides are either pseudo-constants or strict * functions of Vars, else they might not both go to NULL above the outer @@ -127,37 +127,37 @@ process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, } /* - * We use the declared input types of the operator, not exprType() of - * the inputs, as the nominal datatypes for opfamily lookup. This - * presumes that btree operators are always registered with amoplefttype - * and amoprighttype equal to their declared input types. We will need - * this info anyway to build EquivalenceMember nodes, and by extracting - * it now we can use type comparisons to short-circuit some equal() tests. + * We use the declared input types of the operator, not exprType() of the + * inputs, as the nominal datatypes for opfamily lookup. This presumes + * that btree operators are always registered with amoplefttype and + * amoprighttype equal to their declared input types. We will need this + * info anyway to build EquivalenceMember nodes, and by extracting it now + * we can use type comparisons to short-circuit some equal() tests. */ op_input_types(opno, &item1_type, &item2_type); opfamilies = restrictinfo->mergeopfamilies; /* - * Sweep through the existing EquivalenceClasses looking for matches - * to item1 and item2. These are the possible outcomes: + * Sweep through the existing EquivalenceClasses looking for matches to + * item1 and item2. These are the possible outcomes: * - * 1. We find both in the same EC. The equivalence is already known, - * so there's nothing to do. + * 1. We find both in the same EC. The equivalence is already known, so + * there's nothing to do. * * 2. We find both in different ECs. Merge the two ECs together. * * 3. We find just one. Add the other to its EC. * - * 4. We find neither. Make a new, two-entry EC. + * 4. We find neither. Make a new, two-entry EC. * * Note: since all ECs are built through this process, it's impossible * that we'd match an item in more than one existing EC. It is possible * to match more than once within an EC, if someone fed us something silly * like "WHERE X=X". (However, we can't simply discard such clauses, - * since they should fail when X is null; so we will build a 2-member - * EC to ensure the correct restriction clause gets generated. Hence - * there is no shortcut here for item1 and item2 equal.) + * since they should fail when X is null; so we will build a 2-member EC + * to ensure the correct restriction clause gets generated. Hence there + * is no shortcut here for item1 and item2 equal.) */ ec1 = ec2 = NULL; em1 = em2 = NULL; @@ -182,11 +182,11 @@ process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, { EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); - Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ + Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ /* - * If below an outer join, don't match constants: they're not - * as constant as they look. + * If below an outer join, don't match constants: they're not as + * constant as they look. */ if ((below_outer_join || cur_ec->ec_below_outer_join) && cur_em->em_is_const) @@ -234,11 +234,11 @@ process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, } /* - * Case 2: need to merge ec1 and ec2. We add ec2's items to ec1, - * then set ec2's ec_merged link to point to ec1 and remove ec2 - * from the eq_classes list. We cannot simply delete ec2 because - * that could leave dangling pointers in existing PathKeys. We - * leave it behind with a link so that the merged EC can be found. + * Case 2: need to merge ec1 and ec2. We add ec2's items to ec1, then + * set ec2's ec_merged link to point to ec1 and remove ec2 from the + * eq_classes list. We cannot simply delete ec2 because that could + * leave dangling pointers in existing PathKeys. We leave it behind + * with a link so that the merged EC can be found. */ ec1->ec_members = list_concat(ec1->ec_members, ec2->ec_members); ec1->ec_sources = list_concat(ec1->ec_sources, ec2->ec_sources); @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, * add_eq_member - build a new EquivalenceMember and add it to an EC */ static EquivalenceMember * -add_eq_member(EquivalenceClass *ec, Expr *expr, Relids relids, +add_eq_member(EquivalenceClass * ec, Expr *expr, Relids relids, bool is_child, Oid datatype) { EquivalenceMember *em = makeNode(EquivalenceMember); @@ -327,10 +327,10 @@ add_eq_member(EquivalenceClass *ec, Expr *expr, Relids relids, if (bms_is_empty(relids)) { /* - * No Vars, assume it's a pseudoconstant. This is correct for - * entries generated from process_equivalence(), because a WHERE - * clause can't contain aggregates or SRFs, and non-volatility was - * checked before process_equivalence() ever got called. But + * No Vars, assume it's a pseudoconstant. This is correct for entries + * generated from process_equivalence(), because a WHERE clause can't + * contain aggregates or SRFs, and non-volatility was checked before + * process_equivalence() ever got called. But * get_eclass_for_sort_expr() has to work harder. We put the tests * there not here to save cycles in the equivalence case. */ @@ -399,8 +399,8 @@ get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); /* - * If below an outer join, don't match constants: they're not - * as constant as they look. + * If below an outer join, don't match constants: they're not as + * constant as they look. */ if (cur_ec->ec_below_outer_join && cur_em->em_is_const) @@ -408,15 +408,15 @@ get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, if (expr_datatype == cur_em->em_datatype && equal(expr, cur_em->em_expr)) - return cur_ec; /* Match! */ + return cur_ec; /* Match! */ } } /* * No match, so build a new single-member EC * - * Here, we must be sure that we construct the EC in the right context. - * We can assume, however, that the passed expr is long-lived. + * Here, we must be sure that we construct the EC in the right context. We + * can assume, however, that the passed expr is long-lived. */ oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(root->planner_cxt); @@ -437,8 +437,8 @@ get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, /* * add_eq_member doesn't check for volatile functions, set-returning - * functions, or aggregates, but such could appear in sort expressions; - * so we have to check whether its const-marking was correct. + * functions, or aggregates, but such could appear in sort expressions; so + * we have to check whether its const-marking was correct. */ if (newec->ec_has_const) { @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, * * When an EC contains pseudoconstants, our strategy is to generate * "member = const1" clauses where const1 is the first constant member, for - * every other member (including other constants). If we are able to do this + * every other member (including other constants). If we are able to do this * then we don't need any "var = var" comparisons because we've successfully * constrained all the vars at their points of creation. If we fail to * generate any of these clauses due to lack of cross-type operators, we fall @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, * "WHERE a.x = b.y AND b.y = a.z", the scheme breaks down if we cannot * generate "a.x = a.z" as a restriction clause for A.) In this case we mark * the EC "ec_broken" and fall back to regurgitating its original source - * RestrictInfos at appropriate times. We do not try to retract any derived + * RestrictInfos at appropriate times. We do not try to retract any derived * clauses already generated from the broken EC, so the resulting plan could * be poor due to bad selectivity estimates caused by redundant clauses. But * the correct solution to that is to fix the opfamilies ... @@ -517,8 +517,8 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities(PlannerInfo *root) { EquivalenceClass *ec = (EquivalenceClass *) lfirst(lc); - Assert(ec->ec_merged == NULL); /* else shouldn't be in list */ - Assert(!ec->ec_broken); /* not yet anyway... */ + Assert(ec->ec_merged == NULL); /* else shouldn't be in list */ + Assert(!ec->ec_broken); /* not yet anyway... */ /* Single-member ECs won't generate any deductions */ if (list_length(ec->ec_members) <= 1) @@ -535,9 +535,8 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities(PlannerInfo *root) } /* - * This is also a handy place to mark base rels (which should all - * exist by now) with flags showing whether they have pending eclass - * joins. + * This is also a handy place to mark base rels (which should all exist by + * now) with flags showing whether they have pending eclass joins. */ for (rti = 1; rti < root->simple_rel_array_size; rti++) { @@ -555,7 +554,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities(PlannerInfo *root) */ static void generate_base_implied_equalities_const(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec) + EquivalenceClass * ec) { EquivalenceMember *const_em = NULL; ListCell *lc; @@ -579,7 +578,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_const(PlannerInfo *root, EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc); Oid eq_op; - Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ + Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ if (cur_em == const_em) continue; eq_op = select_equality_operator(ec, @@ -604,7 +603,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_const(PlannerInfo *root, */ static void generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec) + EquivalenceClass * ec) { EquivalenceMember **prev_ems; ListCell *lc; @@ -613,9 +612,10 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, * We scan the EC members once and track the last-seen member for each * base relation. When we see another member of the same base relation, * we generate "prev_mem = cur_mem". This results in the minimum number - * of derived clauses, but it's possible that it will fail when a different - * ordering would succeed. XXX FIXME: use a UNION-FIND algorithm similar - * to the way we build merged ECs. (Use a list-of-lists for each rel.) + * of derived clauses, but it's possible that it will fail when a + * different ordering would succeed. XXX FIXME: use a UNION-FIND + * algorithm similar to the way we build merged ECs. (Use a list-of-lists + * for each rel.) */ prev_ems = (EquivalenceMember **) palloc0(root->simple_rel_array_size * sizeof(EquivalenceMember *)); @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc); int relid; - Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ + Assert(!cur_em->em_is_child); /* no children yet */ if (bms_membership(cur_em->em_relids) != BMS_SINGLETON) continue; relid = bms_singleton_member(cur_em->em_relids); @@ -657,12 +657,12 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, pfree(prev_ems); /* - * We also have to make sure that all the Vars used in the member - * clauses will be available at any join node we might try to reference - * them at. For the moment we force all the Vars to be available at - * all join nodes for this eclass. Perhaps this could be improved by - * doing some pre-analysis of which members we prefer to join, but it's - * no worse than what happened in the pre-8.3 code. + * We also have to make sure that all the Vars used in the member clauses + * will be available at any join node we might try to reference them at. + * For the moment we force all the Vars to be available at all join nodes + * for this eclass. Perhaps this could be improved by doing some + * pre-analysis of which members we prefer to join, but it's no worse than + * what happened in the pre-8.3 code. */ foreach(lc, ec->ec_members) { @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const(PlannerInfo *root, */ static void generate_base_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec) + EquivalenceClass * ec) { ListCell *lc; @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ generate_base_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, * we consider different join paths, we avoid generating multiple copies: * whenever we select a particular pair of EquivalenceMembers to join, * we check to see if the pair matches any original clause (in ec_sources) - * or previously-built clause (in ec_derives). This saves memory and allows + * or previously-built clause (in ec_derives). This saves memory and allows * re-use of information cached in RestrictInfos. */ List * @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities(PlannerInfo *root, foreach(lc, root->eq_classes) { EquivalenceClass *ec = (EquivalenceClass *) lfirst(lc); - List *sublist = NIL; + List *sublist = NIL; /* ECs containing consts do not need any further enforcement */ if (ec->ec_has_const) @@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities(PlannerInfo *root, */ static List * generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, + EquivalenceClass * ec, RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel) @@ -787,13 +787,13 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, ListCell *lc1; /* - * First, scan the EC to identify member values that are computable - * at the outer rel, at the inner rel, or at this relation but not in - * either input rel. The outer-rel members should already be enforced - * equal, likewise for the inner-rel members. We'll need to create - * clauses to enforce that any newly computable members are all equal - * to each other as well as to at least one input member, plus enforce - * at least one outer-rel member equal to at least one inner-rel member. + * First, scan the EC to identify member values that are computable at the + * outer rel, at the inner rel, or at this relation but not in either + * input rel. The outer-rel members should already be enforced equal, + * likewise for the inner-rel members. We'll need to create clauses to + * enforce that any newly computable members are all equal to each other + * as well as to at least one input member, plus enforce at least one + * outer-rel member equal to at least one inner-rel member. */ foreach(lc1, ec->ec_members) { @@ -813,20 +813,20 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * First, select the joinclause if needed. We can equate any one outer + * First, select the joinclause if needed. We can equate any one outer * member to any one inner member, but we have to find a datatype - * combination for which an opfamily member operator exists. If we - * have choices, we prefer simple Var members (possibly with RelabelType) - * since these are (a) cheapest to compute at runtime and (b) most likely - * to have useful statistics. Also, if enable_hashjoin is on, we prefer + * combination for which an opfamily member operator exists. If we have + * choices, we prefer simple Var members (possibly with RelabelType) since + * these are (a) cheapest to compute at runtime and (b) most likely to + * have useful statistics. Also, if enable_hashjoin is on, we prefer * operators that are also hashjoinable. */ if (outer_members && inner_members) { EquivalenceMember *best_outer_em = NULL; EquivalenceMember *best_inner_em = NULL; - Oid best_eq_op = InvalidOid; - int best_score = -1; + Oid best_eq_op = InvalidOid; + int best_score = -1; RestrictInfo *rinfo; foreach(lc1, outer_members) @@ -837,8 +837,8 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, foreach(lc2, inner_members) { EquivalenceMember *inner_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); - Oid eq_op; - int score; + Oid eq_op; + int score; eq_op = select_equality_operator(ec, outer_em->em_datatype, @@ -863,11 +863,11 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, best_eq_op = eq_op; best_score = score; if (best_score == 3) - break; /* no need to look further */ + break; /* no need to look further */ } } if (best_score == 3) - break; /* no need to look further */ + break; /* no need to look further */ } if (best_score < 0) { @@ -892,8 +892,8 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, * Vars from both sides of the join. We have to equate all of these to * each other as well as to at least one old member (if any). * - * XXX as in generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const, we could be a - * lot smarter here to avoid unnecessary failures in cross-type situations. + * XXX as in generate_base_implied_equalities_no_const, we could be a lot + * smarter here to avoid unnecessary failures in cross-type situations. * For now, use the same left-to-right method used there. */ if (new_members) @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_normal(PlannerInfo *root, */ static List * generate_join_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, + EquivalenceClass * ec, RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel) @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc); if (bms_is_subset(restrictinfo->required_relids, joinrel->relids) && - !bms_is_subset(restrictinfo->required_relids, outer_rel->relids) && + !bms_is_subset(restrictinfo->required_relids, outer_rel->relids) && !bms_is_subset(restrictinfo->required_relids, inner_rel->relids)) result = lappend(result, restrictinfo); } @@ -973,14 +973,14 @@ generate_join_implied_equalities_broken(PlannerInfo *root, * Returns InvalidOid if no operator can be found for this datatype combination */ static Oid -select_equality_operator(EquivalenceClass *ec, Oid lefttype, Oid righttype) +select_equality_operator(EquivalenceClass * ec, Oid lefttype, Oid righttype) { ListCell *lc; foreach(lc, ec->ec_opfamilies) { - Oid opfamily = lfirst_oid(lc); - Oid opno; + Oid opfamily = lfirst_oid(lc); + Oid opno; opno = get_opfamily_member(opfamily, lefttype, righttype, BTEqualStrategyNumber); @@ -1003,10 +1003,10 @@ select_equality_operator(EquivalenceClass *ec, Oid lefttype, Oid righttype) */ static RestrictInfo * create_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *ec, Oid opno, - EquivalenceMember *leftem, - EquivalenceMember *rightem, - EquivalenceClass *parent_ec) + EquivalenceClass * ec, Oid opno, + EquivalenceMember * leftem, + EquivalenceMember * rightem, + EquivalenceClass * parent_ec) { RestrictInfo *rinfo; ListCell *lc; @@ -1014,8 +1014,8 @@ create_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, /* * Search to see if we already built a RestrictInfo for this pair of - * EquivalenceMembers. We can use either original source clauses or - * previously-derived clauses. The check on opno is probably redundant, + * EquivalenceMembers. We can use either original source clauses or + * previously-derived clauses. The check on opno is probably redundant, * but be safe ... */ foreach(lc, ec->ec_sources) @@ -1039,8 +1039,8 @@ create_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * Not there, so build it, in planner context so we can re-use it. - * (Not important in normal planning, but definitely so in GEQO.) + * Not there, so build it, in planner context so we can re-use it. (Not + * important in normal planning, but definitely so in GEQO.) */ oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(root->planner_cxt); @@ -1216,10 +1216,9 @@ reconsider_outer_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo, continue; /* no match, so ignore this EC */ /* - * Yes it does! Try to generate a clause INNERVAR = CONSTANT for - * each CONSTANT in the EC. Note that we must succeed with at - * least one constant before we can decide to throw away the - * outer-join clause. + * Yes it does! Try to generate a clause INNERVAR = CONSTANT for each + * CONSTANT in the EC. Note that we must succeed with at least one + * constant before we can decide to throw away the outer-join clause. */ match = false; foreach(lc2, cur_ec->ec_members) @@ -1300,15 +1299,15 @@ reconsider_full_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo) /* * Does it contain a COALESCE(leftvar, rightvar) construct? * - * We can assume the COALESCE() inputs are in the same order as - * the join clause, since both were automatically generated in the - * cases we care about. + * We can assume the COALESCE() inputs are in the same order as the + * join clause, since both were automatically generated in the cases + * we care about. * - * XXX currently this may fail to match in cross-type cases - * because the COALESCE will contain typecast operations while the - * join clause may not (if there is a cross-type mergejoin - * operator available for the two column types). Is it OK to strip - * implicit coercions from the COALESCE arguments? + * XXX currently this may fail to match in cross-type cases because + * the COALESCE will contain typecast operations while the join clause + * may not (if there is a cross-type mergejoin operator available for + * the two column types). Is it OK to strip implicit coercions from + * the COALESCE arguments? */ match = false; foreach(lc2, cur_ec->ec_members) @@ -1337,9 +1336,9 @@ reconsider_full_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo) /* * Yes it does! Try to generate clauses LEFTVAR = CONSTANT and - * RIGHTVAR = CONSTANT for each CONSTANT in the EC. Note that we - * must succeed with at least one constant for each var before - * we can decide to throw away the outer-join clause. + * RIGHTVAR = CONSTANT for each CONSTANT in the EC. Note that we must + * succeed with at least one constant for each var before we can + * decide to throw away the outer-join clause. */ matchleft = matchright = false; foreach(lc2, cur_ec->ec_members) @@ -1378,16 +1377,17 @@ reconsider_full_join_clause(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo) /* * If we were able to equate both vars to constants, we're done, and - * we can throw away the full-join clause as redundant. Moreover, - * we can remove the COALESCE entry from the EC, since the added - * restrictions ensure it will always have the expected value. - * (We don't bother trying to update ec_relids or ec_sources.) + * we can throw away the full-join clause as redundant. Moreover, we + * can remove the COALESCE entry from the EC, since the added + * restrictions ensure it will always have the expected value. (We + * don't bother trying to update ec_relids or ec_sources.) */ if (matchleft && matchright) { cur_ec->ec_members = list_delete_ptr(cur_ec->ec_members, coal_em); return; } + /* * Otherwise, fall out of the search loop, since we know the COALESCE * appears in at most one EC (XXX might stop being true if we allow @@ -1489,8 +1489,8 @@ add_child_rel_equivalences(PlannerInfo *root, if (bms_equal(cur_em->em_relids, parent_rel->relids)) { /* Yes, generate transformed child version */ - Expr *child_expr; - + Expr *child_expr; + child_expr = (Expr *) adjust_appendrel_attrs((Node *) cur_em->em_expr, appinfo); @@ -1528,8 +1528,8 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, continue; /* - * No point in searching if rel not mentioned in eclass (but we - * can't tell that for a child rel). + * No point in searching if rel not mentioned in eclass (but we can't + * tell that for a child rel). */ if (!is_child_rel && !bms_is_subset(rel->relids, cur_ec->ec_relids)) @@ -1543,7 +1543,7 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, { EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); EquivalenceMember *best_outer_em = NULL; - Oid best_eq_op = InvalidOid; + Oid best_eq_op = InvalidOid; ListCell *lc3; if (!bms_equal(cur_em->em_relids, rel->relids) || @@ -1552,14 +1552,14 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Found one, so try to generate a join clause. This is like - * generate_join_implied_equalities_normal, except simpler - * since our only preference item is to pick a Var on the - * outer side. We only need one join clause per index col. + * generate_join_implied_equalities_normal, except simpler since + * our only preference item is to pick a Var on the outer side. + * We only need one join clause per index col. */ foreach(lc3, cur_ec->ec_members) { EquivalenceMember *outer_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc3); - Oid eq_op; + Oid eq_op; if (!bms_is_subset(outer_em->em_relids, outer_relids)) continue; @@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, if (IsA(outer_em->em_expr, Var) || (IsA(outer_em->em_expr, RelabelType) && IsA(((RelabelType *) outer_em->em_expr)->arg, Var))) - break; /* no need to look further */ + break; /* no need to look further */ } if (best_outer_em) @@ -1587,9 +1587,10 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, cur_ec); result = lappend(result, rinfo); + /* - * Note: we keep scanning here because we want to provide - * a clause for every possible indexcol. + * Note: we keep scanning here because we want to provide a + * clause for every possible indexcol. */ } } @@ -1605,7 +1606,7 @@ find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, * a joinclause between the two given relations. * * This is essentially a very cut-down version of - * generate_join_implied_equalities(). Note it's OK to occasionally say "yes" + * generate_join_implied_equalities(). Note it's OK to occasionally say "yes" * incorrectly. Hence we don't bother with details like whether the lack of a * cross-type operator might prevent the clause from actually being generated. */ @@ -1647,7 +1648,7 @@ have_relevant_eclass_joinclause(PlannerInfo *root, EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); if (cur_em->em_is_child) - continue; /* ignore children here */ + continue; /* ignore children here */ if (bms_is_subset(cur_em->em_relids, rel1->relids)) { has_rel1 = true; @@ -1715,7 +1716,7 @@ has_relevant_eclass_joinclause(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1) EquivalenceMember *cur_em = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); if (cur_em->em_is_child) - continue; /* ignore children here */ + continue; /* ignore children here */ if (bms_is_subset(cur_em->em_relids, rel1->relids)) { has_rel1 = true; @@ -1744,12 +1745,12 @@ has_relevant_eclass_joinclause(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1) * against the specified relation. * * This is just a heuristic test and doesn't have to be exact; it's better - * to say "yes" incorrectly than "no". Hence we don't bother with details + * to say "yes" incorrectly than "no". Hence we don't bother with details * like whether the lack of a cross-type operator might prevent the clause * from actually being generated. */ bool -eclass_useful_for_merging(EquivalenceClass *eclass, +eclass_useful_for_merging(EquivalenceClass * eclass, RelOptInfo *rel) { ListCell *lc; @@ -1757,16 +1758,16 @@ eclass_useful_for_merging(EquivalenceClass *eclass, Assert(!eclass->ec_merged); /* - * Won't generate joinclauses if const or single-member (the latter - * test covers the volatile case too) + * Won't generate joinclauses if const or single-member (the latter test + * covers the volatile case too) */ if (eclass->ec_has_const || list_length(eclass->ec_members) <= 1) return false; /* - * Note we don't test ec_broken; if we did, we'd need a separate code - * path to look through ec_sources. Checking the members anyway is OK - * as a possibly-overoptimistic heuristic. + * Note we don't test ec_broken; if we did, we'd need a separate code path + * to look through ec_sources. Checking the members anyway is OK as a + * possibly-overoptimistic heuristic. */ /* If rel already includes all members of eclass, no point in searching */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c index 47dd3ec55b..4bd9392313 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c,v 1.223 2007/11/07 22:37:24 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c,v 1.224 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ /* * DoneMatchingIndexKeys() - MACRO */ -#define DoneMatchingIndexKeys(families) (families[0] == InvalidOid) +#define DoneMatchingIndexKeys(families) (families[0] == InvalidOid) #define IsBooleanOpfamily(opfamily) \ ((opfamily) == BOOL_BTREE_FAM_OID || (opfamily) == BOOL_HASH_FAM_OID) @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ typedef struct List *quals; /* the WHERE clauses it uses */ List *preds; /* predicates of its partial index(es) */ Bitmapset *clauseids; /* quals+preds represented as a bitmapset */ -} PathClauseUsage; +} PathClauseUsage; static List *find_usable_indexes(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ static Cost bitmap_scan_cost_est(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, static Cost bitmap_and_cost_est(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, List *paths, RelOptInfo *outer_rel); static PathClauseUsage *classify_index_clause_usage(Path *path, - List **clauselist); + List **clauselist); static void find_indexpath_quals(Path *bitmapqual, List **quals, List **preds); static int find_list_position(Node *node, List **nodelist); static bool match_clause_to_indexcol(IndexOptInfo *index, @@ -382,8 +382,8 @@ find_usable_indexes(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, } /* - * 4. If the index is ordered, a backwards scan might be - * interesting. Again, this is only interesting at top level. + * 4. If the index is ordered, a backwards scan might be interesting. + * Again, this is only interesting at top level. */ if (index_is_ordered && possibly_useful_pathkeys && istoplevel && outer_rel == NULL) @@ -581,7 +581,8 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, List *clauselist; List *bestpaths = NIL; Cost bestcost = 0; - int i, j; + int i, + j; ListCell *l; Assert(npaths > 0); /* else caller error */ @@ -592,40 +593,39 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, * In theory we should consider every nonempty subset of the given paths. * In practice that seems like overkill, given the crude nature of the * estimates, not to mention the possible effects of higher-level AND and - * OR clauses. Moreover, it's completely impractical if there are a large + * OR clauses. Moreover, it's completely impractical if there are a large * number of paths, since the work would grow as O(2^N). * - * As a heuristic, we first check for paths using exactly the same - * sets of WHERE clauses + index predicate conditions, and reject all - * but the cheapest-to-scan in any such group. This primarily gets rid - * of indexes that include the interesting columns but also irrelevant - * columns. (In situations where the DBA has gone overboard on creating - * variant indexes, this can make for a very large reduction in the number - * of paths considered further.) + * As a heuristic, we first check for paths using exactly the same sets of + * WHERE clauses + index predicate conditions, and reject all but the + * cheapest-to-scan in any such group. This primarily gets rid of indexes + * that include the interesting columns but also irrelevant columns. (In + * situations where the DBA has gone overboard on creating variant + * indexes, this can make for a very large reduction in the number of + * paths considered further.) * - * We then sort the surviving paths with the cheapest-to-scan first, - * and for each path, consider using that path alone as the basis for - * a bitmap scan. Then we consider bitmap AND scans formed from that - * path plus each subsequent (higher-cost) path, adding on a subsequent - * path if it results in a reduction in the estimated total scan cost. - * This means we consider about O(N^2) rather than O(2^N) path - * combinations, which is quite tolerable, especially given than N is - * usually reasonably small because of the prefiltering step. The - * cheapest of these is returned. + * We then sort the surviving paths with the cheapest-to-scan first, and + * for each path, consider using that path alone as the basis for a bitmap + * scan. Then we consider bitmap AND scans formed from that path plus + * each subsequent (higher-cost) path, adding on a subsequent path if it + * results in a reduction in the estimated total scan cost. This means we + * consider about O(N^2) rather than O(2^N) path combinations, which is + * quite tolerable, especially given than N is usually reasonably small + * because of the prefiltering step. The cheapest of these is returned. * - * We will only consider AND combinations in which no two indexes use - * the same WHERE clause. This is a bit of a kluge: it's needed because + * We will only consider AND combinations in which no two indexes use the + * same WHERE clause. This is a bit of a kluge: it's needed because * costsize.c and clausesel.c aren't very smart about redundant clauses. * They will usually double-count the redundant clauses, producing a * too-small selectivity that makes a redundant AND step look like it - * reduces the total cost. Perhaps someday that code will be smarter and + * reduces the total cost. Perhaps someday that code will be smarter and * we can remove this limitation. (But note that this also defends * against flat-out duplicate input paths, which can happen because * best_inner_indexscan will find the same OR join clauses that * create_or_index_quals has pulled OR restriction clauses out of.) * * For the same reason, we reject AND combinations in which an index - * predicate clause duplicates another clause. Here we find it necessary + * predicate clause duplicates another clause. Here we find it necessary * to be even stricter: we'll reject a partial index if any of its * predicate clauses are implied by the set of WHERE clauses and predicate * clauses used so far. This covers cases such as a condition "x = 42" @@ -639,9 +639,9 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, */ /* - * Extract clause usage info and detect any paths that use exactly - * the same set of clauses; keep only the cheapest-to-scan of any such - * groups. The surviving paths are put into an array for qsort'ing. + * Extract clause usage info and detect any paths that use exactly the + * same set of clauses; keep only the cheapest-to-scan of any such groups. + * The surviving paths are put into an array for qsort'ing. */ pathinfoarray = (PathClauseUsage **) palloc(npaths * sizeof(PathClauseUsage *)); @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, npaths = 0; foreach(l, paths) { - Path *ipath = (Path *) lfirst(l); + Path *ipath = (Path *) lfirst(l); pathinfo = classify_index_clause_usage(ipath, &clauselist); for (i = 0; i < npaths; i++) @@ -686,9 +686,9 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, path_usage_comparator); /* - * For each surviving index, consider it as an "AND group leader", and - * see whether adding on any of the later indexes results in an AND path - * with cheaper total cost than before. Then take the cheapest AND group. + * For each surviving index, consider it as an "AND group leader", and see + * whether adding on any of the later indexes results in an AND path with + * cheaper total cost than before. Then take the cheapest AND group. */ for (i = 0; i < npaths; i++) { @@ -705,17 +705,17 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, clauseidsofar = bms_copy(pathinfo->clauseids); lastcell = list_head(paths); /* for quick deletions */ - for (j = i+1; j < npaths; j++) + for (j = i + 1; j < npaths; j++) { Cost newcost; pathinfo = pathinfoarray[j]; /* Check for redundancy */ if (bms_overlap(pathinfo->clauseids, clauseidsofar)) - continue; /* consider it redundant */ + continue; /* consider it redundant */ if (pathinfo->preds) { - bool redundant = false; + bool redundant = false; /* we check each predicate clause separately */ foreach(l, pathinfo->preds) @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, if (predicate_implied_by(list_make1(np), qualsofar)) { redundant = true; - break; /* out of inner foreach loop */ + break; /* out of inner foreach loop */ } } if (redundant) @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, } if (list_length(bestpaths) == 1) - return (Path *) linitial(bestpaths); /* no need for AND */ + return (Path *) linitial(bestpaths); /* no need for AND */ return (Path *) create_bitmap_and_path(root, rel, bestpaths); } @@ -774,8 +774,8 @@ choose_bitmap_and(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, static int path_usage_comparator(const void *a, const void *b) { - PathClauseUsage *pa = *(PathClauseUsage *const *) a; - PathClauseUsage *pb = *(PathClauseUsage *const *) b; + PathClauseUsage *pa = *(PathClauseUsage * const *) a; + PathClauseUsage *pb = *(PathClauseUsage * const *) b; Cost acost; Cost bcost; Selectivity aselec; @@ -872,14 +872,14 @@ classify_index_clause_usage(Path *path, List **clauselist) clauseids = NULL; foreach(lc, result->quals) { - Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); + Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); clauseids = bms_add_member(clauseids, find_list_position(node, clauselist)); } foreach(lc, result->preds) { - Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); + Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); clauseids = bms_add_member(clauseids, find_list_position(node, clauselist)); @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ find_indexpath_quals(Path *bitmapqual, List **quals, List **preds) /* * find_list_position * Return the given node's position (counting from 0) in the given - * list of nodes. If it's not equal() to any existing list member, + * list of nodes. If it's not equal() to any existing list member, * add it at the end, and return that position. */ static int @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ find_list_position(Node *node, List **nodelist) i = 0; foreach(lc, *nodelist) { - Node *oldnode = (Node *) lfirst(lc); + Node *oldnode = (Node *) lfirst(lc); if (equal(node, oldnode)) return i; @@ -1218,7 +1218,7 @@ match_clause_to_indexcol(IndexOptInfo *index, } else if (index->amsearchnulls && IsA(clause, NullTest)) { - NullTest *nt = (NullTest *) clause; + NullTest *nt = (NullTest *) clause; if (nt->nulltesttype == IS_NULL && match_index_to_operand((Node *) nt->arg, indexcol, index)) @@ -1315,12 +1315,12 @@ match_rowcompare_to_indexcol(IndexOptInfo *index, /* * We could do the matching on the basis of insisting that the opfamily * shown in the RowCompareExpr be the same as the index column's opfamily, - * but that could fail in the presence of reverse-sort opfamilies: it'd - * be a matter of chance whether RowCompareExpr had picked the forward - * or reverse-sort family. So look only at the operator, and match - * if it is a member of the index's opfamily (after commutation, if the - * indexkey is on the right). We'll worry later about whether any - * additional operators are matchable to the index. + * but that could fail in the presence of reverse-sort opfamilies: it'd be + * a matter of chance whether RowCompareExpr had picked the forward or + * reverse-sort family. So look only at the operator, and match if it is + * a member of the index's opfamily (after commutation, if the indexkey is + * on the right). We'll worry later about whether any additional + * operators are matchable to the index. */ leftop = (Node *) linitial(clause->largs); rightop = (Node *) linitial(clause->rargs); @@ -1421,8 +1421,8 @@ indexable_outerrelids(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) } /* - * We also have to look through the query's EquivalenceClasses to see - * if any of them could generate indexable join conditions for this rel. + * We also have to look through the query's EquivalenceClasses to see if + * any of them could generate indexable join conditions for this rel. */ if (rel->has_eclass_joins) { @@ -1434,8 +1434,8 @@ indexable_outerrelids(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) ListCell *lc2; /* - * Won't generate joinclauses if const or single-member (the latter - * test covers the volatile case too) + * Won't generate joinclauses if const or single-member (the + * latter test covers the volatile case too) */ if (cur_ec->ec_has_const || list_length(cur_ec->ec_members) <= 1) continue; @@ -1569,7 +1569,7 @@ matches_any_index(RestrictInfo *rinfo, RelOptInfo *rel, Relids outer_relids) * This is also exported for use by find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join. */ bool -eclass_matches_any_index(EquivalenceClass *ec, EquivalenceMember *em, +eclass_matches_any_index(EquivalenceClass * ec, EquivalenceMember * em, RelOptInfo *rel) { ListCell *l; @@ -1831,14 +1831,14 @@ find_clauses_for_join(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Also check to see if any EquivalenceClasses can produce a relevant - * joinclause. Since all such clauses are effectively pushed-down, - * this doesn't apply to outer joins. + * joinclause. Since all such clauses are effectively pushed-down, this + * doesn't apply to outer joins. */ if (!isouterjoin && rel->has_eclass_joins) clause_list = list_concat(clause_list, find_eclass_clauses_for_index_join(root, rel, - outer_relids)); + outer_relids)); /* If no join clause was matched then forget it, per comments above */ if (clause_list == NIL) @@ -2150,9 +2150,9 @@ match_special_index_operator(Expr *clause, Oid opfamily, * want to apply. (A hash index, for example, will not support ">=".) * Currently, only btree supports the operators we need. * - * We insist on the opfamily being the specific one we expect, else we'd do - * the wrong thing if someone were to make a reverse-sort opfamily with the - * same operators. + * We insist on the opfamily being the specific one we expect, else we'd + * do the wrong thing if someone were to make a reverse-sort opfamily with + * the same operators. */ switch (expr_op) { @@ -2260,7 +2260,7 @@ expand_indexqual_conditions(IndexOptInfo *index, List *clausegroups) { resultquals = list_concat(resultquals, expand_indexqual_opclause(rinfo, - curFamily)); + curFamily)); } else if (IsA(clause, ScalarArrayOpExpr)) { @@ -2602,9 +2602,9 @@ expand_indexqual_rowcompare(RestrictInfo *rinfo, righttypes_cell = list_head(righttypes); foreach(opfamilies_cell, opfamilies) { - Oid opfam = lfirst_oid(opfamilies_cell); - Oid lefttype = lfirst_oid(lefttypes_cell); - Oid righttype = lfirst_oid(righttypes_cell); + Oid opfam = lfirst_oid(opfamilies_cell); + Oid lefttype = lfirst_oid(lefttypes_cell); + Oid righttype = lfirst_oid(righttypes_cell); expr_op = get_opfamily_member(opfam, lefttype, righttype, op_strategy); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c index 3671d6974c..4282a9912f 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c,v 1.112 2007/05/22 01:40:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c,v 1.113 2007/11/15 21:14:35 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ sort_inner_and_outer(PlannerInfo *root, * * Actually, it's not quite true that every mergeclause ordering will * generate a different path order, because some of the clauses may be - * partially redundant (refer to the same EquivalenceClasses). Therefore, + * partially redundant (refer to the same EquivalenceClasses). Therefore, * what we do is convert the mergeclause list to a list of canonical * pathkeys, and then consider different orderings of the pathkeys. * @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ sort_inner_and_outer(PlannerInfo *root, list_delete_ptr(list_copy(all_pathkeys), front_pathkey)); else - outerkeys = all_pathkeys; /* no work at first one... */ + outerkeys = all_pathkeys; /* no work at first one... */ /* Sort the mergeclauses into the corresponding ordering */ cur_mergeclauses = find_mergeclauses_for_pathkeys(root, diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c index 18fa47c02e..4265a29ea4 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c,v 1.88 2007/10/26 18:10:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c,v 1.89 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ join_is_legal(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1, RelOptInfo *rel2, ListCell *l; /* - * Ensure *jointype_p is set on failure return. This is just to - * suppress uninitialized-variable warnings from overly anal compilers. + * Ensure *jointype_p is set on failure return. This is just to suppress + * uninitialized-variable warnings from overly anal compilers. */ *jointype_p = JOIN_INNER; @@ -398,14 +398,14 @@ join_is_legal(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1, RelOptInfo *rel2, bms_is_subset(ojinfo->min_righthand, rel2->relids)) { if (jointype != JOIN_INNER) - return false; /* invalid join path */ + return false; /* invalid join path */ jointype = ojinfo->is_full_join ? JOIN_FULL : JOIN_LEFT; } else if (bms_is_subset(ojinfo->min_lefthand, rel2->relids) && bms_is_subset(ojinfo->min_righthand, rel1->relids)) { if (jointype != JOIN_INNER) - return false; /* invalid join path */ + return false; /* invalid join path */ jointype = ojinfo->is_full_join ? JOIN_FULL : JOIN_RIGHT; } else @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ join_is_legal(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1, RelOptInfo *rel2, else if (bms_equal(ininfo->righthand, rel2->relids)) jointype = JOIN_UNIQUE_INNER; else - return false; /* invalid join path */ + return false; /* invalid join path */ } /* Join is valid */ @@ -666,9 +666,9 @@ have_join_order_restriction(PlannerInfo *root, ListCell *l; /* - * It's possible that the rels correspond to the left and right sides - * of a degenerate outer join, that is, one with no joinclause mentioning - * the non-nullable side; in which case we should force the join to occur. + * It's possible that the rels correspond to the left and right sides of a + * degenerate outer join, that is, one with no joinclause mentioning the + * non-nullable side; in which case we should force the join to occur. * * Also, the two rels could represent a clauseless join that has to be * completed to build up the LHS or RHS of an outer join. @@ -696,9 +696,9 @@ have_join_order_restriction(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * Might we need to join these rels to complete the RHS? We have - * to use "overlap" tests since either rel might include a lower OJ - * that has been proven to commute with this one. + * Might we need to join these rels to complete the RHS? We have to + * use "overlap" tests since either rel might include a lower OJ that + * has been proven to commute with this one. */ if (bms_overlap(ojinfo->min_righthand, rel1->relids) && bms_overlap(ojinfo->min_righthand, rel2->relids)) @@ -761,13 +761,13 @@ have_join_order_restriction(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * We do not force the join to occur if either input rel can legally - * be joined to anything else using joinclauses. This essentially - * means that clauseless bushy joins are put off as long as possible. - * The reason is that when there is a join order restriction high up - * in the join tree (that is, with many rels inside the LHS or RHS), - * we would otherwise expend lots of effort considering very stupid - * join combinations within its LHS or RHS. + * We do not force the join to occur if either input rel can legally be + * joined to anything else using joinclauses. This essentially means that + * clauseless bushy joins are put off as long as possible. The reason is + * that when there is a join order restriction high up in the join tree + * (that is, with many rels inside the LHS or RHS), we would otherwise + * expend lots of effort considering very stupid join combinations within + * its LHS or RHS. */ if (result) { @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ have_join_order_restriction(PlannerInfo *root, * * Essentially, this tests whether have_join_order_restriction() could * succeed with this rel and some other one. It's OK if we sometimes - * say "true" incorrectly. (Therefore, we don't bother with the relatively + * say "true" incorrectly. (Therefore, we don't bother with the relatively * expensive has_legal_joinclause test.) */ static bool diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c index 846fe78ee6..7d22194860 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c,v 1.89 2007/11/08 21:49:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c,v 1.90 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ #define MUST_BE_REDUNDANT(eclass) \ ((eclass)->ec_has_const && !(eclass)->ec_below_outer_join) -static PathKey *makePathKey(EquivalenceClass *eclass, Oid opfamily, - int strategy, bool nulls_first); +static PathKey *makePathKey(EquivalenceClass * eclass, Oid opfamily, + int strategy, bool nulls_first); static PathKey *make_canonical_pathkey(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *eclass, Oid opfamily, + EquivalenceClass * eclass, Oid opfamily, int strategy, bool nulls_first); -static bool pathkey_is_redundant(PathKey *new_pathkey, List *pathkeys); +static bool pathkey_is_redundant(PathKey * new_pathkey, List *pathkeys); static PathKey *make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(PlannerInfo *root, Expr *expr, Oid ordering_op, bool nulls_first, @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ static PathKey *make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(PlannerInfo *root, bool canonicalize); static Var *find_indexkey_var(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, AttrNumber varattno); -static bool right_merge_direction(PlannerInfo *root, PathKey *pathkey); +static bool right_merge_direction(PlannerInfo *root, PathKey * pathkey); /**************************************************************************** @@ -65,10 +65,10 @@ static bool right_merge_direction(PlannerInfo *root, PathKey *pathkey); * convenience routine to build the specified node. */ static PathKey * -makePathKey(EquivalenceClass *eclass, Oid opfamily, +makePathKey(EquivalenceClass * eclass, Oid opfamily, int strategy, bool nulls_first) { - PathKey *pk = makeNode(PathKey); + PathKey *pk = makeNode(PathKey); pk->pk_eclass = eclass; pk->pk_opfamily = opfamily; @@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ makePathKey(EquivalenceClass *eclass, Oid opfamily, */ static PathKey * make_canonical_pathkey(PlannerInfo *root, - EquivalenceClass *eclass, Oid opfamily, + EquivalenceClass * eclass, Oid opfamily, int strategy, bool nulls_first) { - PathKey *pk; + PathKey *pk; ListCell *lc; MemoryContext oldcontext; @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ make_canonical_pathkey(PlannerInfo *root, * pointer comparison is enough to decide whether canonical ECs are the same. */ static bool -pathkey_is_redundant(PathKey *new_pathkey, List *pathkeys) +pathkey_is_redundant(PathKey * new_pathkey, List *pathkeys) { EquivalenceClass *new_ec = new_pathkey->pk_eclass; ListCell *lc; @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ pathkey_is_redundant(PathKey *new_pathkey, List *pathkeys) /* If same EC already used in list, then redundant */ foreach(lc, pathkeys) { - PathKey *old_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); + PathKey *old_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); /* Assert we've been given canonical pathkeys */ Assert(!old_pathkey->pk_eclass->ec_merged); @@ -197,9 +197,9 @@ canonicalize_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, List *pathkeys) foreach(l, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(l); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(l); EquivalenceClass *eclass; - PathKey *cpathkey; + PathKey *cpathkey; /* Find the canonical (merged) EquivalenceClass */ eclass = pathkey->pk_eclass; @@ -255,13 +255,13 @@ make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(PlannerInfo *root, EquivalenceClass *eclass; /* - * An ordering operator fully determines the behavior of its opfamily, - * so could only meaningfully appear in one family --- or perhaps two - * if one builds a reverse-sort opfamily, but there's not much point in - * that anymore. But EquivalenceClasses need to contain opfamily lists - * based on the family membership of equality operators, which could - * easily be bigger. So, look up the equality operator that goes with - * the ordering operator (this should be unique) and get its membership. + * An ordering operator fully determines the behavior of its opfamily, so + * could only meaningfully appear in one family --- or perhaps two if one + * builds a reverse-sort opfamily, but there's not much point in that + * anymore. But EquivalenceClasses need to contain opfamily lists based + * on the family membership of equality operators, which could easily be + * bigger. So, look up the equality operator that goes with the ordering + * operator (this should be unique) and get its membership. */ /* Find the operator in pg_amop --- failure shouldn't happen */ @@ -284,15 +284,15 @@ make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(PlannerInfo *root, /* * When dealing with binary-compatible opclasses, we have to ensure that - * the exposed type of the expression tree matches the declared input - * type of the opclass, except when that is a polymorphic type - * (compare the behavior of parse_coerce.c). This ensures that we can - * correctly match the indexkey or sortclause expression to other - * expressions we find in the query, because arguments of ordinary - * operator expressions will be cast that way. (We have to do this - * for indexkeys because they are represented without any explicit - * relabel in pg_index, and for sort clauses because the parser is - * likewise cavalier about putting relabels on them.) + * the exposed type of the expression tree matches the declared input type + * of the opclass, except when that is a polymorphic type (compare the + * behavior of parse_coerce.c). This ensures that we can correctly match + * the indexkey or sortclause expression to other expressions we find in + * the query, because arguments of ordinary operator expressions will be + * cast that way. (We have to do this for indexkeys because they are + * represented without any explicit relabel in pg_index, and for sort + * clauses because the parser is likewise cavalier about putting relabels + * on them.) */ if (exprType((Node *) expr) != opcintype && !IsPolymorphicType(opcintype)) @@ -341,8 +341,8 @@ compare_pathkeys(List *keys1, List *keys2) forboth(key1, keys1, key2, keys2) { - PathKey *pathkey1 = (PathKey *) lfirst(key1); - PathKey *pathkey2 = (PathKey *) lfirst(key2); + PathKey *pathkey1 = (PathKey *) lfirst(key1); + PathKey *pathkey2 = (PathKey *) lfirst(key2); /* * XXX would like to check that we've been given canonicalized input, @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ build_index_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, bool nulls_first; int ikey; Expr *indexkey; - PathKey *cpathkey; + PathKey *cpathkey; if (ScanDirectionIsBackward(scandir)) { @@ -601,9 +601,9 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, foreach(i, subquery_pathkeys) { - PathKey *sub_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); + PathKey *sub_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); EquivalenceClass *sub_eclass = sub_pathkey->pk_eclass; - PathKey *best_pathkey = NULL; + PathKey *best_pathkey = NULL; if (sub_eclass->ec_has_volatile) { @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, */ TargetEntry *tle; - if (sub_eclass->ec_sortref == 0) /* can't happen */ + if (sub_eclass->ec_sortref == 0) /* can't happen */ elog(ERROR, "volatile EquivalenceClass has no sortref"); tle = get_sortgroupref_tle(sub_eclass->ec_sortref, sub_tlist); Assert(tle); @@ -653,11 +653,11 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Otherwise, the sub_pathkey's EquivalenceClass could contain * multiple elements (representing knowledge that multiple items - * are effectively equal). Each element might match none, one, or - * more of the output columns that are visible to the outer - * query. This means we may have multiple possible representations - * of the sub_pathkey in the context of the outer query. Ideally - * we would generate them all and put them all into an EC of the + * are effectively equal). Each element might match none, one, or + * more of the output columns that are visible to the outer query. + * This means we may have multiple possible representations of the + * sub_pathkey in the context of the outer query. Ideally we + * would generate them all and put them all into an EC of the * outer query, thereby propagating equality knowledge up to the * outer query. Right now we cannot do so, because the outer * query's EquivalenceClasses are already frozen when this is @@ -680,7 +680,8 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, * We handle two cases: the sub_pathkey key can be either an * exact match for a targetlist entry, or it could match after * stripping RelabelType nodes. (We need that case since - * make_pathkey_from_sortinfo could add or remove RelabelType.) + * make_pathkey_from_sortinfo could add or remove + * RelabelType.) */ sub_stripped = sub_expr; while (sub_stripped && IsA(sub_stripped, RelabelType)) @@ -691,7 +692,7 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, TargetEntry *tle = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(k); Expr *outer_expr; EquivalenceClass *outer_ec; - PathKey *outer_pk; + PathKey *outer_pk; int score; /* resjunk items aren't visible to outer query */ @@ -729,7 +730,7 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, exprType((Node *) sub_expr)) outer_expr = (Expr *) makeRelabelType(outer_expr, - exprType((Node *) sub_expr), + exprType((Node *) sub_expr), -1, COERCE_DONTCARE); } @@ -740,14 +741,14 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* Found a representation for this sub_pathkey */ outer_ec = get_eclass_for_sort_expr(root, outer_expr, - sub_member->em_datatype, - sub_eclass->ec_opfamilies, + sub_member->em_datatype, + sub_eclass->ec_opfamilies, 0); outer_pk = make_canonical_pathkey(root, outer_ec, - sub_pathkey->pk_opfamily, - sub_pathkey->pk_strategy, - sub_pathkey->pk_nulls_first); + sub_pathkey->pk_opfamily, + sub_pathkey->pk_strategy, + sub_pathkey->pk_nulls_first); /* score = # of equivalence peers */ score = list_length(outer_ec->ec_members) - 1; /* +1 if it matches the proper query_pathkeys item */ @@ -854,7 +855,7 @@ make_pathkeys_for_sortclauses(PlannerInfo *root, { SortClause *sortcl = (SortClause *) lfirst(l); Expr *sortkey; - PathKey *pathkey; + PathKey *pathkey; sortkey = (Expr *) get_sortgroupclause_expr(sortcl, tlist); pathkey = make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(root, @@ -961,7 +962,7 @@ find_mergeclauses_for_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, foreach(i, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); EquivalenceClass *pathkey_ec = pathkey->pk_eclass; List *matched_restrictinfos = NIL; ListCell *j; @@ -1042,7 +1043,7 @@ find_mergeclauses_for_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, * Returns a pathkeys list that can be applied to the outer relation. * * Since we assume here that a sort is required, there is no particular use - * in matching any available ordering of the outerrel. (joinpath.c has an + * in matching any available ordering of the outerrel. (joinpath.c has an * entirely separate code path for considering sort-free mergejoins.) Rather, * it's interesting to try to match the requested query_pathkeys so that a * second output sort may be avoided; and failing that, we try to list "more @@ -1117,16 +1118,15 @@ select_outer_pathkeys_for_merge(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * Find out if we have all the ECs mentioned in query_pathkeys; if so - * we can generate a sort order that's also useful for final output. - * There is no percentage in a partial match, though, so we have to - * have 'em all. + * Find out if we have all the ECs mentioned in query_pathkeys; if so we + * can generate a sort order that's also useful for final output. There is + * no percentage in a partial match, though, so we have to have 'em all. */ if (root->query_pathkeys) { foreach(lc, root->query_pathkeys) { - PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); + PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); EquivalenceClass *query_ec = query_pathkey->pk_eclass; for (j = 0; j < necs; j++) @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ select_outer_pathkeys_for_merge(PlannerInfo *root, /* mark their ECs as already-emitted */ foreach(lc, root->query_pathkeys) { - PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); + PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc); EquivalenceClass *query_ec = query_pathkey->pk_eclass; for (j = 0; j < necs; j++) @@ -1161,16 +1161,16 @@ select_outer_pathkeys_for_merge(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * Add remaining ECs to the list in popularity order, using a default - * sort ordering. (We could use qsort() here, but the list length is - * usually so small it's not worth it.) + * Add remaining ECs to the list in popularity order, using a default sort + * ordering. (We could use qsort() here, but the list length is usually + * so small it's not worth it.) */ for (;;) { - int best_j; - int best_score; + int best_j; + int best_score; EquivalenceClass *ec; - PathKey *pathkey; + PathKey *pathkey; best_j = 0; best_score = scores[0]; @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ make_inner_pathkeys_for_merge(PlannerInfo *root, { List *pathkeys = NIL; EquivalenceClass *lastoeclass; - PathKey *opathkey; + PathKey *opathkey; ListCell *lc; ListCell *lop; @@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ make_inner_pathkeys_for_merge(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc); EquivalenceClass *oeclass; EquivalenceClass *ieclass; - PathKey *pathkey; + PathKey *pathkey; cache_mergeclause_eclasses(root, rinfo); @@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ pathkeys_useful_for_merging(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, List *pathkeys) foreach(i, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); bool matched = false; ListCell *j; @@ -1392,23 +1392,23 @@ pathkeys_useful_for_merging(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, List *pathkeys) * for merging its target column. */ static bool -right_merge_direction(PlannerInfo *root, PathKey *pathkey) +right_merge_direction(PlannerInfo *root, PathKey * pathkey) { ListCell *l; foreach(l, root->query_pathkeys) { - PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(l); + PathKey *query_pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(l); if (pathkey->pk_eclass == query_pathkey->pk_eclass && pathkey->pk_opfamily == query_pathkey->pk_opfamily) { /* - * Found a matching query sort column. Prefer this pathkey's + * Found a matching query sort column. Prefer this pathkey's * direction iff it matches. Note that we ignore pk_nulls_first, - * which means that a sort might be needed anyway ... but we - * still want to prefer only one of the two possible directions, - * and we might as well use this one. + * which means that a sort might be needed anyway ... but we still + * want to prefer only one of the two possible directions, and we + * might as well use this one. */ return (pathkey->pk_strategy == query_pathkey->pk_strategy); } @@ -1480,13 +1480,13 @@ truncate_useless_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, * useful according to truncate_useless_pathkeys(). * * This is a cheap test that lets us skip building pathkeys at all in very - * simple queries. It's OK to err in the direction of returning "true" when + * simple queries. It's OK to err in the direction of returning "true" when * there really aren't any usable pathkeys, but erring in the other direction * is bad --- so keep this in sync with the routines above! * * We could make the test more complex, for example checking to see if any of * the joinclauses are really mergejoinable, but that likely wouldn't win - * often enough to repay the extra cycles. Queries with neither a join nor + * often enough to repay the extra cycles. Queries with neither a join nor * a sort are reasonably common, though, so this much work seems worthwhile. */ bool diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c index e2b46f970c..eed6446c8a 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c,v 1.234 2007/11/08 21:49:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c,v 1.235 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -723,8 +723,8 @@ create_unique_plan(PlannerInfo *root, UniquePath *best_path) /* * Get the hashable equality operators for the Agg node to use. * Normally these are the same as the IN clause operators, but if - * those are cross-type operators then the equality operators are - * the ones for the IN clause operators' RHS datatype. + * those are cross-type operators then the equality operators are the + * ones for the IN clause operators' RHS datatype. */ groupOperators = (Oid *) palloc(numGroupCols * sizeof(Oid)); groupColPos = 0; @@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ create_unique_plan(PlannerInfo *root, UniquePath *best_path) SortClause *sortcl; sortop = get_ordering_op_for_equality_op(in_oper, false); - if (!OidIsValid(sortop)) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (!OidIsValid(sortop)) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "could not find ordering operator for equality operator %u", in_oper); tle = get_tle_by_resno(subplan->targetlist, @@ -1530,8 +1530,8 @@ create_mergejoin_plan(PlannerInfo *root, int i; EquivalenceClass *lastoeclass; EquivalenceClass *lastieclass; - PathKey *opathkey; - PathKey *ipathkey; + PathKey *opathkey; + PathKey *ipathkey; ListCell *lc; ListCell *lop; ListCell *lip; @@ -1603,8 +1603,8 @@ create_mergejoin_plan(PlannerInfo *root, /* * If inner plan is a sort that is expected to spill to disk, add a * materialize node to shield it from the need to handle mark/restore. - * This will allow it to perform the last merge pass on-the-fly, while - * in most cases not requiring the materialize to spill to disk. + * This will allow it to perform the last merge pass on-the-fly, while in + * most cases not requiring the materialize to spill to disk. * * XXX really, Sort oughta do this for itself, probably, to avoid the * overhead of a separate plan node. @@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ create_mergejoin_plan(PlannerInfo *root, i = 0; foreach(lc, best_path->path_mergeclauses) { - RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc); + RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc); EquivalenceClass *oeclass; EquivalenceClass *ieclass; @@ -1938,7 +1938,7 @@ fix_indexqual_references(List *indexquals, IndexPath *index_path, } else if (IsA(clause, NullTest)) { - NullTest *nt = (NullTest *) clause; + NullTest *nt = (NullTest *) clause; Assert(nt->nulltesttype == IS_NULL); nt->arg = (Expr *) fix_indexqual_operand((Node *) nt->arg, @@ -2139,9 +2139,9 @@ order_qual_clauses(PlannerInfo *root, List *clauses) { typedef struct { - Node *clause; - Cost cost; - } QualItem; + Node *clause; + Cost cost; + } QualItem; int nitems = list_length(clauses); QualItem *items; ListCell *lc; @@ -2171,8 +2171,8 @@ order_qual_clauses(PlannerInfo *root, List *clauses) /* * Sort. We don't use qsort() because it's not guaranteed stable for - * equal keys. The expected number of entries is small enough that - * a simple insertion sort should be good enough. + * equal keys. The expected number of entries is small enough that a + * simple insertion sort should be good enough. */ for (i = 1; i < nitems; i++) { @@ -2182,9 +2182,9 @@ order_qual_clauses(PlannerInfo *root, List *clauses) /* insert newitem into the already-sorted subarray */ for (j = i; j > 0; j--) { - if (newitem.cost >= items[j-1].cost) + if (newitem.cost >= items[j - 1].cost) break; - items[j] = items[j-1]; + items[j] = items[j - 1]; } items[j] = newitem; } @@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ make_mergejoin(List *tlist, * make_sort --- basic routine to build a Sort plan node * * Caller must have built the sortColIdx, sortOperators, and nullsFirst - * arrays already. limit_tuples is as for cost_sort (in particular, pass + * arrays already. limit_tuples is as for cost_sort (in particular, pass * -1 if no limit) */ static Sort * @@ -2667,8 +2667,8 @@ add_sort_column(AttrNumber colIdx, Oid sortOp, bool nulls_first, for (i = 0; i < numCols; i++) { /* - * Note: we check sortOp because it's conceivable that "ORDER BY - * foo USING <, foo USING <<<" is not redundant, if <<< distinguishes + * Note: we check sortOp because it's conceivable that "ORDER BY foo + * USING <, foo USING <<<" is not redundant, if <<< distinguishes * values that < considers equal. We need not check nulls_first * however because a lower-order column with the same sortop but * opposite nulls direction is redundant. @@ -2729,7 +2729,7 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, foreach(i, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(i); EquivalenceClass *ec = pathkey->pk_eclass; TargetEntry *tle = NULL; Oid pk_datatype = InvalidOid; @@ -2743,7 +2743,7 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, * have come from an ORDER BY clause, and we have to match it to * that same targetlist entry. */ - if (ec->ec_sortref == 0) /* can't happen */ + if (ec->ec_sortref == 0) /* can't happen */ elog(ERROR, "volatile EquivalenceClass has no sortref"); tle = get_sortgroupref_tle(ec->ec_sortref, tlist); Assert(tle); @@ -2755,7 +2755,7 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, /* * Otherwise, we can sort by any non-constant expression listed in * the pathkey's EquivalenceClass. For now, we take the first one - * that corresponds to an available item in the tlist. If there + * that corresponds to an available item in the tlist. If there * isn't any, use the first one that is an expression in the * input's vars. (The non-const restriction only matters if the * EC is below_outer_join; but if it isn't, it won't contain @@ -2779,28 +2779,28 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, if (tle) { pk_datatype = em->em_datatype; - break; /* found expr already in tlist */ + break; /* found expr already in tlist */ } /* * We can also use it if the pathkey expression is a relabel * of the tlist entry, or vice versa. This is needed for * binary-compatible cases (cf. make_pathkey_from_sortinfo). - * We prefer an exact match, though, so we do the basic - * search first. + * We prefer an exact match, though, so we do the basic search + * first. */ tle = tlist_member_ignore_relabel((Node *) em->em_expr, tlist); if (tle) { pk_datatype = em->em_datatype; - break; /* found expr already in tlist */ + break; /* found expr already in tlist */ } } if (!tle) { /* No matching tlist item; look for a computable expression */ - Expr *sortexpr = NULL; + Expr *sortexpr = NULL; foreach(j, ec->ec_members) { @@ -2821,7 +2821,7 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, if (!k) { pk_datatype = em->em_datatype; - break; /* found usable expression */ + break; /* found usable expression */ } } if (!j) @@ -3172,7 +3172,7 @@ make_group(PlannerInfo *root, /* * distinctList is a list of SortClauses, identifying the targetlist items - * that should be considered by the Unique filter. The input path must + * that should be considered by the Unique filter. The input path must * already be sorted accordingly. */ Unique * @@ -3221,7 +3221,7 @@ make_unique(Plan *lefttree, List *distinctList) uniqColIdx[keyno] = tle->resno; uniqOperators[keyno] = get_equality_op_for_ordering_op(sortcl->sortop); - if (!OidIsValid(uniqOperators[keyno])) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (!OidIsValid(uniqOperators[keyno])) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "could not find equality operator for ordering operator %u", sortcl->sortop); keyno++; @@ -3287,7 +3287,7 @@ make_setop(SetOpCmd cmd, Plan *lefttree, dupColIdx[keyno] = tle->resno; dupOperators[keyno] = get_equality_op_for_ordering_op(sortcl->sortop); - if (!OidIsValid(dupOperators[keyno])) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (!OidIsValid(dupOperators[keyno])) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "could not find equality operator for ordering operator %u", sortcl->sortop); keyno++; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c index bacd875abf..a567197d75 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c,v 1.135 2007/10/24 20:54:27 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c,v 1.136 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ static void distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, Relids ojscope, Relids outerjoin_nonnullable); static bool check_outerjoin_delay(PlannerInfo *root, Relids *relids_p, - bool is_pushed_down); + bool is_pushed_down); static void check_mergejoinable(RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); static void check_hashjoinable(RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); @@ -329,10 +329,10 @@ deconstruct_recurse(PlannerInfo *root, Node *jtnode, bool below_outer_join, /* * A FROM with more than one list element is an inner join subsuming - * all below it, so we should report inner_join_rels = qualscope. - * If there was exactly one element, we should (and already did) report - * whatever its inner_join_rels were. If there were no elements - * (is that possible?) the initialization before the loop fixed it. + * all below it, so we should report inner_join_rels = qualscope. If + * there was exactly one element, we should (and already did) report + * whatever its inner_join_rels were. If there were no elements (is + * that possible?) the initialization before the loop fixed it. */ if (list_length(f->fromlist) > 1) *inner_join_rels = *qualscope; @@ -478,8 +478,8 @@ deconstruct_recurse(PlannerInfo *root, Node *jtnode, bool below_outer_join, else { /* can't combine, but needn't force join order above here */ - Node *leftpart, - *rightpart; + Node *leftpart, + *rightpart; /* avoid creating useless 1-element sublists */ if (list_length(leftjoinlist) == 1) @@ -590,13 +590,13 @@ make_outerjoininfo(PlannerInfo *root, ojinfo->lhs_strict = bms_overlap(strict_relids, left_rels); /* - * Required LHS always includes the LHS rels mentioned in the clause. - * We may have to add more rels based on lower outer joins; see below. + * Required LHS always includes the LHS rels mentioned in the clause. We + * may have to add more rels based on lower outer joins; see below. */ min_lefthand = bms_intersect(clause_relids, left_rels); /* - * Similarly for required RHS. But here, we must also include any lower + * Similarly for required RHS. But here, we must also include any lower * inner joins, to ensure we don't try to commute with any of them. */ min_righthand = bms_int_members(bms_union(clause_relids, inner_join_rels), @@ -614,10 +614,10 @@ make_outerjoininfo(PlannerInfo *root, * For a lower OJ in our LHS, if our join condition uses the lower * join's RHS and is not strict for that rel, we must preserve the * ordering of the two OJs, so add lower OJ's full syntactic relset to - * min_lefthand. (We must use its full syntactic relset, not just - * its min_lefthand + min_righthand. This is because there might - * be other OJs below this one that this one can commute with, - * but we cannot commute with them if we don't with this one.) + * min_lefthand. (We must use its full syntactic relset, not just its + * min_lefthand + min_righthand. This is because there might be other + * OJs below this one that this one can commute with, but we cannot + * commute with them if we don't with this one.) * * Note: I believe we have to insist on being strict for at least one * rel in the lower OJ's min_righthand, not its whole syn_righthand. @@ -635,19 +635,19 @@ make_outerjoininfo(PlannerInfo *root, /* * For a lower OJ in our RHS, if our join condition does not use the * lower join's RHS and the lower OJ's join condition is strict, we - * can interchange the ordering of the two OJs; otherwise we must - * add lower OJ's full syntactic relset to min_righthand. + * can interchange the ordering of the two OJs; otherwise we must add + * lower OJ's full syntactic relset to min_righthand. * - * Here, we have to consider that "our join condition" includes - * any clauses that syntactically appeared above the lower OJ and - * below ours; those are equivalent to degenerate clauses in our - * OJ and must be treated as such. Such clauses obviously can't - * reference our LHS, and they must be non-strict for the lower OJ's - * RHS (else reduce_outer_joins would have reduced the lower OJ to - * a plain join). Hence the other ways in which we handle clauses - * within our join condition are not affected by them. The net - * effect is therefore sufficiently represented by the - * delay_upper_joins flag saved for us by check_outerjoin_delay. + * Here, we have to consider that "our join condition" includes any + * clauses that syntactically appeared above the lower OJ and below + * ours; those are equivalent to degenerate clauses in our OJ and must + * be treated as such. Such clauses obviously can't reference our + * LHS, and they must be non-strict for the lower OJ's RHS (else + * reduce_outer_joins would have reduced the lower OJ to a plain + * join). Hence the other ways in which we handle clauses within our + * join condition are not affected by them. The net effect is + * therefore sufficiently represented by the delay_upper_joins flag + * saved for us by check_outerjoin_delay. */ if (bms_overlap(right_rels, otherinfo->syn_righthand)) { @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * Note: it is not immediately obvious that a simple boolean is enough * for this: if for some reason we were to attach a degenerate qual to * its original join level, it would need to be treated as an outer join - * qual there. However, this cannot happen, because all the rels the + * qual there. However, this cannot happen, because all the rels the * clause mentions must be in the outer join's min_righthand, therefore * the join it needs must be formed before the outer join; and we always * attach quals to the lowest level where they can be evaluated. But @@ -828,10 +828,10 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, if (is_deduced) { /* - * If the qual came from implied-equality deduction, it should - * not be outerjoin-delayed, else deducer blew it. But we can't - * check this because the ojinfo list may now contain OJs above - * where the qual belongs. + * If the qual came from implied-equality deduction, it should not be + * outerjoin-delayed, else deducer blew it. But we can't check this + * because the ojinfo list may now contain OJs above where the qual + * belongs. */ Assert(!ojscope); is_pushed_down = true; @@ -846,9 +846,9 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * The qual is attached to an outer join and mentions (some of the) * rels on the nonnullable side, so it's not degenerate. * - * We can't use such a clause to deduce equivalence (the left and right - * sides might be unequal above the join because one of them has gone - * to NULL) ... but we might be able to use it for more limited + * We can't use such a clause to deduce equivalence (the left and + * right sides might be unequal above the join because one of them has + * gone to NULL) ... but we might be able to use it for more limited * deductions, if there are no lower outer joins that delay its * application. If so, consider adding it to the lists of set-aside * clauses. @@ -875,8 +875,8 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, else { /* - * Normal qual clause or degenerate outer-join clause. Either way, - * we can mark it as pushed-down. + * Normal qual clause or degenerate outer-join clause. Either way, we + * can mark it as pushed-down. */ is_pushed_down = true; @@ -887,6 +887,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, { /* Should still be a subset of current scope ... */ Assert(bms_is_subset(relids, qualscope)); + /* * Because application of the qual will be delayed by outer join, * we mustn't assume its vars are equal everywhere. @@ -896,12 +897,11 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, else { /* - * Qual is not delayed by any lower outer-join restriction, so - * we can consider feeding it to the equivalence machinery. - * However, if it's itself within an outer-join clause, treat it - * as though it appeared below that outer join (note that we can - * only get here when the clause references only nullable-side - * rels). + * Qual is not delayed by any lower outer-join restriction, so we + * can consider feeding it to the equivalence machinery. However, + * if it's itself within an outer-join clause, treat it as though + * it appeared below that outer join (note that we can only get + * here when the clause references only nullable-side rels). */ maybe_equivalence = true; if (outerjoin_nonnullable != NULL) @@ -926,9 +926,9 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, /* * If it's a join clause (either naturally, or because delayed by - * outer-join rules), add vars used in the clause to targetlists of - * their relations, so that they will be emitted by the plan nodes that - * scan those relations (else they won't be available at the join node!). + * outer-join rules), add vars used in the clause to targetlists of their + * relations, so that they will be emitted by the plan nodes that scan + * those relations (else they won't be available at the join node!). * * Note: if the clause gets absorbed into an EquivalenceClass then this * may be unnecessary, but for now we have to do it to cover the case @@ -955,23 +955,23 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * machinery. We do *not* attach it directly to any restriction or join * lists. The EC code will propagate it to the appropriate places later. * - * If the clause has a mergejoinable operator and is not outerjoin-delayed, - * yet isn't an equivalence because it is an outer-join clause, the EC - * code may yet be able to do something with it. We add it to appropriate - * lists for further consideration later. Specifically: + * If the clause has a mergejoinable operator and is not + * outerjoin-delayed, yet isn't an equivalence because it is an outer-join + * clause, the EC code may yet be able to do something with it. We add it + * to appropriate lists for further consideration later. Specifically: * - * If it is a left or right outer-join qualification that relates the - * two sides of the outer join (no funny business like leftvar1 = - * leftvar2 + rightvar), we add it to root->left_join_clauses or + * If it is a left or right outer-join qualification that relates the two + * sides of the outer join (no funny business like leftvar1 = leftvar2 + + * rightvar), we add it to root->left_join_clauses or * root->right_join_clauses according to which side the nonnullable * variable appears on. * * If it is a full outer-join qualification, we add it to * root->full_join_clauses. (Ideally we'd discard cases that aren't * leftvar = rightvar, as we do for left/right joins, but this routine - * doesn't have the info needed to do that; and the current usage of - * the full_join_clauses list doesn't require that, so it's not - * currently worth complicating this routine's API to make it possible.) + * doesn't have the info needed to do that; and the current usage of the + * full_join_clauses list doesn't require that, so it's not currently + * worth complicating this routine's API to make it possible.) * * If none of the above hold, pass it off to * distribute_restrictinfo_to_rels(). @@ -997,9 +997,9 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, return; } if (bms_is_subset(restrictinfo->right_relids, - outerjoin_nonnullable) && - !bms_overlap(restrictinfo->left_relids, - outerjoin_nonnullable)) + outerjoin_nonnullable) && + !bms_overlap(restrictinfo->left_relids, + outerjoin_nonnullable)) { /* we have innervar = outervar */ root->right_join_clauses = lappend(root->right_join_clauses, @@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * For an is_pushed_down qual, we can evaluate the qual as soon as (1) we have * all the rels it mentions, and (2) we are at or above any outer joins that * can null any of these rels and are below the syntactic location of the - * given qual. We must enforce (2) because pushing down such a clause below + * given qual. We must enforce (2) because pushing down such a clause below * the OJ might cause the OJ to emit null-extended rows that should not have * been formed, or that should have been rejected by the clause. (This is * only an issue for non-strict quals, since if we can prove a qual mentioning @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * * To enforce (2), scan the oj_info_list and merge the required-relid sets of * any such OJs into the clause's own reference list. At the time we are - * called, the oj_info_list contains only outer joins below this qual. We + * called, the oj_info_list contains only outer joins below this qual. We * have to repeat the scan until no new relids get added; this ensures that * the qual is suitably delayed regardless of the order in which OJs get * executed. As an example, if we have one OJ with LHS=A, RHS=B, and one with @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * required relids overlap the LHS too) causes that OJ's delay_upper_joins * flag to be set TRUE. This will prevent any higher-level OJs from * being interchanged with that OJ, which would result in not having any - * correct place to evaluate the qual. (The case we care about here is a + * correct place to evaluate the qual. (The case we care about here is a * sub-select WHERE clause within the RHS of some outer join. The WHERE * clause must effectively be treated as a degenerate clause of that outer * join's condition. Rather than trying to match such clauses with joins @@ -1077,7 +1077,8 @@ check_outerjoin_delay(PlannerInfo *root, Relids *relids_p, bool found_some; outerjoin_delayed = false; - do { + do + { ListCell *l; found_some = false; @@ -1134,8 +1135,8 @@ distribute_restrictinfo_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, case BMS_SINGLETON: /* - * There is only one relation participating in the clause, so - * it is a restriction clause for that relation. + * There is only one relation participating in the clause, so it + * is a restriction clause for that relation. */ rel = find_base_rel(root, bms_singleton_member(relids)); @@ -1151,8 +1152,8 @@ distribute_restrictinfo_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, */ /* - * Check for hashjoinable operators. (We don't bother setting - * the hashjoin info if we're not going to need it.) + * Check for hashjoinable operators. (We don't bother setting the + * hashjoin info if we're not going to need it.) */ if (enable_hashjoin) check_hashjoinable(restrictinfo); @@ -1222,7 +1223,7 @@ process_implied_equality(PlannerInfo *root, /* If we produced const TRUE, just drop the clause */ if (clause && IsA(clause, Const)) { - Const *cclause = (Const *) clause; + Const *cclause = (Const *) clause; Assert(cclause->consttype == BOOLOID); if (!cclause->constisnull && DatumGetBool(cclause->constvalue)) @@ -1273,9 +1274,9 @@ build_implied_join_equality(Oid opno, * Build the RestrictInfo node itself. */ restrictinfo = make_restrictinfo(clause, - true, /* is_pushed_down */ - false, /* outerjoin_delayed */ - false, /* pseudoconstant */ + true, /* is_pushed_down */ + false, /* outerjoin_delayed */ + false, /* pseudoconstant */ qualscope); /* Set mergejoinability info always, and hashjoinability if enabled */ @@ -1322,9 +1323,9 @@ check_mergejoinable(RestrictInfo *restrictinfo) restrictinfo->mergeopfamilies = get_mergejoin_opfamilies(opno); /* - * Note: op_mergejoinable is just a hint; if we fail to find the - * operator in any btree opfamilies, mergeopfamilies remains NIL - * and so the clause is not treated as mergejoinable. + * Note: op_mergejoinable is just a hint; if we fail to find the operator + * in any btree opfamilies, mergeopfamilies remains NIL and so the clause + * is not treated as mergejoinable. */ } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c index 80d01c0294..09302d3fc1 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c,v 1.33 2007/10/13 00:58:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c,v 1.34 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -298,9 +298,9 @@ build_minmax_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, MinMaxAggInfo *info) info->notnulltest = (Expr *) ntest; /* - * Build list of existing restriction clauses plus the notnull test. - * We cheat a bit by not bothering with a RestrictInfo node for the - * notnull test --- predicate_implied_by() won't care. + * Build list of existing restriction clauses plus the notnull test. We + * cheat a bit by not bothering with a RestrictInfo node for the notnull + * test --- predicate_implied_by() won't care. */ allquals = list_concat(list_make1(ntest), rel->baserestrictinfo); @@ -320,9 +320,9 @@ build_minmax_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, MinMaxAggInfo *info) continue; /* - * Ignore partial indexes that do not match the query --- unless - * their predicates can be proven from the baserestrict list plus - * the IS NOT NULL test. In that case we can use them. + * Ignore partial indexes that do not match the query --- unless their + * predicates can be proven from the baserestrict list plus the IS NOT + * NULL test. In that case we can use them. */ if (index->indpred != NIL && !index->predOK && !predicate_implied_by(index->indpred, allquals)) @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ build_minmax_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, MinMaxAggInfo *info) static ScanDirection match_agg_to_index_col(MinMaxAggInfo *info, IndexOptInfo *index, int indexcol) { - ScanDirection result; + ScanDirection result; /* Check for operator match first (cheaper) */ if (info->aggsortop == index->fwdsortop[indexcol]) @@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ make_agg_subplan(PlannerInfo *root, MinMaxAggInfo *info) * have stuck a gating Result atop that, if there were any pseudoconstant * quals. * - * We can skip adding the NOT NULL qual if it's redundant with either - * an already-given WHERE condition, or a clause of the index predicate. + * We can skip adding the NOT NULL qual if it's redundant with either an + * already-given WHERE condition, or a clause of the index predicate. */ plan = create_plan(&subroot, (Path *) info->path); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c index 772ee84e8d..f7bef9004b 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c,v 1.103 2007/10/04 20:44:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c,v 1.104 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -110,9 +110,10 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, *cheapest_path = (Path *) create_result_path((List *) parse->jointree->quals); *sorted_path = NULL; + /* - * We still are required to canonicalize any pathkeys, in case - * it's something like "SELECT 2+2 ORDER BY 1". + * We still are required to canonicalize any pathkeys, in case it's + * something like "SELECT 2+2 ORDER BY 1". */ root->canon_pathkeys = NIL; root->query_pathkeys = canonicalize_pathkeys(root, @@ -143,8 +144,8 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, root->oj_info_list = NIL; /* - * Make a flattened version of the rangetable for faster access (this - * is OK because the rangetable won't change any more). + * Make a flattened version of the rangetable for faster access (this is + * OK because the rangetable won't change any more). */ root->simple_rte_array = (RangeTblEntry **) palloc0(root->simple_rel_array_size * sizeof(RangeTblEntry *)); @@ -198,8 +199,8 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, * Examine the targetlist and qualifications, adding entries to baserel * targetlists for all referenced Vars. Restrict and join clauses are * added to appropriate lists belonging to the mentioned relations. We - * also build EquivalenceClasses for provably equivalent expressions, - * and form a target joinlist for make_one_rel() to work from. + * also build EquivalenceClasses for provably equivalent expressions, and + * form a target joinlist for make_one_rel() to work from. * * Note: all subplan nodes will have "flat" (var-only) tlists. This * implies that all expression evaluations are done at the root of the @@ -227,14 +228,14 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, /* * If we formed any equivalence classes, generate additional restriction - * clauses as appropriate. (Implied join clauses are formed on-the-fly + * clauses as appropriate. (Implied join clauses are formed on-the-fly * later.) */ generate_base_implied_equalities(root); /* * We have completed merging equivalence sets, so it's now possible to - * convert the requested query_pathkeys to canonical form. Also + * convert the requested query_pathkeys to canonical form. Also * canonicalize the groupClause and sortClause pathkeys for use later. */ root->query_pathkeys = canonicalize_pathkeys(root, root->query_pathkeys); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c index c55f89da78..5234e0433d 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c,v 1.223 2007/10/11 18:05:27 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c,v 1.224 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -174,8 +174,8 @@ standard_planner(Query *parse, int cursorOptions, ParamListInfo boundParams) Assert(list_length(glob->subplans) == list_length(glob->subrtables)); forboth(lp, glob->subplans, lr, glob->subrtables) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(lp); - List *subrtable = (List *) lfirst(lr); + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(lp); + List *subrtable = (List *) lfirst(lr); lfirst(lp) = set_plan_references(glob, subplan, subrtable); } @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ standard_planner(Query *parse, int cursorOptions, ParamListInfo boundParams) *-------------------- */ Plan * -subquery_planner(PlannerGlobal *glob, Query *parse, +subquery_planner(PlannerGlobal * glob, Query *parse, Index level, double tuple_fraction, PlannerInfo **subroot) { @@ -741,9 +741,10 @@ grouping_planner(PlannerInfo *root, double tuple_fraction) { tuple_fraction = preprocess_limit(root, tuple_fraction, &offset_est, &count_est); + /* - * If we have a known LIMIT, and don't have an unknown OFFSET, - * we can estimate the effects of using a bounded sort. + * If we have a known LIMIT, and don't have an unknown OFFSET, we can + * estimate the effects of using a bounded sort. */ if (count_est > 0 && offset_est >= 0) limit_tuples = (double) count_est + (double) offset_est; @@ -777,7 +778,7 @@ grouping_planner(PlannerInfo *root, double tuple_fraction) */ current_pathkeys = make_pathkeys_for_sortclauses(root, set_sortclauses, - result_plan->targetlist, + result_plan->targetlist, true); /* @@ -1446,7 +1447,7 @@ extract_grouping_ops(List *groupClause) GroupClause *groupcl = (GroupClause *) lfirst(glitem); groupOperators[colno] = get_equality_op_for_ordering_op(groupcl->sortop); - if (!OidIsValid(groupOperators[colno])) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (!OidIsValid(groupOperators[colno])) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "could not find equality operator for ordering operator %u", groupcl->sortop); colno++; @@ -1477,8 +1478,8 @@ choose_hashed_grouping(PlannerInfo *root, /* * Check can't-do-it conditions, including whether the grouping operators * are hashjoinable. (We assume hashing is OK if they are marked - * oprcanhash. If there isn't actually a supporting hash function, - * the executor will complain at runtime.) + * oprcanhash. If there isn't actually a supporting hash function, the + * executor will complain at runtime.) * * Executor doesn't support hashed aggregation with DISTINCT aggregates. * (Doing so would imply storing *all* the input values in the hash table, diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c index bc8ce00d4e..af7ab0d7f3 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c,v 1.137 2007/10/11 18:05:27 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c,v 1.138 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ typedef struct { PlannerGlobal *glob; int rtoffset; -} fix_scan_expr_context; +} fix_scan_expr_context; typedef struct { @@ -54,29 +54,29 @@ typedef struct indexed_tlist *inner_itlist; Index acceptable_rel; int rtoffset; -} fix_join_expr_context; +} fix_join_expr_context; typedef struct { PlannerGlobal *glob; indexed_tlist *subplan_itlist; int rtoffset; -} fix_upper_expr_context; +} fix_upper_expr_context; #define fix_scan_list(glob, lst, rtoffset) \ ((List *) fix_scan_expr(glob, (Node *) (lst), rtoffset)) -static Plan *set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset); -static Plan *set_subqueryscan_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, - SubqueryScan *plan, - int rtoffset); +static Plan *set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset); +static Plan *set_subqueryscan_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, + SubqueryScan *plan, + int rtoffset); static bool trivial_subqueryscan(SubqueryScan *plan); -static Node *fix_scan_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, Node *node, int rtoffset); -static Node *fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context *context); -static void set_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Join *join, int rtoffset); -static void set_inner_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *inner_plan, +static Node *fix_scan_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, Node *node, int rtoffset); +static Node *fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context * context); +static void set_join_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Join *join, int rtoffset); +static void set_inner_join_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *inner_plan, indexed_tlist *outer_itlist); -static void set_upper_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset); +static void set_upper_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset); static void set_dummy_tlist_references(Plan *plan, int rtoffset); static indexed_tlist *build_tlist_index(List *tlist); static Var *search_indexed_tlist_for_var(Var *var, @@ -86,19 +86,19 @@ static Var *search_indexed_tlist_for_var(Var *var, static Var *search_indexed_tlist_for_non_var(Node *node, indexed_tlist *itlist, Index newvarno); -static List *fix_join_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, - List *clauses, - indexed_tlist *outer_itlist, - indexed_tlist *inner_itlist, - Index acceptable_rel, int rtoffset); +static List *fix_join_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, + List *clauses, + indexed_tlist *outer_itlist, + indexed_tlist *inner_itlist, + Index acceptable_rel, int rtoffset); static Node *fix_join_expr_mutator(Node *node, - fix_join_expr_context *context); -static Node *fix_upper_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, - Node *node, - indexed_tlist *subplan_itlist, - int rtoffset); + fix_join_expr_context * context); +static Node *fix_upper_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, + Node *node, + indexed_tlist *subplan_itlist, + int rtoffset); static Node *fix_upper_expr_mutator(Node *node, - fix_upper_expr_context *context); + fix_upper_expr_context * context); static bool fix_opfuncids_walker(Node *node, void *context); @@ -155,26 +155,26 @@ static bool fix_opfuncids_walker(Node *node, void *context); * the list of relation OIDs is appended to glob->relationOids. * * Notice that we modify Plan nodes in-place, but use expression_tree_mutator - * to process targetlist and qual expressions. We can assume that the Plan + * to process targetlist and qual expressions. We can assume that the Plan * nodes were just built by the planner and are not multiply referenced, but * it's not so safe to assume that for expression tree nodes. */ Plan * -set_plan_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, List *rtable) +set_plan_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *plan, List *rtable) { int rtoffset = list_length(glob->finalrtable); ListCell *lc; /* - * In the flat rangetable, we zero out substructure pointers that are - * not needed by the executor; this reduces the storage space and - * copying cost for cached plans. We keep only the alias and eref - * Alias fields, which are needed by EXPLAIN. + * In the flat rangetable, we zero out substructure pointers that are not + * needed by the executor; this reduces the storage space and copying cost + * for cached plans. We keep only the alias and eref Alias fields, which + * are needed by EXPLAIN. */ foreach(lc, rtable) { - RangeTblEntry *rte = (RangeTblEntry *) lfirst(lc); - RangeTblEntry *newrte; + RangeTblEntry *rte = (RangeTblEntry *) lfirst(lc); + RangeTblEntry *newrte; /* flat copy to duplicate all the scalar fields */ newrte = (RangeTblEntry *) palloc(sizeof(RangeTblEntry)); @@ -193,11 +193,11 @@ set_plan_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, List *rtable) /* * If it's a plain relation RTE, add the table to relationOids. * - * We do this even though the RTE might be unreferenced in the - * plan tree; this would correspond to cases such as views that - * were expanded, child tables that were eliminated by constraint - * exclusion, etc. Schema invalidation on such a rel must still - * force rebuilding of the plan. + * We do this even though the RTE might be unreferenced in the plan + * tree; this would correspond to cases such as views that were + * expanded, child tables that were eliminated by constraint + * exclusion, etc. Schema invalidation on such a rel must still force + * rebuilding of the plan. * * Note we don't bother to avoid duplicate list entries. We could, * but it would probably cost more cycles than it would save. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ set_plan_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, List *rtable) * set_plan_refs: recurse through the Plan nodes of a single subquery level */ static Plan * -set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) +set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) { ListCell *l; @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) { case T_SeqScan: { - SeqScan *splan = (SeqScan *) plan; + SeqScan *splan = (SeqScan *) plan; splan->scanrelid += rtoffset; splan->plan.targetlist = @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_IndexScan: { - IndexScan *splan = (IndexScan *) plan; + IndexScan *splan = (IndexScan *) plan; splan->scan.scanrelid += rtoffset; splan->scan.plan.targetlist = @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_TidScan: { - TidScan *splan = (TidScan *) plan; + TidScan *splan = (TidScan *) plan; splan->scan.scanrelid += rtoffset; splan->scan.plan.targetlist = @@ -340,11 +340,12 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) /* * These plan types don't actually bother to evaluate their * targetlists, because they just return their unmodified input - * tuples. Even though the targetlist won't be used by the + * tuples. Even though the targetlist won't be used by the * executor, we fix it up for possible use by EXPLAIN (not to * mention ease of debugging --- wrong varnos are very confusing). */ set_dummy_tlist_references(plan, rtoffset); + /* * Since these plan types don't check quals either, we should not * find any qual expression attached to them. @@ -353,13 +354,13 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_Limit: { - Limit *splan = (Limit *) plan; + Limit *splan = (Limit *) plan; /* * Like the plan types above, Limit doesn't evaluate its tlist * or quals. It does have live expressions for limit/offset, - * however; and those cannot contain subplan variable refs, - * so fix_scan_expr works for them. + * however; and those cannot contain subplan variable refs, so + * fix_scan_expr works for them. */ set_dummy_tlist_references(plan, rtoffset); Assert(splan->plan.qual == NIL); @@ -376,7 +377,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_Result: { - Result *splan = (Result *) plan; + Result *splan = (Result *) plan; /* * Result may or may not have a subplan; if not, it's more @@ -398,7 +399,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_Append: { - Append *splan = (Append *) plan; + Append *splan = (Append *) plan; /* * Append, like Sort et al, doesn't actually evaluate its @@ -416,7 +417,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_BitmapAnd: { - BitmapAnd *splan = (BitmapAnd *) plan; + BitmapAnd *splan = (BitmapAnd *) plan; /* BitmapAnd works like Append, but has no tlist */ Assert(splan->plan.targetlist == NIL); @@ -431,7 +432,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) break; case T_BitmapOr: { - BitmapOr *splan = (BitmapOr *) plan; + BitmapOr *splan = (BitmapOr *) plan; /* BitmapOr works like Append, but has no tlist */ Assert(splan->plan.targetlist == NIL); @@ -472,7 +473,7 @@ set_plan_refs(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) * to do the normal processing on it. */ static Plan * -set_subqueryscan_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, +set_subqueryscan_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, SubqueryScan *plan, int rtoffset) { @@ -618,7 +619,7 @@ copyVar(Var *var) * and adding OIDs from regclass Const nodes into glob->relationOids. */ static Node * -fix_scan_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, Node *node, int rtoffset) +fix_scan_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, Node *node, int rtoffset) { fix_scan_expr_context context; @@ -628,7 +629,7 @@ fix_scan_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, Node *node, int rtoffset) } static Node * -fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context *context) +fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context * context) { if (node == NULL) return NULL; @@ -637,9 +638,10 @@ fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context *context) Var *var = copyVar((Var *) node); Assert(var->varlevelsup == 0); + /* * We should not see any Vars marked INNER, but in a nestloop inner - * scan there could be OUTER Vars. Leave them alone. + * scan there could be OUTER Vars. Leave them alone. */ Assert(var->varno != INNER); if (var->varno > 0 && var->varno != OUTER) @@ -657,9 +659,10 @@ fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context *context) cexpr->cvarno += context->rtoffset; return (Node *) cexpr; } + /* - * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly - * scribble on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. + * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly scribble + * on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. */ if (IsA(node, OpExpr)) set_opfuncid((OpExpr *) node); @@ -697,7 +700,7 @@ fix_scan_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_scan_expr_context *context) * quals of the child indexscan. set_inner_join_references does that. */ static void -set_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Join *join, int rtoffset) +set_join_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Join *join, int rtoffset) { Plan *outer_plan = join->plan.lefttree; Plan *inner_plan = join->plan.righttree; @@ -774,7 +777,7 @@ set_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Join *join, int rtoffset) * recursion reaches the inner indexscan, and so we'd have done it twice. */ static void -set_inner_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *inner_plan, +set_inner_join_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *inner_plan, indexed_tlist *outer_itlist) { if (IsA(inner_plan, IndexScan)) @@ -966,7 +969,7 @@ set_inner_join_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *inner_plan, * the expression. */ static void -set_upper_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) +set_upper_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, Plan *plan, int rtoffset) { Plan *subplan = plan->lefttree; indexed_tlist *subplan_itlist; @@ -1038,7 +1041,7 @@ set_dummy_tlist_references(Plan *plan, int rtoffset) } else { - newvar->varnoold = 0; /* wasn't ever a plain Var */ + newvar->varnoold = 0; /* wasn't ever a plain Var */ newvar->varoattno = 0; } @@ -1251,7 +1254,7 @@ search_indexed_tlist_for_non_var(Node *node, * not modified. */ static List * -fix_join_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, +fix_join_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, List *clauses, indexed_tlist *outer_itlist, indexed_tlist *inner_itlist, @@ -1269,7 +1272,7 @@ fix_join_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, } static Node * -fix_join_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_join_expr_context *context) +fix_join_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_join_expr_context * context) { Var *newvar; @@ -1325,9 +1328,10 @@ fix_join_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_join_expr_context *context) if (newvar) return (Node *) newvar; } + /* - * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly - * scribble on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. + * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly scribble + * on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. */ if (IsA(node, OpExpr)) set_opfuncid((OpExpr *) node); @@ -1381,7 +1385,7 @@ fix_join_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_join_expr_context *context) * The original tree is not modified. */ static Node * -fix_upper_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, +fix_upper_expr(PlannerGlobal * glob, Node *node, indexed_tlist *subplan_itlist, int rtoffset) @@ -1395,7 +1399,7 @@ fix_upper_expr(PlannerGlobal *glob, } static Node * -fix_upper_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_upper_expr_context *context) +fix_upper_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_upper_expr_context * context) { Var *newvar; @@ -1422,9 +1426,10 @@ fix_upper_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_upper_expr_context *context) if (newvar) return (Node *) newvar; } + /* - * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly - * scribble on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. + * Since we update opcode info in-place, this part could possibly scribble + * on the planner's input data structures, but it's OK. */ if (IsA(node, OpExpr)) set_opfuncid((OpExpr *) node); @@ -1474,7 +1479,7 @@ fix_upper_expr_mutator(Node *node, fix_upper_expr_context *context) * they are not coming from a subplan. */ List * -set_returning_clause_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, +set_returning_clause_references(PlannerGlobal * glob, List *rlist, Plan *topplan, Index resultRelation) @@ -1485,8 +1490,8 @@ set_returning_clause_references(PlannerGlobal *glob, * We can perform the desired Var fixup by abusing the fix_join_expr * machinery that normally handles inner indexscan fixup. We search the * top plan's targetlist for Vars of non-result relations, and use - * fix_join_expr to convert RETURNING Vars into references to those - * tlist entries, while leaving result-rel Vars as-is. + * fix_join_expr to convert RETURNING Vars into references to those tlist + * entries, while leaving result-rel Vars as-is. */ itlist = build_tlist_index_other_vars(topplan->targetlist, resultRelation); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c index 76d80bfce0..8177f291b0 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c,v 1.125 2007/09/22 21:36:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c,v 1.126 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ typedef struct process_sublinks_context { PlannerInfo *root; bool isTopQual; -} process_sublinks_context; +} process_sublinks_context; typedef struct finalize_primnode_context { @@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ typedef struct finalize_primnode_context static Node *convert_testexpr(PlannerInfo *root, - Node *testexpr, - int rtindex, - List **righthandIds); + Node *testexpr, + int rtindex, + List **righthandIds); static Node *convert_testexpr_mutator(Node *node, convert_testexpr_context *context); static bool subplan_is_hashable(SubLink *slink, SubPlan *node, Plan *plan); static bool hash_ok_operator(OpExpr *expr); static Node *replace_correlation_vars_mutator(Node *node, PlannerInfo *root); static Node *process_sublinks_mutator(Node *node, - process_sublinks_context *context); + process_sublinks_context * context); static Bitmapset *finalize_plan(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *plan, Bitmapset *outer_params, @@ -88,13 +88,13 @@ replace_outer_var(PlannerInfo *root, Var *var) abslevel = root->query_level - var->varlevelsup; /* - * If there's already a paramlist entry for this same Var, just use - * it. NOTE: in sufficiently complex querytrees, it is possible for the - * same varno/abslevel to refer to different RTEs in different parts of - * the parsetree, so that different fields might end up sharing the same - * Param number. As long as we check the vartype as well, I believe that - * this sort of aliasing will cause no trouble. The correct field should - * get stored into the Param slot at execution in each part of the tree. + * If there's already a paramlist entry for this same Var, just use it. + * NOTE: in sufficiently complex querytrees, it is possible for the same + * varno/abslevel to refer to different RTEs in different parts of the + * parsetree, so that different fields might end up sharing the same Param + * number. As long as we check the vartype as well, I believe that this + * sort of aliasing will cause no trouble. The correct field should get + * stored into the Param slot at execution in each part of the tree. * * We also need to demand a match on vartypmod. This does not matter for * the Param itself, since those are not typmod-dependent, but it does @@ -470,11 +470,10 @@ make_subplan(PlannerInfo *root, SubLink *slink, Node *testexpr, bool isTopQual) /* * A parameterless subplan (not initplan) should be prepared to handle - * REWIND efficiently. If it has direct parameters then there's no point - * since it'll be reset on each scan anyway; and if it's an initplan - * then there's no point since it won't get re-run without parameter - * changes anyway. The input of a hashed subplan doesn't need REWIND - * either. + * REWIND efficiently. If it has direct parameters then there's no point + * since it'll be reset on each scan anyway; and if it's an initplan then + * there's no point since it won't get re-run without parameter changes + * anyway. The input of a hashed subplan doesn't need REWIND either. */ if (splan->parParam == NIL && !isInitPlan && !splan->useHashTable) root->glob->rewindPlanIDs = bms_add_member(root->glob->rewindPlanIDs, @@ -625,13 +624,12 @@ subplan_is_hashable(SubLink *slink, SubPlan *node, Plan *plan) return false; /* - * The combining operators must be hashable and strict. - * The need for hashability is obvious, since we want to use hashing. - * Without strictness, behavior in the presence of nulls is too - * unpredictable. We actually must assume even more than plain - * strictness: they can't yield NULL for non-null inputs, either - * (see nodeSubplan.c). However, hash indexes and hash joins assume - * that too. + * The combining operators must be hashable and strict. The need for + * hashability is obvious, since we want to use hashing. Without + * strictness, behavior in the presence of nulls is too unpredictable. We + * actually must assume even more than plain strictness: they can't yield + * NULL for non-null inputs, either (see nodeSubplan.c). However, hash + * indexes and hash joins assume that too. */ if (IsA(slink->testexpr, OpExpr)) { @@ -730,7 +728,7 @@ convert_IN_to_join(PlannerInfo *root, SubLink *sublink) in_operators = NIL; foreach(lc, ((BoolExpr *) sublink->testexpr)->args) { - OpExpr *op = (OpExpr *) lfirst(lc); + OpExpr *op = (OpExpr *) lfirst(lc); if (!IsA(op, OpExpr)) /* probably shouldn't happen */ return NULL; @@ -867,7 +865,7 @@ SS_process_sublinks(PlannerInfo *root, Node *expr, bool isQual) } static Node * -process_sublinks_mutator(Node *node, process_sublinks_context *context) +process_sublinks_mutator(Node *node, process_sublinks_context * context) { process_sublinks_context locContext; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c index 1d92cc5628..d8c98c927e 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.144 2007/10/22 17:04:35 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.145 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -224,11 +224,11 @@ recurse_set_operations(Node *setOp, PlannerInfo *root, * output columns. * * XXX you don't really want to know about this: setrefs.c will apply - * fix_upper_expr() to the Result node's tlist. This - * would fail if the Vars generated by generate_setop_tlist() were not - * exactly equal() to the corresponding tlist entries of the subplan. - * However, since the subplan was generated by generate_union_plan() - * or generate_nonunion_plan(), and hence its tlist was generated by + * fix_upper_expr() to the Result node's tlist. This would fail if the + * Vars generated by generate_setop_tlist() were not exactly equal() + * to the corresponding tlist entries of the subplan. However, since + * the subplan was generated by generate_union_plan() or + * generate_nonunion_plan(), and hence its tlist was generated by * generate_append_tlist(), this will work. We just tell * generate_setop_tlist() to use varno 0. */ @@ -972,8 +972,8 @@ make_inh_translation_lists(Relation oldrelation, Relation newrelation, * Otherwise we have to search for the matching column by name. * There's no guarantee it'll have the same column position, because * of cases like ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN and multiple inheritance. - * However, in simple cases it will be the same column number, so - * try that before we go groveling through all the columns. + * However, in simple cases it will be the same column number, so try + * that before we go groveling through all the columns. * * Note: the test for (att = ...) != NULL cannot fail, it's just a * notational device to include the assignment into the if-clause. diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c index c541713f3f..5b0ca6deec 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c,v 1.250 2007/10/11 21:27:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c,v 1.251 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * * HISTORY * AUTHOR DATE MAJOR EVENT @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ expression_returns_set_walker(Node *node, void *context) * Estimate the number of rows in a set result. * * We use the product of the rowcount estimates of all the functions in - * the given tree. The result is 1 if there are no set-returning functions. + * the given tree. The result is 1 if there are no set-returning functions. */ double expression_returns_set_rows(Node *clause) @@ -738,9 +738,9 @@ contain_mutable_functions_walker(Node *node, void *context) else if (IsA(node, CoerceViaIO)) { CoerceViaIO *expr = (CoerceViaIO *) node; - Oid iofunc; - Oid typioparam; - bool typisvarlena; + Oid iofunc; + Oid typioparam; + bool typisvarlena; /* check the result type's input function */ getTypeInputInfo(expr->resulttype, @@ -849,9 +849,9 @@ contain_volatile_functions_walker(Node *node, void *context) else if (IsA(node, CoerceViaIO)) { CoerceViaIO *expr = (CoerceViaIO *) node; - Oid iofunc; - Oid typioparam; - bool typisvarlena; + Oid iofunc; + Oid typioparam; + bool typisvarlena; /* check the result type's input function */ getTypeInputInfo(expr->resulttype, @@ -1065,13 +1065,13 @@ find_nonnullable_rels_walker(Node *node, bool top_level) else if (IsA(node, List)) { /* - * At top level, we are examining an implicit-AND list: if any of - * the arms produces FALSE-or-NULL then the result is FALSE-or-NULL. - * If not at top level, we are examining the arguments of a strict + * At top level, we are examining an implicit-AND list: if any of the + * arms produces FALSE-or-NULL then the result is FALSE-or-NULL. If + * not at top level, we are examining the arguments of a strict * function: if any of them produce NULL then the result of the * function must be NULL. So in both cases, the set of nonnullable - * rels is the union of those found in the arms, and we pass down - * the top_level flag unmodified. + * rels is the union of those found in the arms, and we pass down the + * top_level flag unmodified. */ foreach(l, (List *) node) { @@ -1115,15 +1115,17 @@ find_nonnullable_rels_walker(Node *node, bool top_level) top_level); break; } + /* * Below top level, even if one arm produces NULL, the result * could be FALSE (hence not NULL). However, if *all* the - * arms produce NULL then the result is NULL, so we can - * take the intersection of the sets of nonnullable rels, - * just as for OR. Fall through to share code. + * arms produce NULL then the result is NULL, so we can take + * the intersection of the sets of nonnullable rels, just as + * for OR. Fall through to share code. */ /* FALL THRU */ case OR_EXPR: + /* * OR is strict if all of its arms are, so we can take the * intersection of the sets of nonnullable rels for each arm. @@ -1135,13 +1137,14 @@ find_nonnullable_rels_walker(Node *node, bool top_level) subresult = find_nonnullable_rels_walker(lfirst(l), top_level); - if (result == NULL) /* first subresult? */ + if (result == NULL) /* first subresult? */ result = subresult; else result = bms_int_members(result, subresult); + /* - * If the intersection is empty, we can stop looking. - * This also justifies the test for first-subresult above. + * If the intersection is empty, we can stop looking. This + * also justifies the test for first-subresult above. */ if (bms_is_empty(result)) break; @@ -1669,7 +1672,7 @@ eval_const_expressions(Node *node) { eval_const_expressions_context context; - context.boundParams = NULL; /* don't use any bound params */ + context.boundParams = NULL; /* don't use any bound params */ context.active_fns = NIL; /* nothing being recursively simplified */ context.case_val = NULL; /* no CASE being examined */ context.estimate = false; /* safe transformations only */ @@ -1697,7 +1700,7 @@ estimate_expression_value(PlannerInfo *root, Node *node) { eval_const_expressions_context context; - context.boundParams = root->glob->boundParams; /* bound Params */ + context.boundParams = root->glob->boundParams; /* bound Params */ context.active_fns = NIL; /* nothing being recursively simplified */ context.case_val = NULL; /* no CASE being examined */ context.estimate = true; /* unsafe transformations OK */ @@ -3015,11 +3018,11 @@ inline_function(Oid funcid, Oid result_type, List *args, newexpr = (Node *) ((TargetEntry *) linitial(querytree->targetList))->expr; /* - * Make sure the function (still) returns what it's declared to. This will - * raise an error if wrong, but that's okay since the function would fail - * at runtime anyway. Note we do not try this until we have verified that - * no rewriting was needed; that's probably not important, but let's be - * careful. + * Make sure the function (still) returns what it's declared to. This + * will raise an error if wrong, but that's okay since the function would + * fail at runtime anyway. Note we do not try this until we have verified + * that no rewriting was needed; that's probably not important, but let's + * be careful. */ if (check_sql_fn_retval(funcid, result_type, list_make1(querytree), NULL)) goto fail; /* reject whole-tuple-result cases */ @@ -3580,8 +3583,8 @@ expression_tree_walker(Node *node, return walker(((MinMaxExpr *) node)->args, context); case T_XmlExpr: { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; - + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; + if (walker(xexpr->named_args, context)) return true; /* we assume walker doesn't care about arg_names */ @@ -3853,15 +3856,15 @@ expression_tree_mutator(Node *node, switch (nodeTag(node)) { - /* - * Primitive node types with no expression subnodes. Var and Const - * are frequent enough to deserve special cases, the others we just - * use copyObject for. - */ + /* + * Primitive node types with no expression subnodes. Var and + * Const are frequent enough to deserve special cases, the others + * we just use copyObject for. + */ case T_Var: { - Var *var = (Var *) node; - Var *newnode; + Var *var = (Var *) node; + Var *newnode; FLATCOPY(newnode, var, Var); return (Node *) newnode; @@ -4130,8 +4133,8 @@ expression_tree_mutator(Node *node, break; case T_XmlExpr: { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; - XmlExpr *newnode; + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; + XmlExpr *newnode; FLATCOPY(newnode, xexpr, XmlExpr); MUTATE(newnode->named_args, xexpr->named_args, List *); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c index 6a31a02835..9fc68a0f6d 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c,v 1.48 2007/02/16 00:14:01 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/joininfo.c,v 1.49 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ have_relevant_joinclause(PlannerInfo *root, } /* - * We also need to check the EquivalenceClass data structure, which - * might contain relationships not emitted into the joininfo lists. + * We also need to check the EquivalenceClass data structure, which might + * contain relationships not emitted into the joininfo lists. */ if (!result && rel1->has_eclass_joins && rel2->has_eclass_joins) result = have_relevant_eclass_joinclause(root, rel1, rel2); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c index bd95a0e0e2..d6bfa2e35f 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c,v 1.140 2007/05/04 01:13:44 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c,v 1.141 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ create_unique_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, Path *subpath) /* * Try to identify the targetlist that will actually be unique-ified. In * current usage, this routine is only used for sub-selects of IN clauses, - * so we should be able to find the tlist in in_info_list. Get the IN + * so we should be able to find the tlist in in_info_list. Get the IN * clause's operators, too, because they determine what "unique" means. */ sub_targetlist = NIL; @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ translate_sub_tlist(List *tlist, int relid) * * colnos is an integer list of output column numbers (resno's). We are * interested in whether rows consisting of just these columns are certain - * to be distinct. "Distinctness" is defined according to whether the + * to be distinct. "Distinctness" is defined according to whether the * corresponding upper-level equality operators listed in opids would think * the values are distinct. (Note: the opids entries could be cross-type * operators, and thus not exactly the equality operators that the subquery @@ -948,8 +948,8 @@ query_is_distinct_for(Query *query, List *colnos, List *opids) /* * DISTINCT (including DISTINCT ON) guarantees uniqueness if all the - * columns in the DISTINCT clause appear in colnos and operator - * semantics match. + * columns in the DISTINCT clause appear in colnos and operator semantics + * match. */ if (query->distinctClause) { @@ -1004,9 +1004,8 @@ query_is_distinct_for(Query *query, List *colnos, List *opids) * * XXX this code knows that prepunion.c will adopt the default ordering * operator for each column datatype as the sortop. It'd probably be - * better if these operators were chosen at parse time and stored into - * the parsetree, instead of leaving bits of the planner to decide - * semantics. + * better if these operators were chosen at parse time and stored into the + * parsetree, instead of leaving bits of the planner to decide semantics. */ if (query->setOperations) { @@ -1028,7 +1027,7 @@ query_is_distinct_for(Query *query, List *colnos, List *opids) opid = distinct_col_search(tle->resno, colnos, opids); if (!OidIsValid(opid) || !ops_in_same_btree_opfamily(opid, - ordering_oper_opid(exprType((Node *) tle->expr)))) + ordering_oper_opid(exprType((Node *) tle->expr)))) break; /* exit early if no match */ } if (l == NULL) /* had matches for all? */ @@ -1048,7 +1047,7 @@ query_is_distinct_for(Query *query, List *colnos, List *opids) * distinct_col_search - subroutine for query_is_distinct_for * * If colno is in colnos, return the corresponding element of opids, - * else return InvalidOid. (We expect colnos does not contain duplicates, + * else return InvalidOid. (We expect colnos does not contain duplicates, * so the result is well-defined.) */ static Oid diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c index 21dd342593..5c11418e0d 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c,v 1.137 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/plancat.c,v 1.138 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -166,9 +166,9 @@ get_relation_info(PlannerInfo *root, Oid relationObjectId, bool inhparent, } /* - * If the index is valid, but cannot yet be used, ignore it; - * but mark the plan we are generating as transient. - * See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. + * If the index is valid, but cannot yet be used, ignore it; but + * mark the plan we are generating as transient. See + * src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. */ if (index->indcheckxmin && !TransactionIdPrecedes(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(indexRelation->rd_indextuple->t_data), @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ get_relation_info(PlannerInfo *root, Oid relationObjectId, bool inhparent, /* * Allocate per-column info arrays. To save a few palloc cycles - * we allocate all the Oid-type arrays in one request. Note that + * we allocate all the Oid-type arrays in one request. Note that * the opfamily array needs an extra, terminating zero at the end. * We pre-zero the ordering info in case the index is unordered. */ @@ -221,9 +221,9 @@ get_relation_info(PlannerInfo *root, Oid relationObjectId, bool inhparent, for (i = 0; i < ncolumns; i++) { - int16 opt = indexRelation->rd_indoption[i]; - int fwdstrat; - int revstrat; + int16 opt = indexRelation->rd_indoption[i]; + int fwdstrat; + int revstrat; if (opt & INDOPTION_DESC) { @@ -235,10 +235,11 @@ get_relation_info(PlannerInfo *root, Oid relationObjectId, bool inhparent, fwdstrat = BTLessStrategyNumber; revstrat = BTGreaterStrategyNumber; } + /* - * Index AM must have a fixed set of strategies for it - * to make sense to specify amcanorder, so we - * need not allow the case amstrategies == 0. + * Index AM must have a fixed set of strategies for it to + * make sense to specify amcanorder, so we need not allow + * the case amstrategies == 0. */ if (fwdstrat > 0) { diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c index 3280612dfd..53f8db6d22 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c,v 1.16 2007/07/24 17:22:07 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c,v 1.17 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ list_member_strip(List *list, Expr *datum) foreach(cell, list) { - Expr *elem = (Expr *) lfirst(cell); + Expr *elem = (Expr *) lfirst(cell); if (elem && IsA(elem, RelabelType)) elem = ((RelabelType *) elem)->arg; @@ -1342,7 +1342,8 @@ btree_predicate_proof(Expr *predicate, Node *clause, bool refute_it) * * We must find a btree opfamily that contains both operators, else the * implication can't be determined. Also, the opfamily must contain a - * suitable test operator taking the pred_const and clause_const datatypes. + * suitable test operator taking the pred_const and clause_const + * datatypes. * * If there are multiple matching opfamilies, assume we can use any one to * determine the logical relationship of the two operators and the correct @@ -1354,8 +1355,8 @@ btree_predicate_proof(Expr *predicate, Node *clause, bool refute_it) 0, 0, 0); /* - * If we couldn't find any opfamily containing the pred_op, perhaps it is a - * <> operator. See if it has a negator that is in an opfamily. + * If we couldn't find any opfamily containing the pred_op, perhaps it is + * a <> operator. See if it has a negator that is in an opfamily. */ pred_op_negated = false; if (catlist->n_members == 0) diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c index 56f8f3493c..b205195998 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c,v 1.87 2007/04/21 21:01:45 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c,v 1.88 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ typedef struct JoinHashEntry static void build_joinrel_tlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *input_rel); static List *build_joinrel_restrictlist(PlannerInfo *root, - RelOptInfo *joinrel, - RelOptInfo *outer_rel, - RelOptInfo *inner_rel); + RelOptInfo *joinrel, + RelOptInfo *outer_rel, + RelOptInfo *inner_rel); static void build_joinrel_joinlist(RelOptInfo *joinrel, RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel); @@ -510,8 +510,9 @@ build_joinrel_restrictlist(PlannerInfo *root, */ result = subbuild_joinrel_restrictlist(joinrel, outer_rel->joininfo, NIL); result = subbuild_joinrel_restrictlist(joinrel, inner_rel->joininfo, result); + /* - * Add on any clauses derived from EquivalenceClasses. These cannot be + * Add on any clauses derived from EquivalenceClasses. These cannot be * redundant with the clauses in the joininfo lists, so don't bother * checking. */ @@ -599,10 +600,10 @@ subbuild_joinrel_joinlist(RelOptInfo *joinrel, { /* * This clause is still a join clause at this level, so add it to - * the new joininfo list, being careful to eliminate - * duplicates. (Since RestrictInfo nodes in different joinlists - * will have been multiply-linked rather than copied, pointer - * equality should be a sufficient test.) + * the new joininfo list, being careful to eliminate duplicates. + * (Since RestrictInfo nodes in different joinlists will have been + * multiply-linked rather than copied, pointer equality should be + * a sufficient test.) */ new_joininfo = list_append_unique_ptr(new_joininfo, rinfo); } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c index 8251e75d65..6a843c8c04 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c,v 1.53 2007/01/22 20:00:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c,v 1.54 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ extract_actual_join_clauses(List *restrictinfo_list, * * Given a list of RestrictInfo clauses that are to be applied in a join, * select the ones that are not redundant with any clause in the - * reference_list. This is used only for nestloop-with-inner-indexscan + * reference_list. This is used only for nestloop-with-inner-indexscan * joins: any clauses being checked by the index should be removed from * the qpquals list. * diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c index d2ac14cfa1..7073f0b1e8 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c,v 1.76 2007/11/08 21:49:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/tlist.c,v 1.77 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ tlist_member_ignore_relabel(Node *node, List *targetlist) foreach(temp, targetlist) { TargetEntry *tlentry = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(temp); - Expr *tlexpr = tlentry->expr; + Expr *tlexpr = tlentry->expr; while (tlexpr && IsA(tlexpr, RelabelType)) tlexpr = ((RelabelType *) tlexpr)->arg; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c index efb1ad9343..75564f2b5f 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c,v 1.71 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c,v 1.72 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ pull_varattnos_walker(Node *node, Bitmapset **varattnos) Assert(var->varno == 1); *varattnos = bms_add_member(*varattnos, - var->varattno - FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber); + var->varattno - FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber); return false; } /* Should not find a subquery or subplan */ diff --git a/src/backend/parser/analyze.c b/src/backend/parser/analyze.c index 099a7c7446..ed837f1ca6 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/analyze.c @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.369 2007/10/25 13:48:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.370 2007/11/15 21:14:36 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ static List *transformReturningList(ParseState *pstate, List *returningList); static Query *transformDeclareCursorStmt(ParseState *pstate, DeclareCursorStmt *stmt); static Query *transformExplainStmt(ParseState *pstate, - ExplainStmt *stmt); + ExplainStmt *stmt); static void transformLockingClause(Query *qry, LockingClause *lc); static bool check_parameter_resolution_walker(Node *node, check_parameter_resolution_context *context); @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ static bool check_parameter_resolution_walker(Node *node, * Optionally, information about $n parameter types can be supplied. * References to $n indexes not defined by paramTypes[] are disallowed. * - * The result is a Query node. Optimizable statements require considerable + * The result is a Query node. Optimizable statements require considerable * transformation, while utility-type statements are simply hung off * a dummy CMD_UTILITY Query node. */ @@ -1565,7 +1565,7 @@ transformReturningList(ParseState *pstate, List *returningList) if (list_length(pstate->p_rtable) != length_rtable) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("RETURNING cannot contain references to other relations"))); + errmsg("RETURNING cannot contain references to other relations"))); /* mark column origins */ markTargetListOrigins(pstate, rlist); @@ -1620,21 +1620,21 @@ transformDeclareCursorStmt(ParseState *pstate, DeclareCursorStmt *stmt) if (result->rowMarks != NIL && (stmt->options & CURSOR_OPT_HOLD)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("DECLARE CURSOR WITH HOLD ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), + errmsg("DECLARE CURSOR WITH HOLD ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), errdetail("Holdable cursors must be READ ONLY."))); /* FOR UPDATE and SCROLL are not compatible */ if (result->rowMarks != NIL && (stmt->options & CURSOR_OPT_SCROLL)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("DECLARE SCROLL CURSOR ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), + errmsg("DECLARE SCROLL CURSOR ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), errdetail("Scrollable cursors must be READ ONLY."))); /* FOR UPDATE and INSENSITIVE are not compatible */ if (result->rowMarks != NIL && (stmt->options & CURSOR_OPT_INSENSITIVE)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("DECLARE INSENSITIVE CURSOR ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), + errmsg("DECLARE INSENSITIVE CURSOR ... FOR UPDATE/SHARE is not supported"), errdetail("Insensitive cursors must be READ ONLY."))); /* We won't need the raw querytree any more */ diff --git a/src/backend/parser/keywords.c b/src/backend/parser/keywords.c index 473ba15252..0c45ab3bb2 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/keywords.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/keywords.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/keywords.c,v 1.192 2007/09/24 01:29:29 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/keywords.c,v 1.193 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -387,13 +387,14 @@ static const ScanKeyword ScanKeywords[] = { {"when", WHEN, RESERVED_KEYWORD}, {"where", WHERE, RESERVED_KEYWORD}, {"whitespace", WHITESPACE_P, UNRESERVED_KEYWORD}, + /* * XXX we mark WITH as reserved to force it to be quoted in dumps, even * though it is currently unreserved according to gram.y. This is because * we expect we'll have to make it reserved to implement SQL WITH clauses. * If that patch manages to do without reserving WITH, adjust this entry - * at that time; in any case this should be back in sync with gram.y - * after WITH clauses are implemented. + * at that time; in any case this should be back in sync with gram.y after + * WITH clauses are implemented. */ {"with", WITH, RESERVED_KEYWORD}, {"without", WITHOUT, UNRESERVED_KEYWORD}, diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c index 28717020e3..174e96adac 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c,v 1.166 2007/06/23 22:12:51 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c,v 1.167 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ setTargetTable(ParseState *pstate, RangeVar *relation, * Open target rel and grab suitable lock (which we will hold till end of * transaction). * - * free_parsestate() will eventually do the corresponding - * heap_close(), but *not* release the lock. + * free_parsestate() will eventually do the corresponding heap_close(), + * but *not* release the lock. */ pstate->p_target_relation = heap_openrv(relation, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1665,21 +1665,22 @@ addTargetToSortList(ParseState *pstate, TargetEntry *tle, restype, restype, false); + /* - * Verify it's a valid ordering operator, and determine - * whether to consider it like ASC or DESC. + * Verify it's a valid ordering operator, and determine whether to + * consider it like ASC or DESC. */ if (!get_compare_function_for_ordering_op(sortop, &cmpfunc, &reverse)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("operator %s is not a valid ordering operator", - strVal(llast(sortby_opname))), + errmsg("operator %s is not a valid ordering operator", + strVal(llast(sortby_opname))), errhint("Ordering operators must be \"<\" or \">\" members of btree operator families."))); break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized sortby_dir: %d", sortby_dir); - sortop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + sortop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ reverse = false; break; } diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c index 79bfe4f7e3..98b9aba238 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c,v 2.157 2007/09/06 17:31:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c,v 2.158 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ static Node *coerce_type_typmod(Node *node, bool hideInputCoercion); static void hide_coercion_node(Node *node); static Node *build_coercion_expression(Node *node, - CoercionPathType pathtype, - Oid funcId, - Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypMod, - CoercionForm cformat, bool isExplicit); + CoercionPathType pathtype, + Oid funcId, + Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypMod, + CoercionForm cformat, bool isExplicit); static Node *coerce_record_to_complex(ParseState *pstate, Node *node, Oid targetTypeId, CoercionContext ccontext, @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ coerce_type(ParseState *pstate, Node *node, * * Note: by returning the unmodified node here, we are saying that * it's OK to treat an UNKNOWN constant as a valid input for a - * function accepting ANY, ANYELEMENT, or ANYNONARRAY. This should be + * function accepting ANY, ANYELEMENT, or ANYNONARRAY. This should be * all right, since an UNKNOWN value is still a perfectly valid Datum. * However an UNKNOWN value is definitely *not* an array, and so we * mustn't accept it for ANYARRAY. (Instead, we will call anyarray_in @@ -271,12 +271,13 @@ coerce_type(ParseState *pstate, Node *node, } param->paramtype = targetTypeId; + /* * Note: it is tempting here to set the Param's paramtypmod to * targetTypeMod, but that is probably unwise because we have no - * infrastructure that enforces that the value delivered for a - * Param will match any particular typmod. Leaving it -1 ensures - * that a run-time length check/coercion will occur if needed. + * infrastructure that enforces that the value delivered for a Param + * will match any particular typmod. Leaving it -1 ensures that a + * run-time length check/coercion will occur if needed. */ param->paramtypmod = -1; @@ -720,10 +721,11 @@ build_coercion_expression(Node *node, acoerce->arg = (Expr *) node; acoerce->elemfuncid = funcId; acoerce->resulttype = targetTypeId; + /* * Label the output as having a particular typmod only if we are - * really invoking a length-coercion function, ie one with more - * than one argument. + * really invoking a length-coercion function, ie one with more than + * one argument. */ acoerce->resulttypmod = (nargs >= 2) ? targetTypMod : -1; acoerce->isExplicit = isExplicit; @@ -934,10 +936,10 @@ coerce_to_specific_type(ParseState *pstate, Node *node, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), /* translator: first %s is name of a SQL construct, eg LIMIT */ - errmsg("argument of %s must be type %s, not type %s", - constructName, - format_type_be(targetTypeId), - format_type_be(inputTypeId)))); + errmsg("argument of %s must be type %s, not type %s", + constructName, + format_type_be(targetTypeId), + format_type_be(inputTypeId)))); } if (expression_returns_set(node)) @@ -1304,7 +1306,7 @@ enforce_generic_type_consistency(Oid *actual_arg_types, /* * Fast Track: if none of the arguments are polymorphic, return the - * unmodified rettype. We assume it can't be polymorphic either. + * unmodified rettype. We assume it can't be polymorphic either. */ if (!have_generics) return rettype; @@ -1359,8 +1361,8 @@ enforce_generic_type_consistency(Oid *actual_arg_types, if (type_is_array(elem_typeid)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("type matched to anynonarray is an array type: %s", - format_type_be(elem_typeid)))); + errmsg("type matched to anynonarray is an array type: %s", + format_type_be(elem_typeid)))); } if (have_anyenum) @@ -1921,13 +1923,12 @@ find_coercion_pathway(Oid targetTypeId, Oid sourceTypeId, /* * If we still haven't found a possibility, consider automatic casting * using I/O functions. We allow assignment casts to textual types - * and explicit casts from textual types to be handled this way. - * (The CoerceViaIO mechanism is a lot more general than that, but - * this is all we want to allow in the absence of a pg_cast entry.) - * It would probably be better to insist on explicit casts in both - * directions, but this is a compromise to preserve something of the - * pre-8.3 behavior that many types had implicit (yipes!) casts to - * text. + * and explicit casts from textual types to be handled this way. (The + * CoerceViaIO mechanism is a lot more general than that, but this is + * all we want to allow in the absence of a pg_cast entry.) It would + * probably be better to insist on explicit casts in both directions, + * but this is a compromise to preserve something of the pre-8.3 + * behavior that many types had implicit (yipes!) casts to text. */ if (result == COERCION_PATH_NONE) { diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c index 52957e825e..85800ea3ea 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.223 2007/11/11 19:22:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.224 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ static Node *transformArrayExpr(ParseState *pstate, ArrayExpr *a); static Node *transformRowExpr(ParseState *pstate, RowExpr *r); static Node *transformCoalesceExpr(ParseState *pstate, CoalesceExpr *c); static Node *transformMinMaxExpr(ParseState *pstate, MinMaxExpr *m); -static Node *transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x); -static Node *transformXmlSerialize(ParseState *pstate, XmlSerialize *xs); +static Node *transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr * x); +static Node *transformXmlSerialize(ParseState *pstate, XmlSerialize * xs); static Node *transformBooleanTest(ParseState *pstate, BooleanTest *b); -static Node *transformCurrentOfExpr(ParseState *pstate, CurrentOfExpr *cexpr); +static Node *transformCurrentOfExpr(ParseState *pstate, CurrentOfExpr * cexpr); static Node *transformColumnRef(ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref); static Node *transformWholeRowRef(ParseState *pstate, char *schemaname, char *relname, int location); @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ transformColumnRef(ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref) static Oid * find_param_type(ParseState *pstate, int paramno) { - Oid *result; + Oid *result; /* * Find topmost ParseState, which is where paramtype info lives. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ exprIsNullConstant(Node *arg) { if (arg && IsA(arg, A_Const)) { - A_Const *con = (A_Const *) arg; + A_Const *con = (A_Const *) arg; if (con->val.type == T_Null && con->typename == NULL) @@ -1411,10 +1411,10 @@ transformMinMaxExpr(ParseState *pstate, MinMaxExpr *m) } static Node * -transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) +transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr * x) { - XmlExpr *newx = makeNode(XmlExpr); - ListCell *lc; + XmlExpr *newx = makeNode(XmlExpr); + ListCell *lc; int i; newx->op = x->op; @@ -1424,7 +1424,7 @@ transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) newx->name = NULL; /* - * gram.y built the named args as a list of ResTarget. Transform each, + * gram.y built the named args as a list of ResTarget. Transform each, * and break the names out as a separate list. */ newx->named_args = NIL; @@ -1432,9 +1432,9 @@ transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) foreach(lc, x->named_args) { - ResTarget *r = (ResTarget *) lfirst(lc); - Node *expr; - char *argname; + ResTarget *r = (ResTarget *) lfirst(lc); + Node *expr; + char *argname; Assert(IsA(r, ResTarget)); @@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), x->op == IS_XMLELEMENT - ? errmsg("unnamed XML attribute value must be a column reference") + ? errmsg("unnamed XML attribute value must be a column reference") : errmsg("unnamed XML element value must be a column reference"))); argname = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ } @@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) { foreach(lc, newx->arg_names) { - ListCell *lc2; + ListCell *lc2; for_each_cell(lc2, lnext(lc)) { @@ -1537,16 +1537,16 @@ transformXmlExpr(ParseState *pstate, XmlExpr *x) } static Node * -transformXmlSerialize(ParseState *pstate, XmlSerialize *xs) +transformXmlSerialize(ParseState *pstate, XmlSerialize * xs) { Oid targetType; int32 targetTypmod; - XmlExpr *xexpr; + XmlExpr *xexpr; xexpr = makeNode(XmlExpr); xexpr->op = IS_XMLSERIALIZE; xexpr->args = list_make1(coerce_to_specific_type(pstate, - transformExpr(pstate, xs->expr), + transformExpr(pstate, xs->expr), XMLOID, "XMLSERIALIZE")); @@ -1558,13 +1558,13 @@ transformXmlSerialize(ParseState *pstate, XmlSerialize *xs) xexpr->typmod = targetTypmod; /* - * The actual target type is determined this way. SQL allows char - * and varchar as target types. We allow anything that can be - * cast implicitly from text. This way, user-defined text-like - * data types automatically fit in. + * The actual target type is determined this way. SQL allows char and + * varchar as target types. We allow anything that can be cast implicitly + * from text. This way, user-defined text-like data types automatically + * fit in. */ return (Node *) coerce_to_target_type(pstate, (Node *) xexpr, TEXTOID, targetType, targetTypmod, - COERCION_IMPLICIT, COERCE_IMPLICIT_CAST); + COERCION_IMPLICIT, COERCE_IMPLICIT_CAST); } static Node * @@ -1608,9 +1608,9 @@ transformBooleanTest(ParseState *pstate, BooleanTest *b) } static Node * -transformCurrentOfExpr(ParseState *pstate, CurrentOfExpr *cexpr) +transformCurrentOfExpr(ParseState *pstate, CurrentOfExpr * cexpr) { - int sublevels_up; + int sublevels_up; /* CURRENT OF can only appear at top level of UPDATE/DELETE */ Assert(pstate->p_target_rangetblentry != NULL); @@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ exprType(Node *expr) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("could not find array type for data type %s", - format_type_be(subplan->firstColType)))); + format_type_be(subplan->firstColType)))); } } else @@ -2153,8 +2153,8 @@ exprIsLengthCoercion(Node *expr, int32 *coercedTypmod) *coercedTypmod = -1; /* default result on failure */ /* - * Scalar-type length coercions are FuncExprs, array-type length - * coercions are ArrayCoerceExprs + * Scalar-type length coercions are FuncExprs, array-type length coercions + * are ArrayCoerceExprs */ if (expr && IsA(expr, FuncExpr)) { @@ -2336,9 +2336,9 @@ make_row_comparison_op(ParseState *pstate, List *opname, /* * Now we must determine which row comparison semantics (= <> < <= > >=) - * apply to this set of operators. We look for btree opfamilies containing - * the operators, and see which interpretations (strategy numbers) exist - * for each operator. + * apply to this set of operators. We look for btree opfamilies + * containing the operators, and see which interpretations (strategy + * numbers) exist for each operator. */ opfamily_lists = (List **) palloc(nopers * sizeof(List *)); opstrat_lists = (List **) palloc(nopers * sizeof(List *)); @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ make_row_comparison_op(ParseState *pstate, List *opname, } if (OidIsValid(opfamily)) opfamilies = lappend_oid(opfamilies, opfamily); - else /* should not happen */ + else /* should not happen */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), errmsg("could not determine interpretation of row comparison operator %s", diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c index 76dcd29185..f8264688f0 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c,v 1.198 2007/11/11 19:22:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c,v 1.199 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -727,9 +727,9 @@ func_get_detail(List *funcname, * This interpretation needs to be given higher priority than * interpretations involving a type coercion followed by a function * call, otherwise we can produce surprising results. For example, we - * want "text(varchar)" to be interpreted as a simple coercion, not - * as "text(name(varchar))" which the code below this point is - * entirely capable of selecting. + * want "text(varchar)" to be interpreted as a simple coercion, not as + * "text(name(varchar))" which the code below this point is entirely + * capable of selecting. * * We also treat a coercion of a previously-unknown-type literal * constant to a specific type this way. @@ -738,8 +738,8 @@ func_get_detail(List *funcname, * cast implementation function to be named after the target type. * Thus the function will be found by normal lookup if appropriate. * - * The reason we reject COERCION_PATH_ARRAYCOERCE is mainly that - * you can't write "foo[] (something)" as a function call. In theory + * The reason we reject COERCION_PATH_ARRAYCOERCE is mainly that you + * can't write "foo[] (something)" as a function call. In theory * someone might want to invoke it as "_foo (something)" but we have * never supported that historically, so we can insist that people * write it as a normal cast instead. Lack of historical support is @@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ func_get_detail(List *funcname, * * NB: it's important that this code does not exceed what coerce_type * can do, because the caller will try to apply coerce_type if we - * return FUNCDETAIL_COERCION. If we return that result for something + * return FUNCDETAIL_COERCION. If we return that result for something * coerce_type can't handle, we'll cause infinite recursion between * this module and coerce_type! */ diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c index a51a4d6215..3367ee2a87 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c,v 1.96 2007/11/11 19:22:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c,v 1.97 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -887,8 +887,8 @@ make_scalar_array_op(ParseState *pstate, List *opname, /* * enforce consistency with polymorphic argument and return types, - * possibly adjusting return type or declared_arg_types (which will - * be used as the cast destination by make_fn_arguments) + * possibly adjusting return type or declared_arg_types (which will be + * used as the cast destination by make_fn_arguments) */ rettype = enforce_generic_type_consistency(actual_arg_types, declared_arg_types, @@ -997,8 +997,8 @@ make_op_expr(ParseState *pstate, Operator op, /* * enforce consistency with polymorphic argument and return types, - * possibly adjusting return type or declared_arg_types (which will - * be used as the cast destination by make_fn_arguments) + * possibly adjusting return type or declared_arg_types (which will be + * used as the cast destination by make_fn_arguments) */ rettype = enforce_generic_type_consistency(actual_arg_types, declared_arg_types, diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c index af26c4c1c9..e8122ad14b 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c,v 1.156 2007/09/27 17:42:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c,v 1.157 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -827,8 +827,8 @@ ExpandColumnRefStar(ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref, * * Since the grammar only accepts bare '*' at top level of SELECT, we * need not handle the targetlist==false case here. However, we must - * test for it because the grammar currently fails to distinguish - * a quoted name "*" from a real asterisk. + * test for it because the grammar currently fails to distinguish a + * quoted name "*" from a real asterisk. */ if (!targetlist) elog(ERROR, "invalid use of *"); @@ -1320,8 +1320,8 @@ FigureColnameInternal(Node *node, char **name) break; case T_XmlExpr: /* make SQL/XML functions act like a regular function */ - switch (((XmlExpr*) node)->op) - { + switch (((XmlExpr *) node)->op) + { case IS_XMLCONCAT: *name = "xmlconcat"; return 2; @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ FigureColnameInternal(Node *node, char **name) case IS_DOCUMENT: /* nothing */ break; - } + } break; case T_XmlSerialize: *name = "xmlserialize"; diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c index e61cf08576..6de2adf7a3 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c,v 1.92 2007/11/11 19:22:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_type.c,v 1.93 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -27,13 +27,13 @@ static int32 typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, - Type typ); + Type typ); /* * LookupTypeName * Given a TypeName object, lookup the pg_type syscache entry of the type. - * Returns NULL if no such type can be found. If the type is found, + * Returns NULL if no such type can be found. If the type is found, * the typmod value represented in the TypeName struct is computed and * stored into *typmod_p. * @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ static int32 typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, * * typmod_p can be passed as NULL if the caller does not care to know the * typmod value, but the typmod decoration (if any) will be validated anyway, - * except in the case where the type is not found. Note that if the type is + * except in the case where the type is not found. Note that if the type is * found but is a shell, and there is typmod decoration, an error will be * thrown --- this is intentional. * @@ -252,15 +252,15 @@ typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, Type typ) return typename->typemod; /* - * Else, type had better accept typmods. We give a special error - * message for the shell-type case, since a shell couldn't possibly - * have a typmodin function. + * Else, type had better accept typmods. We give a special error message + * for the shell-type case, since a shell couldn't possibly have a + * typmodin function. */ if (!((Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(typ))->typisdefined) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", - TypeNameToString(typename)), + errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", + TypeNameToString(typename)), parser_errposition(pstate, typename->location))); typmodin = ((Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(typ))->typmodin; @@ -281,24 +281,24 @@ typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, Type typ) n = 0; foreach(l, typename->typmods) { - Node *tm = (Node *) lfirst(l); - char *cstr = NULL; + Node *tm = (Node *) lfirst(l); + char *cstr = NULL; if (IsA(tm, A_Const)) { - A_Const *ac = (A_Const *) tm; + A_Const *ac = (A_Const *) tm; /* - * The grammar hands back some integers with ::int4 attached, - * so allow a cast decoration if it's an Integer value, but - * not otherwise. + * The grammar hands back some integers with ::int4 attached, so + * allow a cast decoration if it's an Integer value, but not + * otherwise. */ if (IsA(&ac->val, Integer)) { cstr = (char *) palloc(32); snprintf(cstr, 32, "%ld", (long) ac->val.val.ival); } - else if (ac->typename == NULL) /* no casts allowed */ + else if (ac->typename == NULL) /* no casts allowed */ { /* otherwise we can just use the str field directly. */ cstr = ac->val.val.str; @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, Type typ) } else if (IsA(tm, ColumnRef)) { - ColumnRef *cr = (ColumnRef *) tm; + ColumnRef *cr = (ColumnRef *) tm; if (list_length(cr->fields) == 1) cstr = strVal(linitial(cr->fields)); @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ typenameTypeMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typename, Type typ) if (!cstr) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("type modifiers must be simple constants or identifiers"), + errmsg("type modifiers must be simple constants or identifiers"), parser_errposition(pstate, typename->location))); datums[n++] = CStringGetDatum(cstr); } diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c index a6306a435c..2ff6f9274d 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c,v 2.5 2007/11/11 19:22:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c,v 2.6 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -98,13 +98,13 @@ static void transformTableConstraint(ParseState *pstate, Constraint *constraint); static void transformInhRelation(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, InhRelation *inhrelation); -static IndexStmt *generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt, - Relation parent_index, AttrNumber *attmap); +static IndexStmt *generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt, + Relation parent_index, AttrNumber *attmap); static List *get_opclass(Oid opclass, Oid actual_datatype); static void transformIndexConstraints(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt); static IndexStmt *transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, - CreateStmtContext *cxt); + CreateStmtContext *cxt); static void transformFKConstraints(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, bool skipValidation, @@ -138,21 +138,21 @@ transformCreateStmt(CreateStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) ListCell *elements; /* - * We must not scribble on the passed-in CreateStmt, so copy it. (This - * is overkill, but easy.) + * We must not scribble on the passed-in CreateStmt, so copy it. (This is + * overkill, but easy.) */ stmt = (CreateStmt *) copyObject(stmt); /* * If the target relation name isn't schema-qualified, make it so. This * prevents some corner cases in which added-on rewritten commands might - * think they should apply to other relations that have the same name - * and are earlier in the search path. "istemp" is equivalent to a + * think they should apply to other relations that have the same name and + * are earlier in the search path. "istemp" is equivalent to a * specification of pg_temp, so no need for anything extra in that case. */ if (stmt->relation->schemaname == NULL && !stmt->relation->istemp) { - Oid namespaceid = RangeVarGetCreationNamespace(stmt->relation); + Oid namespaceid = RangeVarGetCreationNamespace(stmt->relation); stmt->relation->schemaname = get_namespace_name(namespaceid); } @@ -580,8 +580,7 @@ transformInhRelation(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, } /* - * Insert the copied attributes into the cxt for the new table - * definition. + * Insert the copied attributes into the cxt for the new table definition. */ for (parent_attno = 1; parent_attno <= tupleDesc->natts; parent_attno++) @@ -650,8 +649,8 @@ transformInhRelation(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, } /* - * Copy CHECK constraints if requested, being careful to adjust - * attribute numbers + * Copy CHECK constraints if requested, being careful to adjust attribute + * numbers */ if (including_constraints && tupleDesc->constr) { @@ -687,9 +686,9 @@ transformInhRelation(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, foreach(l, parent_indexes) { - Oid parent_index_oid = lfirst_oid(l); - Relation parent_index; - IndexStmt *index_stmt; + Oid parent_index_oid = lfirst_oid(l); + Relation parent_index; + IndexStmt *index_stmt; parent_index = index_open(parent_index_oid, AccessShareLock); @@ -723,25 +722,25 @@ static IndexStmt * generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt, Relation source_idx, AttrNumber *attmap) { - HeapTuple ht_idx; - HeapTuple ht_idxrel; - HeapTuple ht_am; - Form_pg_index idxrec; - Form_pg_class idxrelrec; - Form_pg_am amrec; - List *indexprs = NIL; - ListCell *indexpr_item; - Oid indrelid; - Oid source_relid; - int keyno; - Oid keycoltype; - Datum indclassDatum; - Datum indoptionDatum; - bool isnull; - oidvector *indclass; - int2vector *indoption; - IndexStmt *index; - Datum reloptions; + HeapTuple ht_idx; + HeapTuple ht_idxrel; + HeapTuple ht_am; + Form_pg_index idxrec; + Form_pg_class idxrelrec; + Form_pg_am amrec; + List *indexprs = NIL; + ListCell *indexpr_item; + Oid indrelid; + Oid source_relid; + int keyno; + Oid keycoltype; + Datum indclassDatum; + Datum indoptionDatum; + bool isnull; + oidvector *indclass; + int2vector *indoption; + IndexStmt *index; + Datum reloptions; source_relid = RelationGetRelid(source_idx); @@ -825,7 +824,7 @@ generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt, Relation source_idx, for (keyno = 0; keyno < idxrec->indnatts; keyno++) { - IndexElem *iparam; + IndexElem *iparam; AttrNumber attnum = idxrec->indkey.values[keyno]; int16 opt = indoption->values[keyno]; @@ -914,9 +913,9 @@ generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt, Relation source_idx, static List * get_opclass(Oid opclass, Oid actual_datatype) { - HeapTuple ht_opc; - Form_pg_opclass opc_rec; - List *result = NIL; + HeapTuple ht_opc; + Form_pg_opclass opc_rec; + List *result = NIL; ht_opc = SearchSysCache(CLAOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(opclass), @@ -928,8 +927,8 @@ get_opclass(Oid opclass, Oid actual_datatype) if (!OidIsValid(actual_datatype) || GetDefaultOpClass(actual_datatype, opc_rec->opcmethod) != opclass) { - char *nsp_name = get_namespace_name(opc_rec->opcnamespace); - char *opc_name = NameStr(opc_rec->opcname); + char *nsp_name = get_namespace_name(opc_rec->opcnamespace); + char *opc_name = NameStr(opc_rec->opcname); result = list_make2(makeString(nsp_name), makeString(opc_name)); } @@ -1038,9 +1037,9 @@ transformIndexConstraints(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt) static IndexStmt * transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) { - IndexStmt *index; - ListCell *keys; - IndexElem *iparam; + IndexStmt *index; + ListCell *keys; + IndexElem *iparam; Assert(constraint->contype == CONSTR_PRIMARY || constraint->contype == CONSTR_UNIQUE); @@ -1054,8 +1053,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) if (cxt->pkey != NULL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("multiple primary keys for table \"%s\" are not allowed", - cxt->relation->relname))); + errmsg("multiple primary keys for table \"%s\" are not allowed", + cxt->relation->relname))); cxt->pkey = index; /* @@ -1068,7 +1067,7 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) if (constraint->name != NULL) index->idxname = pstrdup(constraint->name); else - index->idxname = NULL; /* DefineIndex will choose name */ + index->idxname = NULL; /* DefineIndex will choose name */ index->relation = cxt->relation; index->accessMethod = DEFAULT_INDEX_TYPE; @@ -1079,10 +1078,10 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) index->concurrent = false; /* - * Make sure referenced keys exist. If we are making a PRIMARY KEY - * index, also make sure they are NOT NULL, if possible. (Although we - * could leave it to DefineIndex to mark the columns NOT NULL, it's - * more efficient to get it right the first time.) + * Make sure referenced keys exist. If we are making a PRIMARY KEY index, + * also make sure they are NOT NULL, if possible. (Although we could leave + * it to DefineIndex to mark the columns NOT NULL, it's more efficient to + * get it right the first time.) */ foreach(keys, constraint->keys) { @@ -1110,9 +1109,9 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) else if (SystemAttributeByName(key, cxt->hasoids) != NULL) { /* - * column will be a system column in the new table, so accept - * it. System columns can't ever be null, so no need to worry - * about PRIMARY/NOT NULL constraint. + * column will be a system column in the new table, so accept it. + * System columns can't ever be null, so no need to worry about + * PRIMARY/NOT NULL constraint. */ found = true; } @@ -1132,8 +1131,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) if (rel->rd_rel->relkind != RELKIND_RELATION) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("inherited relation \"%s\" is not a table", - inh->relname))); + errmsg("inherited relation \"%s\" is not a table", + inh->relname))); for (count = 0; count < rel->rd_att->natts; count++) { Form_pg_attribute inhattr = rel->rd_att->attrs[count]; @@ -1146,10 +1145,10 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) found = true; /* - * We currently have no easy way to force an - * inherited column to be NOT NULL at creation, if - * its parent wasn't so already. We leave it to - * DefineIndex to fix things up in this case. + * We currently have no easy way to force an inherited + * column to be NOT NULL at creation, if its parent + * wasn't so already. We leave it to DefineIndex to + * fix things up in this case. */ break; } @@ -1162,9 +1161,9 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) /* * In the ALTER TABLE case, don't complain about index keys not - * created in the command; they may well exist already. - * DefineIndex will complain about them if not, and will also take - * care of marking them NOT NULL. + * created in the command; they may well exist already. DefineIndex + * will complain about them if not, and will also take care of marking + * them NOT NULL. */ if (!found && !cxt->isalter) ereport(ERROR, @@ -1186,8 +1185,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) else ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_COLUMN), - errmsg("column \"%s\" appears twice in unique constraint", - key))); + errmsg("column \"%s\" appears twice in unique constraint", + key))); } } @@ -1269,7 +1268,7 @@ transformFKConstraints(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt, * transformIndexStmt - parse analysis for CREATE INDEX * * Note: this is a no-op for an index not using either index expressions or - * a predicate expression. There are several code paths that create indexes + * a predicate expression. There are several code paths that create indexes * without bothering to call this, because they know they don't have any * such expressions to deal with. */ @@ -1282,28 +1281,28 @@ transformIndexStmt(IndexStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) ListCell *l; /* - * We must not scribble on the passed-in IndexStmt, so copy it. (This - * is overkill, but easy.) + * We must not scribble on the passed-in IndexStmt, so copy it. (This is + * overkill, but easy.) */ stmt = (IndexStmt *) copyObject(stmt); /* - * Open the parent table with appropriate locking. We must do this + * Open the parent table with appropriate locking. We must do this * because addRangeTableEntry() would acquire only AccessShareLock, - * leaving DefineIndex() needing to do a lock upgrade with consequent - * risk of deadlock. Make sure this stays in sync with the type of - * lock DefineIndex() wants. + * leaving DefineIndex() needing to do a lock upgrade with consequent risk + * of deadlock. Make sure this stays in sync with the type of lock + * DefineIndex() wants. */ rel = heap_openrv(stmt->relation, - (stmt->concurrent ? ShareUpdateExclusiveLock : ShareLock)); + (stmt->concurrent ? ShareUpdateExclusiveLock : ShareLock)); /* Set up pstate */ pstate = make_parsestate(NULL); pstate->p_sourcetext = queryString; /* - * Put the parent table into the rtable so that the expressions can - * refer to its fields without qualification. + * Put the parent table into the rtable so that the expressions can refer + * to its fields without qualification. */ rte = addRangeTableEntry(pstate, stmt->relation, NULL, false, true); @@ -1432,7 +1431,7 @@ transformRuleStmt(RuleStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, /* take care of the where clause */ *whereClause = transformWhereClause(pstate, - (Node *) copyObject(stmt->whereClause), + (Node *) copyObject(stmt->whereClause), "WHERE"); if (list_length(pstate->p_rtable) != 2) /* naughty, naughty... */ @@ -1458,7 +1457,7 @@ transformRuleStmt(RuleStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, nothing_qry->commandType = CMD_NOTHING; nothing_qry->rtable = pstate->p_rtable; - nothing_qry->jointree = makeFromExpr(NIL, NULL); /* no join wanted */ + nothing_qry->jointree = makeFromExpr(NIL, NULL); /* no join wanted */ *actions = list_make1(nothing_qry); } @@ -1480,8 +1479,8 @@ transformRuleStmt(RuleStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, has_new; /* - * Since outer ParseState isn't parent of inner, have to pass - * down the query text by hand. + * Since outer ParseState isn't parent of inner, have to pass down + * the query text by hand. */ sub_pstate->p_sourcetext = queryString; @@ -1650,17 +1649,17 @@ transformAlterTableStmt(AlterTableStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) AlterTableCmd *newcmd; /* - * We must not scribble on the passed-in AlterTableStmt, so copy it. - * (This is overkill, but easy.) + * We must not scribble on the passed-in AlterTableStmt, so copy it. (This + * is overkill, but easy.) */ stmt = (AlterTableStmt *) copyObject(stmt); /* - * Acquire exclusive lock on the target relation, which will be held - * until end of transaction. This ensures any decisions we make here - * based on the state of the relation will still be good at execution. - * We must get exclusive lock now because execution will; taking a lower - * grade lock now and trying to upgrade later risks deadlock. + * Acquire exclusive lock on the target relation, which will be held until + * end of transaction. This ensures any decisions we make here based on + * the state of the relation will still be good at execution. We must get + * exclusive lock now because execution will; taking a lower grade lock + * now and trying to upgrade later risks deadlock. */ rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, AccessExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parser.c b/src/backend/parser/parser.c index b9c0b9a985..4a16c7eac7 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parser.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parser.c @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parser.c,v 1.71 2007/01/09 02:14:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parser.c,v 1.72 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ List *parsetree; /* result of parsing is left here */ -static bool have_lookahead; /* is lookahead info valid? */ -static int lookahead_token; /* one-token lookahead */ +static bool have_lookahead; /* is lookahead info valid? */ +static int lookahead_token; /* one-token lookahead */ static YYSTYPE lookahead_yylval; /* yylval for lookahead token */ static YYLTYPE lookahead_yylloc; /* yylloc for lookahead token */ @@ -98,6 +98,7 @@ filtered_base_yylex(void) switch (cur_token) { case NULLS_P: + /* * NULLS FIRST and NULLS LAST must be reduced to one token */ @@ -126,6 +127,7 @@ filtered_base_yylex(void) break; case WITH: + /* * WITH CASCADED, LOCAL, or CHECK must be reduced to one token * diff --git a/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c b/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c index 8d01c554a0..8d84bcfbb9 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c +++ b/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * If dlopen() is available (Darwin 10.3 and later), we just use it. * Otherwise we emulate it with the older, now deprecated, NSLinkModule API. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c,v 1.11 2006/10/08 19:31:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/dynloader/darwin.c,v 1.12 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -43,8 +43,7 @@ pg_dlerror(void) { return dlerror(); } - -#else /* !HAVE_DLOPEN */ +#else /* !HAVE_DLOPEN */ /* * These routines were taken from the Apache source, but were made @@ -132,4 +131,4 @@ pg_dlerror(void) return (char *) errorString; } -#endif /* HAVE_DLOPEN */ +#endif /* HAVE_DLOPEN */ diff --git a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c index 08662d1fb3..b9b8e8453f 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c +++ b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c,v 1.51 2007/07/02 20:11:54 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c,v 1.52 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ PGSharedMemoryIsInUse(unsigned long id1, unsigned long id2) /* * Try to attach to the segment and see if it matches our data directory. * This avoids shmid-conflict problems on machines that are running - * several postmasters under the same userid. + * several postmasters under the same userid. */ if (stat(DataDir, &statbuf) < 0) return true; /* if can't stat, be conservative */ diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c b/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c index 20b8cc7ee7..7b6581192d 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c,v 1.2 2007/10/29 14:04:42 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ #include "postgres.h" /* - * This file contains loaders for functions that are missing in the MinGW + * This file contains loaders for functions that are missing in the MinGW * import libraries. It's only for actual Win32 API functions, so they are * all present in proper Win32 compilers. */ @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ LoadKernel32() if (kernel32 == NULL) ereport(FATAL, (errmsg_internal("could not load kernel32.dll: %d", - (int)GetLastError()))); + (int) GetLastError()))); } @@ -44,11 +44,12 @@ LoadKernel32() * Replacement for RegisterWaitForSingleObject(), which lives in * kernel32.dll· */ -typedef BOOL (WINAPI * __RegisterWaitForSingleObject) - (PHANDLE, HANDLE, WAITORTIMERCALLBACK, PVOID, ULONG, ULONG); +typedef +BOOL(WINAPI * __RegisterWaitForSingleObject) +(PHANDLE, HANDLE, WAITORTIMERCALLBACK, PVOID, ULONG, ULONG); static __RegisterWaitForSingleObject _RegisterWaitForSingleObject = NULL; -BOOL WINAPI +BOOL WINAPI RegisterWaitForSingleObject(PHANDLE phNewWaitObject, HANDLE hObject, WAITORTIMERCALLBACK Callback, @@ -66,7 +67,7 @@ RegisterWaitForSingleObject(PHANDLE phNewWaitObject, if (_RegisterWaitForSingleObject == NULL) ereport(FATAL, (errmsg_internal("could not locate RegisterWaitForSingleObject in kernel32.dll: %d", - (int)GetLastError()))); + (int) GetLastError()))); } return (_RegisterWaitForSingleObject) @@ -74,4 +75,3 @@ RegisterWaitForSingleObject(PHANDLE phNewWaitObject, } #endif - diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c b/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c index 3c6fbdb60d..93d8f55d73 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.18 2007/06/04 13:39:28 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.19 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -103,14 +103,15 @@ pgwin32_poll_signals(void) } static int -isDataGram(SOCKET s) { - int type; - int typelen = sizeof(type); +isDataGram(SOCKET s) +{ + int type; + int typelen = sizeof(type); - if ( getsockopt(s, SOL_SOCKET, SO_TYPE, (char*)&type, &typelen) ) + if (getsockopt(s, SOL_SOCKET, SO_TYPE, (char *) &type, &typelen)) return 1; - return ( type == SOCK_DGRAM ) ? 1 : 0; + return (type == SOCK_DGRAM) ? 1 : 0; } int @@ -118,7 +119,7 @@ pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SOCKET s, int what, int timeout) { static HANDLE waitevent = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; static SOCKET current_socket = -1; - static int isUDP = 0; + static int isUDP = 0; HANDLE events[2]; int r; @@ -139,9 +140,9 @@ pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SOCKET s, int what, int timeout) * socket from a previous call */ - if (current_socket != s) + if (current_socket != s) { - if ( current_socket != -1 ) + if (current_socket != -1) WSAEventSelect(current_socket, waitevent, 0); isUDP = isDataGram(s); } @@ -157,34 +158,32 @@ pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(SOCKET s, int what, int timeout) events[0] = pgwin32_signal_event; events[1] = waitevent; - /* - * Just a workaround of unknown locking problem with writing - * in UDP socket under high load: - * Client's pgsql backend sleeps infinitely in - * WaitForMultipleObjectsEx, pgstat process sleeps in - * pgwin32_select(). So, we will wait with small - * timeout(0.1 sec) and if sockect is still blocked, - * try WSASend (see comments in pgwin32_select) and wait again. + /* + * Just a workaround of unknown locking problem with writing in UDP socket + * under high load: Client's pgsql backend sleeps infinitely in + * WaitForMultipleObjectsEx, pgstat process sleeps in pgwin32_select(). + * So, we will wait with small timeout(0.1 sec) and if sockect is still + * blocked, try WSASend (see comments in pgwin32_select) and wait again. */ if ((what & FD_WRITE) && isUDP) { - for(;;) + for (;;) { r = WaitForMultipleObjectsEx(2, events, FALSE, 100, TRUE); - if ( r == WAIT_TIMEOUT ) + if (r == WAIT_TIMEOUT) { - char c; - WSABUF buf; - DWORD sent; + char c; + WSABUF buf; + DWORD sent; buf.buf = &c; buf.len = 0; r = WSASend(s, &buf, 1, &sent, 0, NULL, NULL); - if (r == 0) /* Completed - means things are fine! */ + if (r == 0) /* Completed - means things are fine! */ return 1; - else if ( WSAGetLastError() != WSAEWOULDBLOCK ) + else if (WSAGetLastError() != WSAEWOULDBLOCK) { TranslateSocketError(); return 0; @@ -291,7 +290,7 @@ pgwin32_recv(SOCKET s, char *buf, int len, int f) int r; DWORD b; DWORD flags = f; - int n; + int n; if (pgwin32_poll_signals()) return -1; @@ -317,8 +316,8 @@ pgwin32_recv(SOCKET s, char *buf, int len, int f) { if (pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(s, FD_READ | FD_CLOSE | FD_ACCEPT, INFINITE) == 0) - return -1; /* errno already set */ - + return -1; /* errno already set */ + r = WSARecv(s, &wbuf, 1, &b, &flags, NULL, NULL); if (r == SOCKET_ERROR) { @@ -326,10 +325,11 @@ pgwin32_recv(SOCKET s, char *buf, int len, int f) { /* * There seem to be cases on win2k (at least) where WSARecv - * can return WSAEWOULDBLOCK even when pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket - * claims the socket is readable. In this case, just sleep for a - * moment and try again. We try up to 5 times - if it fails more than - * that it's not likely to ever come back. + * can return WSAEWOULDBLOCK even when + * pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket claims the socket is readable. + * In this case, just sleep for a moment and try again. We try + * up to 5 times - if it fails more than that it's not likely + * to ever come back. */ pg_usleep(10000); continue; @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ pgwin32_recv(SOCKET s, char *buf, int len, int f) return b; } ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg_internal("Failed to read from ready socket (after retries)"))); + (errmsg_internal("Failed to read from ready socket (after retries)"))); errno = EWOULDBLOCK; return -1; } @@ -359,11 +359,11 @@ pgwin32_send(SOCKET s, char *buf, int len, int flags) wbuf.buf = buf; /* - * Readiness of socket to send data to UDP socket - * may be not true: socket can become busy again! So loop - * until send or error occurs. + * Readiness of socket to send data to UDP socket may be not true: socket + * can become busy again! So loop until send or error occurs. */ - for(;;) { + for (;;) + { r = WSASend(s, &wbuf, 1, &b, flags, NULL, NULL); if (r != SOCKET_ERROR && b > 0) /* Write succeeded right away */ diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c b/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c index b8300f00cf..060fc06dfa 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c @@ -21,21 +21,21 @@ * There is an autovacuum shared memory area, where the launcher stores * information about the database it wants vacuumed. When it wants a new * worker to start, it sets a flag in shared memory and sends a signal to the - * postmaster. Then postmaster knows nothing more than it must start a worker; - * so it forks a new child, which turns into a worker. This new process + * postmaster. Then postmaster knows nothing more than it must start a worker; + * so it forks a new child, which turns into a worker. This new process * connects to shared memory, and there it can inspect the information that the * launcher has set up. * * If the fork() call fails in the postmaster, it sets a flag in the shared * memory area, and sends a signal to the launcher. The launcher, upon * noticing the flag, can try starting the worker again by resending the - * signal. Note that the failure can only be transient (fork failure due to + * signal. Note that the failure can only be transient (fork failure due to * high load, memory pressure, too many processes, etc); more permanent * problems, like failure to connect to a database, are detected later in the * worker and dealt with just by having the worker exit normally. The launcher * will launch a new worker again later, per schedule. * - * When the worker is done vacuuming it sends SIGUSR1 to the launcher. The + * When the worker is done vacuuming it sends SIGUSR1 to the launcher. The * launcher then wakes up and is able to launch another worker, if the schedule * is so tight that a new worker is needed immediately. At this time the * launcher can also balance the settings for the various remaining workers' @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c,v 1.67 2007/10/29 22:17:41 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c,v 1.68 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ static MemoryContext AutovacMemCxt; /* struct to keep track of databases in launcher */ typedef struct avl_dbase { - Oid adl_datid; /* hash key -- must be first */ - TimestampTz adl_next_worker; + Oid adl_datid; /* hash key -- must be first */ + TimestampTz adl_next_worker; int adl_score; -} avl_dbase; +} avl_dbase; /* struct to keep track of databases in worker */ typedef struct avw_dbase @@ -153,14 +153,14 @@ typedef struct avw_dbase char *adw_name; TransactionId adw_frozenxid; PgStat_StatDBEntry *adw_entry; -} avw_dbase; +} avw_dbase; /* struct to keep track of tables to vacuum and/or analyze, in 1st pass */ typedef struct av_relation { - Oid ar_relid; - Oid ar_toastrelid; -} av_relation; + Oid ar_relid; + Oid ar_toastrelid; +} av_relation; /* struct to keep track of tables to vacuum and/or analyze, after rechecking */ typedef struct autovac_table @@ -198,11 +198,11 @@ typedef struct WorkerInfoData Oid wi_dboid; Oid wi_tableoid; PGPROC *wi_proc; - TimestampTz wi_launchtime; + TimestampTz wi_launchtime; int wi_cost_delay; int wi_cost_limit; int wi_cost_limit_base; -} WorkerInfoData; +} WorkerInfoData; typedef struct WorkerInfoData *WorkerInfo; @@ -211,16 +211,16 @@ typedef struct WorkerInfoData *WorkerInfo; * stored atomically in shared memory so that other processes can set them * without locking. */ -typedef enum +typedef enum { - AutoVacForkFailed, /* failed trying to start a worker */ - AutoVacRebalance, /* rebalance the cost limits */ - AutoVacNumSignals = AutoVacRebalance /* must be last */ + AutoVacForkFailed, /* failed trying to start a worker */ + AutoVacRebalance, /* rebalance the cost limits */ + AutoVacNumSignals = AutoVacRebalance /* must be last */ } AutoVacuumSignal; /*------------- * The main autovacuum shmem struct. On shared memory we store this main - * struct and the array of WorkerInfo structs. This struct keeps: + * struct and the array of WorkerInfo structs. This struct keeps: * * av_signal set by other processes to indicate various conditions * av_launcherpid the PID of the autovacuum launcher @@ -235,12 +235,12 @@ typedef enum */ typedef struct { - sig_atomic_t av_signal[AutoVacNumSignals]; - pid_t av_launcherpid; - SHMEM_OFFSET av_freeWorkers; - SHM_QUEUE av_runningWorkers; - SHMEM_OFFSET av_startingWorker; -} AutoVacuumShmemStruct; + sig_atomic_t av_signal[AutoVacNumSignals]; + pid_t av_launcherpid; + SHMEM_OFFSET av_freeWorkers; + SHM_QUEUE av_runningWorkers; + SHMEM_OFFSET av_startingWorker; +} AutoVacuumShmemStruct; static AutoVacuumShmemStruct *AutoVacuumShmem; @@ -249,10 +249,10 @@ static Dllist *DatabaseList = NULL; static MemoryContext DatabaseListCxt = NULL; /* Pointer to my own WorkerInfo, valid on each worker */ -static WorkerInfo MyWorkerInfo = NULL; +static WorkerInfo MyWorkerInfo = NULL; /* PID of launcher, valid only in worker while shutting down */ -int AutovacuumLauncherPid = 0; +int AutovacuumLauncherPid = 0; #ifdef EXEC_BACKEND static pid_t avlauncher_forkexec(void); @@ -261,20 +261,20 @@ static pid_t avworker_forkexec(void); NON_EXEC_STATIC void AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]); NON_EXEC_STATIC void AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]); -static Oid do_start_worker(void); +static Oid do_start_worker(void); static void launcher_determine_sleep(bool canlaunch, bool recursing, - struct timeval *nap); + struct timeval * nap); static void launch_worker(TimestampTz now); static List *get_database_list(void); static void rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb); -static int db_comparator(const void *a, const void *b); +static int db_comparator(const void *a, const void *b); static void autovac_balance_cost(void); static void do_autovacuum(void); static void FreeWorkerInfo(int code, Datum arg); static void relation_check_autovac(Oid relid, Form_pg_class classForm, - Form_pg_autovacuum avForm, PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry, + Form_pg_autovacuum avForm, PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry, List **table_oids, List **table_toast_list, List **toast_oids); static autovac_table *table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid); @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ static void autovac_refresh_stats(void); /******************************************************************** - * AUTOVACUUM LAUNCHER CODE + * AUTOVACUUM LAUNCHER CODE ********************************************************************/ #ifdef EXEC_BACKEND @@ -403,9 +403,9 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (autovacuum probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (autovacuum probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * These operations are really just a minimal subset of - * AbortTransaction(). We don't have very many resources to worry + * AbortTransaction(). We don't have very many resources to worry * about, but we do have LWLocks. */ LWLockReleaseAll(); @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) if (!AutoVacuumingActive()) { do_start_worker(); - proc_exit(0); /* done */ + proc_exit(0); /* done */ } AutoVacuumShmem->av_launcherpid = MyProcPid; @@ -543,8 +543,8 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) { struct timeval nap; TimestampTz current_time = 0; - bool can_launch; - Dlelem *elem; + bool can_launch; + Dlelem *elem; /* * Emergency bailout if postmaster has died. This is to avoid the @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) exit(1); launcher_determine_sleep(AutoVacuumShmem->av_freeWorkers != - INVALID_OFFSET, false, &nap); + INVALID_OFFSET, false, &nap); /* * Sleep for a while according to schedule. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) */ while (nap.tv_sec > 0 || nap.tv_usec > 0) { - uint32 sleeptime; + uint32 sleeptime; if (nap.tv_sec > 0) { @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * of a worker will continue to fail in the same way. */ AutoVacuumShmem->av_signal[AutoVacForkFailed] = false; - pg_usleep(100000L); /* 100ms */ + pg_usleep(100000L); /* 100ms */ SendPostmasterSignal(PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_WORKER); continue; } @@ -652,8 +652,8 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * There are some conditions that we need to check before trying to * start a launcher. First, we need to make sure that there is a - * launcher slot available. Second, we need to make sure that no other - * worker failed while starting up. + * launcher slot available. Second, we need to make sure that no + * other worker failed while starting up. */ current_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); @@ -663,23 +663,24 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) if (AutoVacuumShmem->av_startingWorker != INVALID_OFFSET) { - int waittime; + int waittime; - WorkerInfo worker = (WorkerInfo) MAKE_PTR(AutoVacuumShmem->av_startingWorker); + WorkerInfo worker = (WorkerInfo) MAKE_PTR(AutoVacuumShmem->av_startingWorker); /* * We can't launch another worker when another one is still * starting up (or failed while doing so), so just sleep for a bit * more; that worker will wake us up again as soon as it's ready. - * We will only wait autovacuum_naptime seconds (up to a maximum of - * 60 seconds) for this to happen however. Note that failure to - * connect to a particular database is not a problem here, because - * the worker removes itself from the startingWorker pointer before - * trying to connect. Problems detected by the postmaster (like - * fork() failure) are also reported and handled differently. The - * only problems that may cause this code to fire are errors in the - * earlier sections of AutoVacWorkerMain, before the worker removes - * the WorkerInfo from the startingWorker pointer. + * We will only wait autovacuum_naptime seconds (up to a maximum + * of 60 seconds) for this to happen however. Note that failure + * to connect to a particular database is not a problem here, + * because the worker removes itself from the startingWorker + * pointer before trying to connect. Problems detected by the + * postmaster (like fork() failure) are also reported and handled + * differently. The only problems that may cause this code to + * fire are errors in the earlier sections of AutoVacWorkerMain, + * before the worker removes the WorkerInfo from the + * startingWorker pointer. */ waittime = Min(autovacuum_naptime, 60) * 1000; if (TimestampDifferenceExceeds(worker->wi_launchtime, current_time, @@ -687,6 +688,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) { LWLockRelease(AutovacuumLock); LWLockAcquire(AutovacuumLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); + /* * No other process can put a worker in starting mode, so if * startingWorker is still INVALID after exchanging our lock, @@ -709,7 +711,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) else can_launch = false; } - LWLockRelease(AutovacuumLock); /* either shared or exclusive */ + LWLockRelease(AutovacuumLock); /* either shared or exclusive */ /* if we can't do anything, just go back to sleep */ if (!can_launch) @@ -720,10 +722,11 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) elem = DLGetTail(DatabaseList); if (elem != NULL) { - avl_dbase *avdb = DLE_VAL(elem); + avl_dbase *avdb = DLE_VAL(elem); /* - * launch a worker if next_worker is right now or it is in the past + * launch a worker if next_worker is right now or it is in the + * past */ if (TimestampDifferenceExceeds(avdb->adl_next_worker, current_time, 0)) @@ -748,7 +751,7 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) (errmsg("autovacuum launcher shutting down"))); AutoVacuumShmem->av_launcherpid = 0; - proc_exit(0); /* done */ + proc_exit(0); /* done */ } /* @@ -759,14 +762,14 @@ AutoVacLauncherMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * cause a long sleep, which will be interrupted when a worker exits. */ static void -launcher_determine_sleep(bool canlaunch, bool recursing, struct timeval *nap) +launcher_determine_sleep(bool canlaunch, bool recursing, struct timeval * nap) { - Dlelem *elem; + Dlelem *elem; /* * We sleep until the next scheduled vacuum. We trust that when the - * database list was built, care was taken so that no entries have times in - * the past; if the first entry has too close a next_worker value, or a + * database list was built, care was taken so that no entries have times + * in the past; if the first entry has too close a next_worker value, or a * time in the past, we will sleep a small nominal time. */ if (!canlaunch) @@ -777,10 +780,10 @@ launcher_determine_sleep(bool canlaunch, bool recursing, struct timeval *nap) else if ((elem = DLGetTail(DatabaseList)) != NULL) { avl_dbase *avdb = DLE_VAL(elem); - TimestampTz current_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); - TimestampTz next_wakeup; - long secs; - int usecs; + TimestampTz current_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); + TimestampTz next_wakeup; + long secs; + int usecs; next_wakeup = avdb->adl_next_worker; TimestampDifference(current_time, next_wakeup, &secs, &usecs); @@ -829,7 +832,7 @@ launcher_determine_sleep(bool canlaunch, bool recursing, struct timeval *nap) * this the "new" database, because when the database was already present on * the list, we expect that this function is not called at all). The * preexisting list, if any, will be used to preserve the order of the - * databases in the autovacuum_naptime period. The new database is put at the + * databases in the autovacuum_naptime period. The new database is put at the * end of the interval. The actual values are not saved, which should not be * much of a problem. */ @@ -864,14 +867,14 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) /* * Implementing this is not as simple as it sounds, because we need to put * the new database at the end of the list; next the databases that were - * already on the list, and finally (at the tail of the list) all the other - * databases that are not on the existing list. + * already on the list, and finally (at the tail of the list) all the + * other databases that are not on the existing list. * * To do this, we build an empty hash table of scored databases. We will - * start with the lowest score (zero) for the new database, then increasing - * scores for the databases in the existing list, in order, and lastly - * increasing scores for all databases gotten via get_database_list() that - * are not already on the hash. + * start with the lowest score (zero) for the new database, then + * increasing scores for the databases in the existing list, in order, and + * lastly increasing scores for all databases gotten via + * get_database_list() that are not already on the hash. * * Then we will put all the hash elements into an array, sort the array by * score, and finally put the array elements into the new doubly linked @@ -888,7 +891,7 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) score = 0; if (OidIsValid(newdb)) { - avl_dbase *db; + avl_dbase *db; PgStat_StatDBEntry *entry; /* only consider this database if it has a pgstat entry */ @@ -907,7 +910,7 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) /* Now insert the databases from the existing list */ if (DatabaseList != NULL) { - Dlelem *elem; + Dlelem *elem; elem = DLGetHead(DatabaseList); while (elem != NULL) @@ -920,8 +923,8 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) elem = DLGetSucc(elem); /* - * skip databases with no stat entries -- in particular, this - * gets rid of dropped databases + * skip databases with no stat entries -- in particular, this gets + * rid of dropped databases */ entry = pgstat_fetch_stat_dbentry(avdb->adl_datid); if (entry == NULL) @@ -969,12 +972,12 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) if (nelems > 0) { - TimestampTz current_time; - int millis_increment; - avl_dbase *dbary; - avl_dbase *db; - HASH_SEQ_STATUS seq; - int i; + TimestampTz current_time; + int millis_increment; + avl_dbase *dbary; + avl_dbase *db; + HASH_SEQ_STATUS seq; + int i; /* put all the hash elements into an array */ dbary = palloc(nelems * sizeof(avl_dbase)); @@ -992,7 +995,7 @@ rebuild_database_list(Oid newdb) current_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); /* - * move the elements from the array into the dllist, setting the + * move the elements from the array into the dllist, setting the * next_worker while walking the array */ for (i = 0; i < nelems; i++) @@ -1033,7 +1036,7 @@ db_comparator(const void *a, const void *b) * * Bare-bones procedure for starting an autovacuum worker from the launcher. * It determines what database to work on, sets up shared memory stuff and - * signals postmaster to start the worker. It fails gracefully if invoked when + * signals postmaster to start the worker. It fails gracefully if invoked when * autovacuum_workers are already active. * * Return value is the OID of the database that the worker is going to process, @@ -1047,11 +1050,11 @@ do_start_worker(void) TransactionId xidForceLimit; bool for_xid_wrap; avw_dbase *avdb; - TimestampTz current_time; + TimestampTz current_time; bool skipit = false; Oid retval = InvalidOid; MemoryContext tmpcxt, - oldcxt; + oldcxt; /* return quickly when there are no free workers */ LWLockAcquire(AutovacuumLock, LW_SHARED); @@ -1080,8 +1083,8 @@ do_start_worker(void) dblist = get_database_list(); /* - * Determine the oldest datfrozenxid/relfrozenxid that we will allow - * to pass without forcing a vacuum. (This limit can be tightened for + * Determine the oldest datfrozenxid/relfrozenxid that we will allow to + * pass without forcing a vacuum. (This limit can be tightened for * particular tables, but not loosened.) */ recentXid = ReadNewTransactionId(); @@ -1121,7 +1124,7 @@ do_start_worker(void) if (TransactionIdPrecedes(tmp->adw_frozenxid, xidForceLimit)) { if (avdb == NULL || - TransactionIdPrecedes(tmp->adw_frozenxid, avdb->adw_frozenxid)) + TransactionIdPrecedes(tmp->adw_frozenxid, avdb->adw_frozenxid)) avdb = tmp; for_xid_wrap = true; continue; @@ -1151,7 +1154,7 @@ do_start_worker(void) while (elem != NULL) { - avl_dbase *dbp = DLE_VAL(elem); + avl_dbase *dbp = DLE_VAL(elem); if (dbp->adl_datid == tmp->adw_datid) { @@ -1160,7 +1163,7 @@ do_start_worker(void) * the current time and the current time plus naptime. */ if (!TimestampDifferenceExceeds(dbp->adl_next_worker, - current_time, 0) && + current_time, 0) && !TimestampDifferenceExceeds(current_time, dbp->adl_next_worker, autovacuum_naptime * 1000)) @@ -1174,8 +1177,8 @@ do_start_worker(void) continue; /* - * Remember the db with oldest autovac time. (If we are here, - * both tmp->entry and db->entry must be non-null.) + * Remember the db with oldest autovac time. (If we are here, both + * tmp->entry and db->entry must be non-null.) */ if (avdb == NULL || tmp->adw_entry->last_autovac_time < avdb->adw_entry->last_autovac_time) @@ -1192,7 +1195,8 @@ do_start_worker(void) /* * Get a worker entry from the freelist. We checked above, so there - * really should be a free slot -- complain very loudly if there isn't. + * really should be a free slot -- complain very loudly if there + * isn't. */ sworker = AutoVacuumShmem->av_freeWorkers; if (sworker == INVALID_OFFSET) @@ -1243,8 +1247,8 @@ do_start_worker(void) static void launch_worker(TimestampTz now) { - Oid dbid; - Dlelem *elem; + Oid dbid; + Dlelem *elem; dbid = do_start_worker(); if (OidIsValid(dbid)) @@ -1256,7 +1260,7 @@ launch_worker(TimestampTz now) elem = (DatabaseList == NULL) ? NULL : DLGetHead(DatabaseList); while (elem != NULL) { - avl_dbase *avdb = DLE_VAL(elem); + avl_dbase *avdb = DLE_VAL(elem); if (avdb->adl_datid == dbid) { @@ -1274,11 +1278,11 @@ launch_worker(TimestampTz now) } /* - * If the database was not present in the database list, we rebuild the - * list. It's possible that the database does not get into the list - * anyway, for example if it's a database that doesn't have a pgstat - * entry, but this is not a problem because we don't want to schedule - * workers regularly into those in any case. + * If the database was not present in the database list, we rebuild + * the list. It's possible that the database does not get into the + * list anyway, for example if it's a database that doesn't have a + * pgstat entry, but this is not a problem because we don't want to + * schedule workers regularly into those in any case. */ if (elem == NULL) rebuild_database_list(dbid); @@ -1287,7 +1291,7 @@ launch_worker(TimestampTz now) /* * Called from postmaster to signal a failure to fork a process to become - * worker. The postmaster should kill(SIGUSR1) the launcher shortly + * worker. The postmaster should kill(SIGUSR1) the launcher shortly * after calling this function. */ void @@ -1343,7 +1347,7 @@ avl_quickdie(SIGNAL_ARGS) /******************************************************************** - * AUTOVACUUM WORKER CODE + * AUTOVACUUM WORKER CODE ********************************************************************/ #ifdef EXEC_BACKEND @@ -1445,9 +1449,9 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (autovacuum probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (autovacuum probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -1465,8 +1469,8 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) pqsignal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); /* - * SIGINT is used to signal cancelling the current table's vacuum; - * SIGTERM means abort and exit cleanly, and SIGQUIT means abandon ship. + * SIGINT is used to signal cancelling the current table's vacuum; SIGTERM + * means abort and exit cleanly, and SIGQUIT means abandon ship. */ pqsignal(SIGINT, StatementCancelHandler); pqsignal(SIGTERM, die); @@ -1538,9 +1542,10 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) LWLockAcquire(AutovacuumLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); /* - * beware of startingWorker being INVALID; this should normally not happen, - * but if a worker fails after forking and before this, the launcher might - * have decided to remove it from the queue and start again. + * beware of startingWorker being INVALID; this should normally not + * happen, but if a worker fails after forking and before this, the + * launcher might have decided to remove it from the queue and start + * again. */ if (AutoVacuumShmem->av_startingWorker != INVALID_OFFSET) { @@ -1549,7 +1554,7 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) MyWorkerInfo->wi_proc = MyProc; /* insert into the running list */ - SHMQueueInsertBefore(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, + SHMQueueInsertBefore(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, &MyWorkerInfo->wi_links); /* @@ -1575,7 +1580,7 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) if (OidIsValid(dbid)) { - char *dbname; + char *dbname; /* * Report autovac startup to the stats collector. We deliberately do @@ -1629,7 +1634,7 @@ FreeWorkerInfo(int code, Datum arg) /* * Wake the launcher up so that he can launch a new worker immediately * if required. We only save the launcher's PID in local memory here; - * the actual signal will be sent when the PGPROC is recycled. Note + * the actual signal will be sent when the PGPROC is recycled. Note * that we always do this, so that the launcher can rebalance the cost * limit setting of the remaining workers. * @@ -1686,16 +1691,17 @@ static void autovac_balance_cost(void) { WorkerInfo worker; + /* * note: in cost_limit, zero also means use value from elsewhere, because * zero is not a valid value. */ - int vac_cost_limit = (autovacuum_vac_cost_limit > 0 ? - autovacuum_vac_cost_limit : VacuumCostLimit); - int vac_cost_delay = (autovacuum_vac_cost_delay >= 0 ? - autovacuum_vac_cost_delay : VacuumCostDelay); - double cost_total; - double cost_avail; + int vac_cost_limit = (autovacuum_vac_cost_limit > 0 ? + autovacuum_vac_cost_limit : VacuumCostLimit); + int vac_cost_delay = (autovacuum_vac_cost_delay >= 0 ? + autovacuum_vac_cost_delay : VacuumCostDelay); + double cost_total; + double cost_avail; /* not set? nothing to do */ if (vac_cost_limit <= 0 || vac_cost_delay <= 0) @@ -1715,15 +1721,15 @@ autovac_balance_cost(void) worker = (WorkerInfo) SHMQueueNext(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, &worker->wi_links, - offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); + offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); } /* there are no cost limits -- nothing to do */ if (cost_total <= 0) return; /* - * Adjust each cost limit of active workers to balance the total of - * cost limit to autovacuum_vacuum_cost_limit. + * Adjust each cost limit of active workers to balance the total of cost + * limit to autovacuum_vacuum_cost_limit. */ cost_avail = (double) vac_cost_limit / vac_cost_delay; worker = (WorkerInfo) SHMQueueNext(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, @@ -1734,8 +1740,8 @@ autovac_balance_cost(void) if (worker->wi_proc != NULL && worker->wi_cost_limit_base > 0 && worker->wi_cost_delay > 0) { - int limit = (int) - (cost_avail * worker->wi_cost_limit_base / cost_total); + int limit = (int) + (cost_avail * worker->wi_cost_limit_base / cost_total); /* * We put a lower bound of 1 to the cost_limit, to avoid division- @@ -1750,7 +1756,7 @@ autovac_balance_cost(void) worker = (WorkerInfo) SHMQueueNext(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, &worker->wi_links, - offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); + offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); } } @@ -1781,7 +1787,7 @@ get_database_list(void) while (read_pg_database_line(db_file, thisname, &db_id, &db_tablespace, &db_frozenxid)) { - avw_dbase *avdb; + avw_dbase *avdb; avdb = (avw_dbase *) palloc(sizeof(avw_dbase)); @@ -1817,7 +1823,7 @@ do_autovacuum(void) List *table_oids = NIL; List *toast_oids = NIL; List *table_toast_list = NIL; - ListCell * volatile cell; + ListCell *volatile cell; PgStat_StatDBEntry *shared; PgStat_StatDBEntry *dbentry; BufferAccessStrategy bstrategy; @@ -1835,8 +1841,8 @@ do_autovacuum(void) MemoryContextSwitchTo(AutovacMemCxt); /* - * may be NULL if we couldn't find an entry (only happens if we - * are forcing a vacuum for anti-wrap purposes). + * may be NULL if we couldn't find an entry (only happens if we are + * forcing a vacuum for anti-wrap purposes). */ dbentry = pgstat_fetch_stat_dbentry(MyDatabaseId); @@ -1854,9 +1860,9 @@ do_autovacuum(void) pgstat_vacuum_tabstat(); /* - * Find the pg_database entry and select the default freeze_min_age. - * We use zero in template and nonconnectable databases, - * else the system-wide default. + * Find the pg_database entry and select the default freeze_min_age. We + * use zero in template and nonconnectable databases, else the system-wide + * default. */ tuple = SearchSysCache(DATABASEOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(MyDatabaseId), @@ -1948,12 +1954,12 @@ do_autovacuum(void) */ foreach(cell, toast_oids) { - Oid toastoid = lfirst_oid(cell); - ListCell *cell2; + Oid toastoid = lfirst_oid(cell); + ListCell *cell2; foreach(cell2, table_toast_list) { - av_relation *ar = lfirst(cell2); + av_relation *ar = lfirst(cell2); if (ar->ar_toastrelid == toastoid) { @@ -1969,9 +1975,9 @@ do_autovacuum(void) toast_oids = NIL; /* - * Create a buffer access strategy object for VACUUM to use. We want - * to use the same one across all the vacuum operations we perform, - * since the point is for VACUUM not to blow out the shared cache. + * Create a buffer access strategy object for VACUUM to use. We want to + * use the same one across all the vacuum operations we perform, since the + * point is for VACUUM not to blow out the shared cache. */ bstrategy = GetAccessStrategy(BAS_VACUUM); @@ -1990,10 +1996,10 @@ do_autovacuum(void) */ foreach(cell, table_oids) { - Oid relid = lfirst_oid(cell); + Oid relid = lfirst_oid(cell); autovac_table *tab; WorkerInfo worker; - bool skipit; + bool skipit; char *datname, *nspname, *relname; @@ -2001,9 +2007,9 @@ do_autovacuum(void) CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); /* - * hold schedule lock from here until we're sure that this table - * still needs vacuuming. We also need the AutovacuumLock to walk - * the worker array, but we'll let go of that one quickly. + * hold schedule lock from here until we're sure that this table still + * needs vacuuming. We also need the AutovacuumLock to walk the + * worker array, but we'll let go of that one quickly. */ LWLockAcquire(AutovacuumScheduleLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); LWLockAcquire(AutovacuumLock, LW_SHARED); @@ -2014,8 +2020,8 @@ do_autovacuum(void) */ skipit = false; worker = (WorkerInfo) SHMQueueNext(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, - &AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, - offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); + &AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, + offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); while (worker) { /* ignore myself */ @@ -2032,10 +2038,10 @@ do_autovacuum(void) break; } -next_worker: + next_worker: worker = (WorkerInfo) SHMQueueNext(&AutoVacuumShmem->av_runningWorkers, &worker->wi_links, - offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); + offsetof(WorkerInfoData, wi_links)); } LWLockRelease(AutovacuumLock); if (skipit) @@ -2046,8 +2052,8 @@ next_worker: /* * Check whether pgstat data still says we need to vacuum this table. - * It could have changed if something else processed the table while we - * weren't looking. + * It could have changed if something else processed the table while + * we weren't looking. * * FIXME we ignore the possibility that the table was finished being * vacuumed in the last 500ms (PGSTAT_STAT_INTERVAL). This is a bug. @@ -2062,7 +2068,7 @@ next_worker: } /* - * Ok, good to go. Store the table in shared memory before releasing + * Ok, good to go. Store the table in shared memory before releasing * the lock so that other workers don't vacuum it concurrently. */ MyWorkerInfo->wi_tableoid = relid; @@ -2099,7 +2105,7 @@ next_worker: /* * Save the relation name for a possible error message, to avoid a - * catalog lookup in case of an error. Note: they must live in a + * catalog lookup in case of an error. Note: they must live in a * long-lived memory context because we call vacuum and analyze in * different transactions. */ @@ -2124,9 +2130,9 @@ next_worker: /* * Clear a possible query-cancel signal, to avoid a late reaction - * to an automatically-sent signal because of vacuuming the current - * table (we're done with it, so it would make no sense to cancel - * at this point.) + * to an automatically-sent signal because of vacuuming the + * current table (we're done with it, so it would make no sense to + * cancel at this point.) */ QueryCancelPending = false; } @@ -2171,8 +2177,8 @@ next_worker: } /* - * Update pg_database.datfrozenxid, and truncate pg_clog if possible. - * We only need to do this once, not after each table. + * Update pg_database.datfrozenxid, and truncate pg_clog if possible. We + * only need to do this once, not after each table. */ vac_update_datfrozenxid(); @@ -2249,13 +2255,13 @@ get_pgstat_tabentry_relid(Oid relid, bool isshared, PgStat_StatDBEntry *shared, */ static void relation_check_autovac(Oid relid, Form_pg_class classForm, - Form_pg_autovacuum avForm, PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry, + Form_pg_autovacuum avForm, PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry, List **table_oids, List **table_toast_list, List **toast_oids) { - bool dovacuum; - bool doanalyze; - bool dummy; + bool dovacuum; + bool doanalyze; + bool dummy; relation_needs_vacanalyze(relid, avForm, classForm, tabentry, &dovacuum, &doanalyze, &dummy); @@ -2273,7 +2279,7 @@ relation_check_autovac(Oid relid, Form_pg_class classForm, *table_oids = lappend_oid(*table_oids, relid); else if (OidIsValid(classForm->reltoastrelid)) { - av_relation *rel = palloc(sizeof(av_relation)); + av_relation *rel = palloc(sizeof(av_relation)); rel->ar_relid = relid; rel->ar_toastrelid = classForm->reltoastrelid; @@ -2341,7 +2347,7 @@ table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid) /* it doesn't need vacuum, but what about it's TOAST table? */ else if (OidIsValid(classForm->reltoastrelid)) { - Oid toastrelid = classForm->reltoastrelid; + Oid toastrelid = classForm->reltoastrelid; HeapTuple toastClassTup; toastClassTup = SearchSysCacheCopy(RELOID, @@ -2349,15 +2355,15 @@ table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid) 0, 0, 0); if (HeapTupleIsValid(toastClassTup)) { - bool toast_dovacuum; - bool toast_doanalyze; - bool toast_wraparound; - Form_pg_class toastClassForm; + bool toast_dovacuum; + bool toast_doanalyze; + bool toast_wraparound; + Form_pg_class toastClassForm; PgStat_StatTabEntry *toasttabentry; toastClassForm = (Form_pg_class) GETSTRUCT(toastClassTup); toasttabentry = get_pgstat_tabentry_relid(toastrelid, - toastClassForm->relisshared, + toastClassForm->relisshared, shared, dbentry); /* note we use the pg_autovacuum entry for the main table */ @@ -2386,8 +2392,8 @@ table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid) int vac_cost_delay; /* - * Calculate the vacuum cost parameters and the minimum freeze age. If - * there is a tuple in pg_autovacuum, use it; else, use the GUC + * Calculate the vacuum cost parameters and the minimum freeze age. + * If there is a tuple in pg_autovacuum, use it; else, use the GUC * defaults. Note that the fields may contain "-1" (or indeed any * negative value), which means use the GUC defaults for each setting. * In cost_limit, the value 0 also means to use the value from @@ -2442,7 +2448,7 @@ table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid) * * Check whether a relation needs to be vacuumed or analyzed; return each into * "dovacuum" and "doanalyze", respectively. Also return whether the vacuum is - * being forced because of Xid wraparound. avForm and tabentry can be NULL, + * being forced because of Xid wraparound. avForm and tabentry can be NULL, * classForm shouldn't. * * A table needs to be vacuumed if the number of dead tuples exceeds a @@ -2461,7 +2467,7 @@ table_recheck_autovac(Oid relid) * * A table whose pg_autovacuum.enabled value is false, is automatically * skipped (unless we have to vacuum it due to freeze_max_age). Thus - * autovacuum can be disabled for specific tables. Also, when the stats + * autovacuum can be disabled for specific tables. Also, when the stats * collector does not have data about a table, it will be skipped. * * A table whose vac_base_thresh value is <0 takes the base value from the @@ -2474,24 +2480,28 @@ relation_needs_vacanalyze(Oid relid, Form_pg_autovacuum avForm, Form_pg_class classForm, PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry, - /* output params below */ + /* output params below */ bool *dovacuum, bool *doanalyze, bool *wraparound) { bool force_vacuum; float4 reltuples; /* pg_class.reltuples */ + /* constants from pg_autovacuum or GUC variables */ int vac_base_thresh, anl_base_thresh; float4 vac_scale_factor, anl_scale_factor; + /* thresholds calculated from above constants */ float4 vacthresh, anlthresh; + /* number of vacuum (resp. analyze) tuples at this time */ float4 vactuples, anltuples; + /* freeze parameters */ int freeze_max_age; TransactionId xidForceLimit; @@ -2501,9 +2511,9 @@ relation_needs_vacanalyze(Oid relid, /* * Determine vacuum/analyze equation parameters. If there is a tuple in - * pg_autovacuum, use it; else, use the GUC defaults. Note that the fields - * may contain "-1" (or indeed any negative value), which means use the GUC - * defaults for each setting. + * pg_autovacuum, use it; else, use the GUC defaults. Note that the + * fields may contain "-1" (or indeed any negative value), which means use + * the GUC defaults for each setting. */ if (avForm != NULL) { @@ -2575,9 +2585,9 @@ relation_needs_vacanalyze(Oid relid, else { /* - * Skip a table not found in stat hash, unless we have to force - * vacuum for anti-wrap purposes. If it's not acted upon, there's - * no need to vacuum it. + * Skip a table not found in stat hash, unless we have to force vacuum + * for anti-wrap purposes. If it's not acted upon, there's no need to + * vacuum it. */ *dovacuum = force_vacuum; *doanalyze = false; @@ -2641,6 +2651,7 @@ autovac_report_activity(VacuumStmt *vacstmt, Oid relid) { char *relname = get_rel_name(relid); char *nspname = get_namespace_name(get_rel_namespace(relid)); + #define MAX_AUTOVAC_ACTIV_LEN (NAMEDATALEN * 2 + 32) char activity[MAX_AUTOVAC_ACTIV_LEN]; @@ -2656,9 +2667,9 @@ autovac_report_activity(VacuumStmt *vacstmt, Oid relid) /* * Report the qualified name of the relation. * - * Paranoia is appropriate here in case relation was recently dropped - * --- the lsyscache routines we just invoked will return NULL rather - * than failing. + * Paranoia is appropriate here in case relation was recently dropped --- + * the lsyscache routines we just invoked will return NULL rather than + * failing. */ if (relname && nspname) { @@ -2722,12 +2733,12 @@ IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(void) /* * AutoVacuumShmemSize - * Compute space needed for autovacuum-related shared memory + * Compute space needed for autovacuum-related shared memory */ Size AutoVacuumShmemSize(void) { - Size size; + Size size; /* * Need the fixed struct and the array of WorkerInfoData. @@ -2746,7 +2757,7 @@ AutoVacuumShmemSize(void) void AutoVacuumShmemInit(void) { - bool found; + bool found; AutoVacuumShmem = (AutoVacuumShmemStruct *) ShmemInitStruct("AutoVacuum Data", @@ -2785,10 +2796,10 @@ AutoVacuumShmemInit(void) /* * autovac_refresh_stats - * Refresh pgstats data for an autovacuum process + * Refresh pgstats data for an autovacuum process * * Cause the next pgstats read operation to obtain fresh data, but throttle - * such refreshing in the autovacuum launcher. This is mostly to avoid + * such refreshing in the autovacuum launcher. This is mostly to avoid * rereading the pgstats files too many times in quick succession when there * are many databases. * @@ -2800,8 +2811,8 @@ autovac_refresh_stats(void) { if (IsAutoVacuumLauncherProcess()) { - static TimestampTz last_read = 0; - TimestampTz current_time; + static TimestampTz last_read = 0; + TimestampTz current_time; current_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c b/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c index f75e9f37d8..7f2d3b820a 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ * * bgwriter.c * - * The background writer (bgwriter) is new as of Postgres 8.0. It attempts + * The background writer (bgwriter) is new as of Postgres 8.0. It attempts * to keep regular backends from having to write out dirty shared buffers * (which they would only do when needing to free a shared buffer to read in * another page). In the best scenario all writes from shared buffers will @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c,v 1.46 2007/11/14 21:19:18 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c,v 1.47 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ typedef struct int ckpt_flags; /* checkpoint flags, as defined in xlog.h */ - uint32 num_backend_writes; /* counts non-bgwriter buffer writes */ + uint32 num_backend_writes; /* counts non-bgwriter buffer writes */ int num_requests; /* current # of requests */ int max_requests; /* allocated array size */ @@ -202,9 +202,9 @@ BackgroundWriterMain(void) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (bgwriter probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (bgwriter probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -402,10 +402,10 @@ BackgroundWriterMain(void) } /* - * Force a checkpoint if too much time has elapsed since the - * last one. Note that we count a timed checkpoint in stats only - * when this occurs without an external request, but we set the - * CAUSE_TIME flag bit even if there is also an external request. + * Force a checkpoint if too much time has elapsed since the last one. + * Note that we count a timed checkpoint in stats only when this + * occurs without an external request, but we set the CAUSE_TIME flag + * bit even if there is also an external request. */ now = time(NULL); elapsed_secs = now - last_checkpoint_time; @@ -427,10 +427,9 @@ BackgroundWriterMain(void) volatile BgWriterShmemStruct *bgs = BgWriterShmem; /* - * Atomically fetch the request flags to figure out what - * kind of a checkpoint we should perform, and increase the - * started-counter to acknowledge that we've started - * a new checkpoint. + * Atomically fetch the request flags to figure out what kind of a + * checkpoint we should perform, and increase the started-counter + * to acknowledge that we've started a new checkpoint. */ SpinLockAcquire(&bgs->ckpt_lck); flags |= bgs->ckpt_flags; @@ -518,8 +517,8 @@ CheckArchiveTimeout(void) return; /* - * Update local state ... note that last_xlog_switch_time is the - * last time a switch was performed *or requested*. + * Update local state ... note that last_xlog_switch_time is the last time + * a switch was performed *or requested*. */ last_time = GetLastSegSwitchTime(); @@ -534,17 +533,17 @@ CheckArchiveTimeout(void) switchpoint = RequestXLogSwitch(); /* - * If the returned pointer points exactly to a segment - * boundary, assume nothing happened. + * If the returned pointer points exactly to a segment boundary, + * assume nothing happened. */ if ((switchpoint.xrecoff % XLogSegSize) != 0) ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("transaction log switch forced (archive_timeout=%d)", - XLogArchiveTimeout))); + (errmsg("transaction log switch forced (archive_timeout=%d)", + XLogArchiveTimeout))); /* - * Update state in any case, so we don't retry constantly when - * the system is idle. + * Update state in any case, so we don't retry constantly when the + * system is idle. */ last_xlog_switch_time = now; } @@ -577,14 +576,14 @@ BgWriterNap(void) if (bgwriter_lru_maxpages > 0 || ckpt_active) udelay = BgWriterDelay * 1000L; else if (XLogArchiveTimeout > 0) - udelay = 1000000L; /* One second */ + udelay = 1000000L; /* One second */ else - udelay = 10000000L; /* Ten seconds */ + udelay = 10000000L; /* Ten seconds */ while (udelay > 999999L) { if (got_SIGHUP || shutdown_requested || - (ckpt_active ? ImmediateCheckpointRequested() : checkpoint_requested)) + (ckpt_active ? ImmediateCheckpointRequested() : checkpoint_requested)) break; pg_usleep(1000000L); AbsorbFsyncRequests(); @@ -592,12 +591,12 @@ BgWriterNap(void) } if (!(got_SIGHUP || shutdown_requested || - (ckpt_active ? ImmediateCheckpointRequested() : checkpoint_requested))) + (ckpt_active ? ImmediateCheckpointRequested() : checkpoint_requested))) pg_usleep(udelay); } /* - * Returns true if an immediate checkpoint request is pending. (Note that + * Returns true if an immediate checkpoint request is pending. (Note that * this does not check the *current* checkpoint's IMMEDIATE flag, but whether * there is one pending behind it.) */ @@ -635,7 +634,7 @@ ImmediateCheckpointRequested(void) void CheckpointWriteDelay(int flags, double progress) { - static int absorb_counter = WRITES_PER_ABSORB; + static int absorb_counter = WRITES_PER_ABSORB; /* Do nothing if checkpoint is being executed by non-bgwriter process */ if (!am_bg_writer) @@ -687,7 +686,7 @@ static bool IsCheckpointOnSchedule(double progress) { XLogRecPtr recptr; - struct timeval now; + struct timeval now; double elapsed_xlogs, elapsed_time; @@ -697,7 +696,7 @@ IsCheckpointOnSchedule(double progress) progress *= CheckPointCompletionTarget; /* - * Check against the cached value first. Only do the more expensive + * Check against the cached value first. Only do the more expensive * calculations once we reach the target previously calculated. Since * neither time or WAL insert pointer moves backwards, a freshly * calculated value can only be greater than or equal to the cached value. @@ -708,12 +707,12 @@ IsCheckpointOnSchedule(double progress) /* * Check progress against WAL segments written and checkpoint_segments. * - * We compare the current WAL insert location against the location + * We compare the current WAL insert location against the location * computed before calling CreateCheckPoint. The code in XLogInsert that * actually triggers a checkpoint when checkpoint_segments is exceeded * compares against RedoRecptr, so this is not completely accurate. - * However, it's good enough for our purposes, we're only calculating - * an estimate anyway. + * However, it's good enough for our purposes, we're only calculating an + * estimate anyway. */ recptr = GetInsertRecPtr(); elapsed_xlogs = @@ -852,7 +851,7 @@ BgWriterShmemInit(void) * flags is a bitwise OR of the following: * CHECKPOINT_IS_SHUTDOWN: checkpoint is for database shutdown. * CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE: finish the checkpoint ASAP, - * ignoring checkpoint_completion_target parameter. + * ignoring checkpoint_completion_target parameter. * CHECKPOINT_FORCE: force a checkpoint even if no XLOG activity has occured * since the last one (implied by CHECKPOINT_IS_SHUTDOWN). * CHECKPOINT_WAIT: wait for completion before returning (otherwise, @@ -865,7 +864,8 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile BgWriterShmemStruct *bgs = BgWriterShmem; - int old_failed, old_started; + int old_failed, + old_started; /* * If in a standalone backend, just do it ourselves. @@ -873,9 +873,8 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) if (!IsPostmasterEnvironment) { /* - * There's no point in doing slow checkpoints in a standalone - * backend, because there's no other backends the checkpoint could - * disrupt. + * There's no point in doing slow checkpoints in a standalone backend, + * because there's no other backends the checkpoint could disrupt. */ CreateCheckPoint(flags | CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE); @@ -906,8 +905,8 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) SpinLockRelease(&bgs->ckpt_lck); /* - * Send signal to request checkpoint. When not waiting, we - * consider failure to send the signal to be nonfatal. + * Send signal to request checkpoint. When not waiting, we consider + * failure to send the signal to be nonfatal. */ if (BgWriterShmem->bgwriter_pid == 0) elog((flags & CHECKPOINT_WAIT) ? ERROR : LOG, @@ -922,18 +921,19 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) */ if (flags & CHECKPOINT_WAIT) { - int new_started, new_failed; + int new_started, + new_failed; /* Wait for a new checkpoint to start. */ - for(;;) + for (;;) { SpinLockAcquire(&bgs->ckpt_lck); new_started = bgs->ckpt_started; SpinLockRelease(&bgs->ckpt_lck); - + if (new_started != old_started) break; - + CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); pg_usleep(100000L); } @@ -941,9 +941,9 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) /* * We are waiting for ckpt_done >= new_started, in a modulo sense. */ - for(;;) + for (;;) { - int new_done; + int new_done; SpinLockAcquire(&bgs->ckpt_lck); new_done = bgs->ckpt_done; diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c b/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c index 1b0ad2786c..37e25861e7 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c,v 1.31 2007/09/26 22:36:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgarch.c,v 1.32 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ PgArchiverMain(int argc, char *argv[]) MyProcPid = getpid(); /* reset MyProcPid */ - MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* record Start Time for logging */ + MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* record Start Time for logging */ /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ pgarch_ArchiverCopyLoop(void) if (!XLogArchiveCommandSet()) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("archive_mode enabled, yet archive_command is not set"))); + (errmsg("archive_mode enabled, yet archive_command is not set"))); /* can't do anything if no command ... */ return; } @@ -476,15 +476,15 @@ pgarch_archiveXlog(char *xlog) { /* * If either the shell itself, or a called command, died on a signal, - * abort the archiver. We do this because system() ignores SIGINT and + * abort the archiver. We do this because system() ignores SIGINT and * SIGQUIT while waiting; so a signal is very likely something that - * should have interrupted us too. If we overreact it's no big deal, + * should have interrupted us too. If we overreact it's no big deal, * the postmaster will just start the archiver again. * - * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when - * a called command died on a signal. + * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when a + * called command died on a signal. */ - bool signaled = WIFSIGNALED(rc) || WEXITSTATUS(rc) > 128; + bool signaled = WIFSIGNALED(rc) || WEXITSTATUS(rc) > 128; ereport(signaled ? FATAL : LOG, (errmsg("archive command \"%s\" failed: return code %d", diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c index 8623dbd005..22ba2ee344 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2001-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.166 2007/09/25 20:03:37 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.167 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * ---------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -127,14 +127,14 @@ static bool pgStatRunningInCollector = false; * avoiding repeated searches in pgstat_initstats() when a relation is * repeatedly opened during a transaction. */ -#define TABSTAT_QUANTUM 100 /* we alloc this many at a time */ +#define TABSTAT_QUANTUM 100 /* we alloc this many at a time */ typedef struct TabStatusArray { struct TabStatusArray *tsa_next; /* link to next array, if any */ - int tsa_used; /* # entries currently used */ + int tsa_used; /* # entries currently used */ PgStat_TableStatus tsa_entries[TABSTAT_QUANTUM]; /* per-table data */ -} TabStatusArray; +} TabStatusArray; static TabStatusArray *pgStatTabList = NULL; @@ -147,10 +147,10 @@ static TabStatusArray *pgStatTabList = NULL; */ typedef struct PgStat_SubXactStatus { - int nest_level; /* subtransaction nest level */ + int nest_level; /* subtransaction nest level */ struct PgStat_SubXactStatus *prev; /* higher-level subxact if any */ PgStat_TableXactStatus *first; /* head of list for this subxact */ -} PgStat_SubXactStatus; +} PgStat_SubXactStatus; static PgStat_SubXactStatus *pgStatXactStack = NULL; @@ -160,11 +160,11 @@ static int pgStatXactRollback = 0; /* Record that's written to 2PC state file when pgstat state is persisted */ typedef struct TwoPhasePgStatRecord { - PgStat_Counter tuples_inserted; /* tuples inserted in xact */ - PgStat_Counter tuples_deleted; /* tuples deleted in xact */ - Oid t_id; /* table's OID */ - bool t_shared; /* is it a shared catalog? */ -} TwoPhasePgStatRecord; + PgStat_Counter tuples_inserted; /* tuples inserted in xact */ + PgStat_Counter tuples_deleted; /* tuples deleted in xact */ + Oid t_id; /* table's OID */ + bool t_shared; /* is it a shared catalog? */ +} TwoPhasePgStatRecord; /* * Info about current "snapshot" of stats file @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ static void pgstat_recv_resetcounter(PgStat_MsgResetcounter *msg, int len); static void pgstat_recv_autovac(PgStat_MsgAutovacStart *msg, int len); static void pgstat_recv_vacuum(PgStat_MsgVacuum *msg, int len); static void pgstat_recv_analyze(PgStat_MsgAnalyze *msg, int len); -static void pgstat_recv_bgwriter(PgStat_MsgBgWriter *msg, int len); +static void pgstat_recv_bgwriter(PgStat_MsgBgWriter * msg, int len); /* ------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -470,9 +470,9 @@ startup_failed: /* * Adjust GUC variables to suppress useless activity, and for debugging - * purposes (seeing track_counts off is a clue that we failed here). - * We use PGC_S_OVERRIDE because there is no point in trying to turn it - * back on from postgresql.conf without a restart. + * purposes (seeing track_counts off is a clue that we failed here). We + * use PGC_S_OVERRIDE because there is no point in trying to turn it back + * on from postgresql.conf without a restart. */ SetConfigOption("track_counts", "off", PGC_INTERNAL, PGC_S_OVERRIDE); } @@ -531,8 +531,8 @@ pgstat_start(void) pid_t pgStatPid; /* - * Check that the socket is there, else pgstat_init failed and we can - * do nothing useful. + * Check that the socket is there, else pgstat_init failed and we can do + * nothing useful. */ if (pgStatSock < 0) return 0; @@ -587,9 +587,10 @@ pgstat_start(void) return 0; } -void allow_immediate_pgstat_restart(void) +void +allow_immediate_pgstat_restart(void) { - last_pgstat_start_time = 0; + last_pgstat_start_time = 0; } /* ------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -612,7 +613,7 @@ pgstat_report_tabstat(bool force) { /* we assume this inits to all zeroes: */ static const PgStat_TableCounts all_zeroes; - static TimestampTz last_report = 0; + static TimestampTz last_report = 0; TimestampTz now; PgStat_MsgTabstat regular_msg; @@ -638,8 +639,8 @@ pgstat_report_tabstat(bool force) /* * Scan through the TabStatusArray struct(s) to find tables that actually * have counts, and build messages to send. We have to separate shared - * relations from regular ones because the databaseid field in the - * message header has to depend on that. + * relations from regular ones because the databaseid field in the message + * header has to depend on that. */ regular_msg.m_databaseid = MyDatabaseId; shared_msg.m_databaseid = InvalidOid; @@ -658,12 +659,13 @@ pgstat_report_tabstat(bool force) Assert(entry->trans == NULL); /* - * Ignore entries that didn't accumulate any actual counts, - * such as indexes that were opened by the planner but not used. + * Ignore entries that didn't accumulate any actual counts, such + * as indexes that were opened by the planner but not used. */ if (memcmp(&entry->t_counts, &all_zeroes, sizeof(PgStat_TableCounts)) == 0) continue; + /* * OK, insert data into the appropriate message, and send if full. */ @@ -885,7 +887,7 @@ pgstat_collect_oids(Oid catalogid) scan = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 0, NULL); while ((tup = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection)) != NULL) { - Oid thisoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); + Oid thisoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); @@ -950,7 +952,7 @@ pgstat_drop_relation(Oid relid) msg.m_databaseid = MyDatabaseId; pgstat_send(&msg, len); } -#endif /* NOT_USED */ +#endif /* NOT_USED */ /* ---------- @@ -1021,7 +1023,7 @@ pgstat_report_vacuum(Oid tableoid, bool shared, msg.m_databaseid = shared ? InvalidOid : MyDatabaseId; msg.m_tableoid = tableoid; msg.m_analyze = analyze; - msg.m_autovacuum = IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(); /* is this autovacuum? */ + msg.m_autovacuum = IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(); /* is this autovacuum? */ msg.m_vacuumtime = GetCurrentTimestamp(); msg.m_tuples = tuples; pgstat_send(&msg, sizeof(msg)); @@ -1045,7 +1047,7 @@ pgstat_report_analyze(Oid tableoid, bool shared, PgStat_Counter livetuples, pgstat_setheader(&msg.m_hdr, PGSTAT_MTYPE_ANALYZE); msg.m_databaseid = shared ? InvalidOid : MyDatabaseId; msg.m_tableoid = tableoid; - msg.m_autovacuum = IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(); /* is this autovacuum? */ + msg.m_autovacuum = IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(); /* is this autovacuum? */ msg.m_analyzetime = GetCurrentTimestamp(); msg.m_live_tuples = livetuples; msg.m_dead_tuples = deadtuples; @@ -1107,8 +1109,8 @@ pgstat_initstats(Relation rel) } /* - * If we already set up this relation in the current transaction, - * nothing to do. + * If we already set up this relation in the current transaction, nothing + * to do. */ if (rel->pgstat_info != NULL && rel->pgstat_info->t_id == rel_id) @@ -1145,9 +1147,9 @@ get_tabstat_entry(Oid rel_id, bool isshared) if (tsa->tsa_used < TABSTAT_QUANTUM) { /* - * It must not be present, but we found a free slot instead. - * Fine, let's use this one. We assume the entry was already - * zeroed, either at creation or after last use. + * It must not be present, but we found a free slot instead. Fine, + * let's use this one. We assume the entry was already zeroed, + * either at creation or after last use. */ entry = &tsa->tsa_entries[tsa->tsa_used++]; entry->t_id = rel_id; @@ -1201,14 +1203,14 @@ get_tabstat_stack_level(int nest_level) * add_tabstat_xact_level - add a new (sub)transaction state record */ static void -add_tabstat_xact_level(PgStat_TableStatus *pgstat_info, int nest_level) +add_tabstat_xact_level(PgStat_TableStatus * pgstat_info, int nest_level) { PgStat_SubXactStatus *xact_state; PgStat_TableXactStatus *trans; /* - * If this is the first rel to be modified at the current nest level, - * we first have to push a transaction stack entry. + * If this is the first rel to be modified at the current nest level, we + * first have to push a transaction stack entry. */ xact_state = get_tabstat_stack_level(nest_level); @@ -1234,7 +1236,7 @@ pgstat_count_heap_insert(Relation rel) if (pgstat_track_counts && pgstat_info != NULL) { - int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); + int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); /* t_tuples_inserted is nontransactional, so just advance it */ pgstat_info->t_counts.t_tuples_inserted++; @@ -1258,7 +1260,7 @@ pgstat_count_heap_update(Relation rel, bool hot) if (pgstat_track_counts && pgstat_info != NULL) { - int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); + int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); /* t_tuples_updated is nontransactional, so just advance it */ pgstat_info->t_counts.t_tuples_updated++; @@ -1287,7 +1289,7 @@ pgstat_count_heap_delete(Relation rel) if (pgstat_track_counts && pgstat_info != NULL) { - int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); + int nest_level = GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel(); /* t_tuples_deleted is nontransactional, so just advance it */ pgstat_info->t_counts.t_tuples_deleted++; @@ -1341,8 +1343,8 @@ AtEOXact_PgStat(bool isCommit) /* * Transfer transactional insert/update counts into the base tabstat - * entries. We don't bother to free any of the transactional state, - * since it's all in TopTransactionContext and will go away anyway. + * entries. We don't bother to free any of the transactional state, since + * it's all in TopTransactionContext and will go away anyway. */ xact_state = pgStatXactStack; if (xact_state != NULL) @@ -1424,11 +1426,11 @@ AtEOSubXact_PgStat(bool isCommit, int nestDepth) else { /* - * When there isn't an immediate parent state, we can - * just reuse the record instead of going through a + * When there isn't an immediate parent state, we can just + * reuse the record instead of going through a * palloc/pfree pushup (this works since it's all in - * TopTransactionContext anyway). We have to re-link - * it into the parent level, though, and that might mean + * TopTransactionContext anyway). We have to re-link it + * into the parent level, though, and that might mean * pushing a new entry into the pgStatXactStack. */ PgStat_SubXactStatus *upper_xact_state; @@ -1500,7 +1502,7 @@ AtPrepare_PgStat(void) * Clean up after successful PREPARE. * * All we need do here is unlink the transaction stats state from the - * nontransactional state. The nontransactional action counts will be + * nontransactional state. The nontransactional action counts will be * reported to the stats collector immediately, while the effects on live * and dead tuple counts are preserved in the 2PC state file. * @@ -1512,8 +1514,8 @@ PostPrepare_PgStat(void) PgStat_SubXactStatus *xact_state; /* - * We don't bother to free any of the transactional state, - * since it's all in TopTransactionContext and will go away anyway. + * We don't bother to free any of the transactional state, since it's all + * in TopTransactionContext and will go away anyway. */ xact_state = pgStatXactStack; if (xact_state != NULL) @@ -1701,8 +1703,8 @@ pgstat_fetch_stat_numbackends(void) * --------- * pgstat_fetch_global() - * - * Support function for the SQL-callable pgstat* functions. Returns - * a pointer to the global statistics struct. + * Support function for the SQL-callable pgstat* functions. Returns + * a pointer to the global statistics struct. * --------- */ PgStat_GlobalStats * @@ -1795,8 +1797,8 @@ pgstat_bestart(void) volatile PgBackendStatus *beentry; /* - * To minimize the time spent modifying the PgBackendStatus entry, - * fetch all the needed data first. + * To minimize the time spent modifying the PgBackendStatus entry, fetch + * all the needed data first. * * If we have a MyProcPort, use its session start time (for consistency, * and to save a kernel call). @@ -1930,8 +1932,8 @@ pgstat_report_xact_timestamp(TimestampTz tstamp) /* * Update my status entry, following the protocol of bumping - * st_changecount before and after. We use a volatile pointer - * here to ensure the compiler doesn't try to get cute. + * st_changecount before and after. We use a volatile pointer here to + * ensure the compiler doesn't try to get cute. */ beentry->st_changecount++; beentry->st_xact_start_timestamp = tstamp; @@ -2085,7 +2087,7 @@ pgstat_send(void *msg, int len) /* ---------- * pgstat_send_bgwriter() - * - * Send bgwriter statistics to the collector + * Send bgwriter statistics to the collector * ---------- */ void @@ -2095,9 +2097,9 @@ pgstat_send_bgwriter(void) static const PgStat_MsgBgWriter all_zeroes; /* - * This function can be called even if nothing at all has happened. - * In this case, avoid sending a completely empty message to - * the stats collector. + * This function can be called even if nothing at all has happened. In + * this case, avoid sending a completely empty message to the stats + * collector. */ if (memcmp(&BgWriterStats, &all_zeroes, sizeof(PgStat_MsgBgWriter)) == 0) return; @@ -2145,13 +2147,13 @@ PgstatCollectorMain(int argc, char *argv[]) MyProcPid = getpid(); /* reset MyProcPid */ - MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* record Start Time for logging */ + MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* record Start Time for logging */ /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (pgstat probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (pgstat probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -2250,8 +2252,8 @@ PgstatCollectorMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * poll/select call, so this also limits speed of response to SIGQUIT, * which is more important.) * - * We use poll(2) if available, otherwise select(2). - * Win32 has its own implementation. + * We use poll(2) if available, otherwise select(2). Win32 has its own + * implementation. */ #ifndef WIN32 #ifdef HAVE_POLL @@ -2291,9 +2293,9 @@ PgstatCollectorMain(int argc, char *argv[]) got_data = FD_ISSET(pgStatSock, &rfds); #endif /* HAVE_POLL */ -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ got_data = pgwin32_waitforsinglesocket(pgStatSock, FD_READ, - PGSTAT_SELECT_TIMEOUT*1000); + PGSTAT_SELECT_TIMEOUT * 1000); #endif /* @@ -2363,7 +2365,7 @@ PgstatCollectorMain(int argc, char *argv[]) break; case PGSTAT_MTYPE_BGWRITER: - pgstat_recv_bgwriter((PgStat_MsgBgWriter *) &msg, len); + pgstat_recv_bgwriter((PgStat_MsgBgWriter *) & msg, len); break; default: @@ -2704,7 +2706,7 @@ pgstat_read_statsfile(Oid onlydb) dbentry->tables = hash_create("Per-database table", PGSTAT_TAB_HASH_SIZE, &hash_ctl, - HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); + HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); /* * Arrange that following 'T's add entries to this database's @@ -2813,7 +2815,7 @@ pgstat_setup_memcxt(void) /* ---------- * pgstat_clear_snapshot() - * - * Discard any data collected in the current transaction. Any subsequent + * Discard any data collected in the current transaction. Any subsequent * request will cause new snapshots to be read. * * This is also invoked during transaction commit or abort to discard @@ -3158,7 +3160,7 @@ pgstat_recv_analyze(PgStat_MsgAnalyze *msg, int len) * ---------- */ static void -pgstat_recv_bgwriter(PgStat_MsgBgWriter *msg, int len) +pgstat_recv_bgwriter(PgStat_MsgBgWriter * msg, int len) { globalStats.timed_checkpoints += msg->m_timed_checkpoints; globalStats.requested_checkpoints += msg->m_requested_checkpoints; diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c index 9af6526159..c83e4e73d8 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.546 2007/11/15 20:04:38 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.547 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * @@ -130,10 +130,10 @@ * children we have and send them appropriate signals when necessary. * * "Special" children such as the startup, bgwriter and autovacuum launcher - * tasks are not in this list. Autovacuum worker processes are in it. + * tasks are not in this list. Autovacuum worker processes are in it. * Also, "dead_end" children are in it: these are children launched just * for the purpose of sending a friendly rejection message to a would-be - * client. We must track them because they are attached to shared memory, + * client. We must track them because they are attached to shared memory, * but we know they will never become live backends. */ typedef struct bkend @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ static char ExtraOptions[MAXPGPATH]; * backend dumps core. Normally, it kills all peers of the dead backend * and reinitializes shared memory. By specifying -s or -n, we can have * the postmaster stop (rather than kill) peers and not reinitialize - * shared data structures. (Reinit is currently dead code, though.) + * shared data structures. (Reinit is currently dead code, though.) */ static bool Reinit = true; static int SendStop = false; @@ -213,8 +213,8 @@ static pid_t StartupPID = 0, WalWriterPID = 0, AutoVacPID = 0, PgArchPID = 0, - PgStatPID = 0, - SysLoggerPID = 0; + PgStatPID = 0, + SysLoggerPID = 0; /* Startup/shutdown state */ #define NoShutdown 0 @@ -243,12 +243,13 @@ static bool FatalError = false; /* T if recovering from backend crash */ * * Notice that this state variable does not distinguish *why* we entered * PM_WAIT_BACKENDS or later states --- Shutdown and FatalError must be - * consulted to find that out. FatalError is never true in PM_RUN state, nor + * consulted to find that out. FatalError is never true in PM_RUN state, nor * in PM_SHUTDOWN state (because we don't enter that state when trying to * recover from a crash). It can be true in PM_STARTUP state, because we * don't clear it until we've successfully recovered. */ -typedef enum { +typedef enum +{ PM_INIT, /* postmaster starting */ PM_STARTUP, /* waiting for startup subprocess */ PM_RUN, /* normal "database is alive" state */ @@ -256,14 +257,14 @@ typedef enum { PM_SHUTDOWN, /* waiting for bgwriter to do shutdown ckpt */ PM_WAIT_DEAD_END, /* waiting for dead_end children to exit */ PM_NO_CHILDREN /* all important children have exited */ -} PMState; +} PMState; static PMState pmState = PM_INIT; bool ClientAuthInProgress = false; /* T during new-client * authentication */ -bool redirection_done = false; /* stderr redirected for syslogger? */ +bool redirection_done = false; /* stderr redirected for syslogger? */ /* received START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER signal */ static volatile sig_atomic_t start_autovac_launcher = false; @@ -321,6 +322,7 @@ static long PostmasterRandom(void); static void RandomSalt(char *cryptSalt, char *md5Salt); static void signal_child(pid_t pid, int signal); static void SignalSomeChildren(int signal, bool only_autovac); + #define SignalChildren(sig) SignalSomeChildren(sig, false) #define SignalAutovacWorkers(sig) SignalSomeChildren(sig, true) static int CountChildren(void); @@ -336,12 +338,12 @@ static void WINAPI pgwin32_deadchild_callback(PVOID lpParameter, BOOLEAN TimerOr static HANDLE win32ChildQueue; -typedef struct +typedef struct { - HANDLE waitHandle; - HANDLE procHandle; - DWORD procId; -} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; + HANDLE waitHandle; + HANDLE procHandle; + DWORD procId; +} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; HANDLE PostmasterHandle; #endif @@ -385,7 +387,7 @@ typedef struct InheritableSocket pgStatSock; pid_t PostmasterPid; TimestampTz PgStartTime; - bool redirection_done; + bool redirection_done; #ifdef WIN32 HANDLE PostmasterHandle; HANDLE initial_signal_pipe; @@ -477,9 +479,9 @@ PostmasterMain(int argc, char *argv[]) opterr = 1; /* - * Parse command-line options. CAUTION: keep this in sync with - * tcop/postgres.c (the option sets should not conflict) - * and with the common help() function in main/main.c. + * Parse command-line options. CAUTION: keep this in sync with + * tcop/postgres.c (the option sets should not conflict) and with the + * common help() function in main/main.c. */ while ((opt = getopt(argc, argv, "A:B:c:D:d:EeFf:h:ijk:lN:nOo:Pp:r:S:sTt:W:-:")) != -1) { @@ -907,7 +909,7 @@ PostmasterMain(int argc, char *argv[]) win32ChildQueue = CreateIoCompletionPort(INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, NULL, 0, 1); if (win32ChildQueue == NULL) ereport(FATAL, - (errmsg("could not create I/O completion port for child queue"))); + (errmsg("could not create I/O completion port for child queue"))); /* * Set up a handle that child processes can use to check whether the @@ -1158,8 +1160,8 @@ pmdaemonize(void) MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* - * GH: If there's no setsid(), we hopefully don't need silent mode. - * Until there's a better solution. + * GH: If there's no setsid(), we hopefully don't need silent mode. Until + * there's a better solution. */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -1207,9 +1209,9 @@ ServerLoop(void) * We wait at most one minute, to ensure that the other background * tasks handled below get done even when no requests are arriving. * - * If we are in PM_WAIT_DEAD_END state, then we don't want to - * accept any new connections, so we don't call select() at all; - * just sleep for a little bit with signals unblocked. + * If we are in PM_WAIT_DEAD_END state, then we don't want to accept + * any new connections, so we don't call select() at all; just sleep + * for a little bit with signals unblocked. */ memcpy((char *) &rmask, (char *) &readmask, sizeof(fd_set)); @@ -1217,7 +1219,7 @@ ServerLoop(void) if (pmState == PM_WAIT_DEAD_END) { - pg_usleep(100000L); /* 100 msec seems reasonable */ + pg_usleep(100000L); /* 100 msec seems reasonable */ selres = 0; } else @@ -1294,8 +1296,8 @@ ServerLoop(void) BgWriterPID = StartBackgroundWriter(); /* - * Likewise, if we have lost the walwriter process, try to start a - * new one. + * Likewise, if we have lost the walwriter process, try to start a new + * one. */ if (WalWriterPID == 0 && pmState == PM_RUN) WalWriterPID = StartWalWriter(); @@ -1307,13 +1309,13 @@ ServerLoop(void) { AutoVacPID = StartAutoVacLauncher(); if (AutoVacPID != 0) - start_autovac_launcher = false; /* signal processed */ + start_autovac_launcher = false; /* signal processed */ } - /* - * If we have lost the archiver, try to start a new one. - * We do this even if we are shutting down, to allow archiver to - * take care of any remaining WAL files. + /* + * If we have lost the archiver, try to start a new one. We do this + * even if we are shutting down, to allow archiver to take care of any + * remaining WAL files. */ if (XLogArchivingActive() && PgArchPID == 0 && pmState >= PM_RUN) PgArchPID = pgarch_start(); @@ -1732,10 +1734,10 @@ canAcceptConnections(void) if (pmState != PM_RUN) { if (Shutdown > NoShutdown) - return CAC_SHUTDOWN; /* shutdown is pending */ + return CAC_SHUTDOWN; /* shutdown is pending */ if (pmState == PM_STARTUP && !FatalError) - return CAC_STARTUP; /* normal startup */ - return CAC_RECOVERY; /* else must be crash recovery */ + return CAC_STARTUP; /* normal startup */ + return CAC_RECOVERY; /* else must be crash recovery */ } /* @@ -1793,11 +1795,11 @@ ConnCreate(int serverFd) } /* - * Allocate GSSAPI specific state struct + * Allocate GSSAPI specific state struct */ #ifndef EXEC_BACKEND -#if defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) - port->gss = (pg_gssinfo *)calloc(1, sizeof(pg_gssinfo)); +#if defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) + port->gss = (pg_gssinfo *) calloc(1, sizeof(pg_gssinfo)); if (!port->gss) { ereport(LOG, @@ -2062,14 +2064,16 @@ reaper(SIGNAL_ARGS) /* These macros hide platform variations in getting child status */ #ifdef HAVE_WAITPID int status; /* child exit status */ + #define LOOPTEST() ((pid = waitpid(-1, &status, WNOHANG)) > 0) #define LOOPHEADER() (exitstatus = status) -#else /* !HAVE_WAITPID */ +#else /* !HAVE_WAITPID */ #ifndef WIN32 union wait status; /* child exit status */ + #define LOOPTEST() ((pid = wait3(&status, WNOHANG, NULL)) > 0) #define LOOPHEADER() (exitstatus = status.w_status) -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ #define LOOPTEST() ((pid = win32_waitpid(&exitstatus)) > 0) #define LOOPHEADER() #endif /* WIN32 */ @@ -2152,7 +2156,7 @@ reaper(SIGNAL_ARGS) /* at this point we are really open for business */ ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("database system is ready to accept connections"))); + (errmsg("database system is ready to accept connections"))); continue; } @@ -2166,13 +2170,13 @@ reaper(SIGNAL_ARGS) if (EXIT_STATUS_0(exitstatus) && pmState == PM_SHUTDOWN) { /* - * OK, we saw normal exit of the bgwriter after it's been - * told to shut down. We expect that it wrote a shutdown - * checkpoint. (If for some reason it didn't, recovery will + * OK, we saw normal exit of the bgwriter after it's been told + * to shut down. We expect that it wrote a shutdown + * checkpoint. (If for some reason it didn't, recovery will * occur on next postmaster start.) * - * At this point we should have no normal children left - * (else we'd not be in PM_SHUTDOWN state) but we might have + * At this point we should have no normal children left (else + * we'd not be in PM_SHUTDOWN state) but we might have * dead_end children. */ Assert(Shutdown > NoShutdown); @@ -2192,9 +2196,9 @@ reaper(SIGNAL_ARGS) } /* - * Was it the wal writer? Normal exit can be ignored; we'll - * start a new one at the next iteration of the postmaster's main loop, - * if necessary. Any other exit condition is treated as a crash. + * Was it the wal writer? Normal exit can be ignored; we'll start a + * new one at the next iteration of the postmaster's main loop, if + * necessary. Any other exit condition is treated as a crash. */ if (pid == WalWriterPID) { @@ -2206,9 +2210,10 @@ reaper(SIGNAL_ARGS) } /* - * Was it the autovacuum launcher? Normal exit can be ignored; we'll - * start a new one at the next iteration of the postmaster's main loop, - * if necessary. Any other exit condition is treated as a crash. + * Was it the autovacuum launcher? Normal exit can be ignored; we'll + * start a new one at the next iteration of the postmaster's main + * loop, if necessary. Any other exit condition is treated as a + * crash. */ if (pid == AutoVacPID) { @@ -2433,8 +2438,8 @@ HandleChildCrash(int pid, int exitstatus, const char *procname) /* * Force a power-cycle of the pgarch process too. (This isn't absolutely * necessary, but it seems like a good idea for robustness, and it - * simplifies the state-machine logic in the case where a shutdown - * request arrives during crash processing.) + * simplifies the state-machine logic in the case where a shutdown request + * arrives during crash processing.) */ if (PgArchPID != 0 && !FatalError) { @@ -2448,8 +2453,8 @@ HandleChildCrash(int pid, int exitstatus, const char *procname) /* * Force a power-cycle of the pgstat process too. (This isn't absolutely * necessary, but it seems like a good idea for robustness, and it - * simplifies the state-machine logic in the case where a shutdown - * request arrives during crash processing.) + * simplifies the state-machine logic in the case where a shutdown request + * arrives during crash processing.) */ if (PgStatPID != 0 && !FatalError) { @@ -2494,15 +2499,15 @@ LogChildExit(int lev, const char *procname, int pid, int exitstatus) procname, pid, WTERMSIG(exitstatus)), errhint("See C include file \"ntstatus.h\" for a description of the hexadecimal value."))); #elif defined(HAVE_DECL_SYS_SIGLIST) && HAVE_DECL_SYS_SIGLIST - ereport(lev, - - /*------ - translator: %s is a noun phrase describing a child process, such as - "server process" */ - (errmsg("%s (PID %d) was terminated by signal %d: %s", - procname, pid, WTERMSIG(exitstatus), - WTERMSIG(exitstatus) < NSIG ? - sys_siglist[WTERMSIG(exitstatus)] : "(unknown)"))); + ereport(lev, + + /*------ + translator: %s is a noun phrase describing a child process, such as + "server process" */ + (errmsg("%s (PID %d) was terminated by signal %d: %s", + procname, pid, WTERMSIG(exitstatus), + WTERMSIG(exitstatus) < NSIG ? + sys_siglist[WTERMSIG(exitstatus)] : "(unknown)"))); #else ereport(lev, @@ -2532,18 +2537,18 @@ static void PostmasterStateMachine(void) { /* - * If we are in a state-machine state that implies waiting for backends - * to exit, see if they're all gone, and change state if so. + * If we are in a state-machine state that implies waiting for backends to + * exit, see if they're all gone, and change state if so. */ if (pmState == PM_WAIT_BACKENDS) { /* * PM_WAIT_BACKENDS state ends when we have no regular backends * (including autovac workers) and no walwriter or autovac launcher. - * If we are doing crash recovery then we expect the bgwriter to - * exit too, otherwise not. The archiver, stats, and syslogger - * processes are disregarded since they are not connected to shared - * memory; we also disregard dead_end children here. + * If we are doing crash recovery then we expect the bgwriter to exit + * too, otherwise not. The archiver, stats, and syslogger processes + * are disregarded since they are not connected to shared memory; we + * also disregard dead_end children here. */ if (CountChildren() == 0 && StartupPID == 0 && @@ -2554,7 +2559,7 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) if (FatalError) { /* - * Start waiting for dead_end children to die. This state + * Start waiting for dead_end children to die. This state * change causes ServerLoop to stop creating new ones. */ pmState = PM_WAIT_DEAD_END; @@ -2562,9 +2567,9 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) else { /* - * If we get here, we are proceeding with normal shutdown. - * All the regular children are gone, and it's time to tell - * the bgwriter to do a shutdown checkpoint. + * If we get here, we are proceeding with normal shutdown. All + * the regular children are gone, and it's time to tell the + * bgwriter to do a shutdown checkpoint. */ Assert(Shutdown > NoShutdown); /* Start the bgwriter if not running */ @@ -2579,10 +2584,10 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) else { /* - * If we failed to fork a bgwriter, just shut down. - * Any required cleanup will happen at next restart. - * We set FatalError so that an "abnormal shutdown" - * message gets logged when we exit. + * If we failed to fork a bgwriter, just shut down. Any + * required cleanup will happen at next restart. We set + * FatalError so that an "abnormal shutdown" message gets + * logged when we exit. */ FatalError = true; pmState = PM_WAIT_DEAD_END; @@ -2600,8 +2605,8 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) if (pmState == PM_WAIT_DEAD_END) { /* - * PM_WAIT_DEAD_END state ends when the BackendList is entirely - * empty (ie, no dead_end children remain). + * PM_WAIT_DEAD_END state ends when the BackendList is entirely empty + * (ie, no dead_end children remain). */ if (!DLGetHead(BackendList)) { @@ -2617,7 +2622,7 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) /* * If we've been told to shut down, we exit as soon as there are no - * remaining children. If there was a crash, cleanup will occur at the + * remaining children. If there was a crash, cleanup will occur at the * next startup. (Before PostgreSQL 8.3, we tried to recover from the * crash before exiting, but that seems unwise if we are quitting because * we got SIGTERM from init --- there may well not be time for recovery @@ -2627,7 +2632,7 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) * processes. They've been sent SIGQUIT by this point (either when we * entered PM_SHUTDOWN state, or when we set FatalError, and at least one * of those must have happened by now). In any case they contain logic to - * commit hara-kiri if they notice the postmaster is gone. Since they + * commit hara-kiri if they notice the postmaster is gone. Since they * aren't connected to shared memory, they pose no problem for shutdown. * The syslogger is not considered either, since it's intended to survive * till the postmaster exits. @@ -2648,7 +2653,7 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) /* * If we need to recover from a crash, wait for all shmem-connected - * children to exit, then reset shmem and StartupDataBase. (We can ignore + * children to exit, then reset shmem and StartupDataBase. (We can ignore * the archiver and stats processes here since they are not connected to * shmem.) */ @@ -2678,7 +2683,7 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) * system(). * * There is a race condition for recently-forked children: they might not - * have executed setsid() yet. So we signal the child directly as well as + * have executed setsid() yet. So we signal the child directly as well as * the group. We assume such a child will handle the signal before trying * to spawn any grandchild processes. We also assume that signaling the * child twice will not cause any problems. @@ -2945,7 +2950,7 @@ BackendInitialize(Port *port) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (We do this now on the off chance + * can signal any child processes too. (We do this now on the off chance * that something might spawn a child process during authentication.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID @@ -3448,17 +3453,18 @@ internal_forkexec(int argc, char *argv[], Port *port) } /* - * Queue a waiter for to signal when this child dies. The wait will be handled automatically - * by an operating system thread pool. + * Queue a waiter for to signal when this child dies. The wait will be + * handled automatically by an operating system thread pool. * - * Note: use malloc instead of palloc, since it needs to be thread-safe. Struct will be - * free():d from the callback function that runs on a different thread. + * Note: use malloc instead of palloc, since it needs to be thread-safe. + * Struct will be free():d from the callback function that runs on a + * different thread. */ childinfo = malloc(sizeof(win32_deadchild_waitinfo)); if (!childinfo) ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY), - errmsg("out of memory"))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY), + errmsg("out of memory"))); childinfo->procHandle = pi.hProcess; childinfo->procId = pi.dwProcessId; @@ -3468,10 +3474,10 @@ internal_forkexec(int argc, char *argv[], Port *port) pgwin32_deadchild_callback, childinfo, INFINITE, - WT_EXECUTEONLYONCE | WT_EXECUTEINWAITTHREAD)) + WT_EXECUTEONLYONCE | WT_EXECUTEINWAITTHREAD)) ereport(FATAL, - (errmsg_internal("could not register process for wait: error code %d", - (int) GetLastError()))); + (errmsg_internal("could not register process for wait: error code %d", + (int) GetLastError()))); /* Don't close pi.hProcess here - the wait thread needs access to it */ @@ -3505,13 +3511,14 @@ SubPostmasterMain(int argc, char *argv[]) MyStartTime = time(NULL); - /* make sure stderr is in binary mode before anything can - * possibly be written to it, in case it's actually the syslogger pipe, - * so the pipe chunking protocol isn't disturbed. Non-logpipe data - * gets translated on redirection (e.g. via pg_ctl -l) anyway. + /* + * make sure stderr is in binary mode before anything can possibly be + * written to it, in case it's actually the syslogger pipe, so the pipe + * chunking protocol isn't disturbed. Non-logpipe data gets translated on + * redirection (e.g. via pg_ctl -l) anyway. */ #ifdef WIN32 - _setmode(fileno(stderr),_O_BINARY); + _setmode(fileno(stderr), _O_BINARY); #endif /* Lose the postmaster's on-exit routines (really a no-op) */ @@ -3529,12 +3536,12 @@ SubPostmasterMain(int argc, char *argv[]) memset(&port, 0, sizeof(Port)); read_backend_variables(argv[2], &port); - /* - * Set up memory area for GSS information. Mirrors the code in - * ConnCreate for the non-exec case. + /* + * Set up memory area for GSS information. Mirrors the code in ConnCreate + * for the non-exec case. */ #if defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) - port.gss = (pg_gssinfo *)calloc(1, sizeof(pg_gssinfo)); + port.gss = (pg_gssinfo *) calloc(1, sizeof(pg_gssinfo)); if (!port.gss) ereport(FATAL, (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY), @@ -3601,8 +3608,8 @@ SubPostmasterMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * process any libraries that should be preloaded at postmaster start * * NOTE: we have to re-load the shared_preload_libraries here because - * this backend is not fork()ed so we can't inherit any shared - * libraries / DLL's from our parent (the postmaster). + * this backend is not fork()ed so we can't inherit any shared + * libraries / DLL's from our parent (the postmaster). */ process_shared_preload_libraries(); @@ -3899,6 +3906,7 @@ PostmasterRandom(void) struct timeval random_stop_time; gettimeofday(&random_stop_time, NULL); + /* * We are not sure how much precision is in tv_usec, so we swap * the high and low 16 bits of 'random_stop_time' and XOR them @@ -4014,7 +4022,7 @@ StartChildProcess(AuxProcType type) break; case WalWriterProcess: ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("could not fork WAL writer process: %m"))); + (errmsg("could not fork WAL writer process: %m"))); break; default: ereport(LOG, @@ -4049,7 +4057,7 @@ StartChildProcess(AuxProcType type) static void StartAutovacuumWorker(void) { - Backend *bn; + Backend *bn; /* * If not in condition to run a process, don't try, but handle it like a @@ -4061,8 +4069,8 @@ StartAutovacuumWorker(void) if (canAcceptConnections() == CAC_OK) { /* - * Compute the cancel key that will be assigned to this session. - * We probably don't need cancel keys for autovac workers, but we'd + * Compute the cancel key that will be assigned to this session. We + * probably don't need cancel keys for autovac workers, but we'd * better have something random in the field to prevent unfriendly * people from sending cancels to them. */ @@ -4098,9 +4106,9 @@ StartAutovacuumWorker(void) } /* - * Report the failure to the launcher, if it's running. (If it's not, - * we might not even be connected to shared memory, so don't try to - * call AutoVacWorkerFailed.) + * Report the failure to the launcher, if it's running. (If it's not, we + * might not even be connected to shared memory, so don't try to call + * AutoVacWorkerFailed.) */ if (AutoVacPID != 0) { @@ -4487,16 +4495,17 @@ ShmemBackendArrayRemove(pid_t pid) static pid_t win32_waitpid(int *exitstatus) { - DWORD dwd; - ULONG_PTR key; - OVERLAPPED* ovl; + DWORD dwd; + ULONG_PTR key; + OVERLAPPED *ovl; /* - * Check if there are any dead children. If there are, return the pid of the first one that died. + * Check if there are any dead children. If there are, return the pid of + * the first one that died. */ if (GetQueuedCompletionStatus(win32ChildQueue, &dwd, &key, &ovl, 0)) { - *exitstatus = (int)key; + *exitstatus = (int) key; return dwd; } @@ -4510,13 +4519,17 @@ win32_waitpid(int *exitstatus) static void WINAPI pgwin32_deadchild_callback(PVOID lpParameter, BOOLEAN TimerOrWaitFired) { - win32_deadchild_waitinfo *childinfo = (win32_deadchild_waitinfo *)lpParameter; + win32_deadchild_waitinfo *childinfo = (win32_deadchild_waitinfo *) lpParameter; DWORD exitcode; if (TimerOrWaitFired) - return; /* timeout. Should never happen, since we use INFINITE as timeout value. */ + return; /* timeout. Should never happen, since we use + * INFINITE as timeout value. */ - /* Remove handle from wait - required even though it's set to wait only once */ + /* + * Remove handle from wait - required even though it's set to wait only + * once + */ UnregisterWaitEx(childinfo->waitHandle, NULL); if (!GetExitCodeProcess(childinfo->procHandle, &exitcode)) @@ -4528,13 +4541,19 @@ pgwin32_deadchild_callback(PVOID lpParameter, BOOLEAN TimerOrWaitFired) exitcode = 255; } - if (!PostQueuedCompletionStatus(win32ChildQueue, childinfo->procId, (ULONG_PTR)exitcode, NULL)) + if (!PostQueuedCompletionStatus(win32ChildQueue, childinfo->procId, (ULONG_PTR) exitcode, NULL)) write_stderr("could not post child completion status\n"); - /* Handle is per-process, so we close it here instead of in the originating thread */ + /* + * Handle is per-process, so we close it here instead of in the + * originating thread + */ CloseHandle(childinfo->procHandle); - /* Free struct that was allocated before the call to RegisterWaitForSingleObject() */ + /* + * Free struct that was allocated before the call to + * RegisterWaitForSingleObject() + */ free(childinfo); /* Queue SIGCHLD signal */ diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c index 8ac38f0baa..0a255b5e07 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c,v 1.40 2007/09/22 18:19:18 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c,v 1.41 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ #define LBF_MODE _IOLBF #endif -/* +/* * We read() into a temp buffer twice as big as a chunk, so that any fragment * left after processing can be moved down to the front and we'll still have * room to read a full chunk. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static FILE *csvlogFile = NULL; static char *last_file_name = NULL; static char *last_csvfile_name = NULL; -/* +/* * Buffers for saving partial messages from different backends. We don't expect * that there will be very many outstanding at one time, so 20 seems plenty of * leeway. If this array gets full we won't lose messages, but we will lose @@ -101,9 +101,9 @@ static char *last_csvfile_name = NULL; */ typedef struct { - int32 pid; /* PID of source process */ + int32 pid; /* PID of source process */ StringInfoData data; /* accumulated data, as a StringInfo */ -} save_buffer; +} save_buffer; #define CHUNK_SLOTS 20 static save_buffer saved_chunks[CHUNK_SLOTS]; @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ static void open_csvlogfile(void); static unsigned int __stdcall pipeThread(void *arg); #endif static void logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for); -static char *logfile_getname(pg_time_t timestamp, char * suffix); +static char *logfile_getname(pg_time_t timestamp, char *suffix); static void set_next_rotation_time(void); static void sigHupHandler(SIGNAL_ARGS); static void sigUsr1Handler(SIGNAL_ARGS); @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) MyProcPid = getpid(); /* reset MyProcPid */ - MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* set our start time in case we call elog */ + MyStartTime = time(NULL); /* set our start time in case we call elog */ #ifdef EXEC_BACKEND syslogger_parseArgs(argc, argv); @@ -199,13 +199,14 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) close(fd); } - /* Syslogger's own stderr can't be the syslogPipe, so set it back to - * text mode if we didn't just close it. - * (It was set to binary in SubPostmasterMain). + /* + * Syslogger's own stderr can't be the syslogPipe, so set it back to text + * mode if we didn't just close it. (It was set to binary in + * SubPostmasterMain). */ #ifdef WIN32 else - _setmode(_fileno(stderr),_O_TEXT); + _setmode(_fileno(stderr), _O_TEXT); #endif /* @@ -225,9 +226,9 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (syslogger probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (syslogger probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -284,7 +285,8 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) for (;;) { bool time_based_rotation = false; - int size_rotation_for = 0; + int size_rotation_for = 0; + #ifndef WIN32 int bytesRead; int rc; @@ -348,14 +350,14 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) rotation_requested = true; size_rotation_for |= LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG; } - + } if (rotation_requested) { /* - * Force rotation when both values are zero. - * It means the request was sent by pg_rotate_logfile. + * Force rotation when both values are zero. It means the request + * was sent by pg_rotate_logfile. */ if (!time_based_rotation && size_rotation_for == 0) size_rotation_for = LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR | LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG; @@ -425,8 +427,9 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) if (pipe_eof_seen) { - /* seeing this message on the real stderr is annoying - so we - * make it DEBUG1 to suppress in normal use. + /* + * seeing this message on the real stderr is annoying - so we make + * it DEBUG1 to suppress in normal use. */ ereport(DEBUG1, (errmsg("logger shutting down"))); @@ -566,9 +569,9 @@ SysLogger_Start(void) int fd; /* - * open the pipe in binary mode and make sure - * stderr is binary after it's been dup'ed into, to avoid - * disturbing the pipe chunking protocol. + * open the pipe in binary mode and make sure stderr is binary + * after it's been dup'ed into, to avoid disturbing the pipe + * chunking protocol. */ fflush(stderr); fd = _open_osfhandle((long) syslogPipe[1], @@ -578,7 +581,7 @@ SysLogger_Start(void) (errcode_for_file_access(), errmsg("could not redirect stderr: %m"))); close(fd); - _setmode(_fileno(stderr),_O_BINARY); + _setmode(_fileno(stderr), _O_BINARY); /* Now we are done with the write end of the pipe. */ CloseHandle(syslogPipe[1]); syslogPipe[1] = 0; @@ -682,10 +685,10 @@ syslogger_parseArgs(int argc, char *argv[]) * Process data received through the syslogger pipe. * * This routine interprets the log pipe protocol which sends log messages as - * (hopefully atomic) chunks - such chunks are detected and reassembled here. + * (hopefully atomic) chunks - such chunks are detected and reassembled here. * * The protocol has a header that starts with two nul bytes, then has a 16 bit - * length, the pid of the sending process, and a flag to indicate if it is + * length, the pid of the sending process, and a flag to indicate if it is * the last chunk in a message. Incomplete chunks are saved until we read some * more, and non-final chunks are accumulated until we get the final chunk. * @@ -704,23 +707,23 @@ syslogger_parseArgs(int argc, char *argv[]) static void process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) { - char *cursor = logbuffer; - int count = *bytes_in_logbuffer; - int dest = LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR; + char *cursor = logbuffer; + int count = *bytes_in_logbuffer; + int dest = LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR; /* While we have enough for a header, process data... */ while (count >= (int) sizeof(PipeProtoHeader)) { PipeProtoHeader p; - int chunklen; + int chunklen; /* Do we have a valid header? */ memcpy(&p, cursor, sizeof(PipeProtoHeader)); if (p.nuls[0] == '\0' && p.nuls[1] == '\0' && p.len > 0 && p.len <= PIPE_MAX_PAYLOAD && p.pid != 0 && - (p.is_last == 't' || p.is_last == 'f' || - p.is_last == 'T' || p.is_last == 'F' )) + (p.is_last == 't' || p.is_last == 'f' || + p.is_last == 'T' || p.is_last == 'F')) { chunklen = PIPE_HEADER_SIZE + p.len; @@ -728,18 +731,19 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) if (count < chunklen) break; - dest = (p.is_last == 'T' || p.is_last == 'F' ) ? + dest = (p.is_last == 'T' || p.is_last == 'F') ? LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG : LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR; if (p.is_last == 'f' || p.is_last == 'F') { - /* - * Save a complete non-final chunk in the per-pid buffer - * if possible - if not just write it out. + /* + * Save a complete non-final chunk in the per-pid buffer if + * possible - if not just write it out. */ - int free_slot = -1, existing_slot = -1; - int i; - StringInfo str; + int free_slot = -1, + existing_slot = -1; + int i; + StringInfo str; for (i = 0; i < CHUNK_SLOTS; i++) { @@ -755,7 +759,7 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) { str = &(saved_chunks[existing_slot].data); appendBinaryStringInfo(str, - cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, + cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, p.len); } else if (free_slot >= 0) @@ -764,29 +768,29 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) str = &(saved_chunks[free_slot].data); initStringInfo(str); appendBinaryStringInfo(str, - cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, + cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, p.len); } else { - /* + /* * If there is no free slot we'll just have to take our * chances and write out a partial message and hope that * it's not followed by something from another pid. */ - write_syslogger_file(cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, p.len, + write_syslogger_file(cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, p.len, dest); } } else { - /* + /* * Final chunk --- add it to anything saved for that pid, and * either way write the whole thing out. */ - int existing_slot = -1; - int i; - StringInfo str; + int existing_slot = -1; + int i; + StringInfo str; for (i = 0; i < CHUNK_SLOTS; i++) { @@ -810,7 +814,7 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) { /* The whole message was one chunk, evidently. */ write_syslogger_file(cursor + PIPE_HEADER_SIZE, p.len, - dest); + dest); } } @@ -818,18 +822,18 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) cursor += chunklen; count -= chunklen; } - else + else { /* Process non-protocol data */ /* * Look for the start of a protocol header. If found, dump data * up to there and repeat the loop. Otherwise, dump it all and - * fall out of the loop. (Note: we want to dump it all if - * at all possible, so as to avoid dividing non-protocol messages - * across logfiles. We expect that in many scenarios, a - * non-protocol message will arrive all in one read(), and we - * want to respect the read() boundary if possible.) + * fall out of the loop. (Note: we want to dump it all if at all + * possible, so as to avoid dividing non-protocol messages across + * logfiles. We expect that in many scenarios, a non-protocol + * message will arrive all in one read(), and we want to respect + * the read() boundary if possible.) */ for (chunklen = 1; chunklen < count; chunklen++) { @@ -858,8 +862,8 @@ process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) static void flush_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) { - int i; - StringInfo str; + int i; + StringInfo str; /* Dump any incomplete protocol messages */ for (i = 0; i < CHUNK_SLOTS; i++) @@ -872,12 +876,13 @@ flush_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer) pfree(str->data); } } + /* * Force out any remaining pipe data as-is; we don't bother trying to * remove any protocol headers that may exist in it. */ if (*bytes_in_logbuffer > 0) - write_syslogger_file(logbuffer, *bytes_in_logbuffer, + write_syslogger_file(logbuffer, *bytes_in_logbuffer, LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR); *bytes_in_logbuffer = 0; } @@ -899,12 +904,12 @@ void write_syslogger_file(const char *buffer, int count, int destination) { int rc; - FILE * logfile; + FILE *logfile; if (destination == LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG && csvlogFile == NULL) open_csvlogfile(); - logfile = destination == LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG ? csvlogFile : syslogFile ; + logfile = destination == LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG ? csvlogFile : syslogFile; #ifndef WIN32 rc = fwrite(buffer, 1, count, logfile); @@ -972,16 +977,16 @@ pipeThread(void *arg) #endif /* WIN32 */ /* - * open the csv log file - we do this opportunistically, because + * open the csv log file - we do this opportunistically, because * we don't know if CSV logging will be wanted. */ static void open_csvlogfile(void) { - char *filename; - FILE *fh; + char *filename; + FILE *fh; - filename = logfile_getname(time(NULL),".csv"); + filename = logfile_getname(time(NULL), ".csv"); fh = fopen(filename, "a"); @@ -994,7 +999,7 @@ open_csvlogfile(void) setvbuf(fh, NULL, LBF_MODE, 0); #ifdef WIN32 - _setmode(_fileno(fh), _O_TEXT); /* use CRLF line endings on Windows */ + _setmode(_fileno(fh), _O_TEXT); /* use CRLF line endings on Windows */ #endif csvlogFile = fh; @@ -1010,7 +1015,7 @@ static void logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for) { char *filename; - char *csvfilename = NULL; + char *csvfilename = NULL; FILE *fh; rotation_requested = false; @@ -1066,10 +1071,10 @@ logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for) filename))); /* - * ENFILE/EMFILE are not too surprising on a busy system; just keep - * using the old file till we manage to get a new one. Otherwise, - * assume something's wrong with Log_directory and stop trying to - * create files. + * ENFILE/EMFILE are not too surprising on a busy system; just + * keep using the old file till we manage to get a new one. + * Otherwise, assume something's wrong with Log_directory and stop + * trying to create files. */ if (saveerrno != ENFILE && saveerrno != EMFILE) { @@ -1108,14 +1113,14 @@ logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for) /* same as above, but for csv file. */ - if (csvlogFile != NULL && ( - time_based_rotation || - (size_rotation_for & LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR))) + if (csvlogFile != NULL && ( + time_based_rotation || + (size_rotation_for & LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR))) { if (Log_truncate_on_rotation && time_based_rotation && - last_csvfile_name != NULL && + last_csvfile_name != NULL && strcmp(csvfilename, last_csvfile_name) != 0) - + fh = fopen(csvfilename, "w"); else fh = fopen(csvfilename, "a"); @@ -1130,10 +1135,10 @@ logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for) csvfilename))); /* - * ENFILE/EMFILE are not too surprising on a busy system; just keep - * using the old file till we manage to get a new one. Otherwise, - * assume something's wrong with Log_directory and stop trying to - * create files. + * ENFILE/EMFILE are not too surprising on a busy system; just + * keep using the old file till we manage to get a new one. + * Otherwise, assume something's wrong with Log_directory and stop + * trying to create files. */ if (saveerrno != ENFILE && saveerrno != EMFILE) { @@ -1179,7 +1184,7 @@ logfile_rotate(bool time_based_rotation, int size_rotation_for) * Result is palloc'd. */ static char * -logfile_getname(pg_time_t timestamp, char * suffix) +logfile_getname(pg_time_t timestamp, char *suffix) { char *filename; int len; @@ -1206,7 +1211,7 @@ logfile_getname(pg_time_t timestamp, char * suffix) if (suffix != NULL) { len = strlen(filename); - if (len > 4 && (strcmp(filename+(len-4),".log") == 0)) + if (len > 4 && (strcmp(filename + (len - 4), ".log") == 0)) len -= 4; strncpy(filename + len, suffix, MAXPGPATH - len); } diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c b/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c index d5736b7e69..0780403a8d 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c,v 1.2 2007/09/11 17:15:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/walwriter.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -92,9 +92,9 @@ WalWriterMain(void) /* * If possible, make this process a group leader, so that the postmaster - * can signal any child processes too. (walwriter probably never has - * any child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster - * child processes do this.) + * can signal any child processes too. (walwriter probably never has any + * child processes, but for consistency we make all postmaster child + * processes do this.) */ #ifdef HAVE_SETSID if (setsid() < 0) @@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ WalWriterMain(void) * We have no particular use for SIGINT at the moment, but seems * reasonable to treat like SIGTERM. */ - pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config file */ + pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config file */ pqsignal(SIGINT, WalShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */ pqsignal(SIGTERM, WalShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */ - pqsignal(SIGQUIT, wal_quickdie); /* hard crash time */ + pqsignal(SIGQUIT, wal_quickdie); /* hard crash time */ pqsignal(SIGALRM, SIG_IGN); pqsignal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN); pqsignal(SIGUSR1, SIG_IGN); /* reserve for sinval */ - pqsignal(SIGUSR2, SIG_IGN); /* not used */ + pqsignal(SIGUSR2, SIG_IGN); /* not used */ /* * Reset some signals that are accepted by postmaster but not here @@ -133,8 +133,8 @@ WalWriterMain(void) #endif /* - * Create a resource owner to keep track of our resources (not clear - * that we need this, but may as well have one). + * Create a resource owner to keep track of our resources (not clear that + * we need this, but may as well have one). */ CurrentResourceOwner = ResourceOwnerCreate(NULL, "Wal Writer"); diff --git a/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c b/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c index 0264760ea7..268e072c59 100644 --- a/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c +++ b/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ * OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF * ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c,v 1.6 2007/10/06 16:18:09 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/regex/regc_color.c,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * * * Note that there are some incestuous relationships between this code and @@ -722,13 +722,14 @@ dumpcolors(struct colormap * cm, else fprintf(f, "#%2ld%s(%2d): ", (long) co, has, cd->nchrs); + /* * Unfortunately, it's hard to do this next bit more efficiently. * * Spencer's original coding has the loop iterating from CHR_MIN - * to CHR_MAX, but that's utterly unusable for 32-bit chr. - * For debugging purposes it seems fine to print only chr - * codes up to 1000 or so. + * to CHR_MAX, but that's utterly unusable for 32-bit chr. For + * debugging purposes it seems fine to print only chr codes up to + * 1000 or so. */ for (c = CHR_MIN; c < 1000; c++) if (GETCOLOR(cm, c) == co) diff --git a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c index 34c13068f9..51ce0da2d2 100644 --- a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c +++ b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c,v 1.122 2007/08/27 03:36:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c,v 1.123 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -671,16 +671,16 @@ EnableDisableRule(Relation rel, const char *rulename, Assert(eventRelationOid == owningRel); if (!pg_class_ownercheck(eventRelationOid, GetUserId())) aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NOT_OWNER, ACL_KIND_CLASS, - get_rel_name(eventRelationOid)); - + get_rel_name(eventRelationOid)); + /* * Change ev_enabled if it is different from the desired new state. */ if (DatumGetChar(((Form_pg_rewrite) GETSTRUCT(ruletup))->ev_enabled) != - fires_when) - { + fires_when) + { ((Form_pg_rewrite) GETSTRUCT(ruletup))->ev_enabled = - CharGetDatum(fires_when); + CharGetDatum(fires_when); simple_heap_update(pg_rewrite_desc, &ruletup->t_self, ruletup); /* keep system catalog indexes current */ diff --git a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c index 6170b2f984..a639a5420a 100644 --- a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c +++ b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c,v 1.105 2007/09/06 17:31:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c,v 1.106 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -975,14 +975,14 @@ ResolveNew_mutator(Node *node, ResolveNew_context *context) context->sublevels_up == 0) { /* - * We get here if a WHERE CURRENT OF expression turns out to - * apply to a view. Someday we might be able to translate - * the expression to apply to an underlying table of the view, - * but right now it's not implemented. + * We get here if a WHERE CURRENT OF expression turns out to apply + * to a view. Someday we might be able to translate the + * expression to apply to an underlying table of the view, but + * right now it's not implemented. */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("WHERE CURRENT OF on a view is not implemented"))); + errmsg("WHERE CURRENT OF on a view is not implemented"))); } /* otherwise fall through to copy the expr normally */ } diff --git a/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c b/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c index 57aac234ed..94786975d7 100644 --- a/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c +++ b/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c,v 1.3 2007/08/25 00:03:59 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/snowball/dict_snowball.c,v 1.4 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -66,6 +66,7 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dsnowball_init); Datum dsnowball_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); + PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dsnowball_lexize); Datum dsnowball_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); @@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ typedef struct stemmer_module struct SN_env *(*create) (void); void (*close) (struct SN_env *); int (*stem) (struct SN_env *); -} stemmer_module; +} stemmer_module; static const stemmer_module stemmer_modules[] = { @@ -139,7 +140,7 @@ typedef struct DictSnowball * context, so we just remember CurrentMemoryContext */ MemoryContext dictCtx; -} DictSnowball; +} DictSnowball; static void @@ -238,7 +239,7 @@ dsnowball_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { DictSnowball *d = (DictSnowball *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - int32 len = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); + int32 len = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); char *txt = lowerstr_with_len(in, len); TSLexeme *res = palloc0(sizeof(TSLexeme) * 2); @@ -259,7 +260,7 @@ dsnowball_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) recoded = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) txt, strlen(txt), - GetDatabaseEncoding(), + GetDatabaseEncoding(), PG_UTF8); if (recoded == NULL) elog(ERROR, "encoding conversion failed"); @@ -292,7 +293,7 @@ dsnowball_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) recoded = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) txt, strlen(txt), PG_UTF8, - GetDatabaseEncoding()); + GetDatabaseEncoding()); if (recoded == NULL) elog(ERROR, "encoding conversion failed"); diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c index ce7c54deee..6a18e274e1 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.226 2007/09/25 22:11:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.227 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ static volatile BufferDesc *PinCountWaitBuf = NULL; static Buffer ReadBuffer_common(Relation reln, BlockNumber blockNum, - bool zeroPage, - BufferAccessStrategy strategy); + bool zeroPage, + BufferAccessStrategy strategy); static bool PinBuffer(volatile BufferDesc *buf, BufferAccessStrategy strategy); static void PinBuffer_Locked(volatile BufferDesc *buf); static void UnpinBuffer(volatile BufferDesc *buf, bool fixOwner); @@ -90,8 +90,8 @@ static void TerminateBufferIO(volatile BufferDesc *buf, bool clear_dirty, int set_flag_bits); static void buffer_write_error_callback(void *arg); static volatile BufferDesc *BufferAlloc(Relation reln, BlockNumber blockNum, - BufferAccessStrategy strategy, - bool *foundPtr); + BufferAccessStrategy strategy, + bool *foundPtr); static void FlushBuffer(volatile BufferDesc *buf, SMgrRelation reln); static void AtProcExit_Buffers(int code, Datum arg); @@ -215,10 +215,10 @@ ReadBuffer_common(Relation reln, BlockNumber blockNum, bool zeroPage, * This can happen because mdread doesn't complain about reads beyond * EOF (when zero_damaged_pages is ON) and so a previous attempt to * read a block beyond EOF could have left a "valid" zero-filled - * buffer. Unfortunately, we have also seen this case occurring + * buffer. Unfortunately, we have also seen this case occurring * because of buggy Linux kernels that sometimes return an - * lseek(SEEK_END) result that doesn't account for a recent write. - * In that situation, the pre-existing buffer would contain valid data + * lseek(SEEK_END) result that doesn't account for a recent write. In + * that situation, the pre-existing buffer would contain valid data * that we don't want to overwrite. Since the legitimate case should * always have left a zero-filled buffer, complain if not PageIsNew. */ @@ -283,9 +283,9 @@ ReadBuffer_common(Relation reln, BlockNumber blockNum, bool zeroPage, } else { - /* - * Read in the page, unless the caller intends to overwrite it - * and just wants us to allocate a buffer. + /* + * Read in the page, unless the caller intends to overwrite it and + * just wants us to allocate a buffer. */ if (zeroPage) MemSet((char *) bufBlock, 0, BLCKSZ); @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ BufferAlloc(Relation reln, /* Loop here in case we have to try another victim buffer */ for (;;) { - bool lock_held; + bool lock_held; /* * Select a victim buffer. The buffer is returned with its header @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ BufferAlloc(Relation reln, * If using a nondefault strategy, and writing the buffer * would require a WAL flush, let the strategy decide whether * to go ahead and write/reuse the buffer or to choose another - * victim. We need lock to inspect the page LSN, so this + * victim. We need lock to inspect the page LSN, so this * can't be done inside StrategyGetBuffer. */ if (strategy != NULL && @@ -630,8 +630,8 @@ BufferAlloc(Relation reln, * * Clearing BM_VALID here is necessary, clearing the dirtybits is just * paranoia. We also reset the usage_count since any recency of use of - * the old content is no longer relevant. (The usage_count starts out - * at 1 so that the buffer can survive one clock-sweep pass.) + * the old content is no longer relevant. (The usage_count starts out at + * 1 so that the buffer can survive one clock-sweep pass.) */ buf->tag = newTag; buf->flags &= ~(BM_VALID | BM_DIRTY | BM_JUST_DIRTIED | BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED | BM_IO_ERROR); @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ ReleaseAndReadBuffer(Buffer buffer, * when we first pin it; for other strategies we just make sure the usage_count * isn't zero. (The idea of the latter is that we don't want synchronized * heap scans to inflate the count, but we need it to not be zero to discourage - * other backends from stealing buffers from our ring. As long as we cycle + * other backends from stealing buffers from our ring. As long as we cycle * through the ring faster than the global clock-sweep cycles, buffers in * our ring won't be chosen as victims for replacement by other backends.) * @@ -1016,9 +1016,8 @@ BufferSync(int flags) * have the flag set. * * Note that if we fail to write some buffer, we may leave buffers with - * BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED still set. This is OK since any such buffer - * would certainly need to be written for the next checkpoint attempt, - * too. + * BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED still set. This is OK since any such buffer would + * certainly need to be written for the next checkpoint attempt, too. */ num_to_write = 0; for (buf_id = 0; buf_id < NBuffers; buf_id++) @@ -1045,11 +1044,11 @@ BufferSync(int flags) /* * Loop over all buffers again, and write the ones (still) marked with - * BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED. In this loop, we start at the clock sweep - * point since we might as well dump soon-to-be-recycled buffers first. + * BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED. In this loop, we start at the clock sweep point + * since we might as well dump soon-to-be-recycled buffers first. * - * Note that we don't read the buffer alloc count here --- that should - * be left untouched till the next BgBufferSync() call. + * Note that we don't read the buffer alloc count here --- that should be + * left untouched till the next BgBufferSync() call. */ buf_id = StrategySyncStart(NULL, NULL); num_to_scan = NBuffers; @@ -1067,8 +1066,8 @@ BufferSync(int flags) * examine the bit here and the time SyncOneBuffer acquires lock, * someone else not only wrote the buffer but replaced it with another * page and dirtied it. In that improbable case, SyncOneBuffer will - * write the buffer though we didn't need to. It doesn't seem - * worth guarding against this, though. + * write the buffer though we didn't need to. It doesn't seem worth + * guarding against this, though. */ if (bufHdr->flags & BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED) { @@ -1092,8 +1091,8 @@ BufferSync(int flags) break; /* - * Perform normal bgwriter duties and sleep to throttle - * our I/O rate. + * Perform normal bgwriter duties and sleep to throttle our + * I/O rate. */ CheckpointWriteDelay(flags, (double) num_written / num_to_write); @@ -1105,8 +1104,8 @@ BufferSync(int flags) } /* - * Update checkpoint statistics. As noted above, this doesn't - * include buffers written by other backends or bgwriter scan. + * Update checkpoint statistics. As noted above, this doesn't include + * buffers written by other backends or bgwriter scan. */ CheckpointStats.ckpt_bufs_written += num_written; } @@ -1128,7 +1127,7 @@ BgBufferSync(void) * Information saved between calls so we can determine the strategy * point's advance rate and avoid scanning already-cleaned buffers. */ - static bool saved_info_valid = false; + static bool saved_info_valid = false; static int prev_strategy_buf_id; static uint32 prev_strategy_passes; static int next_to_clean; @@ -1157,8 +1156,8 @@ BgBufferSync(void) int reusable_buffers; /* - * Find out where the freelist clock sweep currently is, and how - * many buffer allocations have happened since our last call. + * Find out where the freelist clock sweep currently is, and how many + * buffer allocations have happened since our last call. */ strategy_buf_id = StrategySyncStart(&strategy_passes, &recent_alloc); @@ -1166,9 +1165,9 @@ BgBufferSync(void) BgWriterStats.m_buf_alloc += recent_alloc; /* - * If we're not running the LRU scan, just stop after doing the - * stats stuff. We mark the saved state invalid so that we can recover - * sanely if LRU scan is turned back on later. + * If we're not running the LRU scan, just stop after doing the stats + * stuff. We mark the saved state invalid so that we can recover sanely + * if LRU scan is turned back on later. */ if (bgwriter_lru_maxpages <= 0) { @@ -1178,18 +1177,19 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* * Compute strategy_delta = how many buffers have been scanned by the - * clock sweep since last time. If first time through, assume none. - * Then see if we are still ahead of the clock sweep, and if so, how many - * buffers we could scan before we'd catch up with it and "lap" it. - * Note: weird-looking coding of xxx_passes comparisons are to avoid - * bogus behavior when the passes counts wrap around. + * clock sweep since last time. If first time through, assume none. Then + * see if we are still ahead of the clock sweep, and if so, how many + * buffers we could scan before we'd catch up with it and "lap" it. Note: + * weird-looking coding of xxx_passes comparisons are to avoid bogus + * behavior when the passes counts wrap around. */ if (saved_info_valid) { - int32 passes_delta = strategy_passes - prev_strategy_passes; + int32 passes_delta = strategy_passes - prev_strategy_passes; strategy_delta = strategy_buf_id - prev_strategy_buf_id; - strategy_delta += (long) passes_delta * NBuffers; + strategy_delta += (long) passes_delta *NBuffers; + Assert(strategy_delta >= 0); if ((int32) (next_passes - strategy_passes) > 0) @@ -1218,8 +1218,8 @@ BgBufferSync(void) else { /* - * We're behind, so skip forward to the strategy point - * and start cleaning from there. + * We're behind, so skip forward to the strategy point and start + * cleaning from there. */ #ifdef BGW_DEBUG elog(DEBUG2, "bgwriter behind: bgw %u-%u strategy %u-%u delta=%ld", @@ -1235,8 +1235,8 @@ BgBufferSync(void) else { /* - * Initializing at startup or after LRU scanning had been off. - * Always start at the strategy point. + * Initializing at startup or after LRU scanning had been off. Always + * start at the strategy point. */ #ifdef BGW_DEBUG elog(DEBUG2, "bgwriter initializing: strategy %u-%u", @@ -1254,8 +1254,8 @@ BgBufferSync(void) saved_info_valid = true; /* - * Compute how many buffers had to be scanned for each new allocation, - * ie, 1/density of reusable buffers, and track a moving average of that. + * Compute how many buffers had to be scanned for each new allocation, ie, + * 1/density of reusable buffers, and track a moving average of that. * * If the strategy point didn't move, we don't update the density estimate */ @@ -1268,16 +1268,16 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* * Estimate how many reusable buffers there are between the current - * strategy point and where we've scanned ahead to, based on the - * smoothed density estimate. + * strategy point and where we've scanned ahead to, based on the smoothed + * density estimate. */ bufs_ahead = NBuffers - bufs_to_lap; reusable_buffers_est = (float) bufs_ahead / smoothed_density; /* - * Track a moving average of recent buffer allocations. Here, rather - * than a true average we want a fast-attack, slow-decline behavior: - * we immediately follow any increase. + * Track a moving average of recent buffer allocations. Here, rather than + * a true average we want a fast-attack, slow-decline behavior: we + * immediately follow any increase. */ if (smoothed_alloc <= (float) recent_alloc) smoothed_alloc = recent_alloc; @@ -1291,12 +1291,12 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* * Even in cases where there's been little or no buffer allocation * activity, we want to make a small amount of progress through the buffer - * cache so that as many reusable buffers as possible are clean - * after an idle period. + * cache so that as many reusable buffers as possible are clean after an + * idle period. * - * (scan_whole_pool_milliseconds / BgWriterDelay) computes how many - * times the BGW will be called during the scan_whole_pool time; - * slice the buffer pool into that many sections. + * (scan_whole_pool_milliseconds / BgWriterDelay) computes how many times + * the BGW will be called during the scan_whole_pool time; slice the + * buffer pool into that many sections. */ min_scan_buffers = (int) (NBuffers / (scan_whole_pool_milliseconds / BgWriterDelay)); @@ -1311,9 +1311,9 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* * Now write out dirty reusable buffers, working forward from the - * next_to_clean point, until we have lapped the strategy scan, or - * cleaned enough buffers to match our estimate of the next cycle's - * allocation requirements, or hit the bgwriter_lru_maxpages limit. + * next_to_clean point, until we have lapped the strategy scan, or cleaned + * enough buffers to match our estimate of the next cycle's allocation + * requirements, or hit the bgwriter_lru_maxpages limit. */ /* Make sure we can handle the pin inside SyncOneBuffer */ @@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* Execute the LRU scan */ while (num_to_scan > 0 && reusable_buffers < upcoming_alloc_est) { - int buffer_state = SyncOneBuffer(next_to_clean, true); + int buffer_state = SyncOneBuffer(next_to_clean, true); if (++next_to_clean >= NBuffers) { @@ -1361,11 +1361,11 @@ BgBufferSync(void) /* * Consider the above scan as being like a new allocation scan. - * Characterize its density and update the smoothed one based on it. - * This effectively halves the moving average period in cases where - * both the strategy and the background writer are doing some useful - * scanning, which is helpful because a long memory isn't as desirable - * on the density estimates. + * Characterize its density and update the smoothed one based on it. This + * effectively halves the moving average period in cases where both the + * strategy and the background writer are doing some useful scanning, + * which is helpful because a long memory isn't as desirable on the + * density estimates. */ strategy_delta = bufs_to_lap - num_to_scan; recent_alloc = reusable_buffers - reusable_buffers_est; @@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ static int SyncOneBuffer(int buf_id, bool skip_recently_used) { volatile BufferDesc *bufHdr = &BufferDescriptors[buf_id]; - int result = 0; + int result = 0; /* * Check whether buffer needs writing. @@ -2312,7 +2312,7 @@ LockBufferForCleanup(Buffer buffer) * * We won't loop, but just check once to see if the pin count is OK. If * not, return FALSE with no lock held. - */ + */ bool ConditionalLockBufferForCleanup(Buffer buffer) { diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c index 781b754cfc..b1219b58f7 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c,v 1.61 2007/09/25 20:03:38 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c,v 1.62 2007/11/15 21:14:37 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -36,10 +36,10 @@ typedef struct */ /* - * Statistics. These counters should be wide enough that they can't + * Statistics. These counters should be wide enough that they can't * overflow during a single bgwriter cycle. */ - uint32 completePasses; /* Complete cycles of the clock sweep */ + uint32 completePasses; /* Complete cycles of the clock sweep */ uint32 numBufferAllocs; /* Buffers allocated since last reset */ } BufferStrategyControl; @@ -57,31 +57,33 @@ typedef struct BufferAccessStrategyData BufferAccessStrategyType btype; /* Number of elements in buffers[] array */ int ring_size; + /* * Index of the "current" slot in the ring, ie, the one most recently * returned by GetBufferFromRing. */ int current; + /* - * True if the buffer just returned by StrategyGetBuffer had been in - * the ring already. + * True if the buffer just returned by StrategyGetBuffer had been in the + * ring already. */ bool current_was_in_ring; /* - * Array of buffer numbers. InvalidBuffer (that is, zero) indicates - * we have not yet selected a buffer for this ring slot. For allocation + * Array of buffer numbers. InvalidBuffer (that is, zero) indicates we + * have not yet selected a buffer for this ring slot. For allocation * simplicity this is palloc'd together with the fixed fields of the * struct. */ - Buffer buffers[1]; /* VARIABLE SIZE ARRAY */ -} BufferAccessStrategyData; + Buffer buffers[1]; /* VARIABLE SIZE ARRAY */ +} BufferAccessStrategyData; /* Prototypes for internal functions */ static volatile BufferDesc *GetBufferFromRing(BufferAccessStrategy strategy); static void AddBufferToRing(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, - volatile BufferDesc *buf); + volatile BufferDesc *buf); /* @@ -108,8 +110,8 @@ StrategyGetBuffer(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, bool *lock_held) int trycounter; /* - * If given a strategy object, see whether it can select a buffer. - * We assume strategy objects don't need the BufFreelistLock. + * If given a strategy object, see whether it can select a buffer. We + * assume strategy objects don't need the BufFreelistLock. */ if (strategy != NULL) { @@ -127,7 +129,7 @@ StrategyGetBuffer(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, bool *lock_held) /* * We count buffer allocation requests so that the bgwriter can estimate - * the rate of buffer consumption. Note that buffers recycled by a + * the rate of buffer consumption. Note that buffers recycled by a * strategy object are intentionally not counted here. */ StrategyControl->numBufferAllocs++; @@ -151,8 +153,8 @@ StrategyGetBuffer(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, bool *lock_held) * If the buffer is pinned or has a nonzero usage_count, we cannot use * it; discard it and retry. (This can only happen if VACUUM put a * valid buffer in the freelist and then someone else used it before - * we got to it. It's probably impossible altogether as of 8.3, - * but we'd better check anyway.) + * we got to it. It's probably impossible altogether as of 8.3, but + * we'd better check anyway.) */ LockBufHdr(buf); if (buf->refcount == 0 && buf->usage_count == 0) @@ -246,7 +248,7 @@ StrategyFreeBuffer(volatile BufferDesc *buf) * * In addition, we return the completed-pass count (which is effectively * the higher-order bits of nextVictimBuffer) and the count of recent buffer - * allocs if non-NULL pointers are passed. The alloc count is reset after + * allocs if non-NULL pointers are passed. The alloc count is reset after * being read. */ int @@ -363,12 +365,12 @@ BufferAccessStrategy GetAccessStrategy(BufferAccessStrategyType btype) { BufferAccessStrategy strategy; - int ring_size; + int ring_size; /* - * Select ring size to use. See buffer/README for rationales. - * (Currently all cases are the same size, but keep this code - * structure for flexibility.) + * Select ring size to use. See buffer/README for rationales. (Currently + * all cases are the same size, but keep this code structure for + * flexibility.) * * Note: if you change the ring size for BAS_BULKREAD, see also * SYNC_SCAN_REPORT_INTERVAL in access/heap/syncscan.c. @@ -438,9 +440,9 @@ GetBufferFromRing(BufferAccessStrategy strategy) strategy->current = 0; /* - * If the slot hasn't been filled yet, tell the caller to allocate - * a new buffer with the normal allocation strategy. He will then - * fill this slot by calling AddBufferToRing with the new buffer. + * If the slot hasn't been filled yet, tell the caller to allocate a new + * buffer with the normal allocation strategy. He will then fill this + * slot by calling AddBufferToRing with the new buffer. */ bufnum = strategy->buffers[strategy->current]; if (bufnum == InvalidBuffer) @@ -454,9 +456,9 @@ GetBufferFromRing(BufferAccessStrategy strategy) * * If usage_count is 0 or 1 then the buffer is fair game (we expect 1, * since our own previous usage of the ring element would have left it - * there, but it might've been decremented by clock sweep since then). - * A higher usage_count indicates someone else has touched the buffer, - * so we shouldn't re-use it. + * there, but it might've been decremented by clock sweep since then). A + * higher usage_count indicates someone else has touched the buffer, so we + * shouldn't re-use it. */ buf = &BufferDescriptors[bufnum - 1]; LockBufHdr(buf); @@ -492,7 +494,7 @@ AddBufferToRing(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, volatile BufferDesc *buf) * * When a nondefault strategy is used, the buffer manager calls this function * when it turns out that the buffer selected by StrategyGetBuffer needs to - * be written out and doing so would require flushing WAL too. This gives us + * be written out and doing so would require flushing WAL too. This gives us * a chance to choose a different victim. * * Returns true if buffer manager should ask for a new victim, and false @@ -507,7 +509,7 @@ StrategyRejectBuffer(BufferAccessStrategy strategy, volatile BufferDesc *buf) /* Don't muck with behavior of normal buffer-replacement strategy */ if (!strategy->current_was_in_ring || - strategy->buffers[strategy->current] != BufferDescriptorGetBuffer(buf)) + strategy->buffers[strategy->current] != BufferDescriptorGetBuffer(buf)) return false; /* diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c index ad2bcf8dac..42d68a8f7e 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c,v 1.77 2007/05/30 20:11:59 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c,v 1.78 2007/11/15 21:14:38 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ LocalBufferAlloc(Relation reln, BlockNumber blockNum, bool *foundPtr) /* Found a usable buffer */ LocalRefCount[b]++; ResourceOwnerRememberBuffer(CurrentResourceOwner, - BufferDescriptorGetBuffer(bufHdr)); + BufferDescriptorGetBuffer(bufHdr)); break; } } @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ GetLocalBufferStorage(void) if (next_buf_in_block >= num_bufs_in_block) { /* Need to make a new request to memmgr */ - int num_bufs; + int num_bufs; /* Start with a 16-buffer request; subsequent ones double each time */ num_bufs = Max(num_bufs_in_block * 2, 16); diff --git a/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c b/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c index 79da1f9c6f..6d70fea77d 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c,v 1.140 2007/07/26 15:15:18 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c,v 1.141 2007/11/15 21:14:38 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES: * @@ -855,16 +855,16 @@ OpenTemporaryFile(bool interXact) /* * If some temp tablespace(s) have been given to us, try to use the next - * one. If a given tablespace can't be found, we silently fall back - * to the database's default tablespace. + * one. If a given tablespace can't be found, we silently fall back to + * the database's default tablespace. * * BUT: if the temp file is slated to outlive the current transaction, - * force it into the database's default tablespace, so that it will - * not pose a threat to possible tablespace drop attempts. + * force it into the database's default tablespace, so that it will not + * pose a threat to possible tablespace drop attempts. */ if (numTempTableSpaces > 0 && !interXact) { - Oid tblspcOid = GetNextTempTableSpace(); + Oid tblspcOid = GetNextTempTableSpace(); if (OidIsValid(tblspcOid)) file = OpenTemporaryFileInTablespace(tblspcOid, false); @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ OpenTemporaryFile(bool interXact) /* * If not, or if tablespace is bad, create in database's default - * tablespace. MyDatabaseTableSpace should normally be set before we get + * tablespace. MyDatabaseTableSpace should normally be set before we get * here, but just in case it isn't, fall back to pg_default tablespace. */ if (file <= 0) @@ -941,8 +941,8 @@ OpenTemporaryFileInTablespace(Oid tblspcOid, bool rejectError) if (fi |